THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE (VITIS VINIFERA (L.) [2]

A COMPARISON OF TEMPERATURE REGIMES IN THE AUSTRALIAN

AND MEDITERRANEAN REGIONS

by |. A, Paescorr?

[Read 10 April 1969]

SUMMARY

The distribution and areas of Australian viticultural locations have been

illustrated on two maps and are shown to fall within the limits of 57°F (13-9°C)

and 65°F (18-3°C) mean annual temperature and B°F (4-4°C) and 15°F (8-3°C)

temperature amplitude,

These temperature limits have been projected on a map of the Mediterranean

region and the areas corresponding to Australian conditions indicated. These are

in general concentrated round the westem basin of the Mediterranean Sea.

The temperature characteristics of thirty-four European and Mediterranean

statians and of thirty Anstralian stations have been Jisted and brought together

om appropriate tables and diagrams. In general Mediterranean temperatures are

later in phase than Australian stations,

In an earlier communication (1965) it was shown that the cool limits of the

cultivation of the grape vine (Vitis vinifera L.) in Western Europe were deter-

mined by mean monthly temperatures of the warmest monthly period of 65:6° F-.

(18-7° C.) provided that this was associated with a period of six months during

which the mean monthly temperature exceeded 10° C, The isotherm for this

warmest monthly period was projected on a map of south-eastern Australia and

it was shown that this was in general agreement with Australian experience with

the cultivation of Vitis vinifera.

Temperature conditions. in Australia, however, are such that for useful com-

parisons, the warmer climates of the Mediterranean region must be taken into

account, This is further emphasised by the ready success in Australia of such

wine-making procedures as the production of fortified sweet wines, corresponding

to the styles of wines of the Douro Valley of Portugal and the vins doux naturels

of southern France, of vinos de Jerez produced in Spain and the Marsala wines of

Sicily. This is further exemplified by the production of dried grapes originally

characteristic of the Aegean area of Greece and Turkey.

Tn the maps of Figs. 1 and 2 are shown the important areas under vines in

south-eastern and south-western Australia and on these maps are projected the

isotherms of the mean annual temperatures for 57° F. and 65° F. and of annual

temperature amplitude of 8° F. and 15° F, based on wave-form analysis of the

mean monthly temperatures. The annual mean isotherms are adapted from the

Climatological Atlas of Australia and the amplitude curves from Prescott (1942).

It will be seen that for south-eastem Australia the viticultural areas fall

within these limits which correspond approximately to 65° F, (18-3° C.) and

80° F. (26:7° C.) for the warmest months over the full range of conditions pos-

sible within these limits.

The localities in the Mediterranean region with similar temperature limits

are illustrated in Fig. 3, In this case the isotherms are adapted from Prescott and

Lane-Poole (1947). Tt will be noted that the areas corresponding fo similar oncs

1 Member of the Council of The Australian Wine Research Institute,

Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust. (1969), Vol. 93.

2 J. A, PRESCOTT

in Australia are primary in Portugal, castern Spain, Morocco, northern Algeria,

Tunis and Palestine, togcther with coastal regions of southern France, Italy, Yugo-

slavia and Greece and the islands of Sardinia, Corsica and Sicily. The island of

Cyprus is too much under continental influences to come within the temperature

limits adopted except for very small areas.

Noretan

{ a0?

5 =~ Stanthgrpe \

7 SR Soa0 }

aot *

yet Tamwarth,

od =I S bed

sehen 4,

= Mudgee * O01 ter 37

—~ Molonge 7o*~7 Valley O

% “WOranger.60 '

“Worra pignigeeonbeBe ‘

Mildure “Irrigation Arta wae

‘ =. 2100 Yuoungej5

4 ee

Valley we Nab,

Sanghorns sve gs U

' oo

mi Camd

= Hill

reek2sO =P ana.

Kera: ;

FRO

erslen

R z

SheppartotSB, wanaiia

AmEAS UNDER VLHES Staweil Retiney#O0 100

+ 269° — =. 7

\a,000 ha 4 oongwar tam e

Lo whem ;

1.aco ha

Berrigan t

ot thydale

7 Ea iota

Geelonz

. joe. ha or less te Sete

TEMPERATURLS “F

—— ee ANNU MEA

weer ees AMPLITUDE .

ae oS Se

Fig. 1, Map of south-eastern Australia showing areas under viticulture and the limits of mean

annual temperatures between 57° F. and 65° F. and amplitudes 8° F. and 15° I. The

areas given are substantially correct for the year 1960 except for the two areas of

Geclong and Lilydale, no longer functioning, but included for historical reasons.

In order to bring out more particularly the closer parallels between Australian

and Mediterranean stations, the temperature characteristics of annual mean and

amplitude have been plotted against each other in the diagram of Fig. 4. In this

method of presentation the temperature of the warmest month can be indicated

by a diagonal line where. the sums of the means and amplitudes have a constant

value. It will be scen that within the temperature limits adopted, Australian and

Mediterranean stations can be readily compared, The stations represented in the

preparation of this diagram are listed in ‘Tables la and 1b. This table provides a

key to the abbreviations used in Fig. 4 and gives latitudes and longitudes and the

temperature phase for each station, 64 stations in all. It is noteworthy that this

phase value, expressed as lag in days behind solar radiation, is in general much

higher for Mediterranean stations than for those in Australia,

CLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE (VITIS VINIFERA L.): A COMPARISON 3

Fig, 2, (Left) Map of south-western Aus-

tralia showing areas under viticulture

and the limits of mean annual tem-

peratures between 58° F, and 65° F.

and of amplitudes 8° F, and 15° F.

Fig. 3, (Below) Map of the Mediterranean

region on which have been projected

the isotherms of 57° F, (13-9° C)

AREA UNDER VINES and 65° F. (18-3 C.) mean annual

h temperatures and 8° F. (4-4° C.) and

4oha Locations which fall within these

limits are shaded and have in con-

sequence the temperature conditions

preyuiling within the zones of Aus-

tralian viticulture.

TEMPERATURES °F

—~|e-—--- ANNUAL MEAN

tee en ee *s'* AMPLITUDE

AMPLITUOE

MEAN ANNUAL

4 J. A. PRESCOTT

°F S50 35 60 7O

MEAN ANNUAL

Fig. 4. Diagram illustrating the temperature characteristics (mean and amplitude) of stations in the Me

terranean (left) and Australia (right) regions. The line a.b.e.d. corresponds to a warmest mor

of 66° F. (18-9° C.). The area defined hy ef.g.c.b. corresponds to the temperature limits of |

Australian viticultural experience. The key to the abbreviations is given in Tables la and lb, A f

European stations near the cool limit of viticulture are included,

TABLE la

Tnformation regarding European and Mediterranean stations used im the preparation of Fig. 4

i —————————

Lag of temperature

Symbol Locality Latitude Longitude behind solar

radiation

N " days

AL Algiers 37-1 2-1E 47

An Angers AT +4 0-6 W 29

At Athens 38-0 23-7 EH 39

Ba Barcelona 41-4 2-28 37

Bi Bari 41-3 lio E 43

Bo Bordeaux 44-9 0-6 W 32

Cz Caghari 29-2 9-12 43

Cu Candia 35-3 25-1E 43

Cr Cartagena, 37-6 0-9 W 42

cm Coimbra 40-3 8:4W 35

Cf Corfu 39-5 19-9 EH 43

eF El Fayumn 29-3 30-9E 34

Gm Geisenheim 50-0 B-0OE 26

Ga. Genoa 44-4 8-9 E 40

Gb Gibraltar 36:2 5:3 W 39

Tz Izmir a8-4 27-2 39

J Jerusalem 31-8 35-2 18 43

Lm Limassol 34-6 33-0 49

Ls Lisbon 38-7 9-1 W 39

Mi Malta 35-8 14-55 52

Mr Marseilles 43-3 bea EB 33

Mo Montpellier 43-6 3-9 R 32

Mu Murcia 38-0 11W 37

Np Naples 40-8 14-2 E 4]

Ni Nicosia 3512 33-3 EF 40

oO Oporto 41 +2 8-6 W 36

Po Palermo 38-2 13:32 43

Ta Perpignan 42-7 2-92 33

Rg Ragusa 42-6 18+1E 41

Rm Reims 19°3 4-0 38

8m Samsun 41°3 36-4 E 49

Sv Seville 37°4 6-0 W 35

Sb Strasbourg 48-6 4-95 29

T Taormina 37°8 15-3 E 42

Z Zakinthos 37°38 20-9 E 45

CLIMATOLOGY OF 'THE VINE (VITIS VINIFERA L.): A COMPARISON 5

TABLE 1b

Information regarding Australian stations used in the preparation of Fig. 4

hw SSSSSSSsSsSSSSSSSSssssesFeseF

Lag of temperature

behind solur radia-

tion at the limits of

Symbol Locality Latitude Longitude the atmosphere

25 0} days

A Albury 36-1 147-0 27

Be Berri 84-3 140-6 24

Rr Brishane 27-A 153-0 BF

By Bunbury 83-3 115-6 41

Ck Cessnock 32-9 151-4 26

Cl Clare 33-8 138-6 29

Ca Coonawarra 37:3 140-9 aL

EF Forbes ; 33-5 148-1 26

Gn Gatton 27-6 152-3 23

Gg Geéelony 38-1 144-4 34

Gr Griffith 34°23 146-1 20

Gd Guildford 31-9 116-0 40

I Inverell 29-8 151-2 27

K Kew 37-8 145°0 32

L Leeton 34-5 146-4 27

M Mildura 34-2 142-2 25

Nm Northam 31-7 116-6 35

Na Nuriootpa 34°55 139-1 3]

P Picton 34-2 150-6 26

Ra Roma 26-65 148-7 21

Ry Roseworthy 34:1 138-7 32

Rn Rutherglen 38-0 146°5 20

Se Seymour 37-0 145-1 30

Sh Shepparton 36-4 145-4 a9

st Stanthorpe 28-6 141-9 24

SL Stawell 710 142°8 31

Sn Strathalbyn 35-3 138-9 32

SH Swan Hill 35-4 143-6 28

WIL Waite Institute 35-0 138-6 33

WwW Wangaratta 36-3 146-3 29

To illustrate this point comparisons are made in Fig. 5 between two pairs of

Australian and Mediterranean stations, namely Leeton is compared with Naples

and Mildura with Cagliari. The differences in phase are elegy. indicated in the

curves which are based on values calculated from the wave-form characteristics.

For a further comparison the curve for Mildura is shown with that of Izmir in

Turkey. The annual mean is much the same in each case, but Izmir is already

more continental with a much higher amplitude than Mildura. This higher ampli-

tude, together with a late phase leads to higher and later summer temperatures

which are of importance to the dried vine-fruit industry,

Temperature characteristics phase

mean amplitude lay behind radiation

Station °F, oF days

Leeton 62:2 14-2 27

Naples 61:8 14-4 41

Mildura 63-5 13-5 25

Capliati 63-7 13-6 A3

Izmir 63-0 17-2 39

The vertical lines ss correspond to the longest day.

6 J. A. PRESCOTT

°F

CAGLIARI IZMIR

40 MILDURA MILDURA

Nt JFMAMJJASOND YVFMAMIJASOND JFMANJSJIASOND

S' JASONDVFMANS JASONDJIFMAMYJ JASONDY FMAMSJ

Fig, 5. Temperature curves of stations having comparable temperature characteristics.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

Thanks are due to the late Mr, J. C. M. Fornachon, Director of The Australian

Wine Research Institute for his interest in the project and for making available

correspondence with State Viticulturists who have supplied. appropriate statistics

from time to time,

REFERENCES

Prescorr, J. A. “The phase and amplitude of Australian mean monthly temperatures.” Truns,

Roy. Sac. S, Aust. 66, 46-49, 1942.

Prescott, J. A., and LaNE-Pootr, C. E. “The climatology of the introduction of pines of the

Mediterranean environment to Australia.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 71, 67-90, 1947,

Pnescorr, J. A. “The climatology of the vine—Vitis vinifera L. The cool limit of cultivation,”

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 89, 5-23, 1965.

THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE (VITIS VINIFERA L.) [3]

A COMPARISON OF FRANCE AND AUSTRALIA ON THE BASIS OF

THE TEMPERATURE OF THE WARMEST MONTH

By J. A. PRESCOTT’

Summary

The history of climatological investigations on the requirements of the vine in France has been

outlined. In order to bring this experience into a wider field of use, it is shown that the temperature

of the warmest month can be used as a simple index. This temperature can be expected on

mathematical grounds to be a linear function of the sums of temperatures that have been extensively

used in the past. This expectation is confirmed by an examination of data for the northern limit of

cultivation in Europe, for California in general, and for the classical work of Angot (1885). A brief

example is given of the application of this principle to the choice of varieties for any given

environment.

THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE (VITIS VINIFERA L.) [3]

A COMPARISON OF FRANCE AND AUSTRALIA ON THE BASIS OF

THE TEMPERATURE OF THE WARMEST MONTH

by J. A. Paescorr

[Read 10 April 1969]

SUMMARY

The history of climatological investigations on the requirements pf the vine

in France has been outlined. In order to bring this experience into a wider field

of use, it is shown that the termperature of the warmest month can be used as &

simple index. This temperature can be expected on mathematical grounds to be

a linear function of the sums of temperatures that have been extensively used iis

the past. This expectition is confirmed by an examination of data for the northern

limit of cultivation in Europe, for California in general, and for the classical work

of Angot (1885), A brief example is given of the application of this principle to

the choice of varieties for any given environment,

INTRODUCTION

In a previous communication (1969) a comparison was made, on a climatic

hasis, between the viticultural areas of Australia and their homoclimes in the

Mediterranean region. In this comparison, based essentially on the temperature

characteristics of annual mean and amplitude, only a small area of France, re-

stricted to the Mediterranean littoral of that country was shown to afford anything

approaching a strict parallel to any of the Australian conditions. French experience

is so long and so well documented that it is important to find some simple climatic

criterion that would extend the application of this experience to a wider geo-

graphical range. The most widely used criterion has been the sums of temperatures

expressed as day-degrees over a specific group of months, usually the seven

months; April to October, or over a specified growth period, such as flowering ta

maturity, This concept was originally established by de Candolle (1855) where

a minimum of 2,900 day-degrees (centigrade) above a limiting temperature of

10° C. was required. The development of this concept in France was principally

due to de Gasparin (Cours d’Agriculture vol. 4, 1860) who classified vine varieties

ita seven groups according to their degree of earliness and who established the

“quantities of heat” necessary for the maturation of the grapes in each class.

De Gasparin, however, based the maximum temperatures used in the derivation

of the mean on the black-bulb thermometer exposed to the sun, so that they cxnnot

he readily interpreled today, and it was Angot (1885) who later pointed out the

appropriateness of using shade temperatures.

The study of the climatic limits of viticulture in France has a long history,

Arthur Young (1792), in what became edited later as “Travels in France”, included

a map entitled “a new map of the climate and navigation? of France”, in which

the northern limits. of cultivation of vines, maize and olives wore shown by

straight lines having’a north-easterly trend, In the absence of temperature data,

these limiling lines were to be regarded as climatic indicators. In a verbal descrip-

tion of the limit for vines Young wrote* “the line of separation between vines and

*By “navigation” Young meant the navigability of rivers,

3 Joc. cit. p. 298.

Trius. Roy. Soc. 5, Aust, (1969), Vol, 93.

4 J. A. PRESCOTT

no vines, as | observed myself is at Coucy, ten miles to the north of Soissons; at

Clermont, in the Beawvoisois; at Beaumont in Maine; and Herbignac, neac

Guerande in Bretagne”. Me suggested that it would be reasonable to extend. this

line into Germany as far north as latitude 52°,'

By the second deeade of the nineteenth century, 4 sufficient number of

temperature observations over an adequate geographical range had been accumu-

lated to fustify the concept and definition of isotherms by Humboldt (1817

Although Humbeldt did not Fae ss any maps, he provided an_oxtensive ‘abl

of data fram which the trends of isotherms could be judged and, in some cases

maps prepared, In this publication Humboldt referred briefly to the possible

application of his concepts to agriculture, taking into account not only the annual

isotherms, but also the associated mean summer and winter temperatures for any

given locality, including specifically the temperatures of the warmest and coldest

mouths, With respect to the cultivation of the vine in Europe he noted thut,

providing summer temperatures reached 19° C, or 20° C.,, cultivation could he

extended up to « latitude of 50° N. Later in his Kosmos (1845) he was able to

give, as a speciul example, the temperature limits of the vine when cultivated to

roduce potable wine. These were defined asa mean annual temperature of not

weg thin 9°3° C., a mean winter temperature of at least 0:5° C. and a mean

summer temperature of at least 18° C. This mean summer temperature was based

on the months of June, July and August, corresponding in modem observations

to 17-9" C. and for the warmest month to 15-7° C.

In 1880, the Gentral Bureau of Meteorology in Paris organised for the first

time, the regular abseryatious of vegetation phenomena jn France, and at the

game time arranged for the collection of such historical information regarding

the viticultural seasons and the declaration of vintages (Ban de vendanzes) us

could be derived from municipal and other records, This infosmation was in due

course analysed by Alfred Angot (1885), and provided a valuable and unique

historical document on climatic conditions in France. The earliest period of

vintage recorded was that for 1366 at Dijon and by extending the records to those

of Wurtemberg, the quantity and quality of the vintage was established for some

years as far back as 1236, while for Burgundy these records began in 1689.

The han de vendanze was originally established as a tendal manorial right.

This right was abolished in principle in 1791, but was retained as a communal

responsibility From that date, in order to guarantee the quality of the best vintages.

Long records of the date of the declaration of vintage are to be found in many

municipalities and communes and the longest such is for Dijon and goes buck

with Full continuity to 1572.

Of importance to the present study is that Angot was able to correlate the

mean period of vintage over a period of 20 years (1860-1879) with temperature

observations over the same period, for 22 sets of observations covering mean

asmual temperatures ranging from 9-0° C, at Gap (Hautes-Alpes) to 15-0° C, at

Perpignan (Roussillon). The annual march of temperature was expressed in each

case in terms of the constants of a Fourier scries (formule périodique) where the

first two terms of the serics proved to be adequate, The commencement of vegeta-

tion was assumed to coincide with the time at which mean temperature reached

9° C. and this was calontated from the formula as well as the sums of temperatures

hotween this date and that of the declaration of vintage, For convenience in dis-

cussion, these data were placed in seven groups ranging in sums of temperature

above 9” C. from 973 te 1957 day-degrees.

‘John Evelyn in his diary for 1643-44 had earlier observed the north-western Jiauits oF

the cultivation of the vine at Beauvais und Pantat.

CLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE (VITIS VINIFERA L.j: A COMPARISON 9

It is of further interest that Angot was able, by climinating very early table

varieties and yery late varieties, and by regrouping, to reduce an original classifi-

cation of de Gasparin from seven ta two groups. These were made up of an early

group of varieties able to ripen in the vicinity of Paris and a later group not uble

to do se. Of interest to Australian vignerons typical varivties in the rst group

included Pinot noir, Sémillon and Shiraz und the second group included Malber,

Carignan and Grenache.

The assessment of current views and practices has heen facilitated by a series

of reports conimissioned by the Office international de la cvizne et du vin and

presented to the appropriate Commission in September 1967, These reports deul

with methods and principles adopted in various countries in determinin regional

requirements for the culture of the vine and for the choice of varieties. The reports

have been published in the Bulletin of the International Office (1967, 1968). In

these reports table grapes and wine Stipes receive equal emphasis. To some

respects, because of the need to cater for markets over as long 2 period as is

practicable, the climatic requirements of table grapes provide a wider range of

conditions than do wine grapes, and in mast cases the variety Golden Chaaselas is

used asa standard of reference wilh respect to period of maturity, The earliest

table grapes generally include the Hungarian varicty Perle de Csaba awd a

number of strains of Madeleine, The lists of the latest table varieties usually

include the variety Ofianes,

The climatic requirements are dealt with in a variety of ways, but practically

always the sums of temperatures are used over a fixed period, usually the seven

months from April to October, although for Bordeaux, Ribéreau-Gayon and

Peynaud (196() quote the period April to September, These sums are sometimes

quoted as above 0° C. and also as “efficient” temperatures above 1° ©, In othey

cases the sums are calculated from the time of bud-burst to that of technical

maturity,

The extremes aye illustrated by the German report in which only the mean

temperature from April to October is quoted, and by the Tunisian report, in

which the sums of temperature are calculated as degree-hours over the months

March to December. The Israeli report quotes sums of “active? tempcratures, thet

is above 10° C, from bud-burst to maturity over periods varying from LOO days

for carly varieties to 135 days for very late varieties with the sums ranging from

950 to 1,900 day-degrees, which is very close to the original range of Angot.

Of specific interest to the present study, Brejoux and Daverne in the French

Icport recognise two principil climutie types for that country, namely the Atlantic

and Mediterranean, with a semi-continental bridge between the two along the

valleys of the Rhine, the Sadne and the Rhéne.

The nelationihip between sums of temperature and the tem perature of the wermest

month.

The annual temperature curve of the monthly means for localities within the

latitudes determining the limits of the cultivation of Vitis vinifera is sufficiently

close to 4 smooth trigonometric curve to suggest that some of the simple properties

of such a curve could reasonably be found to be valid, This was early recognised

by Angot, as has been mentioned above, and the wave-form characteristies of

annual mean, amplitude and phase have frequently been used by the author in

climutie studies.

The varly recommendation by Humboldt that summer temperatures could

be used to establish the geographically cool limit of the vine was stalistically

confirmed by the author (Prescott, 1965). In terms of the temperature of the

warmest month, in both cases this proved to be 18-7° C. Owing to the decidwnns

1) J. A. PRESCOTT

nature of the vine and its winter dormancy, the temperature of the coldest month

becomes significant only when damage through frost becomes important.

For a simple cosine curve of temperature, any area beneath the curve, limited

by a fixed temperature and within specified time limits can be readily shown to

be a linear function of the maximum temperature. Where the critical temperature

is one-half of the temperature of the warmest month, there is in fact a strict pro-

portionality between day-degrecs and that temperature. For a number of stations

along the northem limit of the cultivation of the vine in Europe, the length of the

season above 10° C. approximates. to 6 months und such a correlation could, in

fact, be expected if only approximately. For perfect agreement, the periods for

comparison should have the same phase.

In order to illustrate this relationship, three examples have been taken. One

example, provided by the data of Angot, previously mentioned, for the period

1860-1879 in which sums of temperatures are calculated from the temperature

curves between the ime when the temperature first reaches 9° C. and the time of

the mean declaration of vintage for these areas. From the wave-form constants

quoted by Angot for the temperature curves, it is readily possible to calculate

the mean temperature of the warmest month in each case. Angot found it con-

venient to group his 22 sets of observations into seven and these have becn plotted

in Fig. 1, It will be seen that an almost perfect rectilinear correlation exists

between the pairs of values.

2000

1500

”

ws 1000

tO)

ia)

% 500

46 18 20 92 24°C.

TEMPERATURE : WARMEST MONTH

Fiv, 1, Tlustrating the relationship between the sums of temperature over 9° C. and the tem-

perature of the warmest month. The limits chosen are from the time when the mean

daily temperature reaches 9° C., to the time of the average beginning of vintage for

groups of French viticultural areas. The data are those of Angot (1835) for the period

1860-1879. The temperatures of the warmest month are derived from estimates of the

annual mean plus amplitnde based on the Fourier constants given hy Angot.

Californian and European experience is drawn upon for the data illustrated

in Fig. 2. The Californian data are taken from official records of stations chosen

for their viticultural importance. The concept of sums of temperatures has been

extensively used by viticultural workers in California, for example, Winkler

CLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE (VITIS VINIFERA L.); A COMPARISON 11,

3000

California

_- &™,

_-— 7” Astrakhan

—-O “Kh

Odessa 9°"

DAY — DEGREES

eImsQ —or = Ce

Frankfurt

20°C 25. °c 30°C

TEMPERATURE : WARMEST MONTH

Fig. 2, Illustrating the relationship between the sums of temperatures over 10° C. and the

temperature of the warmest month for California and Europe, The California data

are based on the montis April to October in accordance with current practice. The

European data are for the cool limit of cultivation of the vine, using selected stations

With season of approximately six months with mean temperatures above 10° GC, The

circle C yepresents the theoretical value for a cosine curve (20° CG, 1162 day-

degrees).

(1962), with particular reference to the subdivision and definition of the viticul-

tural areas of that State into five regions based on temperature summation. The

European data are for the cool limit of cultivation as established by the author

(1965). In both cases a satisfactory relationship is shown to exist. In the case of

the Californian data, the line connecting the pairs of values shows a slight curve.

It should therefore be possible to use the temperature of the warmest month

as a substitute for sums of temperatures for general comparisons. The correlation

is only valid for mean values over a period of years and cannot be expected to

hold for individual seasons. On this basis, however, maps have been prepared for

south-eastern Australia and for France, on which the isotherms for the warmest

months are shown. This is illustrated in Figs. 3 and 4, The following Table 1 gives

a wider perspectiye to the comparison.

TABLE 1

Temperature of the warmest month for viticultural areas

European and

Mediterranean localities °C Australian localities

Cool limif of cultivation 19 Geelong (Vic.) Coonawarra (S. Aust.)

Bordeatx (France) 20

21 Stawell (Vic.)

22 Clare (8, Aust.)

Montpellier (France) 23 Ruthorglen (Viec.) Berri (8. Aust.)

24 Griflith (N.S.W.)

25 Mildura (Vic.)

Tunis (Tunisia) 26

Trmir (Turkey) 27

28 Roma (Qld).

El Fayum (Egypt) 29

Jordan Valley (Israel} 32

12 J. A. PRESCOTT

Tig. 3. Map of France with isotherms of the mean temperatures of the warmest month in

relation to viticulture. ‘lhe isotherm for 18-7° C. is based on the cool limit of eultiva-

tion in western Europe. The linc AY gives the limit recognised by Arthur Young

(1792). The stippled margins represent the cool limits of areas tecognised for quality

by the Institut national des appellations @origine on the map of 1949.

Probably the best example of the use that can be made of the comparison

between France and Australia would be in the selection of varieties for any given

locality and temperature conditions, lt is not intended to present an exhaustive

list_this is a task for the experienced viticulturist, but the list in Table 2 may be

suggestive in this regard. It will be recalled that Angot divided varieties into twa

groups, one of which would ripen in the vicinity of Paris and the other not so. The

present list may be regarded. as an extension of such a concept.

With respect to table grapes, the variety Chasselas, which is the most

important in France, affords an example of the problems involved in climatological

interpretation for such a variety,

CLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE (VITIS VINIFERA L.); A COMPARISON 13

TABLE 2

Cool limits for a selection of’ varieties of vines based un French experience

Temperature of

the warmest month Variety

18 — 19 Chardonnay

Chenin

Gamay

Pinot noir

Riesling

Traminer

19 — 20 Cabernet grog

Cabernet sausignon

Malbec:

Syrah (Shiraz)

20 — 21 Sémillen

Trebbiano (Ugni blanc)

21 -— 22 Muscat of Alexandric

(Muscat gordo blanco)

22 — 23 Carignan

Cinsaut

Grenache

Mataro (Mourvedre)

Chasselas first appears in the Paris market in carly July from the coastal

region of Algeria. This is followed by the crop from the Mediterranean coast of

southern France, The main supply comes in late August and in September from

the country of the Garonne, with superior quality from near Moissac. Very late

supplies come from the region of Paris.

This variety is also used as a wine grape in the semi-continental regions of

France and is a recommended variety for certain areas in the Franche-Comté and

for Alsace. Under the synonym Gutedel it is also used in Germany for wine

making. In Baden-Wurtemberg, this vanety is grown to the extent of 8-5 percent

of the viticultural area.

Constantinescu in the Romanian report points out that certain early varieties

do not produce grapes of high quality when grown under warm conditions.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

It is a pleasure to record the help received from the Library of the Royal

Society in London in securing copies of the papers by Humboldt and Angot,

Thanks are due to Mr. K. M. Cellier and Prof. J. R. Prescott for discussions on the

mathematical problems involved and particularly to the late Mr. J. C. M.

Fornachon, as director of The Australian Wine Research Institute, for his con-

tinued interest in the investigation.

SOURCES OF INFORMATION

Galet, P.:

Cépages et vignobles de Francc—4 volumes (1956-1964 ).

Ministére de Agriculture:

Institut des vins de consommation courante,

Le vignoble francais d’aprés le cadastre viticole (1955-1959).

1d J. A. PRESCOTT

Office International de la vigne et du vin:

Méthodes et principes de détermination des aptitudes viticoles dune région

ct du choix des cépages appropriés,

Rapports présentés A la $* Reunion de la Commission I qui s‘est tenuc a

Mayence (R.F.A,) les 4-11 Septembre 1967,

Bulletin de YO.LYV.

a ee

Region Author/s VoL/No, Year Pages

Romania Constantinescu, G. 40/441 1967 1179-1205

Franee Brejoux, P, and Dayerne, P. 40/442 1967 =: 1315-1333

South Africa Beukman, E. F. 41/443 1968 19-27

Switzerland anon. 41/443 1968 28-37

Tunis Taoufik, B. A. 41/444 1968 135-158

Portugal Gracio, A, M. 41/445 1968 975-311

Israel Safran, B. and Hochberg, B, 41/447 1968 527-544

Germany Alleweldt, G. 41/447 1968 544-556

Soviet Union Katarian, T, G. 41/448 1968 639-651

Bulgaria Nedeltchey, N. 41/448 1968 651-657

Luxembourg Faber, J. 41/448 1968 657-664

Yugoslavia Jelaska, M. and Avramov, L. 41/449 1968 733-746

BNOKEN HILL

Fig. 4. Map of south-eastern Australia with isotherms of the mean temperatures of the warmest

month in relation to viticulture. ‘The isotherm for 18-7° G., represented by a broken

line, is based on the cool limit of cultivation of the vine in western Europe.

CLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE (VITIS VINIFERA L.): A COMPARISON 15

REFERENCES

Ancor, A. (1885). Ann. Bur. centr. météorologique de France, Etude sur les vendanges en

France, 1883 (1) B29-B120.

Canpotie, Atpu. L, P. P, pe (1855). Geographie botanique raisoneé. Paris, Geneva, 2 vol,

1365 pp.

Humsowpt, ALEXANDER von (1817). Mém. Phys. Chir, de la Société d@’Arceuil, 3 pp, 462-602

+ table. Des lignes isothermes et de la distribution de la chaleur sur le globe,

Humnoipr, ALEXANDER von (1845). Kosmos: Entwurf einer physischen Weltbeschreibung.

Stuttgart und ‘liibingen, Vol. 1, 493 pp. loc. cit. p. 350.

Prescorr, J. A. (1965). The climatology of the vine (Vitis vinifera L.). The cool limit of

cultivation, Trans. Roy. Soc. §. Aust. 89 5-23.

Prescott, J. A. (1969). The climatology of the vine (Vitis vinifera J.) Il. A comparison of the

femmperatiite regimes in the Australian and Mediterranean regions, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust,

> p. It.

RmerEAv-Gayon, J. er Peynavp, E. (1960). Traité doenologie, Vol. 1, p. 126.

Winker, A. J. (1962). General Viticulture, Univ. Calif. Press, Berkeley, pp, 56-62.

Youne, Anruur (1792). Travels during the years 1787, 1788 and 1789 undertaken more par-

ticularly with a view of ascertaining the cultivation, wealth, resources, and national

prosperity of the Kingdom of France, Bury St. Edmund’s 566 pp. + Index 8 pp., inchides

three maps: 1. frontispiece: the author’s route, 2, between pp. 282-283: the soil of France,

3. between pp. 292-293; the climate and navigation of France,

A CHECKLIST OF FLOWERING PLANTS OF THE SIMPSON DESERT

AND ITS IMMEDIATE ENVIRONS

BY D. E. SYMON*

Summary

A checklist is given of 353 species of flowering plants from the Simpson Desert and its immediate

environs. A total of 180 species has been collected from the sand dune desert proper and an

appendix lists 25 species most closely associated with the upper slopes and dune crests. Five species

of alien plants Cenchrus ciliaris Buffel Grass, Emex australis Three Cornered Jack, Ricinus

communis Castor Oil, Mulva parviflora Mallow and Citrullus colocynthis Colocinth have been

collected to date, all from the general vicinity of Andado Station.

A CHECKLIST OF FLOWERING PLANTS OF THE SIMPSON DESERT

AND ITS IMMEDIATE ENYVIBONS

by D. E, Synron®

[Read 10 April 1969]

SUMMARY

A checklist is given of 353 species of flowering plants from the Simpson

Desert and its immediate environs. A total af 180 species has been eellected from

thu sand dune desert proper and an appendix lists 25 species most closely asso-

ciated with the upper ass ancl dune crests. Five species of alien plants

Cenchrus ciliaris Bullel Grass, Fmex qusttals Three Cornered Jack, Ricinus

communis Castor Oil, Mulna parcifura Mallow and Citrullus colocynthis Colo-

cinth have been collected to date, all from the general vicinity of Andado ‘Station,

INTRODUCTION

In 1946 Miss C. M, Eardley published (Trans. R. Soc. §. Aust 70, 145) a

catalogue of plants collected by the 1939 Simpson Desert Expedition. The list was

divided inta plants of “the desert proper” (Camp 5 to Camp 19) which was the

arca covered between the remniunts of the Hale River in the uorth-east and the

Mulligan on the eastern edge of the desert. The rest of the list included all other

plants collected trom the approaches to the desert.

Tt is obviously not casy to.defnge very precisely this desert within a desert, but

the term Simpson Desert is often considered to refer to the great sand dune desert.

This receives the Todd, Hale and Hay niyers in the north which give rise to

localised water courses and Hood plains. On the western side the desert is bordered

by the last reaches of the Finke River whose bruided remnants thread between

the dunes in places, In the vicinity of Andado Station the stony tableland extends

into the margins of the desert. On its eastern side the desert is bordered by the

Mulligan and Eyre Creek and on the south and south-cast by the Kallakoopah and

the Warburton above which are many saline and sub-saline claypans and flats.

In the following account many plants from the margins of the desert are

inchided, but those found in the sandridge desert (dunes and flats) and away

from marginal intrusions are inarked with an asterisk (a total of 180 species), In

addition an appendix lists those species most closcly associated with the upper

slopes of the dunes and the dune ridges, a total of 25 species.

Tt will be seen that the collecting sites have not been well distributed over

the desert and that the arvas in the centre, the north-east and the southern

margins of the desert have not becn well collected,

Tt has not been possible to examine and check all the many specimens so

widely distributed. The list is compiled from the original lists of the Crocker

collections, from collecting books supplied by the Alice Springs herburium, and

trom lists of the collections made by Lothian and Hall, Boyland, Must and Beaugle-

hole. To all these eontributers Tan most grateful.

All the species listed ure described in Black 1943-1957, or in Eichler 1965

except those tew which are individually given a reference to the original source

of publication of the name,

® Waite Institute, Cuiversity uf Adelaide, —

Trans. Roy. Soc, §. Aust, (1969), Vol. 93,

18 D, E, SYMON

COLLECTORS

The Collectors included in this paper, the arcas in which they worked, and

their collecting numbers are as follows.

R. L. Crocker crossed the desert with the Simpson Desert Expedition in June 1939

from Andado Station to Birdsville. For details of this journey see Madigan 1945,

Crocker 1946, and Eardley 1946, and for an earlicr short account of the Simpson

Desert and its surroundings see Madiyan 1938. The specimens collected are

housed at the State Herbarium, Adclaide (AD) and the specimens are quoted

by Camp number, e.g. C5. A mup of the desert and its surroundings will be found

in Madigan 1938, a further map and route of the Expedition in Madigan 1946,

and a vegetation map in Crocker 1946.

R. E. Winkworth collected in the north-western past of the desert in October,

1954. His localities and numbers are as follows:

113 km. (70 m.) 8,E. of Ringwood Headstation No. 627-649

113 km, (70 m.) $4. of Ringwood Window Hill 650-659, 661

64:4 km. (40 m.) 5.E. of Ringwoud 660

40+1 km. (25 m,) $.E. of Ringwood 662

32-1 km. (20 m.) SB. of Ringwood 663-670

8-0 km. (5 m.) S.E. of Ringwood 71

N. Forde and G. M. Chippendale collected im the north-western parts of the

desert in September 1955 using separate numbers.

(A) N, Forde

Viale River 1264

6-4 km, (4 m.) N of Numinery 1.5. 12635-1266

9-7 km. (6 m,) $ of Nummery HS,

1267

11:3 kn. (7 m.) S of Nummery HLS. 1269-1273, 1277-1284

1292-1293

113 km. (70 1n.) S.E. of Ringwood 1274 1276

Window Hill 1285-1291, 1295

1:6 km. (1 m,) § of Nummery HS. 1296

97 km, (60 m.) S.E. of Ringwood 1297-1300

100 km. (62 m,) S.E, of Ringwood 4301-1310

88 kim. (55 m.) S.E. of Ringwood Hale River Crossing 1311-1319

105 km. (65 m,) S.E, of Ringwood 1320-1323

56-3 km, (35 m.) S.B. of Ringwood 1324-1325

32-1 kin, (20 m.) S.E. of Ringwood 1326

4-8 km. (3 m) S.E. of Ringwood 1329

(B) G. M. Chippendale

Hale River 1589-1593

97 km. (60 m.)'S.E. of Ringwood HS. 1594-1602

Window ITill 1603-1626

75-7 kn be m} $.E. of Kingwoad H.S. 1627-1630

64-4 km. (40 m.) $.E. of Ringwood Hale River 1631-1644

29 km. (18 m.) N.W. of Hale River 1645-1645

22-5 km, (14 an.) S.B. of Kingwood H,5, 1649-1650

G, M. Chippendale visited and collected on the western edge of the desert in

September 1956. His sites and collecting numbers follow:

Andado (old head station) 9818

33-7 kan. (24-6 m1.) N, of Andado 2819-2897

1-3 km. (0-8 m:) N of North Bore, Andado 2828-2524

42-8 lon, (26+T m.) N of Andado HS, 2830

19-3 km, (12-4 1.) N of Andado HAS, 2831

17-7 km, (11-4 m,) N of Andiado HS, 9832

Andado H.S3, 2833

Indinda Bore, Andado 2834, 2836

17-7 km. (11 m:} §.W. af Andado H.S. 2637-2841

22-5 km. (14 m.) S.W, of Andado HS 9842,

CHECKLIST OF FLOWERING PLANTS OF ‘THE SIMPSON DESERT iy

23-3 kra, (14:5 mm.) S.W. of Andado HS.

46-6 kim, (29-2 m.) SAW, of Andado HS,

91-3 kim. (57 m.) $.8.W, of Andado (Boundary Gate)

2843-2845

2846-2850

2551-2852

G. M, Chippendale and L, A. S. Johnson revisited the Andado arca again in

October 1957.

G. M. Chippendale

46-6 km. (29 m,) W of Andado (Old Andado H.S.)

48°68 km. (30-2 m.) N of Andado (North Bore)

20-8 ko. (12-9 m.) § of Andado

38-5 km. (24:1 m.) $ of Andado

62-5 km. (38-8 m.) N.E. of Charlotte Waters

9941-3944

3945-3946

3947-3949

3950-3952

3953

G. M. Chippendale revisited the Simpson Desert again in 1958 and 1959; Sep-

tember 1958—northern area.

0°8 Jan. (0-5 m,) N.W. Hale River near Simpson Desert

Bottom Bore, Nummerie, Hale River

11-8 km. (7-3 1m) §,F. Bottom Bore Hale River

12-5 km, (7*8 m.) S.E. Bottom Bore Hale River

14-5 km. (9 m.) S.E. Bottom Bore Hale River

20-9 km. (13 m,) 8.E. Bottom Bore Hale River

27-3 km, (17 m,) §.E. Bottom Bore Hale River

30°64 km, (19 m.) S.E. Bottom Bore Hale River

41:8 km. (26 m.) S.E, Bottom Bore Tfale River

53-1 km. (33 .m.) S.E. Bottom Bore Hale River

58-0 kim. (36 m.) S.E, Bottam Bore Hale River

62-46 km, (39 an.) S.E. Bottom Bore Hale River

63-6 km. (39-5 m,) S.E, Bottom Bore Hale River

17-7 km. (11 m.) S.E. Bottom Bore Hale River

12:9 km. (8 m,) S.E. Bottom Bore Hale River

20-9 km, (13 m.) Ringwood ITS.

Andado again in September, 1959—western edge.

127-5 kim. (79 m.) NW of Andado HS,

121-0 km. (73 m,} N of Andado H,S,

109-9 ke. (68 m.) N of Andado H.S.

105-0 km. (65 m,) N of Audado HS.

100-2 km, (62 in.) N of Andado ELS,

92-9 km. (55 m.) N of Andado H.S,

74'1 km, (46 m,) N of Andado H.S.

61-2 km, (38 m.) N af Andada ILS,

74-1 km, (46 m_) S.W. of Andado HS.

4927

4928-4930

4931

4932

4933-4935

49364937, 4952:

4935

4939-4947

4942

443-4945. 4948

49464047

4954

4953-4962

6574-6582

6583-6587

8588-6589

6590-6592

6593-8594

6595-6598

6599-6603

6604

6605-6609

T. R, N, Lothian and RB. Hill collected on the western edge of the desert approxi-

mately due east of Dalhousie Springs Station on road made by the French Oil

Search Company between August 9-12 1963. Their base camp was just within the

borders of the dune désert.

Base Camp between dunes 3-4

Gibber plain between dines 2-3

Flats between dunes 3-4 ;

30-6 km. (19 m.) E of base camp, high dunes, deep valleys, deep sand

48-3 km. (30 m.) E of base camp, flat between dunes. little or no sand

48:3 km, (30 m.) Io of hase camp, dunes, deep. sand

35-3 km. (22 m,) E of hase camp, sand dunes

16:1 km, (LO m.) Ei of base camp, sand

35°3 km. (22 m.) FE of base vamp, sand

9:7 km. (6 m.) E of base camp consolidated sand, slopes and flat

Base camp

I1-3 kin. (7 m.) E, of base camp then 2m, along dune trough, consolidated

san¢

3-2 dem. (2 m.} E of base camp, clay pan between dunes

Gibber pla between dnnes 3-4

Dune No. 3. near base camp

Gihber plain at base camp

1407-1508

1509-1530

1531-1592

1593-1622

1623-1656

1657-1700

1701-1753

1754-1763

1764-1775

1776-1781

1762

1783-1831

1532-1860

1861-1870.

1871-1885

1886-1898

2) 1D. . SYMON

D. Boyland collected on the S.E, corner of the desert in September 1966,

74-1 km, (46 ,) S.S.E. of Poeppel Corner, sandy clay near salt lake 230-233

48-3 km. (30 m,) 8.8.6. of Pricpeol Corner, interdiune [at 334

Poeppel Corner. sandy clay on salt lake 935-236

Poeppel Corner, sandy soil edue of salt lake 236A—245

Porpmel Corner, sandy soil intordyme flut and slopes 246-256

144-$ kay. (approximately 9 m.) WNW. of Birdsville 287-293

113-0 km, (approximately 70m.) WNW, of Birdsville: 194—297

89-7 km. (approximately 56 11.) W.N.W. of Birdsville 298-322

D, Symon collected ut the Amerada Petroleum Corporation No. 1 Tale River

drilling site at 25° 15’ 50’S, 136° 43’ 35”E. in November 1966, This area is approxi-

mately 129 km. (80 in.) W of the Queensland border and 129 km. (80 m.) E of

Andado Station and is almost in the centre of the great sand dune desert. Col-

lecting numbers 4331-4405.

Mr. A. C, Beaugleliole of Portland, Victoria, collected in the Andade Station

area in July 1968. One sct of Iris specimens has been sent to the herbarium at Alice

Springs aud duplicates of some other genera have been distributed as follows:

Bassia and Zyvophyllum at AD, Stute Herbarium, Adelaide, and

Cassia und Solanum at ADW, Waite Herbarium, Adelaide.

Far brevity his collections are cited as ACB and his cullecting sites and

numbers are as follows:

109°7 ki, (68:2. m.) N.N.W. of Old Andade H.S., L-G km, (1 an,) S,N.W.

of Bench mark 30-4 27731-27764

106-7 km. (66-3 mm.) NNW. of Old Andado ELS,, b-4 km, (-9 ma.) SS.

yf Bench mark 304 27774-27796

403-7 km. (64-5 au.) NNW. of Old Andado H.S,, about Bench suark B05 27 TYBA—2784.3

Y1-7 km. (57 m.) NNW. of Old Andado TLS., 16 kin, (Lo m.) NUNVW, of

Bench mark 398 27 843A—27878

735-6 km. (47 m.) N.N.W, of Old Andado H,S., bore and damn ut Beneh

mark 69/41, 400 27885-2759)

69-5 kin, (43-2.01,) N.N.W. of Old Andade H.S,, 4-3 Ten. (2-7 mm.) $.5.B,

of Bench mark 401 27893-27594

53-2 kim, (33°2 m.) NNW, of Old Andada I1.S., 9:0 km, (5:6 an, NNW.

of Beneh inark 404 27900-27908

42-1 kr, (26-2. 1.) N.N.W. of Old Andado H.S., 2-2 kin. (1-4 in) S.SVE.

of Benoh mark 404 27910-27911

30-2 km, (18°8 m,) NN,E. of Old Andado FS. about 16-1 km. (LO m.)

N.N.E. of Bench mark 408 27916-27928

17-2 kin, (10-7 m.) N.N.W. of Old Andado H.5., about Beneh ynith 40s ITYB0-2T 94

Old Andado H.5. aren 27047-27967

15-3 km. (8-9 om.) Wy of Old Audado H.S., 54) kev. (3-4 m.) KE, of New

Andado FI.S, 27976-2HU 159A

3-2 fom, (2 wi,) W. nf New Andado ILS, 28016-28033B

43-4 kus, (27 mm.) SW, of New Andado HS. 1-6 hi (1 m.) NB, of mall

and bare: 28034-28037

Miss J. Must, Mr. D. Nelson and Mr, J. R. Maconoclie of the Animal and

Agriculture Todustry Branch of the Northern Territory Administration, Alive

Springs, collected ul a site 22-27 km. (14-17 m.} north of Andado homestearl im

July and August 1968. The collection is listed under the collecting numbers ut

Miss Must. The specimens are deposited at the herbarium al. Alice Springs (N'T)

with some duplicates at ADW. ‘The area is ontside the stony tablelands and is

right in the dune system. The collecting, numbers and dates are as follows:

Miss J. Must Nos, 48-119... . 11.7,1968

Nos, 314-342 . _ 8-12.6.1948

The specimens collected by Winkworth, Forde and Chippendale are mainly

at the Ulerbarium at Alice Sprinys (NT) (Northern Territory) but with many

CHECKLIST OF FLOWERING PLANTS OF THE SIMPSON DESERT 21

duplicates at Canberra. The specimens of Crocker, Lothian und Hill are at the

State Herbarium Adelaide (AD), those collected hy Symon are at the herbarium

of the Waite Institute (ADW) with duplicates at AD and elsewhere, The speci-

mens collected by Boyland are at the State Herbarium, Brishane (BRI).

FLOWERING PLANTS OF TIE SIMPSON DESERT AND ITS IMMEDIATE

ENVIRONS

CHECKLIST

(* = plants found in the actual sandridge desert)

TYPHACEAE

Typha <flemitgerttts Pers. Leafy specimen only of this aquatic herb. ACB.

RUPPIACEAL

Ruppia spiralis L. ex Dum, An aquatic plant from channel of the Hale River,

Crocker (as R. maritima).

JUNCGAGINACEAR

Triglochin caleitrapa Hook. A small erect annual. Lothian 1533. ACB.27839,

27906, 27924.

Triglochin calcitrapa yar. isingiana Black, A small erect annual. Chippendale

2841; Lothian 1533. ACB.27906, 28002.

Triglochin centrocarpa Hook. A small erect annual. These three Triglochins

are all closely related. ACB.27931, 28008.

Poacear (Gramincac)

“Aristida contorta F, Muell. (A, arenaria Gand. ), An annual or short-lived

perennial collected on hard soil on an interdune flat. Lothian 1546, 1631,

1862, Must 55, 341,

* Aristida browniana Henr. An annual or short-lived perennial often a domi-

nant grass on fats and slopes between the dunes, widely collected.

Crocker C1, C3, Chippendale 1600, 6578; Lothian 1676, 1747, 1827; Bay-

land 266, 313; Symon 4379: Must 33; ACB.27756.

Brachiaria milliformis (Presl.) Chase, A short-lived perennial, ACB.27780,

Brachiaria pravtervisa (Domin) Hubbard. An annual grass from the flood

pluin of the Tale River. Crocker.

Cenchrus ciliaris L, An alien perennial pasture vrass. ACB.27965.

Chloris acicularis Lindl. A tall perermial grass apparently rare in the desert.

Forde 1291. ACB.27855,

Chloris pectinuta Benth. A tussock perennial grass, ACB.27997.

Cynodon dactylon (L.) Pers. A stoloniferous perennial, ACB.27959,

Daclyloctenium radulans (R.Br.) Beauy, A sprawling annual, not common

here, collected from interdune claypan Hats. Lothian 1583, 1835, 1860.

ACB,27784, 27833, 27911, 28014.

*Danthonia bipartita F, Muell, A perennial tussock grass. Must 58, 320.

Dichanthium frumilius J. M. Black. A small tufted annual, not common.

Crocker C3; Forde 1295.

Dichanthium sericeum (R.Br.) Camus. An erect perennial tussock grass,

Lothian 1850.

Digitaria ammophila (F. Muell.) Hughes. A tufted perennial grass, Wink-

worth 654; Lothian 1558.

1D, bk. SYMON

Digitaria brownii (1. and 8.) Hughes. A tussock perennial, locally common

on 4 rock outerop. Winkworth 636; Must 337.

Diplachne fusea (L.) Beauv, An erect perennial tussock grass, Crovker (As

D. muelleri). Lothian 1542, 1559; ACB.27805, 27998,

*Enneapogon avenaceus (Lindl.) Hubbard, An annnal grass from. interdumne

fats or in deep red sand. Crocker; Chippendale 6579; Lothian 1571,

1627, 1858; ACB.27802.

° Enneapogon cylindricus Burbidge. An erect tufted perennial from sandy soil

on an interdime flat. Lothian 1570; Boyland 259; Must 57,

°Enneapogon polyphyllus (Domin.) Burbidge. Common or occasional ou Hals

between the dunes. Crocker C3; Chippendale 1622; Symon 4346.

Beogsuunls concinna Steud. An annual, very variuble ia size. ACB,27828,

237990.

° Eragrostis dielsii Pilger. A prostrate annual or short-lived perennial occasional

on deep red sand from interdune flat areas. Crocker 2, C3; Chippendale

6580; Lothian 1803, 1829, 1833, 1864, Boyland 236; AGB.2781L0, 27977-

*Rragrastis eriopoda Benth, A tough tussocky perennial very common on the

Hats and slopes and in places a dominant grass. Crocker C5, C16; Symi

4347, 4383; Must 330, 332; ACB.27846.

Eragrostis kennedyae F. Turner. A tussock perennial. ACB.27993,

°Eragrostis laniflora Benth, A tussock perennial on some interdune dats,

Crocker Cl: Winkworth 630; Lothian 1715.

Eragrostis leptocarpa Benth, A slender annual, variable in size. ACB.27601,

27843, 25009.

* Eragrostis setifolia Nees. A tussock perennial similar in plant form to the two

species above, collected from clayey sandy soil on an interdune flat.

Crocker C3; Forde 1293; Chippendale 2524; Lothian 1569; Boyland 300;

ACB.27776, 27803,

* Eragrostis xerophila Domin. A perennial tussock grass. Must 54, 336,

?Friachne aristidea F. Muell, An erect annual common on the upper slopes and

crests of the sand ridges and on deep simd, Crocker C2; Chippendale

1624; Lothian 1462, 1666, 1753, 1800, 1816: Boyland 260; Symon 4348;

Must 338; ACB.28013,

Eriachne benthamii Hartley, A perennial tussock grass. ACB,27996.

Eriachne helmsii (Domin) Hartley. Rare on loose sandy soil in interdune

areas, Winkworth 638.

Tseflema eremaewn Blake. A small annual grass, Lothian 1574.

Neurachne muelleri Hack. Must 323.

* Panicum australiense Domin. A small tufted annual not common, Crocker (as

Tchuanthus); Symon 4377,

Panicum decompositum R.Br. A tussock perennial from interdune cliy flat.

Crocker C3; Winkworth 633,

*Plavinsetum refractum (F. Mucll.) Benth, An annual common and wide-

spread along the upper slopes and dune crests, widely collected. Crocker;

Forde 1269, 1276; Chippendale 6587, 6609; Lothian 1617, 1677, 1697,

1736, 1792; Boyland 311; Symon 4357; Must 325; ACB.27864.

*Setaria sp. (? S, brownii [errm, in Rosen, Beitr. Biol, Pflanzen 10:61 (1910) ).

An annual grass, Crocker C18; Forde 1298,

Sporobolus actinocladus (¥. Muell.) F. Muell, An erect. annual or short-lived

perennial, ACB.27982.

Tragus australianus Blake, A small sprawling annual grass, Lothian 1575,

1831; ACB.27831.

CHECKLIST OF FLOWERING PLANTS OF THE SIMPSON DESERT 23

“Triodia basedowii Pritzel, A widespread, pungent leaved, hummocky peren-

nial, very common on flats and slopes and one of the dominant grasses

of the desert, Crocker C8, etc.; Lothian 1468; Boyland 314; Symon 4382;

Must 52; ACB. 27858.

Tripogon loltifarmis (F. Muell.) Hubbard. A small tufted perential. ACB.

27827,

*Triraphis mollis R.Br. An annual common or occasional on flats and dune

slopes. Crocker G3: Forde 1271; Chippendale 1599; Lothian 1412, 1463,

1503, 1636, 1748, 1801, 1863; Boyland 234: Symon 4389; Must 56; ACB,

27757, 27795,

*“Zygochloa paradoxa (R.Br.) Blake, A perennial forming a tough tangled

clump, a dominant grass and important sand binder on the upper slopes

and ridges of the dunes, Many other plants get some shelter f rom. this

widespread species, Crocker C3; Winkworth 631; Forde 1272; Chippen-

dale 1596, 2533: Lothian 1459, 1661, 1883: Boyland 279: Symon 4360;

Must 59; ACB.27754.

CYPERACEAE

Cyperus bulbosus Vahl. A perennial sedge, producing small bulbils. Crocker

Cyperus gilesii Benth. A graceful annual sedge, ACB.27992,

Cyperus iria L. An annual sedge. ACB.27989.

Cyperus squarrosus L. A small erect annual sedge. Crocker C4, ete. (As C.

aristalus Benth. ): ACB.28004,

Fimbristylis dichotome (1) Vahl. A tufted perennial, apparently rare in the

desert, Crocker C19; ACB.27813, 28010.

CENTROLEPIDACEAE

Centrolepis polygyna (R.Br.) Teron. A very small annual, ACB.28007.

LILIACEAE

*Anguilluria dioica R.Br, A small evect bulbous plant. ACB,27979; Must 69,

*Bulbinopsis semibarbata ( R.Br.) Borzi, An annual or ephemeral apparently

rare on hard clay flats hetween dunes, Lothian 1493, 1578, 1652, 1857;

ACB.27§35, 27902,

Corynotheca lateriflara (R.Br.) Benth. An unexpected record, the specimens

are not ideal and more material is needed for confirmation. On deep

interdune sands. Lothian 1671, 1680.

PROTFACEAL

*Grevillea juncifalia Hook. A large: shrub or sruall tree (3 m.) oceurring on

interdune Hats. In 1966 many were dead as a result of the long drought,

but many new seedlings were seen. Crocker C6-S; Lothian 1477, 1701,

1720; Boyland 319; Symon 4365, 4392,

*Grevillea stenobotrya F. Muell. A medium sized (1-1-5 m.) shrub, occasional

on the interdune slopes. Crocker C5, C6, C7, C12, C13; Symon 4366,

°Grevillea striata R.Br. A small tree apparently rare in interdune areas,

Crocker C5; Winkwozth 645.

*Hakea divaricata Johnson. (HH. intermecdia Ewart and Davies), A small tree,

apparently rare. Crocker C7, C10; Boyland 317; Must 110.

*Hakea leucoptera R.Br, A shrub or small tree in open grassland. Crocker Cl,

C2, C8; Winkworth 663; Forde 1299: Lothian 1469; Boyland 251,

ad D, &. SYMON

SANTALACEAE

Santalum lanceolatum R.Br. A shrub or small tree very rare in the desert.

Crocker C3; Winkworth 637; Boyland 312,

LorANTHACEAL

Amyema maidenii (Blakely) Barlow. A parasite on Acacia aneura ane!

cambagei. Crocker (as Loranthus muidenii) C3, Boylaud 288.

Lysiana exocarpi (Behr.) Tiegh. Parasite on Acacia peuce. Crocker (as

Loranthus exocarpi); Chippendale 2829 (lost or mislaid ).

Lysiane spathulata (Blakely ) Barlow. Parasite on Acacia kempeana, Forde

1279 (as Loranthus exocarpi var. spathulata), ACB.2774, 27821,

POLYGONACEAE

Emex australis Steinh, An alien annual herb. ACB.27959.

Muehlenheckia cunninghamii (Meisn.) F', Muell. An intricate tangled sprawl-

ing shrub oflen associated with waterways and flood plains, Crocker;

Lothian 1874; Boyland 309; ACB,27820.

Humes erystallinus Lange, An erect annual ur short-lived perennial. ACB.

27955.

CHENOPODIACEAE

Atriplex gngulata Benth. A sroall perennial shrub ou a flood plain, Chippen-

dale 2427: ACB.27920.

Atriplex campanulatum Benth. A sprawling herb. ACB.27995,

Atriplex conduplicata F. Muell, Austral. J. Pharm. 429 (1886). A smal] shrub

or herb on flood plain, Chippendale 2526.

Atriplex crassipes J. M. Black. A small erect anual or short-lived perennial.

ACB.27916,

Atriplex elachophylla F. Muell. A sroall annual in the shelter of trees and in

red sand. Winkworth 652; Chippendale 1621.

Atriplex fissivalvis , Mucll, A small herb on stony gibber Hat. Lothian 1865.

Atriplex holocarpa F. Muell. A small herb on flood plain or interdune Hit.

Chippendale 2852, 3950; Lothian 1549.

* Atriplex limbata Benth. A sprawling herb on interdune flats, Lothian 1421,

1711; Boyland 248.

Atriplex lindleyi Mog. Au annual herb. Forde 1333.

Atriplex muelleri Benth. Sprawling annual herb. ACB.27961.

Atriplex. nummularia Lindl, A perennial shrub 1-3 m, tall on flood plain or

stomy interdune flat. Chippendale 2851, 4937; Lothian 1523,

* Atriplex spongiosa I". Muell. An annual herb in depressions ur of stony plain.

‘Chippendale 3951, 4952; Lothian 1549; Boyland 238; ACB,27519,

Atriplex. velutinella F. Muell. A sprawling annual or short-lived perennial,

ACB,27938.

* Atriplex vesicuria Heward ex Benth. A shrubby perennial collected trom stany

rises ur interdune flats. Crocker C2; Forde 1313, 1315; Lothian 1650;

Chippendale 1639, 1642, 1613, 4941; Boykutd 233, 240,

Rabbagia acroptera F, Muell, and Tate. A small perennial shrub collected

from stony or hard interdune flats, Crocker C20; Lothian 1528, 1638,

1844,

Bubbagia dipterocarpa F, Muell. A small perennial shrub locally common on

flood plain and rare on stony plain. Chippendale 2819, 3946; ACB.27939.

Bassia andersonii (sing, A perennial herb infrequent on stony plain in clayey

red soil. Chippendale 3942; ACB.27624.

CHECKLIST Gk FLOWERING PLANTS OF THE SIMESON DESERT a5

"Bassia hicornis (Lindl.) F. Muell. A small shrub from clayey sandy soil of

interdune Hat. Crocker, Chippendale 6591; Lothian 1596, 1554: Boylatid

320, ACB.27S18.

Bassla calvarata Ising. A small sprawling undershrab, ACB.27917.

Bassia convexula Anderson. A small grey shrub common in red sandy Hat,

Winkworth 6350; Chippendale 3939; Must 85; ACB.27886.

Bassia cornishiana F. Muell. A woolly leaved, spiny fruited perennial, Must

Bassia deourrens Black. A compact small shrub, ACB.27980.

“Bassia diacantha (Necs) F, Muell. A sprawling annual or short-lived perennial

from hard soil on interdune fats, Crocker; Lothian 1644, 1649, 1708;

Boyland 240; ACB.27833,

Bassia divaricata (R.Br.) F, Mucll. A small shrub locally common in sundy

suil in shelter of trees. Chippendale 4960: Lothian 1525,

*Bussia eremaca Ising. A small shrub from interdune Hat, Lothian 1645

Bassia eriacantha (VW. Muell.) Anderson. A small shrub from stony areas.

Forde 1315; Chippendale 3948; Lothian L887.

*Bassia intricata Anderson, Locally common on flood plain and on stony red

soils, i small intricate shrub. Crocker; Chippendale 2525, 3941, 4918;

Lothian 1525, 1562; Boyland 239,

Kochia aphylla R.Br. An intricate small shrub occasional on interdune flood

plain. Chippendale 2830; Lathian 1890; ACB.27799.

Kochia coronata J, M, Black, A small sprawling shrublet locally common on

flood plain. Chippendale 2522, 3943; Lothian 1527; ACB.27918.

Kochia georgei Diels. A small stout shruh on stony rise and plain, locally

common, Forde 1314, 1328; Chipperidale 1640, $843, 3949: Lothian LS88s.

*Kochia lanosa Lindl. A small sprawling shrub, apparently not comman,

Crocker C11,

Kochia microearpa (Beuth.) Wilson. A sprawling short-lived perennial. ACB.

28020),

Kachia spongiocarpa F, Muell, A dwarf grey shrub, rare in cluyey red soll on

stony plain. Chippendale 3944.

Kochia tomentosa ¥. Muell. A small shrub infrequent near small stony water-

course, Crocker C3; Forde 1323; Chippendale 4959,

Kochia triptera Benth. A small shrub. ACB.27787.

*Pachycornia tenuis (Benth.) Black, A small intricate shrub from sandy soil

at the edge of a salt lake, Crocker C2; Chippendale 2831, 4943: Boyland

241; ACB.27816.

*Rhagodia spinescens R.Br. var. deltophylla (F. Mucll.) Black. A sprawling

shrub on deep firm sand or dune slopes. Crocker: Lothian 144, 1812;

Symon 4370; ACGB.27788.

*Salsola kali L. and yar. strobilifera Berth, An intricate rounded annual from

decp sands. Crocker ©2, C5; Lothian 1512, 1513, L561, 1647, L871; Boy-

land 246; Symon 4400; Must 86; ACRB.27763,

Threlkeldia proceriflora ¥. Mucll. An erect undershrub, ACB.27919.

*Bassia johinsonil Ising. An intricate perennial undershrub on swale Mats. Must

107; ACB,27861. |

“Bassia lanicuspis (WF, Muell.) F. Muell. A dwarf shrnh, Jocally common on

stony rise to infrequent in sandy Joam. Forde 1316, 1321; Chippendale

1641, 4962; Lothian 1514, 1555, 1642, 1646, 1648: ACB.27809.

*Bassia paradoxa (R.Br.) F. Muell, An annual or small, short-lived shnth

occasional in sandy loam to common on stony interdune Hat. Crocker;

Chippendale 1628, 4961, 6590; Lothian 1411, 1557, 1866, ACB.27826,

M4 BD. i. SYMON

Bassia pdrallelicuspis Anderson, Au annual or small shrub on interdmie Wal,

Lothian 1548, 1556.

*Bassia quinguecuspis (F. Muell.) F. Muell, A. small shrub or annul from

interdime Hats, Chippendale 3940; Symon 4394 (as yar. villosa).

*Chenopodiune anricomum Lindl An erect small shrub, Jowwly common on

Hood area, Forde 1329; Chippendale 2834, Boyland 299: ACB.27041,

27956.

Chenopodium cristatum (F. Muell.) F. Muell, A smull prostrate annnal from

interdune flats, Lothian 1446, 1471; ACB.27830, 27967,

“Chenopodium plantazinellum (Fo Muell.) Aetlen. in Engl, Jahrb, 63:487

(1930). From heavy soil near salt lake. Boyland 237.

Dysphania myriocephala Benth. A small prostrate anmnal, ACB.27837, 25011.

*Fychylaena tomentosa R.Br, An intricate and sprawling small shrub from

sandy interdune flats. Crocker C8, C9; Boyland 247; Must 49, ACB.

27753.

AMARANTHACEAE

“Amaranthus grandiflorus (J. M. Black) J. M. Black. An annual herb; ap-

parently not common, from deep imterdune sands. Crocker C11; Lothian

1452, 1502, 1599; Must 333; ACB.27794.

Amaranthus milchellii Benth, An erect annual herb. ACB.27791.

°Ptilolus atriplicifolius (A. Cunn, cx Moy.) Benl. in Mtt. Bol. Staatssamm,

Munchen 2:404 (1938). Collected from heavy deep sands. Lothian 1662,

1806, 1595.

Prilotus exallafus Nees, Stout, erect, perennial herb from a sundy watercourse.

Crocker C2,

Ptilotus helipteroides (F, My-cll.) F, Muell. A small annual herb from a rocky

outcrop near a creck bunk, Crocker C4, Winkworth 668; Chippendale

tay

’Pilotus latifolins R.Br. Very common along the upper slopes of the steep

dune [ace and a primaty coloniser of the mobile crests. It can form large

(75 om.) showy while, rounded herbs. Widespread and repeatedly col-

lected, Crocker C10; Chippendale 2816, 6602, 6605; Lothian 1410, 1185,

1615. 1729, 1797, 1818; Boyland 291; Symon 4355; Must 75; ACB,27863,

27930.

Prilotus nobilis (Lindl.) F. Muell, Rare in the desert, in stony ground al the

hase of hills. Chippendale 4935.

plains and slopes, rarely if ever found on deep sand. Crocker, Wink

worth 632; Chippendale 1612, 2545, 4958. 6597; Lothian 1893: Must 81,

* Peflotus polystachyus (Gandich) F, Muell. (P. alopecuraideis ) and including

the form rubriflorus. Depending on season a smull or large sprawling

herb which may be 1 m. high by 2 m, wide, Tl may be very common of

deep sand on the Hats and dune slopes. Widespread and widely collected,

Crocker Cl, 62, G14; Winkworth 649, Chippendale 1623, 6582; Lothian

1433. 1540, 1614, 1653, 1688, 1730, 1805; f, rubriflarus 1435, 1490, 1731,

1804; Boyland 283; Symon 4401; Must 80; ACB.27857,

NyCrAGINACEAL

® Boerhavia diffusa 1. A prostrate auinual or perennial herb, on hard interdune

flats. Crocker ©3; Winkworth 653; Lothian 1634.

GYROS TEMON ACESE

Codonocarpus cotinifolius (Dest,) F, Muell. A short-lived tree very rare mn

the desert, A single tree recorded by Crocker near the Hay River.

CHECKLIST OF FLOWERING PLANTS OF TILE SIMPSON DESERT a7

*Gyrostemon ramulosus Desf. A short-lived shrub or small tree. Must 112, 329;

ACB.27845.

AIZOACEAE

Aizoon quadrifidum (1. Mucll.) F. Muell. An intricate rounded small shrub.

ACB.27976.

Glinus lotoides L. A sprawling herb. ACB.27954.

°Trianthema pilosa F. Mucll. A sprawling mat-forming herb locally commen

on deep sind flats and slopes, Crocker C2; Lothian 1422, 1445, 1473,

1607, 1696, 1745. 1757, 1826; Symon 4345; Must 116.

Trianthema. triquetra Willd. A prostrate aunual herb on hard Hats between

dunes. Lothian 1521, 1885.

TRTRAGONACEAE

Tetragonia eremaca Ostent. A prostrate annual herb from hard stony inter-

dune flats, Lothian 1518, 1580.

PORTULACACEAL

Calandrinia species frequently mike most unsatistactory herbarium specimens

due to their extreme succulence and tendency to fall to pieces on drying

with the result that accurale determinations are often difficult,

*Calundrinia balonensiy Lindl, A succulent ephemeral locally common on deep

sand hetween dunes. Syinon 4395: Bovland 302; Must 324, 100,

*Calandrinia clisperma J. M. Black, A sprawling Heshy annual. Must 113.

*Calandrinia peladahe Benth. A succulent ephemeral locally common on

deep sand. Symon 4396: Must 106.

Calandrinia ptychosperma F. Mucll A prostrate anmnal rare in the desert on

an interdune flat. Lothimn 1532; ACB,27838.

Calandrinia pumila (F. Muell. ox Benth.) F. Mucll. A small annual also rare

_ in the desert on an interdune flat. Lothian 1537. ACB.27829.

Galandrinia of, remota Black, A sneculent annuul or ephemeral. Lothian 1505,

1619. 1710, 1762; ACB.27847.

“Portulaca intralerranea J, M. Black, A sprawling mat-forming herb up to 1m.

across, Common on the consolidated sides of dunes and lower slopes.

Crocker C2: Winkworth 642; Chippendale 1614; Lothian | 451, 1486,

a 1615, 1687, 1691, 1751, 1879. Boyland 263, 322. Symon 4397; Must

339.

Portulaca oleracea L. A sroull mit-forming succulent herb on interdune flats,

Lothian 1502 p.pt, 1592; ACB.27891,

Brassicacear (Crecrenar)

*Arubidella eremizena (FM uell.) Shaw. An antiual herb from clayey sandy

soil on an interdune flat, Boyland 295 (as Blennodia eremizena), :

Arabidella procumbens (Tate) Shaw, A slender prostrate annual, ACB.27908,

*“Blennodia canescens R.Br. An annual herb from the sides of a dune, Wink-

worth 634; Must 67,

*Blennodia pterosperma (Black) Black. An annual her common along the

upper slopes of the dunes and forming a fringe along the sides of the

unstible crests. Crocker C11: Chippendale 1610; Boyland 281: Symon

4558; Must 65.

*Tarmsiodoxa blennadioides (F. Muell,) Schulz. An annnal herb from inter-

dune flats, Boyland 303 (as Blennodia lasiocarpa),

Lepidium muelleri-ferdinandi Thell, A small annual only once collected from

an interdnne fat. Lothian 1351.

D, BE. SYMON

¢/ epidium rotundum DC. A small annual herb on interdune flats. Chippendale

6581; Lothian 1427, 1443, 1496, 1589, 1819; Boyland 258; Symon 4332;

Must 114.

*Stenopetalum lineare var. canescens Benth. An erect annual herb from hard

interdunc flats. Lothian 1418, 1551, 1626, 1655, 1773, 1845; Must 77.

CRASSULACEAE

Crassula colorata (Nees) Ostenf. A very small succulent ammual., Lothian

1531; ACB.27991,

PrIrrosPORACEAE

Pittosporum phylliraeowdes DC, An erect shrub or small tree from small creck-

line. often colonial. Forde 1326; Chippendale 1650.

MIMosachAr

Acacia aneura F. Muell, ex Benth. A small tree on stony interdune flat. Wink-

worth 628; Lothian 1565; Must 101.

“Acacia brachybotrya Benth. A shrub on sand or interdune flat. Boyland 254.

® Acacia brachystachya Benth. A tree on consolidated interdune sands, Crocker

C2; Lothian 1809,

“aoe ead R. T. Baker. A tree on sandy fat, flood plain, Crocker; Boy-

and 249.

*Acacia dictyophleba F. Muell. A colonial shrub or small tree on deep sand

slopes or ridges, one of the most widespread species in the desert.

Crocker C6, C7; Chippendale 4951; Lothian 1442, 1467, 1491, 1604, 1694,

1743; Boyland 256; Symon 4375; Must 99.

Acacia estrophiolata F. Muell, A slender, graceful, small or large tree in-

frequent on deep sand or flats, Crocker C3, Chippendale 4953, 6589.

Acaciu georginae F. M. Bailey. Bot.Bull, 13:9. A tree locally common in sandy

loam of food plain. Chippendale 1590, 4936,

Acacia kempeang F. Muell. A large shrub locally common on ridge, Crocker

C2; Chippendale 1604; Must 96.

Acacia leptopetala Benth. A shrub or tree, Forde 1265.

° Acacia ligulata A. Cum, ex Benth. A colonial, large or small shrub, One of

the commonest species in the desert, on deep sand on flats and on dune

slopes, Crocker C1, C2, C6; Forde 1284; Chippendale 4930, Lothian 1431,

1488, 1612, 1663, 1721, 1724; Boyland 252; Symon 4359, 4367.

* Acacia linophylla W. V. Fitzgerald. A tall shrub from interdune flats. Lothian

1441, 1498, 1664, 1718, 1791. ,

2 Acacia maitlandii F. Muell. (A, patens F. Muell. ex Benth.) A shrub. Crocker

C6, C8.

* Acacia murrayana F. Muell, ex Benth, A large shrub or small tree on deep

sand, Crocker C6; Chippendale 2847, 4928, 6583; Lothian 1472, 1593,

1667: Boyland 253, 289; Must 331.

Acacia peuce F, Muell. An erect tall tree restricted in distribution to near

Andado on the stony plain and also found near Birdsville, Crocker;

Chippendale 2823, 3945.

* Acacia ramulosa W. V. Fitzgerald. A large shrub or small tree from interdunc

sands, Royland 292.

Bonria aeasttiveps F, Mell. A shrub to 3 m. rare on Mloodout. Chippendale

°* Acacia tetragonophylla F. Muell. A large shrub or small tree. Lothian 1782;

Boyland 316.

CHECKLIST OF FLOWERING PLANTS OF THE SIMPSON DESERT 29

Acacia victorlae Benth. An intricate small or large tree locally common on

stony fat. Winkworth 638; Forde 1327; Chippendale 1649; Lothian 1508.

Acavia ? wattsiana F, Muell. ex Benth, A small shrub, Crocker C1T.

CAMS ALPINIACEAK

Bauhinia carronii F. Muell, A tree from the Eyre Creek, Kaliduwarry Station,

Crocker C20,

*Cassia nemophila Vogel. A woody shrub 1-2 m. tall, at times colonial in habit,

on the lower slopes of the dunes or on the interdune fats, Crocker C7,

C14; Chippendale 4933, 6595; Lothian 1424, 1492. 1713, 1764; Boyland

308; Symon 4405; Must 97; ACB.27812, 27862.

“Cassia nemophila var. sygophylla (Benth.) Symon, A medium sized shrub.

Symon 4354; Must 50, ACB.27850,

Cassia oligophylla F. Mucll. A woody shrub. Chippendale 1603, 4957, 6596:

Lothian 1896; ACB.27790, 27848, 27878.

* Cassia pleurocarpa F, Mucll. A shrub, usually low (to 1 m.), at times colonial

and widespread on the interdune flats and dune slopes, Crocker C1, C10.

C13; Forde 1294; Chippendale 1626; Lothian 1456, 1670, 1733: Boyland

318; Symon 4368; Must 98: ACB.27874.

Cassia pruinosa F. Muell. A straggly shrab usually found on rocky or stony

sites. Chippendale 1635.

Bawacear (PAPILioNACcEAr )

*Crotalaria cunninghamii R.Br, A stiffly erect annual or short-lived shrub

common along the upper steep slopes of the dunes and in the edge of

the loose sand om the crests. Widespread and commonly collected.

Crocker C8; Winkworth 627; Forde 1268; Chippendale 1594, 6600:

Lothian 1776; Boyland 255; Symon 4356; Must 94; ACB.27870,

“Crotalaria dissitiflora Benth, An annual or short-lived willowy herb also found

along the upper slopes of the dunes and in deep sand, Widespread and

commonly collected. Crocker C8, C15; Forde 1273; Chippendale 1607,

4938; Lothian 1413, 1432, 1487, 1622. 1657, 1702, 1777, 1796, 1807, 1877:

Symon 4379; Must 88; ACB.27856, 27950, 28034.

“Crotalaria eremaea F. Muell. Rep.Greg. P15. Collected from the lower slopes

of sand ridges. Boyland 270,

Crotalaria mitchellit Benth, A spreading prostrate perennial on loamy snil,

Lothian 1534,

*Crotalaria novae-hollandiae DC, A perennial herb in sandy loam between

ridges. Chippendale 4931, 1616; Lothian 1824,

Crotalaria strehlowii. Pritz. A perennial herb, apparently rare on sandridge

crest. Crocker; Chippendale 6608.

Glycine canescens Herm. A slender twining herbaceans perennial. Lothian

1409,

“Indigofera: brevidens var. uncinata Benth. Small perennial shrubs. ? Wink

worth 646; Lothian L682, 1704, 1721; Symon 4391; ACB.27935.

Isotropis wheeler) F,, Muell. ex Benth. A small slender shrub. Must 48,

Lotus eruentus Court. A prostrate annual herb. Crocker; Lothian 1588, 1539,

1859; AGB.27943,

Psoralea cinerea Lindl, An erect annual. Crocker C20),

*Psoralea eriantha Benth, Annual or perennial herb of variable size to 1m.

high along the base of the steep fuce of the dunes or in deep sand,

Crocker Cl4, C20; Lothian 1454, 1660, 1716, 1727, 1813: Boyland 3278;

Symon 4362: Must 322.

Sp D. fh. SYMON

* Psoralea patens Lindl. An erect herbaceous perennial from interdune claypan.

Lothian 1840; Chippendale 4932; Boyland 286, ACB.28016.

Ptychosema trifoliatum F. Mucll, A procumbent slender herb. Must 73.

Seshania cannabina (Retz.) Poir. A slender erect herb. Crocker C20 (as S.

—-aculeatus).

Siainsona burkittti F. Muell, ex Benth. From the desert margin only, «ut

sprawling perennial. Forde 1308.

Sthainsona flavicarinata Black. Sprawling herb in deep sand, Chippendale

1619, 1630; Lothian 1511, 1568, 1867, 1892.

*Swainsona microphylla ssp. affinis A. Lee, A small branching herb on the

slopes on deep sand, Crocker C6, C7; Symon 4341; Must 76.

Steainsona oligophylla F. Muell, ex Benth. A prostrate annual herb, ACB.

28018.

Sinainsona oroboides F. Muell. A small annual or herbaceous pereunial. Forde

1292.

°Swainsona parviflora Benth, Fl. Austral, 2:223, Collected from sandy clay

edge of salt lake, Boyland 230,

*Swainsona phacoides Beath. Prostrate spreading annual on interdune flats.

Crocker C2; Chippendale 1602, 2850, 6554; Lothian 1428, 1765, 1783,

1815, 1943, 1868; Boyland 271, ACB.27933,

®Swainsona rigida ( Benth.) Black, At first a delicate willowy herb, later more

intricate and rigid, along the dune crests. Crocker C17, Lothian 1621,

1659, 1672, 1725; Boyland 290; Symon 4388,

*Tephrosia aftin, purpurea (L..) Pers. A locally common perennial herb along

the upper Sie of the dunes. Crocker; Boyland 282; Symon 4371,

Tephrosia remotifora F. Muell, ex Benth. Must 51, 76B.

°Tephrosia sphacrospora F. Muell. A perennial herb on the interdune Hats.

Chippendale 4946; Lothian 1429, 1799, 1830, 1876.

Trtgonet suavissima Lindl, A small sprawling annual, Lothian 1519; ACB,

27923.

GERANIACEAE

Erodium anreum Carolin, A sprawling annual herb. Lothian 1417, 1639, 1656.

1856; ACB.27806.

Erodium cygnorum Nees. A vigorous sprawling annual. Forde 1320; Lothian

1817; ACB,28024.

*Frodium cygnorum ssp. glandulosunt Carolin. Chippendale 1644; Lothias

1501, 1587, 1628, 1772, 1849; Boyland 310; Must 60.

ZYCOVHYLLAUEAE ‘

*Nitraria schoheri L. A lu‘ge intricate sprawling shrub from sandy clay near

edge of salt lake. Boyland 232.

°Tyibulus hystrix R.Br. A prostrate annual on the upper slopes of the dunes,

Chippendale 1606; Lothian 1712; Boyland 280.

*Zygophyllum ammophilum F, Muell, An annual herb occurring on the flats

or floodouts. Chippendale 1593; Lothian 1416, 1457, 1484, 1633, 1654,

1753, 1821, 1845; Symon 4385; Boyland 244, Must 105, ACB.27871, 27962,

Zygophyllum compressum J. M, Black. An erect annual herb. Crocker C20.

* Zygophyllum howittii F. Muell. An annual herb from sandy flats, Grocker C2;

Forde 1303; Lothian 1453, 1504, 1613, 1690, 1709, 1759, 1788, 1608;

Boyland 243; Symon 4404; ACB,27752, 27926.

Zygophyllum iodocurpum F, Muell, A diffuse bushy anual, Lothian 1517.

CHECKIIST OF FLOWERING PLANTS OF THE SIMPSON DESERT 31

EUPHORBIACEAE

* Adriana hookeri (F. Muell.) Mueller-Arg, An erect dioecious perennial herb

from interdune flats. Crocker C5, C8; Symon 4369, 4350,

°Euphorbia drummondii Boiss. A quite prostrate herb on the flats and slopes.

Chippendale 3954; Lothian 15 numbers: Boyland 285, 293; Symon 4364;

Must 117, 335; ACB.27865, 27894, 28035.

*Euphorbia eremophila A. Cunn, ex Hook. An erect herb, probably annual.

Chippendale 1618; Lothian 1408, 1810, 1873, 1891; Boyland 321: Must

102.

*Euphorbia wheeleri Baill, A semi-erect sprawling herb often partially en-

gulfed in sand on the dune slopes where it appears to replace E. drum-

mondii. Crocker C11; Boyland 262; Symon 4376; Must 104.

*Clochidion rhytidospermum (Mueller Arg.) Eichler (as Phyllanthus rhytido-

spermum.), A small annual from interdune flats in sand. Winkworth 640;

Chippendale 1609, 4945: Boyland 265.

*Glochidion trachyspermum (F. Muell.) Eichler (as Phyllanthus trachy-

spermus). A small annual, Lothian 1476. 1497, 1596, 1707, 1738,

°Phyllanthus fuernrohrii F, Muell. A small shrub on flats and slopes. Chippen-

dale 4944, 6586; Boyland 306.

Ricinus communis L. An alien shrub or small tree often confined to drainage

lines in the arid areas. ACB.27964.

STACKHOUSIACEAE

Stackhousia viminea Sm. A slender erect herbaceous perennial. Forde 1309,

Lothian 1464.

SAPINDACEAR

Atalaya hemiglauca (F. Mucll.) F. Mucll. ex Benth. A small tree, not common

in the desert and locally found on a dune crest. Winkworth 633,

*Dodonaea attenuata A. Cunn, A shrub from sandy soil on interdune fats.

Chippendale 4950; Boyland 284; Must 326; ACB.27872,

*Dedonaea viscosa Jacq. A shrub or small tree. Crocker C12; Lothian 1723

‘TILIACEAE,

°*Triumfetta winneckeana F, Muell. Winnecke Re. (1884) 15. A perennial

erceping herb from the dune ridges. Cracker C6, C7, CB.

MALVACEAR

*Abutilon otocarpum F, Mucll. An erect herbaceous perennial or undershruls,

fairly widely collected from deep interdune sands. Winkworth 659; Forde

1281; Lothian 1598, 1780; Symon 4331; ACB.27859.

Hibiscus farragei ¥, Muell. An crect shrub, rare in the desert and only cal-

lected once on a flood out, Chippendale 1592.

“Hibiscus krichauffianus F. Muell, A small shrab from dune slopes, Crocker

Cl ete.; Chippendale 2845; Lothian 1750, 1779.

*Lavatera plebeia Sims, A perennial herb. Crocker C20; Boyland 301A,

Malva parviflora L, An alicn annual herb. ACB,27951.

*Sida corrugata Lindl. A variable small shrub on interdune fats. Crocker C20;

Chippendale 1613; Boyland 250; Symon 4373: ACB.27775.

°Sida cyciaphans White, A small undershrub. Lothian 1698, 1837; Boyland

is)

Sida platycalyx F. Muell. ex Benth. A small undershrub, not common on

inter-dune area. Crocker C1-2; Winkworth 639; ACB.27786.

2 D. E, SYMON

Sida trichopoda F. Muell. A small undershrub collected from a floodplain.

Chippendale 2823; ACB.28019.

*Sida virgata Hook. A small erect shrub, variable, from interdune flats and

ae Cracker C13; Chippendale 1625; Lothian 1470; Symon 4375;

CB,27984,

STERCULIACEAE

Gilesia biniflora F. Muell, A small prostrate perennial apparently rare in the

desert. Lothian 18332.

Melhania oblongifolia F. Muell, (M. incana), A small shrub, not common, in

deep sands. Crocker C2; Forde 1300, 1310; Chippendale 1629.

FRANKENIAGEAE

*Frankenia gracilis Summerh. A small undershruh locally common on stony

hillslope on desert margins. Chippendale 1589, 4927; Boyland 235; ACB.

27936, 27978,

TIALORAGACEAE

* Halorayis gossei F, Muell, An erect annnal on interdune deep sands. Crocker

C9-10; Lothian 1706, 1719; Symon 4372, 4387; Must 317.

*Haloragis heterophylla Brongn. A small perennial colonial herb. Crocker C3,

Boyland 304.

Myriophyllum verrucosum Lindl, An aquatic plant from the Hale River

channel. Crocker.

ApiAcEAE: ( UMPFLLIFERAE )

Daucus glochidiatus (Labill.) Fisch, Mey, and Ave-Lall. A small erect annual,

not common. Lothian 1576, 1838; ACB.28006.

*Trachymene gluucifolia (F, Muell.) Benth, An erect annual, variable in size,

common on flats and slopes in deep sand. Crocker (as Didiseus) C2;

Winkworth 657; Chippendale 6585; Lothian nine numbers; Boyland 264;

Symon 4337; ACB.27759, 27779, 27877.

CONVOLVULACEAE

>Convolvulus erubescens Sims. A prostrate herb, annual or perennial. Crocker

C3; Chippendale 4954; Lothian 1510, 1564, 1651, 1855; Must 115, ACB,

27781.

*Fvoloulus alsinoides L.. A small erect perennial subshrub apparently rare,

Forde 1282; Lothian 1448, 1760; ACB.27778.

*Tpomoea heterophylla R.Br. A prostrate herbaceous perennial, Lothian 1449,

1802,

*Ipomoea muelleri Benth, A sprawling vine. Crocker C3, C15.

VIOLACEAE

Hybanthus enneaspermus (L.) F. Muell. A sitall undershrub desenbed as

infrequent on stony hillside. Chippendale 1634.

Try MELAEACEAE

®Pimelea trichostachya Lindl. A small erect annual. Lothian 1420, 1500, 1705.

MYRrAGEAR

Eucalyptus—None of the following Eucalypts (small or large trees) are common

in the sand dune desert and most are confined to flood plains and river remmants

as they peter out in the desert.

Eucalyptus dichromophloia F. Muell. Chippendale 1605.

* Eucalyptus microtheca F. Mucll. Crocker (As E. coolahbah) C6, CT, C12, C13,

C16; Forde 1319; Boyland 298.

CHECKLIST OF FLOWERING PLANTS GF THE SIMPSON DESERT 33

Eucalyptus papuana F, Muell. Forde 1290,

*Eucalyptus terminalis F. Muell. Crocker (as E. pyrophora) C3, C17, C18;

Forde 1296; Must 93.

Melaleuca glomerata F. Muell, A small shrubby tree which like the Eucalypts

above is largely confined to creeklines, rare in the desert. Chippendale

1637.

*Thryptomene muaisonneuvit F. Muell. A small intricate shrub apparently rare.

Crocker; Must 84.

BoractwaAckAr

Heliotropium asperrimum R.Br. A colonial herbaceous perennial, ACB.27985,

° Heliotropium pleiopterim F. Mucell, An erect annual or short-lived perennial.

Must 118, 327, ;

Omphalolappula concave (F, Muell.) Brand. A small erect annual. Lothian

1516,

Plagiobothrys plurisepalus (F, Mucll,) Johnston. A small prostrate annual

herb. ACB.27904,

*Trichodesma zeylanicum (Burmf,) R.Br. A stiff erect annual or short-lived

perennial from a few centimetres to a metre high, common on deep sand

on flats or slopes. Chippendale 1595, 4947, 6599; Lothian 1435, 1494, 1683,

1732, 1793, 1880; Symon 4374; Boyland 277; Must 83, ACB.27868,

ChLOANTHACEAE

A small family of shrubs. Examination of the herbarium specimens at AD and

ADW suggests considerable confusion in their identification and when they

are revised ar more rigorously checked the following names may be changed.

Dicrastylis costelloi F. M, Bailey. A subshrub to 45 cm. rare in deep red sand

between ridges. Chippendale 3955.

*Diorastylis doranit F. Muell. including var. eriuntha, Colonial small shrub

occasional on interdune flats. Crocker C16-17; Lothian 1600, 1700, 1722:

Symon 4342, 4388; ACB.27853,

Newcastelia cephalantha F, Muell,. A rounded small shrub. Croeker C17.

Newcastelia spodiotricha F. Muell. A shrub or herbaccous perennial. ACB.

27552.

LAmiacear ( LABIATAE)

Teucrium racemosum R.Br, Anerect perennial herbaceous herb. Crocker C20;

Forde 1330; Chippendale 2836; Boyland 307; ACB.27960.

SOLANACEAE

Datura leichhardtit ¥. Mucll. ex Benth. An annual, infrequent in Houdout.

Chippendale 1632.

Nicotiana ingulba |. M. Black, An erect annual herb. Must 823.

Nicotiana velutina Wheeler. An ercct annual herb locally common, Crocker

(20, Chippendale 1615, 2832; Lothian 1499, 1641, 1771; Boyland 276;

ACB,27910, 27958.

*Solanum chenopodinum ¥. Muell, An erect, perennial, colonial imdershrub,

in interdunce areas often under shade or shelter. Crocker C19; Forde 1289:

Chippendale 1620.

*Solanum coactiliferum |. M. Black. A small colonial undershrub. Crocker C14,

*Solanum ellipticum R.Br. A sprawling colonial subshrob from interdune

sands, Crocker C3; Chippendale 4956; Must 79,

°Solanum esuriale Lind). A small herbaceous colonial perennial. Crocker C16:

Must 90; ACB.27948.

34 Db. BE. SYMON

Solanum guadriloculatum F. Muell. A small shrub collected from flood out.

Chippendale 1591; ACB.27876.

Solanum sturtianum F. Muell. An crect, colonial, perennial, often associated

with creeklines in arid areas. Chippendale 3947.

ScROPHULARIACEAE

Limosella australis R.Br. A very small sub-aquatic herb, ACB.28015A.

* Morgania glabra R.Br. An crect perennial herb usually near water or creek-

lines. Crocker C5; Chippendale 4949; ACB,27825, 27889, 27940.

Peplidium muelleri Benth. A sprawling herb, Lothian 1536; ACB.27903,

27905, 28003, 28005.

AGANTTIACEAE

Rostellularia pogonanthera F, Muell. (Justicia procumbens non L. Robertson

in Black 1957.) A small spreading erect perennial, along small water-

course. Winkworth 667; Forde 1324; Chippendale 1645.

Ruellia corynotheca F, Muell. ex Benth. Fl.Austral, 4:546. A perennial herb

or subshrub, not common, Forde 1325; Chippendale 1646,

MyYororACEsrE

Eremophila a genus of shrubs well developed in the arid areas of Australia.

They range in size from smallish intricate shrubs flowering when only 20 cm,

high to small trees,

Eremophila duttonii F, Muell. A small shrub common but scattered between

sand ridges. Chippendale 6394; ACB,.27807.

Eremophila freelingii ¥, Muell. A shrub to 2.m., common on a hill. Chippen-

dale 1608; Lothian 1889.

“Rremophila latrobei F. Muell. A grey shrub to 2 m, on rocky or hard soil.

Crocker C2, C5, C18; Chippendale 1636; Lothian 1643; Must 334.

* Eremophila longifolia (R.Br.) ¥. Muell, An crect colonial shrub or small tree,

Crocker C3, CT, C8; Lothian 1466, 1640, 1714, 1884; Boyland 297; Symon

4398: Must 92; ACB.28017.

°Evemophila macdonnellii F. Muell. A small shrub with grey foliage and fine

purple flowers, common in deep sands. Crocker; Chippendale 1627, 4940,

6604; Lothian 1637, 1742; Boyland 287; Symon 4351, 4363; ACB.27849.

Evemophila maculata (Ker-Gaw]) Muell. A shrub to 1 m., locally common in

loamy soil. Chippendale 4942; ACB.27798, 28029.

Eremophila obovata L. Smith Proe.Roy,Soc.Q, 1956: 75, 33. A subshruls in

deep red sand. Chippendale 1617, 2542; Must 91.

*Eremophila strehlowii E. Pritzel. A small shrub, Crocker C12, C13.

*Eremophila strongylophylla F. Muell. Apparently rare. Crocker C2, C5.

*Eremophila willsii F. Muell. An erect s ‘ub. Crocker C6, C7; Lothian 1616,

1739; Must 95.

PLANTAGINAGEAE

°Plantago varia R.Br. A small annnal herb. Chippendale 2821; Lothian 10

numbers; Boyland 269; ACB.27842, 27901, 27921.

RUBIACEAE

*Oldenlandia pterospora (F. Muell.) F, Mucll. A small, erect, twiggy herb or

short-lived perennial, locally common on deep sand. Symon 4344,

*Pomax umbellata (Sol. et Gaertn.) Miq. A small undershrub. Lothian 1678,

Synaptantha tillaeacea (F, Muell.) Hook. f. A small slender annual. Lothian

1563, 1852; ACB.27942.

CHECKLIST OF FLOWERING PLANTS OF THE SIMPSON DESERT 35

CucurBITACEAE

Citrullus colocynthis (L..) Schrad, An alien perennial with a massive ‘oot

system and herbaceous stems sprawling widely. Chippendale 4929,

Melothria maderaspatana (L.) Cogn, A scrambling vine, probably annual.

Crocker C3; Must 87; ACB,27854,

CAMPANULACEAE

“Lobelia heterophylla Labill. Noy.Holl,Pl, 1.52.t.74. Locally common on

interdune flats, the flowers are an attractive sky blue and the plants

almost leafless at flowering. Chippendale 3953; Symon 4336,

Wahlonberete gracilenta Lothian. An erect slender armual. Lothian 1538.

1539,

Wahlenbergia sieberi ADC. A graceful herbaceous perennial. ACB.27946,

BRUNONIAGEAE

*Brunonia australis Sm, An attractive annual or short-lived perennial herh,

locally common on the flats. Crocker C5; Symon 4343,

Goopenrackar

°Calogyne berardiana (Gaudich.) F. Muell, An annual herb from hard stony

flats. Crocker C2, C5; Lothian 1430, 1567, 1861, 1886; Must 63:

enon argentea |. M. Black. A weak sprawling herh. Lothian 1535, 1534,

*Goodenia cycloptera R.Br. A sprawling annual or short-lived perennial herb.

Locally very common on Hats and upper slopes, Crocker C6; Lothian 8

numbers; Symon 4353; Must 109.

Goadenia glabra R.Br. An herbaceous perennial Must 61,

Goodenia heterochila F, Muell, A small sprawling perennial herb from the

upper slope or dune crest, Winkworth 629; Forde 1285.

Goodenia lunata |. M. Black. A sprawling, colonial, herbaceous perennial.

ACB,27789, 28028.

*Goodenia mitchellii Benth. A perennial herb collected from interdune flats.

Chippendale 1601; Boyland 274; Must 328; ACB.27867,

*Goodenia subintegra F. Muell. ex Tate. A small perennial herb from sandy

clay interdune flats. Boyland 305.

“Lechenaultia divaricata F. Muell. A small shrub forming rigid, intricate,

rounded bushes on deep sands in interdune slopes. Crocker; Lothian

1603; Boyland 315; Symon 4381, 4349: ACB.27873.

“Scaveola collaris F. Muell. An undershrub from sandy clay at edge of a salt

lake, Crocker C20; Boyland 231.

*Scacuola depauperata R.Br. Another rigid intricate small perennial from deep

sands on the long slope of the dunes, Crocker C5, C8, C18: Lothian 1674,

1685; Symon 4380, 4352; Must 68,

"“Scaevola aemula R.Br. A small spreading annual or perennial from depres-

sions, Winkwerth 670; Must 119.

*Scaevola ovalifelia R.Br. An erect undershmub, Crocker C3, C20; Chippendale

4935; Lothian 1481, 1781, 1875; Boyland 272.

*Velleia connata F, Muell. An erect annual, scattered plants from deep sand.

Symon 4335,

ASTERACEAE: (CoMposirat )

“Angianthus pusillus (Benth.) Benth, A small ephemeral herb. Lothian 1415,

1474, 1597, 1692, 1746, 1893; ACB.27937

Db. k. SYMON

*Brachyscome iberidifolia Bonth. An annual herb. Lothian 1434, 1754, 1795,

22.

*Calotis erinacea Stectz. A tough, herbaceous perennial from the upper slopes

of the dunes, Crocker C7; Lothian 1620, 1668, 1741; Symon 4340; Must

71; ACB.27843A, 28036.

°Calotis hispidula (F. Muell.) F. Muell, A small ephemeral on the interdune

flats, Lothian 1547, 1854; Symon 4402; ACB.27782, 27890, 27966.

*Calotis multicaulis (Turez.) Druce. An annual herb on clayey sandy soils on

preean flats. Lothian 1530, 1560, 1897; Boyland 296, ACB.27832,

Calocephalus knappii (F, Muell.) Ewart & White. An erect annual on swale

fats. Must 74, 318,

Cdlocephulus plapyoeptals (F. Muell.) (Benth). A small annual. Chippen-

ale Doi,

Centipeda cunninghamii (DC) A.Br. et Aschers. A small annual or perennial

herb. ACB,.27953,

Centipeda thespidivides F. Muell. A small prostrate herb often on flooded

sites, Lothian 154] 1577; ACB.27841, 27994.

*Craspedia chrysantha (Schlechted ) Benth, A small annual, occasional patches

on the dats, PWinkworth 660; Symon 4361.

*Gnephosis eriovarpa (F. Mucll,) Benth, A small annual. Chippendale 2539,

6592; Lothian 1426, 1550, 1841; Boyland 272A; ACB.27755, 27536.

Gnephosis foliata (Sond,) Kichler, A small annual herb, Chippendale 2849.

3952, 6593; Lothian 1353, 1870; ACB.27797, 28023.

*Gnephosis skirrophora (Sond. et F. Muell.) Benth, A small annual herb.

Boyland 236A,

*Helichrysum ambiguum var. paucisetum J, M. Black. A perennial herb.

Crocker C13; Lothian 1450, 1602, 1675, 1740,

Helichrysum cassinianum Gaudich, An erect annual. Winkworth 666; Must

64; ACK.27851.

“Helichrysum davenportl

var.) CS; Must 62,

Helichrysum lindleyt Eichler. An erect annual. ACB.28027.

Helichrysum semifertile F, Muell. A small annual on clayey sandy soil on

interdune flats. Boyland 294; ACB.28025.

°Helipterum floribundum. DC. A small annual at times yery abundant on inter-

dune flats. Crocker C2; Winkworth 643, Chippendale 1611, 6575; Lothian

1425, 1520, 1585, 1625, 1770, 1846, 1869; Boyland 268; ACB.27900, 25026,

Helipterum charsleyae F. Muell, An crect annual, Crocker C4-C5; Winkworth

662; Must 70; ACB.27988.

Helipterum microglossum (F. Muell. ex Benth, ) Maiden and Beteche. A smull

sprawling annual, Lothian 1836, 1898.

*Helipterum moschatim (A. Cunn. ex DC.) Benth. An erect inimual. Crocker

C4, C8; Lothian 1437, 1480, 1584, 1609, 1635, 1679, 1737, 1763, 1766, 1794,

1881; Boyland 261; Must 316; ACB.27755, 27934.

Helipterum pterochaetum (T°. Muell.) Benth, A perennial herb. Crocker C4;

Chippendale 1648, 6595; Must 111.

Helipterum stipitatum (F. Muell.) F. Muell. ex Benth. Crocker C4-C3; Wink-:

worth 665; Must 89,

Helipterum strictum (Lindl.) Benth, A small aunual, Chippendale 1638;

Lothian 1529, 1545, 1586,

"Helipterum tietkensii F. Muell, An erect annual, scattered plants on the flats.

Chippendale 2840; Symon 4334.

iF, Muell. An erect annual, Crocker (as H. rescum

CHECKLIST OF FLOWERING PLANTS OF THE SIMPSON DESERT 37

Txiolaena leptolepis (DC) Benth. A small annual. Chippendale 1538: I.othian

1529, 1545, 1586.

Ixiolaena tomentosa Sond. & F. Muell. ex Sond, A perennial herb. ACB.27907.

Millotia greevesii F, Muell. A small annual. Boyland 267,

Minuria_denticulata (DC.) Benth. A small perennial. Chippendale 2835;

ACB.27887, 27927, 27949, 27987.

Minuria leptophylla DC. A small undershrub. Chippendale 2844; Must 78,

319

*Myriocephalus stuartii (F. Muell, and Sond. ex Sond.) Benth. An annual,

very common and widely spread in almost all sites except the mobile

dune crests, repeatedly collected. Winkworth 651; Chi pendale 1598,

2838, 6576; Lothian 1495, 1579, 1611, 1669, 1728, 1756, 1768, 1784, 1879.

Boyland 273; Symon 4338; Must 72; ACB.27761, 27844,

*Podocoma nana Ewart & White. A small prostrate annual. Lothian 1623,

*Podolepis canescens A. Cunn. ex DG. An erect annual, occasional plants on

the flats. Lothian 1423, 1703, 1894; Symon 4333.

Podolepis capillaris (Steetz) Diels. A slender erect annual. ACB.27932, 27983.

Pterigeron dentatifolius F. Mucll. A small annual. Lothian 1515, 1590,

Pretigeror liatroides (Turcz.) Benth. An erect rigid perennial herb, ACB.

28021.

Pterocaulon sphacelatum (Labill.) Benth. & Hook. A stiff erect undershrub.

Chippendale 1631, 4934,

Rutidosis helichrysoides DC. An erect perennial, Chippendale 4939; Lothian

1552; Must 340; ACB.27986,

“Senecio gregorii F. Muell, An erect annual, common on flats and slopes,

widely collected. Crocker C3, C4; Winkworth 644; Chippendale 1597,

2837; Boyland 275; Must 66; ACB.27760,

*Senecio lautus Sol. An annual or short-lived percunial herb, Crocker C20;

Symon 4339; Lothian 1436, 1482, 1566, 1608, 1632, 1689, 1758, 1769, 1785,

1878.

°Waitzia citrina ( Benth.) Steetz. in Lehm. Pl. Preiss 1, 454. An erect annual

locally plentiful on the flats. Symon 4403.

D. E. SYMON

APPENDIX

PLANTS FROM THE Upper SLOPES OR DUNE CRESTS

POACEAE

Plagiosetum refractum

Eriachne aristidea

Zygochloa paradoxa

CHrENOPODIACEAE

Rhagodia spinescens yar. deltophylla

Salsola kali

AMARANTACEAF

Ptilotus latifolius

Ptilotus polystachys

AIZOACEAE

Trianthema pilosa

PORTULACACEASE

Calandrinia spp.

Portulacca intraterranea

BRASSICACEAE

Blennodia pterosperma

MIMOSACEAE

Acacia ligulata

Acacia dictyophleba

CAESALPINIACEAE

Cassia pleurocarpa

FABACEAE

Crotalaria cunninghamii

Crotalaria dissitiflora

Psoralea eriantha

Swainsona rigida

Tephrosia purpurea

ZYGOPHYLLACEAE

Tribulus hystrix

EUPHORBIACEAE

Euphorbia wheeleri

BoraGINACEAE

Trichodesma zeylanicum

GoopENIACEAE

Goodenia cycloptera

ASTERACEAE

Calotis erinacea

Myriocephalus stuartii

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Back, J. M. (1943-1957). Flora of South Australia, 4 vols. Government Printer, Adelaide.

Crocker, R. L, (1946). Soils and vegetation of the Simpson Desert and its borders. Sci. Report

No. 8. Trans. Soc. §. Aust. 70: 295-258.

Earpey, C. M. (1946). Catalogue of Plants, Sci. Report No. 7. Simpson Desert Expedition.

Trans. Soe, $. Aust. 70; 145-174.

“ee Hi J. (1965). Supplement to Black’s Vlora of South Australia, Government Printer,

Adelaide.

MANIA, ea T. (1938). The Simpson Desert and its borders, Proc, Roy. Soc, N.S.W. 71:

503-535,

Mantcan, C. T. (1945). The Simpson Desert Expedition 1939. Suientific Report, Introduction

and Narrative, Physiography and Meteorology. Trans. KR. Soc. S. Aust. 69; 118-139.

Manican, C. T. (1946). Crossing the Dead Heart, Georgian House, Melbourne.

STRATIGRAPHY AND LANDSCAPE RELATIONS OF SOIL MATERIALS

NEAR ADELAIDE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY J. B. FIRMAN

Summary

In the paper, the superposition, emplacement and organization of soil materials through time is the

central theme. Tectonic and geological events are outlined as a necessary pre-requisite to the

stratigraphic study of materials in soil profiles. Soils in the Adelaide area are defined and materials

in soil profiles are identified. Stratigraphic analysis is employed to bring out time of origin of

various layers. Finally , soil-landscape relations are set down and the history of soil development is

briefly described.

STRATIGRAPHY AND LANDSCAPE RELATIONS OF SOIL MATERIALS

NEAR ADELAIDE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA!

by J. B. Firman

[Read 8 May 1969]

SUMMARY

In this paper, thy superposition, emplacement and organisation of soil

materials through time is the central theme, Tectonie and geological events art

outlined as a necessary pre-roquisite to the stratigraphio study of materials ir

soil profiles, Soils in the Adelaide area are defined and materials in soil profiles

are identified. Stratigraphic analysis is employed ta bring out the time of origin

of various layers. Finally, soil-landsexpe relations are set dewn and the history of

soil development is briey described.

INTRODUCTION

Soil investigations have been carried out by the South Australian Geological

Survey over the past fifteen years. This work had its origins in a study of the soils

and geology of Adelaide (Aitchison, Sprigg and Cochrane, 1954) which was

designed to assist engineers and architects concerned with foundations of small

buildings. The investigations were later extended to provide basic information for

most kinds of soft ground engineering. In 1964, a statewide straiigraphic study

of superficial deposits was undertaken by the writer (Firman, 1967 pp. 165-150.

1968 pp. 569-576, and 1969 pp. 204-233). Materials on the western side of the

area dealt with herein were formally described in Firman, 1963 and 1966, and the

various stratigraphic units were laler mupped throughout the Adclaide -4-mile

sheet (Thomson, 1969), The references mentioned provide background for this

paper.

: In 1965, stratigraphic investigations were made near Adelaide to provide

(nlormation on soil genesis, particularly of the deeper substrates, during mapping

of the Gilles Plains-Modbury-Tea Tree Gully area by Soil Consultant J. K. Taylor

and Engineering Geologist R. D, Steel (Stécl and Taylor, 1968). The study was

extended outside the detail map area so as to transect the trend of rocks, landforms

and soils on the margin of the Great Australian Rift, and to link continental

Hepusits and marine deposits on the western side of the transect area (Plate 1

and Fig. 1),

The stratigraphic approach to the study of soils begins with the description

and delineation of materials in the field, leads to definition of some of the factors

controlling soil formation through time, and concludes with the history of soil

development. In this paper, some of the conclusions about soil and soil develop-

ment are unconventional, mainly because the stratigraphic approach restricts

interpretation of the various soil features to those compatible with stratigraphic

rinciples.

r The study begins with an examination of tectonics and eological events.

This is not only background material, but is a necessary part of the study; without

it, later statements on soil evolution in the section ‘on soil-landscape relations

camnat be fully understood. The reader will see in the sections on soils in the

Adelaide area that materials in soil profiles are examined from both a “geological”

1 Published with the approval of the Director, $.A. Department of Mines,

Trans, Roy. Soc, 8. Aust. (1969), Vol, 93.

40 J, B. TIRMAN

UBCOlN LM AND SES

‘5

Nat

we ADELAIDE |

Editheuegh 5 ?

any

SCALE IN MILES ail

g io 20 30 40 aie ® | MILES O 100 200 MILES

1b, + —_1—j ,

9 40 BO Q 100 200 300

KILOMETRES KILOMETRES

SA Gent wl Miner

Prate 1

Morphological map of $,A. showing Jocalities and detailed soil transect near Adeluide,

and “pedological” point of view. The result is that the soil is examined layer by

layer (the individual layers heing traced through different soils und landscapes),

and, also, as complete assemblages of layers naturally occurring in associated

landscapes, It is important to remember that the matcrials so described have all

been previously recorded using conventional soil terminology in many humdreds

of soil profiles throughout the metropolitan area.

Some of the materials described in shallow soil profiles as A and B horizons,

also ocour as substrates and buried deep in sedimentary sequences, In order to

STRATIGRAPHY AND LANDSCAPE RELATIONS NEAR ADELAIDE 4

trace out the layers and establish their stratigraphic position, it has bcen necessary

to sample to much greater depths than is normal during soil survey,

Although conventional soil terminology has been employed herein, the reader

will appreciate that the simple and conventional view of soil and soil formution

is not taken as a model. Rather, it is hoped that a more gencrally useful and widely

acceptable definition of the soil will cyentually result from this kind of study,

“4

SOUTH LINE maior

fae \o

rhe 0

Mi ADELAIDE oa ®

an ena ae =

—Sreleon! ane wedealye pols Red brown corth

; Alluyeol sails [River Torrens),

Fadeolic and salad soils ae solonchak and hue ed clay <aily

= AEstuaninel, Soastel sonds Aeolian!

» Black earth, @ Borer om stroigtopme sections = @.Prebles svaminod

__— — _ Tetra rosy) fendgine.

SCALE

MILES | 5. MILES

Brown sivaly

Grenl 8)! greup: aller Welly) C.D, 11264), KILOMETRES

68-745

Fig. 1, Soil and landform map, Adelaide Area.

THE TECTONIC FRAMEWORK AND GEOLOGICAL EVENTS

Fault blocks occupy the eastern or Mt. Lofty Ranges portion of the area, and

the Great Australian Rift occupies the western portion below the Lower Gutwash

and Estuarine Plains. Near-vertical faults control the broader features of landform

and soil distribution. Although older surfaces provide evidence for continued

elevation of the ranges from Permian time onward, the formation of major

features in the modern landscape began with disruption of the mid-Tertiary land

surface by block-faultiug and tilting during the Kosciuskan Orogeny. Movements

continued into the Pleistocene and the area is at present within the Australian

region most subject to seismic disturbances (Bolt, B. A., 1957; Kerr-Grant, Colin,

1956; and Sutton, D, J. and White, R. E., 1968), Remnants of the dismembered

42 J. B. FIRMAN

pre-Tertiary surface came to lie at elevations separated by as much as 4,000 feet.

Sediments of the St. Vincent Basin—now within St. Vincent's Graben and a part

of the Great Australian Rift—and Myponga Basin—now within the Mt. Lofty

Ranges—were once contiguous, but are now separated vertically by no less than

1,000 feet. Local changes in elevation ranging trom a few feet to about 400 fect

can be demonstrated by tracing late Pliocene marine sediments across the Para

Fault. The Keswick Clay, one of the youngest layers in the sequence of Pleistocene

clays, is found on both sides of the Eden Fault: It occurs at an elevation of about

150 feet above sea-level near Adelaide on the Para Block, and about 600 feet

apoks sea-level on an up-lifted sub-horizontal surface cut across the tilted Eden

Block.

In St. Vincent’s Graben, beneath the Estuarine Plain (Fig. 1), a 300 to 400

feet thick a i of clays and sandy clays with sand and gravel lenses, the

Hindmarsh Clay, records strong alluviation in the Lower Pleistocene,’ The alluvial

plain at this time extended far beyond the modern coast. The Hindmarsh Clay

also occurs on the Para Block, where it is overlain by the Keswick Clay, a some-

what younger unit occurring as a thin discontinuous fluyiatile deposit. Middle

Pleistocene faulting post-Hindmarsh Clay and pre-Glanville Formation displaced

the Hindmarsh Clay across the Para Fault (see Fig. 2, North Line), This faulting

may have occurred at the same time as the faulting which displaced the Keswick

Clay across the Eden Fault to the south,

Above the Hindmarsh Clay are remnants of various deposits, including

calereted loess and, on the seaward margin, shallow marine Glanville Formation.

These deposits record fuctuations in sea-level, aeolian deposition, soil formation,

faulting, and extensive subaerial erosion during the Middle Pleistocene. C'

dating of shell from the Glanville Formation suggests that the unit has an age in

excess of 45,000 years B.P. (See Fig. 2, North Line, Bore T2 at the west end.)

Later faulting and renewed alluviation during the Upper Pleistocene is

recorded by Pooraka Formation. At the time, the alluvial plain extended out into

Gulf St. Vincent following a withdrawal of the sea at the end of the Middle

Pleistocene, N. B. Tindale, when discussing the advent of man in Australia,

referred to St, Vincent Gulf as“... a great alluvial plain, extending down towards

Kangaroo Island.” (Symposium on Geochronology and Land Surfaces in Relation

to Soils in Australia 1961—unpublished.) Layers of vermiform carbonate nodules

at the top of this formation and younger carbonate patches and nodules formed

during aeolian re-working of Pooraka Formation, are assigned to the Loveday

Soil. Thin deposits of red clay without carbonates mark the top of the unit.

Recent marine gulf, estuarine, littoral and aeolian sediments overlie the sea-

ward margin of the Pooraka Formation and record the rise of the Flandrian Sea,

Two of the most prominent units are Lipson Formation and St. Kilda Formation.

C' age determinations carried out by Scripps Institution of Oceanography in

1967-68 on shell from St. Kilda Formation north of the transect area near Sandy

Point, range from 3,800 + 500 years B.P. for shell from the base of the unit to

1,120 + 75 years B,P. for shell from stranded beach ridges at the top of the unit.

Aeolian deposition during the Recent is marked by the reddish brown Fulham

Sand of the older dunes on the Estuarine Plain south of Port Adelaide, and the

Semaphore Sand of the dunes fringing the modem coast.

SOILS IN THE ADELAIDE AREA

This part of the paper is based upon the stratigraphic sections shown on

Figures 1 and 2, The sections extend east-west through the transect area for a

1 Detailed subdivisions of Pleistocene time are shown on the Correlation Chart (Fig. 3).

STRATIGRAPHY AND LANDSCAPE RELATIONS NEAR ADELAIDE 43

distance of about 15 miles. The profiles are about 12 feet deep. On the sections,

datum is ground surface and correlation is made between adjoining bores. The

observation points are so closely spaced that correlation lines approximate the

real distribution of units between bores. Boxes in the eastern part of the transect

area are shown on the map accompanying a report by Steel and Taylor (1968).

Copies of bore logs are available on request at the S.A. Department of Mines.

The soils have been described in some detail by various workers whose

papers have been summarized by Wells (1966). A version of Wells’ map with

modifications, including details derived from the map by Steel and Taylor, is

shown on Fig. 1. The original work of Aitchison, Sprigg and Cochrane (1954) is

particularly relevant elsewhere in the transect area. Their usage of great soil

group nomenclature and of symbols for the groups has been followed in this

paper. The symbols are used to designate important soil types on the stratigraphic

sections (Fig. 2) and on the Correlation Chart (Fig. 3). Further description and

classification of the soils is given in Stephens (1962) and Northcote (1960).

Description of Soil Groups

The great soil groups commonly occurring are set out below, together with

representative profiles where appropriate:

Skeletal Soils (SK): Shallow soils which contain abundant coarse rock frag-

ments derived from the underlying Tertiary sandstone or the sandstone, shale,

dolomite and siltstone of the Proterozoic Burra Group. The soils are without

profile form.

Podzolic Soils: Soils with sandy upper horizons, over yellow clay B horizons

(YP), or red clay B horizons (RP), or deep sandy subsoil (P), or ferricrete pan

with older mottled zones.

PROFILE 1

Podzolic Soil. $1 on Fig. 2 (Bore No. 754728052). Vista Estate J/6. Section 5626, Hd. Yatala

Depth

Age Unit —_| Horizon | in feet Description

RECENT Al 0-5" Yellowish brown (10YR5/4) sand. Lower

boundary sharply defined by colour change

and presence of gravel lower.

A2 57 1’ 2" Reddish yellow (7-5YR7/6) fine sand with

scattered ferruginous gravel.

PLEISTO- Altered Bs V’ 2”—3’8” Yellowish brown (10YR5/6) mottled with

CENE Tertiary | red (10R4/6) sandy clay, changing to

Sand clayey sand at about 2 feet.

TERTIARY Cc 3’ 8” 4’ 2” White fine—medium grained quartz sand

with red (10R4/6) mottles.

Remarks: Thin clay layer from 1’ 2” to 3’ 8”.

Hard sand prevented deeper penetration.

Solodic Soils (S): Deep sandy surface layers over mottled clay subsoil. A

hard-setting sandy clay occurs at the top of the subsoil in some places.

44 J. B. FIRMAN

PROFILE 2

Solodic Svil. Between Sand Quarry section and NL2 on the North Line of Vig. 2

Depth

Age Unit Horizon im feet. Description

RECENT Thin slope Al g—10" Light brown (LOYR7/3) silty fine sand

deposits with some grey organic material

showing between 2 in. and 6 in.

hleaching |———} e

at the basé A2 1y’—1'°7" Pale brown (2°35 Y8/2) silty; fine sand

beeoming paler towards the base,

PLEISTOCENE | Keswick B 17” —3' 2" Light yellow brown (10YR6/4) fine

clay sandy clay with fine dark red (10R3/6)

equivalent mottles. Prismatic structure.

Remarks: The B hovizon in this soil is altered Tertiary sand showing structure and mottling.

Black Earths (BE): Fine textured grey and black soils with vaiiable profile

characteristics. Strong cracking and gilgai are common. Material derived from the

black earth and transported downslope produces storeyed soils with black earth

affinitics.

PROFILE 3

Black earth. N10 on Fig. 2 (728156501) Modbury—Nth. Adelaide. Pl. No, 11, Section 1585,

Hd. Yatala

Depth

Age Unit Horizon in feet Deseription

PLEISTO- Thin A o- 10” Very dark grey and olive (SY4/3)

CENE clay layer yaguely moitled clay. Strong effer-

vescenct, Lower boundary ‘well

defined by colour change and

patches of lime below.

|Keswiek) Older B 19-18" Light yellowish brown (10Y 6/4)

Clay | carbonate slightly siltyr clay with white

patches of carthy lime (2-5¥8/0),

Strong effervesvence, lower houn-

dary gradational.

1s"-6' 1" Light yellowish brown (10YR6/4)

somewhat. silty ¢lay. Strong effer-

VeESCETIeG.

Terra Rossa and Rendzina (TR and RZ); Reddish brown or dark brown top-

soils overlie very calcareous zones in weathered calcareous bedrock or loess with

or without a calerete pan.

Brown Soil. Also called Mallee Soil or Brown Solonized Soil (8S): Soils with

shallow loamy or clayey surface horizons over very calcareous zones, normally

mixtures of carbonate silt and sand. Calerete pan, rubbly or nodular carbonate is

common. Mottled clay or rock gccurs at the base of the profile in some places.

STRATIGRAPHY AND LANDSCAPE RELATIONS NEAR ADELAIDE

PROFILE 4

Terra Rossa. Between N7 and Lincoln Court section on Fig. 2

Transitional botween brown soil and red-brown earth

Depth

Age Unit | Horizon in. feef Description

RECENT Al 0— 3° Light yellowish brown (5YR4/4) silty fine

grained sand.

PLEISTOCENE A2 3” —1' 38" Dark brown ('YR8/4) fine sund becoming

reddish brown and somewhat clayey lower.

1’ 3*—1' 9” Rubbly off-white (10¥R8/3) calcrete-

1'9"—3' 6" Weukly cemented. off-white (10¥R8/3)

calcareous earth.

Remarks; The reddish brown part of the A2 horizon can be

it is separately identified as the ‘thin clay layer”

earth Type RB4,

The calerete is w younger calerete layer in Bakara Soil (Birman, 1967).

Brawn soil: Near 813 on Fig. 2 (Bore No, 752728040) Clearview-Folland Patk Reserve

340, Hd. Yatala

PROFILE 5

traced into adjoining profiles whero

and forms a B horizon in the red brown

J/4, Seetion

Age

Unit

| Horizon

Depth

in feet

Deseuription

0-3°

Fill

RECENT

3°

1’ 3°

Yellowish brown (10YR6/4) silty fine

sand. Strong efferyeseence. Lower

boundary gradational with woak

eontrast,

PLEISTOCENH

Pooraka

Formation

Loveday Suil

carhonate

extends down

to 8 ft. 6 in.

3*_3* 9°

Very pale brown (10YRS8/4) silty fine

sand with soft irregular carbonate

nodules and some nodules of Ripon

Calerete with later concretionary

layers. Strong effervescence,

8” — 6 BY

Reddish yellow (5YR6/6) silty fine

sand with abundant small hard

lurips of carbonate. Strong cffer-

vescenite,

Lower boundary gradational but fairly

well defined by moderate colour

CONnTTAaSt,

Hindmarsh

Clay

lime

impregnated

B—C | @&

6"- 9° 6"

Yellowish red (S¥RA/8) vlayey silty

fine sand with ¢lay content in-

creasmg downwards, Patches of

earthy lime (J0YRS8/4). Strong

effervescence.

Lower boundary fairly sharp with

strong texture contrast.

Hindnuwwzsh

Clay

9° 6" = 18° 6” Dark red (2-5YR3/6) clay with a

prismatic structure and angular

blocky sub-structure. Moderate

sheen on faces of utructural units.

A few pale grey and yellow patches

octur, No effervescence,

Remarks: Tnteryal 1 ft. 3 in, ta 3 fl, 8 in. is possibly re-worked Loveday Soil (Firman, 1967).

46 ; J. B. FIRMAN

Red Brown Earth (RB3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8): Soils with a loamy or sandy surface

horizon overlying clearly marked red-brown clay subsoil. A calcareous horizon

is present below the upper red-brown clay.

PROFILE 6 Fiz. §

Red brown earth. N3 on Fig. 2 (728009716), he Levels—North Adelaide PIL. No. 11.

Section Pt. 7, Hd. Yatala

. | —————— _ ___ —S S

Depth

Age Unit Horizon in feet. Description

RECENT Ke-worked Al O-1°3" Dark reddish brown (2-5¥YR3/4) fine

Kulham sand, Lower boundary gradational

Sand ' and poorly defined.

PLEISTOCENE Thin AZ 1 3°—1' 10" Reddish brown (5YR4/4) fine clayey

clay layer and silty sand. Lower boundary

gradational, but well defined hy

carbonate lower.

Pooraka Bl 1 10” —3° 3° Reddish brown clayey sandy silt

Formation (SYR4/4) with patches of reddish

yellow (7-5YR8/6) earthy lime.

Strong effervescence, Lower boun-

dary gradational, but well defined.

B2 3/3" 4/5" Dark ved (1013/4) silty and fine sandy

clay with a fine granular structure

(angular blocky). Weak effervesc-

ence. Lower boundary gradational,

but well defined.

C 4°5°—7'0° Red sandy and silty clay. Weak

effervescence.

ee Ce

Alluvial Soils (AL); Soils with variable depth, sequence and composition,

ranging from clayey silts to coarse gravel.

PROFILE 7

Alluviul soil. Upper Dry Crvek Section on Fig. 2

Depth

Age Unit. | Horizen| in feet Deseription

RECENT River o—1' 2” Pule brown fine grained quartz sand,

; alluyiarm

V 2" —2' 6" Light brown and yellow brown weakly

structured clayey quartz sand.

PLEISTOCENE Pooraka, B 2' 8° —3°6" >) Light reddish brown clayey and silty

Formation | fine grained quartz sand and sundy

clay with scattered hard irregular

GO 3° 6” —10' 0” yermiform carbonate nodules from

2 ft, 6 m. to 3 ft. 6 in.

Manganese coatings on peds ati

5 feet.

PROTEROZOIC Burra 10° 0* —10’ 6” Quartzite.

Group

ee See

Remarks: Loveday Soil carbonate from 2 ft. 6 in. to 3 ft. 6 in-

STRATIGRAPHY AND LANDSCAPE RELATIONS NEAR ADELAIDE AT

Solonchak (So): Saline estuarine or shallow marine sediments and associated

buried red earths.

PROFILE 8

Solonchak. N2 on Fig. 2 (593102002). Cavan—Nth. Adelaide Plains. No. 10. Section 1020, Hd-

Pr. Adelaide

Depth

Age Unit Horizon in feeb Description

RECENT St. Kilda. O—7 Light greyish brown (10YR3/2) silty

Formation clay with very poorly developed

vertioal sbructure. Lower boundary

gradational, but well defined.

7*- VV 4" Light greenish brown silty clay.

Weak effervescence. Lower bound-

ary gradational and not well

defined.

PLEISTOCENE Pooraka A 1’ 4" — 3° 0” ) Pale reddish brawn (7-5Y 6/6) silty

Formation B—C | 30" 5° 0" elay with irregular reddish brown

GC a0" 8’ 6" patches pF earthy lime betaeon 3

and 4 feet. Strong effervescence,

A few carbonate granules and

angulac quartz pebbles are scut-

tered throughout. Lower boundary

not well defined.

6° 6"—8°0" Light yellow clay without shell,

transitional to Glanville Formation

below 8 ft.

Glanville 8° 0°—10' LO” Light. yellow brown shelly clay.

Formation

Hindmarsh 10° 10*°--11' 10" Light brown, red mottled clay.

Clay

PP. EES

Remurks: Loveday Soil carbonate between 3 ft. and 5 ft.

Coastal Sands (DS1, DS2); Fossil fragment or quartz sand, mainly in dunes,

with minor accumulations of organic material in the surface horizons.

PROFILE 9

Coastal sand. Bore through dune near $17 and §17b, Fig. 2 (593113501)

North Adelaide Pl,, No. 10, Section 1135, Hd. Pt. Advlaide

Depth

Age Unit in feet Deseription

RECENT Semaphore Q— 2° 6" Yellowish brown fine-grained sand, Surface

Sand 2 im, stained greyish brown with organic

inatter.

2° 6"—6°0° Palo yellow fine-grained quartz sand. Weakly

eomented zone from 4 ft, 6 in. to 4 ft. 0 im.

St. Kilda 6° 0"—7°6" Dark yellow weakly cemented fine-grained

Formation quartz, sand.

7 6” -9' 6" Yellow fine-grained quartz sand.

Remarks: Adjoining swamps below level of dune contain light bluish grey sand of St. Kilda

Formation, with a thin yoneer of grey and yellow finely mottled soft clay.

45 J. BR. FLRMAN

Materials in. Soil Profiles

in this paper emphasis is on the complete soil profile rather than the “solum”,

or upper part of the soil. Unaltered parent materials forming part of the profiles

are of various kinds and include Proterozoic sediments; Tertiary sand, and various

zones in the laterite profile; the Hindmarsh Clay, Keswick Clay and loess and

associated deposits; and the thin clay layer, the sandy slope deposits on the valley

walls and the younger materials of the estuarine plan. The parent materials have

been extensively modified by liter soil-forming processes and, in their altered

condition. occur as soil horizons throughout the area. (See Fig. 2.) Arranged in

order from oldest to youngest, the various materials recorded in descriptions of

soil profiles (including unaltered parent material) are ancient weathered zones in

Proterozoic bedrock (not shown separately on the sections); ferricreted layers;

silicified layers, and older mottled yones in Tertiary sand; mottled Hindmarsh

Clay; Keswick Clay; structured Keswick Clay and structured clay zones in older

Tertiary sand and weathered Proterozoic siltstoncs marginal and stratigraphieally

equivalent to Keswick Clay; pink silt with relic rock structure; locss-quartz sand

and lness—older clay mixtures; older carbonates in pink silt and older units,

including Keswick Clay, Hindmarsh Clay, Terliary sand and Proterozoic bedrock;

calurete: Pooruka Formation, Loveday Soil carbonate in Pooraka Formation and

Tertiary sand; the upper thin clay layer; and A horizons «and other near-surlace

horizons in solonchaks-

Soil Horizons and. Nomenclature

During logging of soil profiles, A horizons were tiken to be surface horizons,

usually with an accumulation of organic material, where eluviation is important;

B horizons were taken to be transitional horizons, including clay layers, wherein

accumulation and ilhiviation may occur; C horizons were logged where material

little influenced by organisms and showing evidence of weathering occurred

helow A or B horizons; D horizons were taken to mean relatively unweathered

malerial, This is close to the early Russian usage, wherein the soil profile is

dominated by A and O horizons which reflect the proximity of ground surface,

and by C horizons showing little evidence of soil formation.

The A, B, G system derives from the examination of soil profiles, so that

diagnostic characters are matters of observation and the system is usable irrespec

tive of differing theories of soil genesis. Its application to soil horizons in the

transect area is now developed. The lowermost Jayers, represented on the

Correlation Chart (Fig. 3) by katamorphased basement rock and Tertiary sund,

are the C and D horizons of earlicr literature, and the R horizon of [.5.5.5, ( L967).

These horizons are generally described as weathering ancl oxic horizons. Above

the katamorphosed basement rock and Tertiary Sand are pan-like B horizons in-

eludiug silerete and ferricrete with mottled clayey B2 horizons. These are

normally described as “fossil” lateritic podzols and derivatives with the original

A horizon missing.

Weathered and diagenetically modified layers of various urigins extend on

the Correlation Chart from the Hindmarsh Clay up to the thin clay Javer. The

presence of clay layers and horizons of carbonate wccumulation is characteristic.

Provided that these layers are not obviously sedimentary, they are deseribed as

B horizons in conventional studies. Where some of the sedimentary layers are

recognised, the soil is described as storeyed and a more sophisticated number

terminology is used.1 The middle layers cun be subdivided into two: At the top

are salic horizons which are simply younger poorly differentiated matcrials of the

7 An early example af this usage is in Rube. R. V., und Daniels, BR. BL (1958). Later

comment is given in 1.5.8.8. (1967, p. 5).

STHATIGRAPHY AND LANDSCAPE KELATIONS NEAR ADELAIDE 44

coastal margin and inland depressions, or older materials saturated by saline

sulutions. Stratigraphically below are the herizons usually termed illuvial, the

B and BV horizons of LS.$,8. (1967) und calcrete pans. These lower layers can

he designated according to SCS (1960, pp. 35-65) from top to bottom xs follows:

Argillic horizons of the thin clay layer, argillic horizons of the Pooraka Formation

with manganese coating on the peds; calcice horizons of the Loveday Soil, Bukara

Soil, locss and carbonate silt-quartz sand mixtuces: urgillic and natric horizons of

the older solonized clay layers; and argillic horizons with manganese coatings

and gypsie horizons.

The uppermost layers indicated on the correlation diagratn are the A and O

horizons df. IS.$,$. (1967). The A horizons of degraded soils are included also,

and there is a general correspondence ta the epipedons and albex horizons of

SCS (1960). In the older literature these kiyers are described as eluvial horizons,

or horizons of organic material secumulation. The voungest sedimentary layers

i soil profiles are included here also.

Stratigraphic Analysis

Soil stratigraphy begins with the description of horizons according to

diflerences in colour, structure, texture, composition, consistence and such things

as the presence or absence of carbonates, The same criteria are used, as far as

posstble, for horizons within and below the zone of seasonal moisture variation,

so a8 to avoid an artificial contrast between near-surface horizons and those at

depth. Decisions about genesis or any particular horizon, the classificabon of

horizons into lithological and pedulogieal categories, and the recognition of

palgcosuls are not made during description of horizons, except in the case at rock

weathered mek compurisons, which are made by examination of similar materials

in different conditions, und as indicated by relic minerals and structu¢es in

weathered materials, Decisions about genesis are made after the layers have been

placed in their proper stratigraphic sequence.

‘The stratigraphic approach yields the relative age of horizons. This in-

formation is supplemented by identification of remains of Alora and fauna in

interralated horizons, and by absolute age determinations on shell, peat and

uther materials. (An example has heen given previously an the western end of the

stratigraphic sections, In that area, C!* dated shelly marine deposits aid in the

reconstruction of pedological events.) With reyard to relative age, widespread

layers are traced throughout the landscape so that the position in sequence of

these und other horivuns is established: the thin clay layer is. a through-going

luyer and occurs as an important horizon in podyelic soils, red-brown earths,

terra tossas and brown soils. A colour variant af the same layer also appears in

some black earths. The same layer is found in different positions within the soil

profiles, For cxample, it occurs as an A horizon in the soil with terra rossi

affinities in Bore N7 and as a B horizon in the red-brown earth in bore N5. (Seu

Fig. 2.) The stratigraphic approach also yields other kinds pf information: Both

red-brown curths and podzolic soils are developed over Tertiary sand {N11 and

N12 of Fig. 2), Bluck earths with a deep layer of reactive clay are formed only

aver thick Keswick Clay, similar soils with less reactive profites occur in lateral

equivalents of the Keswick Clay developed in adjoining Tertiary sand und

weathered bedrock, Black earths and rendzinas (RZ and BE) and red-brown

carths and terra rossas (RB4-TR) commonly gocur together on the Para Block.

(See Fig. 3, North Line between N7 and Nelson Road.) The A horizons are tex-

turully similar in each cast, Red-brown earths are differentiated from terra vossus,

and black earths from rendzinas mainly because of the presence in the terra rossa

and rendzina profiles of calesreous older layers. Where calerete is continuous

30 J. B. FIRMAN

under sandy A horizons, terra rossa (red) or rendzina (brown and grey) are

identified irrespective: of lower layers. Where calorete is thin and/or calearcous

weathered bedrock oceurs in red svil profiles containing the thin clay layer, red-

brown carth is identified. The thin clay layer also oecus between the sandy A

horizons and the calercte or caleareous earth in some terra rossas and rendzinas,

but where this luyer is thick and well-developed the red soils are called red-brown

earths and the grey soils, black earth.

On the stratigraphic sections, some horizons contain only one sort of material

and others are a combination of layers of different materials. That is, layers occur

separately, together or superimposed, “Layer” includes soil horizans, sedimentary

layers, emplaced layers such as carbonate zones etc. and organized layers struc

tured in characteristic ways. Only those layers, necessary for proper identification

of the soils are shown on Figs, 2 and 3, Structure layers and some emplaced layers

ure omitted. Because of this broad meaning of “lover” in stratigraphic analysis,

layers naturally ocenrring as horizons m soil profiles are identihed as such, par

ticularly where the diseussion concerns matters of ordinary pedological usage.

Stratigraphic analysis separates the various layers according to lime of origin.

This separation facilitates a close examination of layer cclationships. For example,

the: youngest soil unit produeed by chemical differentiation is the younger car-

bonute layer in Loveday Soil. (See Vig, 2 and Fig. 3, the Correlation Chart, ) The

youngest rock unit in which this carhonate is emplaced is. the Pooraka Formation.

That is, the Pooraka Formation was laid down first and the carbonate was

emplaced shortly afterwards, It can be suid that the carbonate is st ratigraphically

associated with Puoraka Formation, Because all the other units are older than

Pouruka Formation, it follows that the younger carbonate is wut genetically

connected with them: [t is not produced by processes responsille cither for the

formation of older parcnt materials or of soil layers associated stratigraphically

with these miuterials. The same sort of argument applies to other layers in the

profiles examined. Two important concepts follow: Firstly, because horizons in

any one profile were formed in different ways at different times, the simple

concept of profile differentiation from homogeneous material must be limited,

possibly tu the time of formation of individual layers. Secondly, because deposition

precedes soil formation in succecding stratigraphically associated layers, soil

formation raust be periodic!

On the Correlation Chart, stratigraphic units ave listed vertically according ta

time of formation, with the oldest at the base and the youngest at the top. The

chart has assemblages representing rcal soil profiles arranged left to right with

letters at the top indicating the great soil groups (P for podzolic; S for solodice:

etc.}, The assemblages record all the layers known to occur in soil profiles ot the

type listed, Layers essential to the definition af the type are shown with a cross,

others with 2 solid cirelc,

Where certain layers are commonly associated in more than one way within

a given soil type, more than one assemblage is shown under the type symbol. The

assemblages are arranged from left to right according to decreasing age of the

lawermost Jayer in the assemblage essential to the definition of the type, Older

srals that are “better differentiated” nalurally appear on the left hand side of the

vhart Becanse older soil Javers have been stranded due to inereasing uplift in

the ranges, there is a trend left to right from the ranges down to coastal plan.

The various layers occurring in the soils reflect the environment prevailing

during their formation. Horizontal lincs on the Correlation Chart mark tectonic

and climatic events that were followed by profound changes in the landscape.

i For a different approach yielding ihe same conclusion sce Butler (1959)

STHALIGHAPHY AND LANDSCAPE RELATIONS NEAR ADELAIDE aL

These events produce the genetic groups of soils delineated ou the chart by

strong horizontal (and vertical} lines. The way in which these groups are formed

and preserved, and the way in which they relate tu the present zonal pattern will

be discussed in a luter paper.

SOLL-LANDSCAPE RELATIONS

Much of the history of landform development has already been dealt with

in the appropriate sections ay tectonics and geological events. Landforms in the

area have been disenssed by numerous authors, principally Fenner, Charles (1930,

pp. 136) and Sprigy, KH. C. (1945, pp. kG ,

Most of the land-forms were developed followiny faulting and disruption of

the pre-Tertiary surface. Periodic uplift af the Mt, Lofly Ranges has been followed

by erosion ancl sedimentation. Uplift has outstripped stream incision, so tht

remnants of successively younger surfacey arc found at successively lower

clovations slong the flanks of the ranges.

Shifts: in Pleistocene sea-level have been of sufficient magnitude to change

the rate and extent of fluvial processes, but high sea-levels have not affected Jand

forms east of the Estuarine Plain.

Various landform-soil associations are now described and x brief history of

soil development is given for cach landform unit. Landform units, topography and

ussuciated soils are shown above the stratigraphic sections of Fig. 2. Soil types

and their symbols are set out briefly at the beginning of the section ov soils in the

Adelaide area, on the Correlation Chart, Fig. 3. and in the following text. The

arrangement of symbols on the topographic sections of Fig, 2 follows Steel and

Taylor (1968); Dominant furms are showt in large print and soils of lesser

importance in smaller print. Symbals for sqils of rotietly equal dominance are

cannéeted by a hyphen.

Eden Block

The Fden Block reaches heights up to 1,200 feet above sea-level. Monadnocks

in the Mt. Lofty area sauth of the transect arc up to about 2.400 ft ubave sey-

level, and stand sharply defined by the change in slope above the dissected

remtiants of the pre-Tertiary surface.

The western slopes of the block are steep due to strong dissection by streams

of the Eden fuult-line scarp. Remnants of older soil layers rest upon slopes whieh

become increasingly steep with decreasing age of the layers: Merrierete of the

old laterite profile marks a gently undulating surface, slope deposits equivalent

fo pink silt and Pooraka Formation rest upon moderate slopes, younger thin red

and yellow clay layers mark steep slopes. Modern slope deposits now lie upon the

very stcep slopes of valley walls adjusted to the modern drainage pattern.

The soils of the Eden Block are podzolic (P, YP, RP), and skeletal soils (SK),

The symbols arc used to represent these sails on I? ig. 2 and the Correlation Chart,

Fig. 3. In general, the podzolic soils are formed of young layers, including red and

yellow clay, resting upon ferricrcte and its derivatives or ancient woatherin 8 zones

in bedrock. Minor oceurrences uf 4 red brown earth {RBL) oceur outside the

transect urea on the lower slopes of the block where the red clay rests opon

remnants of older carbonate horizons in katamorphosed bedrock, The skeletal

soils are formed by erosion of older layers and the superposition on bedrack of

younger layers adjusted to the steep slopes of the modern drainage pattern,

Pera Block

The larclform unit is bounded on the east by the Eden Fault and on the-west

by the Para Fault. The altitude of the block on the northern marein of the transect

is about 706 feet above sea-level, The surface of the block declines to the south:

On the southern margin of the transect it is about 250 feet abnve sea-level, and

32 J. B. FIRMAN

south of Adclaide it stands at the same height as the adjoining coastal plain, that

is about 100 feet above sea-level.

On the eastern margin of the Para Block, remmants of the ferricreted Tertiary

surface occur, but these give way to the west to flat-lying surtaces developed prior

tu deposition of the Pleistocene Hindmarsh and Keswick clays, and finally, to the

steeper slopes of the ancestral Pleistocene drainage patterns which now contain

the modern streams.

After deposition of the Pleistocene clays and priar to strong incision, the Para

Block received strong accessions of the aeolian lime. This material, aud other

avbonate from katamorphism of older rocks, was leached and calcrete pans were

formed, Soils containing the characteristic calercte pans are referred to the soil

stratigraphic unit called Bakara Soil.

Dismemberment of the block by stream incision followed upou regression of

the sea in which Glanville Formation was deposited.

Fooraka Formation was deposited in the valleys (see Upper Dry Creek

section on the North Line of Fig, 2). Successively younger layers on increasingly

steep shapes, including the thin clay layers formed ut the end of Pleistocene time,

Recent slope deposils and alluvinm, and bed load of the modern stream channels

are all contained within the ancestral Pleistocene drainage patter,

The soils of the Para Block are podzalie (P) and solodic (S) soils, older redl-

brawa earth, brown soil, black earth, terra tossa, rendzina and younger red-brown

euth (RBS, BS, BE, TR, RZ and RB4 respectively, shown on Fig. 2 and the

Carcelation Chart, Fig. 3).

Prior to uplift and dissection the important soils were lateritic podsols ou

Tertiary sands, After dissection and later deposition of the Keswick Clay and the

ald red clay layer? the important soils were solodic soils and the older red-brown

earths (ABS). Then followed deposition of loess and development of calerete pans

characteristic of the brown soils. These soils were developed one alter the other

wu flat-lying surfaces.

Following further uplift and deep dissection in the Upper Pleistocene. t com-

plicated mosaic of soils appeared on the strongly undulating surface. Pooraka

Formation appeared in the valleys and zones of nodular carbonate were liter

formed in this material, Further dissection was accompanied by formation of thin

slope deposits of yellow, grey and red clay, These deposits form an essentially

continuous layer, and reflect the adjacent source material from which they were

derived: the yellow and red clays were superimposed on older layers in weathered

hedrock and Tertiary sand to torm podzolie soils; the grey clays were super-

impused on older Keswick Clay and its equivalents (with ur without parts of the

ealerete and loess layers) to form black earth and rendzinas; the red clay was

superimposed on thick culcrete and loess layers to form terra rossas, and upon the

pink silt of weathered caleureous bedrock associated with calerete to form the

younger red-brown carths. Other red-brown earths m the Torrens River valley

vontain the younger red clay laver superimposed in some places on older clay

layers revealed by dissection (RB3 and RBS).

Luter, strearn development and solifluction produced A horizons over sui!s

ot the slopes and the alluyial soils of the modern stream courses.

The Lower Oufiensh Plain

During Pooraka Formation tine, the alluvial plain extended out inta Gulf St.

Vincent far beyond the limits of the modern coast. This followed a withdrawal

oF the Pleistocene sea at the end of the Middle Pleistocene,

) The ald red clay layer occurs at the base of the red clay shown as Cr in bore $7 and S8

ot the South Line.

STHATIGRAPHY AND LANDSCAPE RELATIONS NEAR ADELAIDE 53

Pooraka Formation contains sedimentary layers with distinctive carhonate

nodules restricted to those layers. These nodules, which are most common un the

western margin of the Lower Outwash Plain, were probably formed in a yalley-

Hat enyironment following a break in deposition of the sediments. Later eur

horuites which occur as patches and nodules in horizons cross-cutting sedimentary

layers, murk an important period of soil differentiation, Soils containing these

horizons ure referred to the soil stratigraphic unit called Loveday Soil,

Layers of red clay occur ubove Loveday Soil. These are well-developed on

the Lower Outwash Plain. Fossil stream courses at the top of Pooraka Formation

ure marked by puorly-sorted deposits of angular quartz sand.

Soils of the Lower Outwash Plain are red-brown earths (RB3, RRS, RBG,

RB7) and alluvial soils (AL), (See Fig, 2 and the Correlation Chart, Fig. 3.) The

red-brown earths near the Para fault-line scarp contain red-brown clay of the

thin clay layer over Pooraka Formation. The distinction between RB3 and RBS

depends upon thickness and structure of the thin clay layer. These soils do not

contain the older clays and carbonates of the red-brown earths south of the

Torrens iver. Their closest affinities arc with the soils RB6 and 7: Soil type RB7

is developed adjacent to soil type RB3 and 5 and differs only in the presence of

tore sand in the surface horizons or the absence of the red elay of the thin clay

layer. Type RB6 differs from RBT7 in that it is saline with a high groundwater

table consequent on the rise of the Flandrian Sea. Alluvial soils are poorly

differentiated quartz sands of the fossil stream courses. Similar soils of colluvial

origin occur near the Para fault-line scarp, where they contain re-worked material

from older brown soils in many places.

The Estuarine Plain

‘the Estnarine Plain js a flat-lying coastal tract containing thin marine gulf,

estuarine and littoral deposits including the Lipsou and St. Kilda formations. The

deposits, which were Jaid down during the ingression of the Flandrian Sea, rest

upon the eraded top of the Pooraka Formation and older units, Shell banks near

the eastern margin of the plain mark the maximum advance of the Flandrian Sea,

Ked-brown dune sand derived ultimately from Pooraka Formation on the eastern

margin of the plain was laid down upon St. Kilda Formation following a retreat

of the sea. Alluyial and younger estuarine deposits ure found in the western

margin of the plain. Boach ridges and dunes containing Semaphore Sand fringe

the modem: cous,

Soils of the Estuarine Plain are solonchaks (So) and coustal sands (1952),

The solonchaks include eroded RB6 soils overlain by deposits of the St. Kilda

Formation, aud solonchaks in thicker sequence of St, Kilda Formation. Coastal

sands are of two types: DS1 includes the red-brown Fulham Sand in the older

dunes, and DS2 includes the younger Semaphore Sand of dunes fringing the

modern coast.

CONCLUSIONS .

This study demonstrates that the stratigraphic approach can be employetl to

advantage in the systematic study af snils, and thus supports the general theory

set out iu ate earlier paper (Firman, 1968), The study also shows that soil profiles

can be examined and described using “geological” and “pedological” methods,

together with conventional pedological nomenclature. This is possible for two

reasons: The first is that hoth methods have in common a detailed and objective

description of materials naturally occurring in the field; the second is that the

methods and nomenclature selected are these compatible with stratigraphic

principles.

Stratigraphic analysis shows that “parent” materials, and the organized or

emplaced layers stratigraphically associated with them, occur in sequence with

54 J.B. FTAMAN

other horizons of similarly associated materials. The conclusion is that soil forma-

tion is periodic, and that layers in soils are formed im different ways at different

times. One consequence of this conclusion is that the simple concept of profile

differentiation from homogenous material is limited, possibly to the time of

formation of individual layers. Another consequence is that stratigraphic cor-

enc can be carried ont with soils in much the same way as with other stratified

materials,

The stratigraphic approach used in this study leads inevitably to 4 statement

of soil evolution and to the recognition of parallel development of Jandform.

This parallel developnient favours a matching of soil and landform chronology

as i check on the history of soil development. Other consequences are, firstly,

the recognition of the influence of profound events upon the formation of

puwleusals, genetic groups of soils and associated lundforms, and, secondly, the

correlation of soils formed in similar but widely separated environments,

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

Thanks are due to Soil Consultant J. K. Taylor and Geologist R. D. Steel tor

assistance during the field investigations. Preparation of the illustrations. i this

paper was the responsibility of the TMustrations andl Display Section at the

Drufting Branch in the Department of Mines, The work of Draftsmen B. Frost,

1), Sutton and ©. Smith is very much appreciated.

REFERENCES

Arrenon, G, D,, Srucc, R, C. an Cocunans, G. W_, 1954. ‘The Soils aut Ceolagy ot

Adelaide und Subarbs, S.A. Dept. Mines, Geal. Sirv. Bull 32.

Bours, B. A. 1957. The Epicentre of the Adelaide Barthyuake of March 1, 1934, Jour. anil

Proc, Koy, Soe. NSW. 90,, pp. 39-43,

Tercer, B, E.. 1959, Periodic Phenomena in Landseapes as a Busis for Soil Stites. C.8.1.8.0.

Soil Pub, No. 14.

Pexsen, CuAtecs, 1990, The Major Stuctoval and Physivgraphbic Tyeatures of South Austyalia,

Trans. Roy. Sec. S, Aust. Vol, LIV. ;

Finatan, J. B., 1963. Quaternary Geologteal Events near Port Adelaide. $.A, Geol. Sutv., Quart.

Geol. Notes No, 7

Trraran, |. B.. 1966. Stratigraphio Units of Late Cainozoic Age in ihe St. Vincent Basin South

Australia, SA. Gool. Surv. Quart. Geol. Notes No. 17.

Fiuwan, J. B., 1967. Stratigraphy of Late Cainozoic Deposits it South Australia, Trans. Rey.

Sac. 8. Aust. 91, pp. 145-180,

Fimican, J. B.. 1968. Soil Distribution—A Stratigriphic Approach. Trans. Sth Int. Cong, Snil

St. Adelaide, Aust, 1968, pp. 589-574. Angus and Robertyon, Sydney-

Fina, J. B,, 1969. The Quaternary Period. Llaudbook of South Australian Geology (1. W.

Varkin, Ed.) Govt. Printer, Adelaide,

1.8,8.5., 1987. Proposal fer a Uniform System of Soil Uorizon Designations, Thulletin of the

international Society of Soil Science No. SL, Bp. 4-7.

Kuun-Grant, Corin, 1956. The Adelaide Tarthquake of Ist March, 1054. ‘Trany. Ray, Sne,

South Aust. 79, pp. 177-185.

Nowrucote, K. IL, 1960, Atlas of Australian Suils, Sheet t, Port Augusta-Adelalde-TTarnilten

Area. With Explanatory Data, C.5,1,R.0. Aust. M.ULP,

Rune. R. V., and Dawiens, A, B., 1953, Soils, prlucosols, and soil-horizan nomenclature, Proc.

Soil Sei. Sou. Atuer, 22, pp. 66-9.

Semec, R. C., 1945, Some Aspects of the Geomurpholopy of portion of the Mount Lofty Tuuases.

Trans. Rey. Soc, S. Anst. 70. pp. 313-347, /

8.C.8., 1960, Soil Classification (7th Approximation). Soil Survey Staff, Soil Conservation

service, U.S, Dept. Ag, U.S, Govt, Printing Offices; 1960 0-558055,

Sree, BR. 2. C., and Tayo, J. K., 1968, Soila of the Athelstone-Gilles Plains-Modbury-Tea

Tree Gully Arcu. §.A. Dept. Mines and Geol. Surv, Metra. Soil Map Series.

Srevnens. C, G., 1962. A Mannal of Australion Soils, C,5.1R.0., Melbourne. |

Surron. D. [.. and Wurre, BR. E., 1968. The seismicity of South Australia. 7, Ceol. Soc Aust,

L5 (1): pp. 25-32.

THomsuN, B. P,, 1909. Geological Atlas of South Austealia, Sheet Adelaide 1:250,000.

Wers, C. B. 1966, A Composite Map of the Soils of Metropolitan Adelaide, C.5.1.R,0, Sails

and Land Use Serics No, 49.

THE GENUS MILTHA (MOLLUSCA: BIVALVIA) IN THE

AUSTRALIAN CAINOZOIC

BY N. H. LUDBROOK

Summary

The rare genus Miltha is well represented in southern Australia in limestones and sandstones of

Miocene to Pleistocene age. Five species are present: Miltha nullarborensis Ludbrook sp. nov. in

the Nullarbor Limestone (Lower Miocene), M. dennanti Wilkins in the Upper Miocene to Lower

Pliocene formations of Victoria and South Australia, M. flindersiana Singleton and Woods in the

Upper Pliocene of South Australia and Flinders Island, M. lindsayi Ludbrook sp. nov. in the Upper

Pliocene of South Australia and M. hamptonensis Ludbrook sp. nov. in the Pleistocene of the

Eucla Basin.

The genus lives at present off the southern coast of California and off the coast of Brazil in latitudes

8° - 23°; Cainozoic occurrences are nearly all between latitudes 30° and 40°.

THE GENUS MILTHA (MOLLUSCA: BIVALVIA) IN 'THE

AUSTRALIAN CAINOZOIC

by N. E,. Lupsroox

[Read 12 June 1969]

SUMMARY

The rare genus Miltha is well represented in southern Australia in limestones

and saridstones of Miocene to Pleistovene age, Five species are present; Milthu

fullarborensis Ludbrook xp. nov. in the Nullarbor Limestone (Lower Miocerie)_

M. dennanti Wilkins in the Upper Miveene to Lower Pliocene formations of

Victoria and Sonth Australia, M. findersiana Singleton and Woods in the Upper

Plioceny of South Australia and Flinders Island, M, lindsayé Ludbrook sp, nov.

im the Upper Pliocene of South Australia and M. hamptonensis Ludbrook sp. nov.

in the Pleistocene of the Eucla Basin.

The genus lives at present off the southern coast of California and off the

coast of Brazil in latitudes 8"-23°; Cainozoic oceurrences are nearly all between

latitudes 30° and 40°.

INTRODUCTION

Miltha is a genus of large disc-like lucinid bivalves with a restricted geo-

graphical distribution and very limited specific differentiation. Some thirteen

species, most of which are represented by a few individuals, can be assigned to

the genus in the strict sense. Only two are known to be living today—Miltha

childrenae (Gray) from Brazil and M. xantusi (Dall) from Baja California, With

two possible exceptions, one in the Paleowene of New Zealand and the other jn

the Californian Eocene. the genus first appears in the late Oligacene or Miocene

of California, Florida, Argentina, New Zealand and Australia, Despite the paucity

of specimens, Miltha is well represented in southern Australia from the Miocene

to the Pleistocene.

Material used in the present study is in the collections of the Geological

Survey of South Australia (GSSA), National Museum of Victoria (NMV), Geo-

logical Survey of Westen Australia (GSWA), and the Western Australian

Museum (WAM). I wish to thank the Director of Mines South Australia, the

Director and Mr. T. A. Darragh of the National Museum of Victoria, the Director

Geological Survey of Western Australia, and the Director and Dr. D. Merrilces

of the Western Australian Museum tor making it available. I am grateful also to

Dr. A. G. Rew of the New Zealand Geological Survey for information on the New

Zealand distribution of Miltha.

GENERIC CHARACTERS

The shell of Miltha in the strict sense is usually a large, slighUy convex dise

70 mm. or more in diameter with a well developed posterior area separated from

the rest of the shell by a radial ridge and slight Hexure; the anterior area is

relatively poorly defined by a shallow sulcus; the liwwle is small, impressed, and

tending to encroach upon the cardinal urea; the ligament is long and sunken

below the dorsal border; there zre two cardinal teeth in each valve—3u and 3b in

the right und 4b and 2a in the left—but no laterals. The posterior adductor is

more or less oval, the anterior adductor long, extending nearly halfway across the

shell adjacent to the pallial line.

Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust. (1969), Vol. 93,

56 N. H. LUDBROOK

The subgenus Milthoidea was erected by Marwick (1931), relying on Reeve's

(1841) figure of Lucina childreni (sic) Gray, and with Miltha neozelanica

Marshall & Murdoch as the type species, lor forms haying the posterior wing well

developed, the long anterior muscular impression adjacent to the pallial line, the

lunule small, deeply excavated and tending to obliterate the right anterior car-

dinal, and the attachment for the ligament broadly triangular. As Miltha has all

of these characters, Chavan (1938) considered that Milthoidea should be synony-

mized with Miltha, with which I haye previously expressed agreement (Ludbrook,

1955). The original material of the type species Lucina_childrenae Gray has now

been located in the Gracherode Shell Collection of the British Museum ( Natural

History) and the lectotype, Crach. No. 216, figured (Wilkins, 1957). Any doubts

as to the nature of the shell characters which might have justified the subgenus

are removed,

Tropic of Cancer

Equator

Fig, 1, Distribution of Miltha.

DISTRIBUTION

Fossil and living records of the genus arc shown in Figure 1, With two

exceptions they date from the late Oligocene or from the Miocene when it became

well established in the Americas and in Australia and New Zealand.

Although the fragmentary nature of the material renders its location in the

genus open to sume doubt, the earliest record of Miltha is that of a small species,

M. agilis Finlay & Marwick from the Wangaloa fauna (Paleocene) of New

Zealand. According to Ben (1966) the genus then continucs to the cnd of the

Pliocene in New Zealand. Dr. Beu (in correspondence) has given the [ollowing

ranges for the species; M, agilis Wangaloa fauna only; M. dosiniformis Marshall

GENUS MILTITA IN THE AUSTRALIAN CALNOZOIC 57

ant! Murdoch Whaingaroan (early Oligocene) to Tongaporutuan (Upper Mio-

cene) almost confinuons; M. neozeluniea Marshall & Murdoch Waitakian (lote

Oligocene or basal Miocene) to Waipipian (mid-Pliocene), rare, discontinuous,

common only in Waipipian.

The venus is represented in the Eocene of California by Lucina packi Dicker-

sen, placed in Miltha hy Vokes (1939). From the Miocene to Pliocene it aveurs

in several formations in southern California (Grant & Gale, 1931), inclucing the

Temblor (Vaqueros of Arnold, 1909) Formation and the Monterey Shale ( Woail-

ring, Bramlette & Kew, 1946), The Miocene M. sanctuecrucis Ainold was placed

in synonymy with the Pliocene—Recent M- xantusi (Dall) by Grant & Gale, but

not by later authors, From the figures the two appear to be distinct, M_ sanctae-

erucis being more circular in outline like the Australian M. fndersiana and M.

hamptonensis,

In Florida the Miocene-Pliocenc record of Miltha is similar to that of

Galitornia with M.. chipolana (Dall) in the Chipola Fo:matiou and Ouk Crove

Sand of the Alum Bluff Group (Dall, 1903, Cardner, 1926) and M. caloosuensis

(Dall) in the Pliocene Caloosahatchic Formation.

In South America Miltha iheringiana Dovllo-Jurado was described froin the

Miovene of Entre Rios, Argentina.

The record in Australia is also somewhat sporadic, with a maximum develop-

ment in the Pliocene.

All Cainovvic occurrences except the Wungaloan M. ayilis in the South

[sland uf New Zealand and the Caloosghatchie M. calvosaensis of Florida lie

between latitudes 30° and 40°.

The two Recent species M. childrenae (Gray) and M. xantusi (Dall) are

notable for their rarity. M. childrenae occurs off the Brazilian coast between

latitudes 8° and 15°: it has been recorded from Recife (Pernambuco) and

Salvador (Bahia), M. xantesi has been described as “one of the rarest as well as

next lo the largest of the West American Incines . , , known only by a few

Specimens, most of those taken off Cape San Lacas in depths of 30 or more

fathoms” (Keen, 1958). The: locality is Appzoximitely at 23° N.

The present surface temperature requirements of the genus appear to be

within the range of 217 C. and 27° C., those of Cape San Lucas being February

21° August 27°, and of Brazil August 23° February 27° (Sverdrup, Johnson &

H'leming, 1942, Charts It and LT).

Discussions of the genus and its distribution are contained in Chavan (1938),

Dall (1903, 1905), Gardner (1926), Keen (1958), Lamy (1920) witha synonymy

of M. ehildrenae, Stewart (1930), Species fram the Enropean Eocene previously

placed in Miltha, as well 2s Lucina voorhoevei Deshayes [rom Mozambique.

donbtfully referred to Miltha, and several American species are now pliced in

such genera as Eonultha and Reeticarto.

AUSTRALIAN OCCURRENCES

Miltha was first recognized in Australia by Tate (1890) from fragments

recovered from Dry Creek Bore. Fragments from Abatloirs Bore were sub-

sequently described by N. H. Woods (1931) as Dosinia grandis (non Nelson,

1870), and later as Miltha (Milthoidea) grandis by Singleton & Woods (1934),

Ati incomplete specimen from Flinders Island, ‘lasmanis, “probably conspecific

with the South Australian specimens” was separated as a subspecies Mt. (M.)

grandis flindersiana Singleton & Woods. Cotton (1947) renamed the speties

Milthaidea hora (nom. nov. tor Dosinia grandis Woods 1931 non Nelson, 1870)

the species heing relocated in Miltha by Ludhrouk (1955. 1959),

NS. IL LUDBHOORK

The collection of further material from Elinders Island and from Gippstuue

Victoria. enabled Wilkins (1962) to extend the geographical range and the

speciation of the genus, The Flinders Island subspecies was raised to specific rank

‘md an internal mould and cast from Mitehell River, Gippsland, deseribed is 4)

sulypecies Miltha flindersianu dennanti.

Miltha is now knawn to occur in the Lower Miocene Nullurbor Linestouw,

to he well cepresetited in the Pliocene of the St. Vineeut and Murray Basins ot

Sonth Anstralin and to survive to the Pleistocene of the Eucla Basin. Five species

having stratigraphic utility are recognized: Miltha nullarierensis Ludbrook sp.

nov, in the Nullarbor Limestone, M. dennanti Wilkins in the Mitchellian (Upper

\iorene} of Gippsland, the Cheltenhamiin Black Rock Sands aud the Book-

purnong Beds (Lower Pliocene); M. flindersiana Singleton & Woods. the nearne

ou elevation to speeific muk having priority over WM. hora, in the Upper Pliocene

of the Cameron Inlet Formation of Flinders Tslind, the Dry Creek Sands and the

Norwest Bend. Formation: Af, findsayi Ludbrook sp, nov. in the Norwest Bend

Formation, the Dry Creek Sindy and the Hallatt Cove Sandstone; and AL, fen p-

toncasis Ludbrook sp. voy, in the Pleistocene calcareous sandstones of the Eucly

Rasin. All occurrences are in limestones, sandy limestones, quartz sands or sand

stones, the best preserved specinens being ia incuherent sands such as the Dry

Creck Sands or ine wauconitic sands of the Bookpurmiong Beds, As almost all the

well preserved specimens froin South Anstralia occur in subsurface material

recovered by percussion drilling, complete specimens are rare Material from the

Nullarbor Limestone und from limestones of the Norwest Bend Formato is

always in the foem of moulds and casts.

The present surfuce temperature recuirements of Miltha and other genera

with which it is associated in the Nullarbor Limestone and several of the Phocene

formations give confirmation to the frequently stated observations (ew, Grespin,

1950; Ludbrook, 1954) that at certain times waters have been warner in the

Flindersian Province of sonthern Australia than they are today. The germs seems

to have established itself in the Lower Miocene at a time when, without allowing

for pussible difterences between water temperatures and pulacotemperatures

(Dornan, 1966), water temperatures were in the vicinity of 23-25" and lirestanes

currying, Indo-Pacific foraminifera were deposited,

During the Pliovene, the waters of the Flindersian Province in the: restricted

sense of Bennett and Pope (1953), that is, the coast of South Austridise ancl the

south coast of Westom Australia, partly eqaivalent to Crespin’s (1990) Austral

{Indo-Pacific Provinee, were probably warmer than thase of the Maugeun Province

of Bennett and Pope (Bass Strait Province of Crespin), since large pearl shells

(Pinetada) and Anodentia are assoriated with Miltha in the Bookpurnong Beds

and the Dry Creek Sands, The westward retreat of Milthu to survive in the

Pleistocene of the Roe Plain is net perhaps anomalous in view of the higher

summer surface temperatures of the Great Australian Blwhe (20°) as compared

with Bass Strait (18°) at the preset time. Exeept for the Roe Plain oeurrence,

Miltha Wid not survive the cooling of waters at fhe end of the Pliocene. Its

asgoetution with Pinctada. suggests Lbat it lived in the South Australian Pligeene

at depths of LO to 40 fathoms or more, computable with the present habitat of

Mi xantresi.

None of the specimens from Victoria or Flinders Island reach the size of the

South Australian und Western Australian forms. This is interpreted us confirming

ihat the waters of the Maugean (“Bass Strait”) Province were cooler than those

af the Flindersian (“Austral Indo-Pacific”) Province in Tertiary as well as in

Recent times,

GENUS MILTHA IN TITE AUSTRALIAN CAINOZOIC Sh

SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTIONS

Genus MintHa H. & A. Adams. 1957

‘Type species (monotypy) Lucina childrenae Gray

Miltha dennanti Wilkins

pl. 1, figs. 1-6

1962. Miltha flindersiana dennanti Wilkins, 43. pl. 3, figs, 3, 4

Shell large, sulid, convex, slightly inequilateral, ubout as long as high, sub-

chrealar, posterior margin truncated, nearly straight, anterior and ventral muirging

rounded, posterior area well developed and marked by a radial sulcus and slight

flexure; umbos small, slightly incuryed, prosogyrous, situated slightly to the

anterior, hinule smull, deeply impressed and extending aver part of the antezior

cardinal, ligament decply sunken below the dorsal margin; surlace ornamented

with numerous concentric threads and obscure radial striae visible in oblique

light, concave anteriorly, more conspicuous in the lower half of the shell in. the

pasterior one-third and obsolete elsewhere: between the concentric threads there

are numerous microscopic radial striae; a weak shallow radial sulciis concave

towards the anterior over which the concentric threads tend to become irregular,

Hinge plate fairly straight, wide, right valve with a small narrow anterior

cardinal and a curved posterior cardinal: left valve with i strong tiangular

broadly grooved anterior and a long, narrow, curved posterior cardinal: resilinm

area Jong, fairly broad, triangular: posterior adductor oval, anterior adductor

long, parallel to the pallial line on the lower edge and nearly straight on the upper

edge, a small deep pedal retractor pil just above the anterior adductor; arca within

the pallial ine thickened with a deposit of secondary calcite divided by a high

umbonal-posterior ridge and a furrow extending from ahout the middle of the

ridge to the lower part of the anterior adductor, area below the furrow pitted more

strongly than clsewhere.

Dimensions: Hypatypes in the Geological Survey of South Australia Collec-

tion vary in length from 74 to $5 imn., in height from 73 to §4.mm., inflation from

15 to 20 mm. (single valye).

Type locality: Bellevue, Mitchell River, V ictoria; Mitehellian.

Material, Casts of the holotype NMV P22320-1; 44 specimens: NMV P228()1-

40 Bentleigh, Victoria; GSSA M1340, M2762, M2774a,b.

Distribution: Mitchellian of Bellevue, Mitchell River; Black Rock Sands

(Cheltenhamian); Bookpurnong Beds (Cheltenhamian); Upper Miocene to Lower

Miocene.

Milthu flindersiane Singleton & Woods

pl. 2, figs. 1-6

1931, Dasinia grandis N. H. Woods, 148, pl. 7, figs, 5.6 (on Nelson, 1870),

1934. Miltha ( Milthoidea) grandis, Singleton & Woods, 208, pl. VII, figs. 1-1,

1934, eae (Milthouleu) grandis findersiana Singleton & Woods, 216, pl, VITI,

ig. 4, ;

1938, Miltha grandis; Chavan, 230.

1917. Milthoidea hora Cotton, nom, nov. for Dosinia grandis Woods non Nelsun,

1953. Miltha hora (Cotton): Undbrook, 53; 1959. Ludbrook, 220.

1962. Miltha flindersiana; Wilkins, 43, pl. 5, figs, 1,2.

40) N. H. LUDBROOK

In describing M-. flindersiana from a single worn valve from a bare on

Flinders Island, Singleton and Woods recognized that it was probably couspecific

with the South Australian Pliocene shell originally described as Dosinia grandis,

and that the diflerences were perhaps partly due to age, Ludbrook (1955) ¢on-

sidered a juvenile from Hindmarsh Bore conspecific wi the Flinders Island holo-

type of M, (M.) grandis flindersiana “probably also a juvenile”, The range of

spechnens now available from Flinders Island and from the Dry Creek Sands

clearly demonstrates that M. flindersiana is conspecific with M. hora over which it

has nomenclatural priority. The Flinders Island specimens apparently never grew

to the size of adults from South Australia.

The species was fully described by Singleton and Woods (1934). It may be

distinguished from ether species by its more circular shape, its finer omament and

the Hatness of the disc.

Type locality: No. 1 Bore, Wingaroo, Flinders Islan, Tasmimia, 55-80 feet

(16-7-24-3 m.), PUpper Pliocene.

Material: 3 paits and 16 valves from dam excavations on Furneaux Estate,

NMV P26886, P26887; 6 valves and 7 fragments from bores in the met.opolitun

area Adelaide, GSSA M347, M2227, M3197, M3201,3203: 7 internal casts and

moulds from Fishery Bay and Rameo GSSA M3203,3204,3209. Internal casts from

Fishery Bay, Eyre Peninsula, hundred of Sleaford, section 11, are all flat, and so

far as can be determined in the absence of external moulds, belong to M, flinder-

siana, Intemal moulds on limestone of the Norwest Bend Formation at Ramica

appear also to he M. flindersiana.

Distribution, Upper Pliocene of the Cameron Inlet Formation, Flinders

Island, Tasmania; of the Dry Creek Sands, St. Vincent Basin, and of the Norwest

end Formation, Murray Basin, and sandy limestones of Fishery Bay.

Miltha hamptonensis Ludbrook sp. tov.

pl. 3, fiys, 1-3; pl. 4, figs, 1,2

Shell large, thick, nearly circular in outline, slightly inequilateral, left valve

slightly convex, right valve nearly flat, both posterior and anterior margins

rounded, the anterior more so than the posterior; posterior arca poorly developed,

narrow, and marked by a very slight Hexurc; umbos small, sharp, prosogyrows.

situated a little to the anterior, lunule deeply impressed and thinly transgressive

aver the hinge area, ligament deeply sunken below the dorsal margin; surtuce

tanamented with concentric lamelae 2 mm. apart with smooth interspaces but

for oceasional fine concentric striae. There is a shallow curyed radial sulens and

corresponding flexure in the ventral tnargin of the Joft valve, in the right valve it

is a slight radial ridge and flexure.

Hinge plate relatively narrow, somewhat irregularly curved, with a long thin

posterior cardinal and high grooved auteriar cardinal in the left valve. a high

grigved posterior cardinal and small narrow anterior cardinal in the right valve;

resilium area long. narrow, deep; posterior adductor aval, anterior adductor long,

well separated from the pallial tine; pedal retractor confluent with the anterior

adductor; area within the pallial line moderately thickened, a high subumbonal-

nsterior Tidge and a short anterior ridge helow the hinge late, a weak furrow

rou the middle of the posterior ridge to the lower part of the anterior adductor.

Inner margin broad. nearly fat, racially striated.

Dimensions; Holotype length 91, height 85, inflation (both valves} 32 mm,

Type locality: Hampton Microwave Repeater Site, 33 miles east OF Madura,

latitude 31° 57° 57", longitude 127° 34? 45".

GENUS MILTHA IN THE AUSTRALIAN CAINQZOIC GI

Material; Holotype (a pair) WAM 69-334, WAM 61-33, CSWA F7052

{ fragments of 2 valves),

Distribution: Pleistocene of (he Roe Plain, Westcrn Australia.

Miltha lindsayi Ludbrook sp. noy,

pl. 5, figs, 1-7

Shell large, rather thin, chalky, gently conyex, slightly inequilateral, posterior

margin obliquely truncated, anterior and yeutral margins rounded; posterior area

well developed and marked by a shallow radial sulcus and flexure; umbos small,

very slightly incuryed and prosogyrous, situated a little to the anterior, lunule

deeply impressed and transgressive over the hinge area, ligament deeply sunken

below the dorsal margin; surface ornamented with conspicuous concentric lanellae

about | mm. apart with microscopic concentric threads between them, tnedian

radial suleus not usually present.

Hinge plate relatively narrow and lony, curved, with 2 high posterior cardinal

and small anterior cardinal almost obscured by the Junule, resilium area long and

narrowly triangular, longitudinally striate and bordered on its lower edge by a

slight ridge from which it is inclined backwards from the surface of the hinge

plate. Posterior adductor subovate, anterior adductor long, pedal retractor appar-

ently confluent with the anterior adductor; area within the pallial line filled with

secondary calcite, divided into more or less triangular areas by a posterior ridge

and furrow and a median furrow below which the surface is conspicuously pitted;

inner margin wide, obscurely striate towards the pallial line,

Dimensions: Holotype GSSA M2747 length (estimated) 67, height 70, in-

Hation (both valves) 30 mm.; other specimens length from 64 to 74 mm... height

63 to 75 mm.

Type locality: Jervois Punt approach, Tailem Bend, South Australia, The

locality has now been covercd by road works at the approach to the punt landing:

Norwest Bend Formation, Upper Pliocene,

Material; Holotype GSSA M2747 (a pair), paratypes M3205, M3206, and

fragments; M3208 fragmentary material from the Hallett Cove Sandstone.

Distribution; Norwest Bend Formation at Tailem Bend; Hallett Cove Sand-

stone i mile cast of Hallett Cove; Dry Creek Sands, where it overlaps with M.,

flindersiana. The Tailem Bend specimens arc chalky and fragile. The spevirnen

M303 from the Dry Creek Sands of Hindmarsh Bore is a thick solid shell with the

truncated posterior margin and conspicuous ormament of M. lindsayi: the

osterior adductor is more elongate and the hinge plate wider than in the more

ragile forms of the species,

The species is named in honour of J. M. Lindsay, Assistant Senior Palaeon-

tologist, of the Geological Survey of South Australia, who collected the type

material.

Miltha nullarborensis Ludisrook sp- nov.

pl. 4, figs, 3-6

The species is known only from external and internal moulds and casts.

Shell small for the genus, subcireular, only moderately compressed, slightly

inequilateral, longer than high. posterior area well developed, defined by a

prominent radial sulcus and flexure, umbo small, prosogyrous, lunule small, deeply

impressed, and tending to encroach on the anterior cardinal, ligament sunken

62 N, H. LUDBROOK

below the dorsal margin; ornament of evenly spaced, fine, concentric lamellae

about 1mm. apart with microscopic radial threads between.

Hinge of moderate width with a strong anterior cardinal and a long narrow

posterior cardinal; posterior adductor roundly quadrate, anterior adductor long

and running parallel to the pallial line, pedal retractor impression a small deep

pit just above the anterior adductor; radial ridges and furrows rather poorly

developed; inner margin broad, smooth.

Dimensions: Holotype GSWA. F6871/1 length 49, height 48 mm.

Type locality: “140-mile quarry”, § miles southwest of Forrest, Western Aus-

tralia; Nullarbor Limestone,

Material; 8 specimens, mostly internal casts and external moulds in hard

limestone from “140-mile quarry” and Naretha, Western Australia, Watson Quarry

and Lake Yarle, South Australia.

Nistribution; Nullarbor Limestone (Lower Miocene) of the Fircla Basin,

REFERENCES

Anno, R., 1909. Paleontology of {he Coalinga District, Eresno and Kings Gounties, Colifarnia,

Bull. U.S, geal. Surv., 896, 1-173,

BENNETT, Isose,, and Pores, Erizasere C,, 1953, Intertidal zonation we the expused rocky

shores. of Victoria, together with a re-arrangemeént of Ue biogeowraphical provinces of

temperate Anstralian shores. Aust. J. Mar. Freshur, Rew., 4, L06-159-

Bev; A. G., 1966, Sea temperatures in New Zealand during the Cenozaic Esa, as indicated by

mollises, Treas, R, Soc. NZ. 4 (9), 177-187.

Cimvan, A., 1938. Essai critiqne de classification des Lucines. J. Conch. Paris, 82 (1), 59-1300.

Gorros, B. C., 1947, Some ‘Tertiary fossil molluscs from the Adeluidean Stage (Pliocene) of

South Australia. Rec, 8. Aust. Mus, 8 (4), 653-670.

tnesprn, Inexx, 1950, Australian Tertiary mivroLaunas and their relationships to: assemblages

elvewheye inthe Pacifie region. J. Paleont,, 24 (4), 421.439.

Dats, W. 11, 1908. Coutributions to the ‘Vertiary fanna of Florida. ‘Trans, Wagner free Last

Sei, Philad., ILL (VI), 1219-L654,

Dac. W. H., 1905. Note on Lucirus (Miltha) childvent Gray and on a new species from the

Calf of California. Nautilus, 18 (9), 110-112.

Dortio-Jumapo, M,, 1919. Une nouvelle espeee de “Miltha” du Tertiuire de Argentine.

Physis, B. Aires, WV (18), 558-562,

Donan. F. H.. 1966. Australian Tertiary Paleotemperatures. J. Geol., 74 (1), 49-61.

Finuay, 11, f., and Manwrex, J., 1937. The W angaloan and associated faunas of the Kaltangatiae

Creen Island Subdivision. Paleont, Bull. Wellington, 15, 1-140,

Franunc. C. A. 1966. Marwick’s Uustrations of New Zealand Shells, with a cheekhst of New

Zealand Cenozbie Mollusc, Bull. N.Z,. Dep. seient. ind, Res, 178, 1-456,

Carpxen, J., 1926. The molluscun fauna of the Alnm Bluff Group of Florida. Proj, Pap. U.S.

weol. Surv,, 142-C, Part IIL, Lucinacea, Leptonavea, Cardiacea.

Gnan't, U. S,, and Gane, WW. RR. 193. Catalogue of the marine Pliocene and Pleistocene

Mollusca of California, Afem, 8. Diega Sov, nat, Tist., 1, 1-1086.

Keen, A. M., 1958, Sea shells of tropical West America. Stunford Unionrsity Press.

Lams, E., 1920. Revision des Lucinacea vivants du Museum Histoire uaturetle de Paris. |,

Conch. Povis, UXV (1), 71-122,

Lupsnovk, N, H,, 1954. The molluscan fauna of the Phovene strata underlying the Adelaide

Plains. Part 1, Trans. A. Soe. 5, Aust. 77, 42-6.

Tawwpskook, N, H., 1955. ibid. Part HL. Pvans, R. Soc. 8, Aust, 78, 18-87.

Lupenoox, N. H,, 1959. A widespread Pliocene molluseun fauna with Anodontia in South

‘Auatralian. Trans, TR. Soc, 8. Aust., 82, 219-235.

Manrsuans, P., and Monpocs, R., 1921, Some Tertiary Mollusea, with deseriptions of naw

species. Trans. N.Z. Inst, LIT, 77-b4.

Manwice, 1 LOS. The Tertiary Mollusca of the Gisborne Distrivl, Palwont. Bull, Wellington,

1-177.

Tleeve. I, A. 184L+8, Conchologia Systematica, or complete system of concholoyzy; in which

the Lepades and conchiferous Mollusca are described jose 2 vols. Landon,

Stewant, R., 1930, Gabb’s California Cretaceous and Tertiary Type Lantellibranchs. Spee.

Puhls. Acad, nat. Soi. Philad, 3, 1-314,

GENUS MILTHA IN THE AUSTRALIAN CAINOZOIC 63

Sverprup, H. U., Jounson, M. W., and Freminc, R. H., 1942, The Oeeans, their physics,

chemistry and general biology, New York, Prentice-Hall Inc.

Tare, R,, 1890, On the discovery of marine deposits of Pliocene age in Anstralia, Trans. R.

Soc. 8, Aust.. 13 (2), 172-180. ,

Vokes, H. E,, 1939, Molluscan faunas of the Domengine and Arroyo [fondo Formations of the

Californian Eocene. Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci, XXXVI, 1-246, ]

Witkins, G. L., 1957. The Cracherode Shell Collection, Bull, Br. Mus, nat. Hist. Historical

series, 1 (4),

Wau.kins, BR. W. 'T., 1962. Miltha in the south-eastern Australian J. malac. Soc. Aust. 6, 43-49.

Wooprine, W. P.. Bramierre, M. N., and Kew, W. 8. W., 1946. Geology and Paleontology

of Palos Verdes Hills, California. Prof. Pap. U.S. geol. Sure,, 207,

Woops, N, Hy, 1931, Pelecypoda from the Abattoirs Bore, including twelve new species, Trans.

R, See, $. Aust., 55, 147-151.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

All fiures natural size

Phare |

Miltha dennanti Wilkins

Id. GSSA M1340, left valve, Loxton 5-10 feet (1°52-8:04 m.) below bed of River Murray:

Bookpurnoug Beds, Lower Pliocene,

2. NMY P232808, left valve, dump of excavations for sewerage tunnel 40 feet (12-LL mm.)

Frovts surface, Beech and Wright Streets, Bentleigh, Victoria; Black Rock Sands, Chelten-

iwmian,

3. NMV P22808, right valve, same locality.

5. GSSA M2274h, right valve, A.O.G. Loxton No. | Well, 100-105 feet (30-48-3200 m.);

Bookpurnong Beds.

Gi GSSA M2762, right valve, same locality.

PLATE 2

Miltha flindersiana Singleton and Weods

1. GSSA M305, Cowandilla Bore 470-485 feet (143-25-147-8 m.); Dry Creek Sands, Upper

Pliocene.

2, NMYV P26887, Jeft valve, dam on Hills Block 52, Furneaux Estate Section B, t-0 mile

NNE of The Dutchman, Flinders Island; Cameron Inlet Formation, Upper Pliocene,

3-5. NMV P22886; 3, 5. right valve; 4, left valve: dam on Block 47, Furneaux Rstate, Section

B, Flinders {sland: Cameron Inlet Formation, Upper Pliocene,

G, CSSA M2227, right yalve, Kooyonga Golf Club Bore 15/62, 503 feet (153 m.): Dry Creek

Sands, Upper Pliocene,

PLarEe 3

Miltha hamptonensis Ludbrook sp. nov.

1, Holotype WAM 69-334 right valve of a pair of valves, Hampton Microwave Repeater

Site, 33 miles east of Madura. Western Australia; Pleistocene,

2.8 Paratype, juvenile, WAM 61-33, 20 miles east of Madura; Pleistocene,

PLATE 4

1.2. Miltha hamptonensis Ludbrook sp, nov.

Holotype WAM 69-334 internal views; 1, left valye; 2, right valve, Hampton Microwave

Repenter Site, 33 miles east of Madura; Pleistocene.

3-6, Miltha nullarborensis Ludbrook sp, nav.

8, paratype GSSA 3199a, Watson Quarry, South Australia, Nullarbor Liniestone Lower

Miocene; 4, paratype GSSA 3198a Naretha, Western Australia, Nullarbor Limestone; 5,

holotype GSWA_ F6871/1 “140-mile quarry”. 6 miles southwest of Forrest, Western

Australia, Nullarbor Limestone; 6, paratype GSSA 3199b, Watson Quarry.

PLATE 5

Miltha lindsayi Ludbrook sp. nov.

1, Holotype (a pair) GSSA M2747, Norwest Bend Formation, Tailem Bend, South Australia;

Upper Pliocene.

2,3, Paratype CSSA M3205, right valve, Tailem Bend.

4,5, Paratype GSSA M303, right yalve, Hindmarsh Bore 450-487 fet (187-148 m.); Dry

Creek Sands,

6,7, Paratype GSSA M304, left valve, juvenile, Bore 20 Woodville South; Dry Greek Suncls.

PLATE | N. H. Lupsrooxk

N. H. LupsrooKx PLATE 2

PLATE 3 N. H. Lupsproox

PLATE 5 N. H. Lupsroox

SOIL SALINITY IN SALTBUSH COUNTRY OF NORTH-EASTER

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY R. W. JESSUP*

Summary

A total of 798 soil samples, collected at three different times, were analysed for chlorides. Of these

498 were also analysed for total soluble salts. The samples came from profiles of desert loams in

two adjoining paddocks, one supporting saltbush and bluebush shrub-steppe, the other denuded of

bush by excessive grazing. The bushes concentrate chlorides in the topsoil under their canopies.

This chloride is derived from the soil below and between the bushes and is apparently released from

dead leaves that collect under the canopies. There is a progressive increase in chlorides in the

topsoil under the bushes and decrease in the surrounding soil during dry periods.

Eroded soils ("scalds") occur in the country denuded of bush. Chloride concentration in the surface

of some "scalds" is higher than in equivalent horizons of uneroded soils. Also, less chloride occurs

in some soils adjacent to the "scalds" than elsewhere. Apparently chloride has migrated into the

"scalds7' from these depleted soils.

The distribution of chlorides and of total soluble salts down the profiles shows that there is no

significant water movement in the uneroded soils below depths of between 18 in. and 24 in., and in

the "scalds" below depths of between 1 in. and 6 in. Measurements of the amount of water held in

the soils at field capacity, considered in relation to the rainfall regime, support this conclusion.

SODL SALINITY IN SALTBUSH COUNTRY OF NORTH-EASTERN

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by R. W. Jessur*

[Read 10 July 1969]

SUMMARY

A total of 798 soil samples, collected ut three dillerent times, were analysed

for chlorides, Of these 498 were also analysed for total soluble salts. The saniples

came from protiles of desert laams in (wo adjoming paddocks, oné supporting

saltbush and. bliebush shrub-steppe. the other denmded of bush by excessive

grazing. The bushes concentrate chlorides in the topsoil under their canopies. This

chloride is derived from the soil below and between the bushes and is apparently

released. from dead leaves that collect under the canopies. There is a progressive

inevease in chlorides in the topsoil under the bushes and decrease in the sur-

younding soi during dry periods,

Eroded soils (“scalds") oceur in the country denuded of bush. Chloride con-

centration in the surface of some “scalds” is higher than in equivalent horizons of

uneroded soils. Also, less chloride occurs in some soils adjacent to the “scalds™

than clewhere. Apparently chloride has migrated into the “scealds"” from these

depleted satls.

The distribution of chlorides and of total soluble salts down the profiles

shaws that there is no significant water movement in the uneroded svils below

depths of between 18 in. and 24 in. and in the “sealds” below depths of between

L in. and 6 in. Meastitements of the aminount of water held in the soils at field

capacity, considered in relution to the rainfall regime, support this conclusion.

INTRODUCTION

In Australia little information is available concerning the effects of the native

vegetation on soil properties, The main purpose of the present study was to deter-

mine whether bladder saltbush (Atriplex vesicaria) and the bluebush (Kochia

asirotricha), two shrubs that are widely distributed in ‘the southern part of the

arid zone, influence the distribution of soluble salts in the soils on which they

Erow,.

The area selected for investigation is in north-eastern South Australia about

30 miles north of Olary, on a plain that was originally entirely covered by shrub-

steppe vegetation dominated by saltbush, but with scattered plants of bluebush.

However, excessive grazing by stack in the first decade of this century caused

complete destruction of the shrub-steppe in part of the area and its replacement

by two plant communities, one dominated by grasses and the other by species of

Bassia. Wind erosion during dry times, when the soil was inadequately protected

by these two communities, resulted in an intricate pattern of “scalds” developing

on the soil surface. In the “scalds” the topsoil was removed and the clay B horizon

exposed,

R In order to determine whether saltbush and blucbush affect the distribution

of soluble salts, soil samples were collected under the bush canopies, between the

bushes, and under both the grass and Bassia communities, In addition, samples

were taken from the “scalds” so that the salinity of the eroded soils could be

compared with that of the uneroded ones.

* C.S.1.4.0.,. Division of Soils, Adelaide, South Austrafia,

Trans, Roy, Soc. S. Aust. (1969), Vol. 93.

70 R. W. JESSUP

THE SALTBUSH COMMUNITY AND THE SOILS SUPPORTING IT

Salinity of the soils supporting a well-preserved stand of saltbush shrub-

steppe was investigated on Kalabity Station 0-5 miles south-sonth-east of the

abandoned Telechic homestead. The saltbush and bluebush species present grow

to an average height of 15 in. and a canopy diameter of 19 in. They are shallow

rooting shrubs, with their roots confined to the upper 24 in. of the soil. The

canopies of adjacent bushes are usually separated by distances of 1 to 3 feet. The

soil between the bushes is devoid of plants during periods of prolonged drought,

but the rainfall (Table 2) during the two years preceding the period when the

first samples were collected, had resulted in the growth of Bassia uniflora, B.

decurrens, Enneapogon avenaceus and other plants between the bushes (Table

1).

TABLE 1

Rotanical composition of the Binet cooununities. The species nomenclature is that of Black (1948).

Botanical composition was determined by counting the nuinber of plants of each species m

randomly distributed metre quadrats.

Saltbush community Grass community Baasia comunity

to Se ta

Atriplex vesioaria 20-4 )

Bassia uniflora 32-9 1-0 fi-4

Bassia ventricosa, 1-0 O09 21-3

Eniieupogon avyeniucens 24+1 S84 12-1

Gassia decurrens 12-0 2-4 43-5

Kochia, astrotmcha B-5 0 9

Maloucocera tricornis 1-1 0 0

Atriplex limbata 1:8 ) +7

Sida intricata 1-2 3:1 9-5

Eragrostis clielsii 1-3 3-5 0-4

Stipa mitida 1-0 0-7 0-7

Baasia divaricata 1-3 0 0

Bastia brachyptera a 0 O-7

Basma paradoxa 0 0 a

Bassia biflora it) 0 O-7

Babbagia acroptera 0 6 2-8

The saltbush community occurs on soils known as desert loams. These soils

have texture contrast profiles with shallow, loamy, brown to red A horizons clearly

separated from the red, clay B horizons in which there are accumulations of

carbonates. The desert loams have an alkaline reaction, are moderately to strongly

saline, and have calcium and maguesium as the main exchangeable cations.

wo types of desert loam profiles occur in the area investigated. The most

widespread one, referred to as type X, has the following characteristics:

Superficial deposit: A layer of wind-blown sand, 1 in. thick between the

bushes and about 4 in, thick under them, overlies the soil profile, The

sand is red (2-5 YR 5/6—5/S8*), has false bedding sid is clearly

separated from the A horizon of the soil.

A horizon: 6 in. thick. Yellowish red (5 YR 4/6 — 5/6); sandy loam (C5 53%,

FS 33%, Si 6%, G 9%); massive. Soft when dry; a little sub-angular gravel;

pH 8-6; exchangeable cations—Ca 52%, My 28%, Na 6%, K 15%. Sharp

boundary to:

* All Munsell colour notations are for soil in the dry state, Consistence terms as defined

in the U.S.D.A. Soil Survey Manual (1951) are used. Abbreviations used in the descriptions are

CS = coarse sand, FS =fine sand, Si= silt, and C = clay, Exchangeable cations are expressed

as percentage of total vations.

SOIL SALINITY IN SALTBUSI] COUNTRY OF NE. SOUTH AUSTRATIA 7

§, horizon: 10 in, thick. Yellowish red to red (5 YR 4/6 —2-5 YR 4/6); light

clay (CS 33%, FS 21%, Si 7%, C 36%); massive, Slightly hard when dey.

Slightly plastic and slightly sticky when wet; u little sub-angular gravel:

pl =r exchangeable cations—Ca 54%, Mg 26%, Na 11%, K 6%, Diffuse

qundary to;

Bo, horizon: Red (2-3 YR 4/6 —5/8); clay (CS 27%, FS 20%, Si 11%, C 41%);

massive. Slightly hard to hard when dry, plastic and sticky when wet;

a little sub-angular gravel; mary pockets of soft carbonate and much

carbonate in the fine earth (CaCO, 15%); pH 9-8; exchangeable cations

—Ca 39%, Mg 32%, Nu 26, K 3%

Srrial) areas of soil, referred to as type Y, occupy the slightly lower sites on the

plain. This soil has the following characteristics:

Superficial deposit; A layer of wind-blown sand, 1 in, thick between the

bushes and aboul 4 in, thick under them, overlies the soil profile, The

gandl fds false bedding and is clearly separated from the A horizon of

the soi

A horizon: 3 in, thick, Light red (2°5 YR 6/6) to red (2°5 YR 5/6); sandy

loam (CS 46%, FS 39%, Si 9%, C 7%); massive; suft when dry; often with

a little sub-angular gravel. pH 8-9; exchangealle cations—Ca 48%,

Mg 26%, Na 9%, K 17%. Sharp boundary to:

“Bleached” top of B horizon: Up to ¥ in, thick. Reddish yellow (5 YR 6/6—

7/8); vesicular; light clay, Slightly hard when dey, slightly plustie and

slightly sticky when wet.

8, horizon: 7 in, thick, Red (2-5 YR 4/6 — 4/8); ght clay (CS 30%, FS 26%,

Si 7#, C 37%); prismatic structure, the prisms (1-3 in. across ) breaking

fairly easily to sub-angular blocky peds 4-% in. in size; slightly hard to

hard when dry, plastic and sticky when wet; a little sub-angular gravel,

pH 9-1; exchangeable cations—Ca 35%, Mg 36%, Na 26%, K 3%. Dilluse

boundary to:

Bu, horizon: Red (2:5 YR 4/6 —5/S); clay (CS 21%, FS 19%, Si 11%, C 47%);

massive, slightly hard ta hard when dry, plastic and sticky when wet;

a little sub-angular gravel; many pockets of soft carbonate and munch

carbonate in the fine earth (CaCO, 19%): pH 8-9; exchangeable cations

—Ca 35%, Mg 36%, Na 26%, K 39. \

The type Y soil has a shallower A horizon and hence a finer-textured profile

than the type X svil, und has higher exchangeable sodium and hetter structure in

the B, horizon, The type ¥ soil also has higher salinity, These diflerences in

profile features are probably due to the fact that the type Y soil occurs on the

slightly lower parts of the plain.

VEGETATION AND SQILS IN THE COUNTRY DENUDED OF SALTBUSH

The site selected for the study of soil salinity in country denuded of ils salt-

bush cover, was in Watercourse Paddock on Bimbowrie Station, south of and

adjoining the well-preserved stind of saltbush discussed above, The vegetaiion

in Watercourse Paddock consisted of an intricate pattern of two plant com-

munities, one deminiuted by the grass Enneapogen avenaceus and the other hy

two species of Bassia (B. decurreng and B, centricosa). The floristic composition

of these two communitics is shown in Table I. The grass community occupied

ae of the area and the Bassie community 10%. The remaining 10% was devoid of

ants,

5 In the unyegetated areas (“scalds”) the A horizon of the soils had been

removed by wind crosion and the exposed B horizan was irregularly veneered

R. W. JESSUP

TABLE 2

Rainfall (in iuches) preceding and between the periods of sampling. The first sampling was catried

out during the period 19/5/57 — 12/6/57, the second 28/8/47 — 11/9/57, and ihe third 23/10/59—

6/11/59. No rain fell during the sarnpling periods.

1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1939

January 0:24 104 1:36 0-00 1-32 0-50

February 0-00 4-50 0-88 0:37 0-33 0-00

March HO 2-81 0-45 1-17 0-48

April 0-52 0-16 0-36 O14 0-45 0-00

May O15 B27 0-71 0-00 042 1-00

June 0-26 1:29 0-92 1-55* 0-00 0-00

July 0-00 0-62 2-20 0-00 0-55 0-37

August 0-00 0-84 0-14 0-26 1-26 1-05

September om 1-33 0-09 0-00 0-38 0-33

October 0-90 0-31 0-39 0-07 “234 0-86

November 0-00 «0-92 0-05 0-00 2-24 0-00

December 2-92 0-00 "E “007 | 1-31 0-7 oe

Year 5-3] 16-15 9.98 4-15 11-00 =

#1-45 in, fell on June 19-20.

with a Jag deposit of gravel. The coarse-textured materials stripped from the

“scalds” had accumulated around their margins, Thus in Watercourse Paddock

there were areas of uneroded, truncated and of buried types X and Y profiles.

The grass community occurred on the uneroded type X soil and on the aeolian

deposits.

SOIL SALINITY

Soil samples were collected at three different times, the first in May-lune

1957, the second August-September 1957 and the third in October-November

1959. Very little rain had fallen during the 10 months prior to the first sampling

period (Table 2). The soils were very dry, in fact tests carried out in the lahora-

tory showed that field moisture was less than that held in the soil at a tension

of 15 atmospheres, commonly referred to as the permancnt wilting point of plants

(Table 3).

TABLE 8

Soil water data. derived from laboratory determimations carried out by O. B. Williams,

CS.LR.0,, Division of Animal Physiclogy, Parramatta, N.S.W.

Inehes of water per stated depth held im the soil

Soil type Depth At field capacity At 13 atmospheres At firat sampling

(in,) tension time m field

0-3 0-60 0-11 0-08

x 3-9 0-87 0:27 Ol

9-18 2-58 1-62 1-04

(ha 1-41 0-12 0-08

3—9 1-34 1-24 0-49

¥ 9-18 2-01 1-90 0-93

18-24 1-64 1-34 {)-83

24-30 1:39 1-34 O-80)

SOIL SALINITY IN SALTHUSH COUNTAY GF NE. SOUTH AUSTRALIA 7

Field soil maisture was not determined at the time of the second and third

samplings, There was one heavy fall of rain (ubout 1-50 in.) soon after the first

sampling (Table 2), but following this and prior to the second sampling there

was a period of about 2 months when very little rain was recorded. The soils

were again dry at the time of the third sampling, During the three months prior

to this last sampling there was little rain except for one fall of 0-63 in, recorded

about € weeks prior to sampling time.

Method of sampling

During the first sampling (May-June 1957) the samples were taken at depths

of 0-1, 56-68%, 114-198, 174-184 and 23-24¥ in. in each profile. For the purpose of

discussion, these depths, which include the superficial sand deposit, are referred

to as 0-1 in., Gin, 12 in,, 18 in., and 24 in. respectively, Nine profiles of uneroded

type X soil, cach at least 9 in, away from the nearest bush canopy, were sampled in

the shrub-steppe, These sites are referred to as “between bushes” in. Tables 4 and

2. Nine profiles of uneroded type X soil were also sampled under the saltbush

canopies, and six profiles of ancroded type Y soil under bluebush canopies, In

addition, nine profiles each of uneroded type X soil supporting grass, uncroded

type ¥ supporting the Bassia community, and “scalded” type Y devoid of vegeta-

tion, were sampled in the country denuded of its saltbush cover,

In the second sampling ( August-September 1957) samples were collected at

depths of (+1, 54-62, 118-128, 17%-18M, 234244 354-364, AT#-48%, 50K-60% and

71%-72% in. in cach profile. All profiles were of uneroded type X soil in the shrub-

steppe country. Nine profiles were sampled under both the saltbush ane the blue-

bush canopies. and nine between the bushes.

The third set of samples taken in Octuber-Novemher 1959 were collected

at the same depths as the first 1957 sampling, Twelve profiles of uneroded type X

soil were sampled in the shrub-steppe in cach of three situations, namely under

saltbush canopies, under bluebush canopies and hetween the bushes. Six profiles

af uneroded type Y soil were alsa sampled between the bushes. In the country

denuded of its bush cover, six profiles were sampled in the bare “scalds’ of both

X and Y snils, aed six in an area su porting the grass community, adjoining the

type X “scald”, where 10 in, of sand had accumulated on the same soil type.

Methods used in the laboratory and statistical analyses

The 253 samples collected during the first sampling and the 243 samples from

the seennd sampling were analysed for both chlorides and total soluble salts. The

400 samples from the third sampling were only analysed for chlorides. The

chemical analyses were carried out using the methods described by Piper (1942),

namely chlorides by electrometric titration and reported as percent sorium

chloride present in air dry soil, and total soluble salts by electrical conductivity

of a 1-5 soil: water suspension.

During the statistical examination of the analytical data it was found that

it was necessary to transform the chloride and total soluble sult concentiatians to

depth, These log,, figures were always used when determining whether there

were significant dilferences between the various sites.

Results

The analyses show that the type X profile contained less chloride than the

type Y profile. During the first samplin (Table 4) the type X profile sampled in

the grass community, had a significantly lower chloride concentration at depths

of 6 in., 12 in, and 18 in, than the type Y profile sampled in the Bassia community.

7 K. W, JESSUP

Similurly, at the time of the third sampling, there was a higher concentration

ut depths of 0-1 in., 6 and 12 in. in the “scald” of the type X soil than at 6, 12 and

18 in, respectively in the uneroded soil between the bushes. Comparisons must

again be made between these depths in the “scalded” und uncroded soils, because

the eroded type X profile had lost about 7 in. of topsoil.

The additional chloride in this type X “scald” could have been derived from

the soil nearby. During the third sampling, samples were taken from. an area

adjoining the type X “scald” where sand tlat had been stripped from the “scald”

had accumulated. Beneath the deposit of sand, which was 10 in. in thickness, was

uneroded type X soil. There were uo significant differences im the chloride con-

centrations at depths of 12 and 18 in. in the areas where the sand had accumulated

compared with depths of 0-1 und 6 in, respectively in the soil between the bushes.

However, there was significantly less chloride at a depth of 24 in, where the sand

had accumulated than at 12 in, in the soil between the bushes. This may indicate

tbat there had been some loss of chloride from the buried type X soil adjacent to

the “seald”.

The depth of normal moisture penetration in the soils is indicated by the

distribution of chlorides in their profles, The chloride concentration reached a

maximum at 24 in. and was not significantly different at any depth below. This

shows thut there was no significant water movement in this soil below a depth of

between 18 and 24 in. In the “scalds” that were sampled the chloride concentration

was constant at and below u depth of 6 in.; this indicates that water normally

penetrated to less than 6 in. in these erodcd soils,

Total soluble salts were not determined in the samples collected during

October-November 1959, but the salt figures for the other two sumplings (Tables

3 and 7) showed the same trends as the chloride figures, except that, during the

first sampling, the total soluble salt concentration in the type Y “scald” was not

significantly higher at 0-1 in. than at 6 in. in the uncroded soil supporting the

Bassia community.

TABLE &

Chloride concentrations in saniples collected Oetoher —Novernber 195%,

(1) Geometric means (Cl as %), NaCl) (2) Logyy (%) Na! « 10°), Standard error = mean standard

error for all deptha at cach sampling site,

Between Under Under Between Bare Bare

bushes saltbush bluebush bushes “svald’ “scald Grass

Depth ———

ininches type X type X type NX type Y type X type ¥ Sand accumulation

on type X

01 (1) 0.0038 0-024 7-011 (b- G04 059 0.083 0-002

(2) 0-477 1-253 1-045 0-62 1:77 1-24 0-538

5-62 = (1) 0-004 = 0-010 0-007 0:08] 0-361 O-484 0-003

(2) 0-563 1-053 G+ 855. 1786 2-507 2-b4 )-444

112-124 (1) 0-052 0-05 1) 02 274 0-380 847 O-QU5

(2) '-502 1-770 1-714 2-438 2-591 2-738 Atl

17-18% (1)0-109 0-120 M-1Td 0-488 0-363 0-484 0-006

(2) 2-038 2-080 2-10 2-688 2-560 2-685 0-789

Q9)-244 (1) 0-189 0-188 0-162 0-509 )-BAZ aR 010

(2) 2-277 8-289 9-214 TOT HD HBB (W-H78

Standard ¥

error +0-126 4-0-1268 40-1298 —O0-054 =0-087 |0-180 0-078

S01L SALINITY IN SALTBUSH CUUNTRY OF N\E, SOUTTI AUSTHALIA 77

DISCUSSION

The conventration of chlorides and of total soluble salts was significantly

higher in the topsoil directly under the saltbush and bluebush canopies than in

the soils beqween the bushes. Furthermore, in the 0-1 in, soil sample, chlorides

contributed between +i and % of the total soluble salts under the canopies iif the

bushes, but only 14 to Ms uf those in the soil between the bushes. This shows thut

there was an absolute increase in the amount of chlorides under the bushes, Thus

uneven entry of rainfall into the soils, due to water being shed from the canopics

or being lost by direct evaporation from draplets on the leaves. cannot have caused

the formation of the pattern of chloride distribution. The observed pattem of

chloride distribution must haye developed after the bushes hecame established,

becanse the zone of maximum chloride accumulation (depth 0-1 in.) oceurted

in the deposit of wind-blown sand that had been “trapped™ by the busly canopies.

Apparently the chlorides that were concentrated in the topsoil under the

bushes were absorbed from the subsoil wnder the bush canopies and from the soil

between them. At the time of the first sampling the chloride concentration was

(1) significantly higher at 0-1 in, under the saltbush canopies, (2) significantly

lower under the saltbush canopies at depth of L8 and 24 in., and (3) significantly

lower in the soil between the bushes at depths of 12, 18 and 24 in., than jv the

two latcr samplings.

During dry times saltbush and blucbush progressively shed their leaves,

thereby reducing the amount of water lost through transpiration. The dead leaves

accumulate under the canopies. It is proposed that the chlorides that had accumu-

lated in the topsoil under the bush canopies were released from these fallen

leaves. Saltbush leaves are known to have a high ash content with the ash con-

sisting principally of sodium chloride (Wood 1925, Beadle, Whalley and Gibsi

1957). From its effect on the soil salinity pattern it is inferred that blucbusli.

which like saltbush belongs to the family Chenopodiaceae, must also concentrate

chlorides in its leaves. There was little difference in chloride concentration uoder

the saltbush and bluebush. No comparisons can be made nsing the data from the

first sampling because the soils under the two species were different. In the second

sampling, chloride was significantly higher under saltbush than under blucbush

at 0.1 in, but the third sampling showed no significant differences. During the

second sampling the total soluble salt concentration was not higher under salt-

bush at 0-1 in,

Accumulation of chlorides would be advantageous to the bushes during times

of moisture stress, for the growth of plants with a low chloride tolcrance, such as

the grasses, would be inhibited and compctition for moisture reduced.

Apparently there is a progressive uceumulation of chlorides in the topsoil

under the bushes and decrease in the surrounding soil during dry periods. Prior

to the first sampling time. which was churacterized by maximum concentration of

chlorides under the bushes and maximum depletion in the surrounding soil, little

effective rainfall had fallen for 10 months, However, about 1-50 in. fell son 28

months prior to the second sampling and 0-62 in. abcut 6 weeks before the third

one (Table 2}. There were no significant differences between the second and

third samplings in the chloride concentrations in any of the sites either “between

bushes", under saltbush canopies or under bluebush canopies.

Sultbush and bluebush wre not unique in their effects on the distribution uf

soil salts. Roberts (1950), and Pireman and Hayward (1952) have shown. that

several kinds of bushes that grow in semi-arid environments in the United Status,

concentrate salts in the soil under their canopies.

76 R, W. JESSUP

The analyses show that in the type X soil, the chloride concentration reached

a maximum at 24 in. and then remained constant with depth, This indicates that

there was no significant water moyement in the soil below a depth of between

18 and 24 in. Jackson (1958) concluded that the maximum depth of rainwater

penetration into similar soils at Yudnapinna Station, where the climate: is similar,

was also between L8 and 24in

‘4 consideration of the rainfall in relation to the amount of water required

to bring the soil to feld capacity, 4 in. (see Table 3), also indicates that water

would penetrate the type X profile to between 18 and 24 in, At the first sampling

time the moisture content of type X soil was less than that held at a tension of 15

atmospheres, coramonly referred to as the permanent wilting point of plants

(Tuble 3). The top 18 im, contained just over 1 in. at water, so a fall of about 3 in.

af rain would have been required to raise this depth of soil to field capacity.

Yahle 3 also shows that the top 18 in. of the type ¥ soil holds about 4-75 in. at

water at field capacity, At the first sampling time aboul 3-3 in. of rain would have

heen required to bring this depth to field capacity.

Single falls of rain as high as 3 in, are rarely received in the study area; during

the 6 year period 1954-1959 falls of about 3 in. per month were only recorded on

3 occasions (Table 2). Once, in 1955, an exceptionally large amount of rain,

4-5 in., fell during February. Lack of penetration of water below 24 in. would

explain why saltbush and bluebush roots do not penetrate below this depth, and

is probably the reason for the absence of trees in this country.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

Statistical analyses of the chloride and total soluble salt figures were made

by Messrs, K. Cellier and G. A. McIntyre, C.S.LR.O.,, Division of Mathematical

Statistics, and the former offered many helpful suggestions regarding the inter-

pretation of the data, All of the chemical analyses were carried out in the labora-

tories of the C.S,1.R.O., Division of Soils, Canberra, under the direction of Mr.

H. J. Beatty. A number of people assisted with field samplings at different times.

nutably Messrs, G. and §. Scholz formerly of Bimbowrie Station, and Mr. O. B,

Williams, C.S.1,8.0., Division of Animal Physiology, Parramatta.

REFERENCES

Breanne, N, C. W., Weatcey. BR. D. B., and Gisson, J. B, (1957). Studies in halopbytes I,

Analytic data on the mineral constituents of three species of Atriplex and their avcom-

panying soils in Australia, Ecology 38 (23). 340-44.

BuaAck, J. M. (1948), Flora of South Australia (2nd Ed.). Govt. Printer, Adelaide,

Tunearan, M,, und Haywauv, I. E. (1952). Indicator sigrilicance of sme shrubs in the

Escalante Desert, Utah. Botanical Gazette 114 (2); 148-55.

jackson, BE. A, (1958), A study of the. soils and same aspects. of the hydrology at Yudnapinna

Station, South Australia, Soils and Land Use Series No, 24. C.$.1,R.0. (Melbourue).

Piven, C. 5. (1942)_ Soil and Plant Analysis. Hassell Press. Adelaide,

Rowrnrs. BR. CG. (1950). Chemical effects of salt-tolerant shrubs on soils, 4th Inter. Cong, Soil

Sci. Amsterdam. L: 404-06.

Yanga STATES DEPAR(MENT oF ActucuLrure (1951), Soil Survey Manual, Agric. Handh,

nm, 18.

Woon, J. G. (1925). The selective absorption of chlorine ions: aud the absorption of water bv

the leaves in the genus Aérviplex, Aust. Jour. Exp, Biol. and Med. Sci. 2: 45-56.

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE MESOPHYTIC FLORA OF

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY HEINZ AMTSBERGT

Summary

An introductory description of the macroflora of the Springfield Triassic Basin and the analysis of

its age are given. The following palaeobotanical divisions are represented: Ginkgophyta,

Arthrophyta, Pteridospermophyta, also Gymnospermous seeds and Incerae sedis.

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE MESOPHYTIC FLORA OF

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

(Springfield and Leigh Creek)

by Tlemz Ancrsperct

[Read 10 July 1969]

SUMMARY

An infroductory description of the macroflora of the Springfeld Triassic

Basin and the analysis of its age are given. The following palaeohotanical

dlivisions are represented: Ginkgophyta, Arthrophyta, Pteridospermophyta, also

Cymnospermous seeds and Incertae sedis,

INTRODUCTION

In 1957 leaf impressions of Triassic age were found by students of the

University of Adelaide under the leadership of Dr. Kleeman, approximately 46 km

north of Quorn in the Flinders Ranges of South Australia. These impressions were

identified by Ludbrook (1961) as Dicroidium feistmanteli (Johnston) and fresh-

water molluscs Unio and Protovirgus were described by Ludbrook from the same

source, In 1958 and 1959 comprehensive drilling in search of coal was carried out

at Springfield by the South Australian Department of Mines, but the project was

abandoned as only thin seams of coal were discovered.

In 1965 the writer examined fossil plant specimens from Springfield lodged

with the University of Adelaide, which prompted the present investigations.

METHOD

The Springfield Triassic Basin (Lat. 37° 07’ 5, Long, 138° 25’ E) is situated

some 375 km north of Adelaide in an undulating section of the Flinders Ranges,

bordering the Willochra plain.* The roads from Adelaide are bituminized, with

the exception of the last 15 km which are bush tracks. Due to some hazardous

ereek beds in the latter section, the locality should be visited during the dry

season, using a four-wheel-drive vehicle.

The specimens, unless specifically stated otherwise, were collected by the

writer during the years 1965 to 1969, on the central mesa of the Springfield Basin,

Section 48 Hundred of Cudla Mudla. They were picked up from the surface, or

dug out from a depth of up to 20 cm. Where a specimen is mentioned with its

counterpart, the original reck was split open by the writer on the site.

Descriptions are based on hand Jens observations, microscopic investigations

haye not been carried out,

All described specimens have been listed and deposited with The South

Australian Museum, Adelaide, The numbers with the prefix P, shown in brackets

in the text, arc the Museum registration numbers.

— t City Gardener, Corporation of the City of “Woodville, Box J, P.O., Woodville, S.A.

* For locality map see U'vans. R. Sor. 8, Aust, 84: 140, for geologival map see Willochra

Geological Survey sheet, Department of Mines, Adelaide.

Trans. Roy. Soc, 8S. Aust. (1969), Vol, 93.

80 HEINZ AMTSBERG

Division GinkcorHyta

Family GINKGOACEAE

Ginkgo antarctica (Saporta)

4 (Plate 1, figs. 1-2)

lig. 1 Typotype (P14117)

Description; Portion of a Ginkgo leaf, only partly preserved, The centre part

of the lamina has been preserved, the outer margin is missing. The base of the

lamina has been laying exposed and has weathered. The width of the upper part of

the lamina is 40 mm, the width of the lower part § mm. The available Jength is

18 mm, the length of the full lamina is estimated at 30-40 mm (without petiolc ).

The lamina is split into four lanceolate segments, curved outwards. The segments

are of different width, average width at the centre line is 5-10 mm. The veins are

clearly marked, dichotomously branching, and 1 mm_ apart.

Fig. 2 Hypotype (P14115)

Description: A small Ginkgo Icaf, lamina only (spur shoot leaf?). The lamina

is triangular in shape, width at the margin 25 mm, length 30 mm. Slightly off

centre to the right is a pimnule (Dieroidium) overlying the margin. Slightly off

centre to the left of the margin the lamina is lobed (torn?), the width of the lobe

at the margin is 24 mm, the depth 4 mm. The Jobe appears to have been torn

during the embedding process. The outer margin at the left side appears to be

damaged. The lamina near the base is partly covered with the oyerlying material.

A petiole cannot be distinguished. The veins in the lamina are numerous, radially

urranged, and repeatedly branch dichotomously. They are scarcely visible to the

naked eye. Four veins are located in the width of 1 mm. The imprint of the veins

is clear toward the inargin, however it fades ont near the base through imperfect

impression.

Division ARTHROPHYTA

Class EQuisETALES

(Plate 1, figs. 5-7)

The findings so far are only fragmentary, but there is enough evidence to

claim that this class was present. The details, however, are insufficient to put the

plants into a particular genus or species, as only parts of stems have been found

and no trace of complete leaves. Leat fragments which could be assigned to

Equisctales differ from those described from other Triassic localities,

Fig. 3 (P14119)

Stem only, length of impression 68 mm, width 20 mm. The stem shows

5 longitudinal flattened ridges. Nodes and striation ure not visible,

Fig. 4 (P14120)

Stem with one node, length 63 mm, width 16 mm, width at the node 15 mm.

‘The impression is flattened and at the top ond the diameter is 1 mm, The stem

appears to be loose from the surrounding bed. It is distinctly striate, showing

7 faintly distinguishable longitudinal ridges, bulging out at the node, which is

partly damaged, so that the base of the leaf sheath is not visible.

Fig, 5 (P14121)

Faint impressions with one node. Length 45 mm, width 8-10 mm. The node

is located at approximately the centre of the stem. 7 longitudinal ridges are faintly

visible,

OONTRIBUTION TO THE MESOPHYTIC FLORA OF STH, AUST. 61

Fig. 6 (P14122)

Stem with two nodes, Length 30 mm, width 9mm. The internode is 15 mm

long. The stem appears to be twisted into an angle of 30°. The imprint !s dis-

tinctly ribbed, the ribs running parallel, occasionully branching dichotomously.

22 ribs are located on the stem.

Fig. 7 (P14146)

Stem with two nodes and three internodes, length 40 mm, width 7 mm. The

internodes are 14 mm long. Five ribs are distinguishable on the centre internode.

The specimen shows five leaf scars at the nodes, each % mm in diameter.

Division PrenmosPeRMoPHyTa

Family CORYSTOSPERMACEAE Thomas 1933

Genus Dicromium Gothan 1914

Dicroidtm odontopteroides (Morris) Gothan

(Plate 1. fig. 8; plate 3, figs. 16 and 17)

In the description of the following specimens the name D. odentoptervides

has been used in a broad sense to inchide plant remains whose taxonomy cannot

be better clarified due to imperfect preservation,

Plate 1, fig. 8 (P14123)

Partly preserved lamina of 2 frond, with a well preseryed cuticle on the rachis

and on part of the pinnules. Imprint of a frond with the rachis forked dichoto-

mously. Full length of the rachis 68 mm, width near the base 3 mm, width near

dichotomy 2 mm. Width of the rachis above the forking 1 mm, length of the

rachis unforked 43 mm. The rachis is covered with an uneven surface created hy

raised blisters, 30 blisters in the length of 10 mm, The pinnules are located on

both sides of the rachis, at a close set, The shape varics from lanceolate obtuse, to

semicircular, All pinnules are attached to the base in full width, The venation is

odentopteroid, some pinnules show a centre vein, the latter follawing half way

through the pinnule, Certain secondary veins branch dichotomously approximately

half way to the margin,

Plate 3, fig, 16 (P14131)

Description: Imprint of a fernlike dichotomous frond, length 80 mm. The two

pinnae branch at an acute angle 25 mm from the basal end of the frond, The

pinnules arc located at a close set and are attached to the base in full width. Their

mirgig is entire, the shape varies from elongate with an ovate apex, to semi-

circular. The elongate pinnules are located toward the apices of the pinnae. They

possess a midrib which extends 2/3 of the way toward the margin hefore it opens

out, The secondary veins form an acute angle with the midrib, The semicircular

pinnules are dommant near the base of the frond and at the inner side of the

pinnae toward the dichotomy, the venation is odontopterod, Length of pinnules

4-9 mm. The secondary veins show dichotomous branching.

Remarks: This specimen resembles the Queensland specimen described hy

Walkom (1917) under D. lancifolia,

Plate 3, fig. 17 (P14132)

Description: Part of frond with a seed-like structure attached to the rachis

(poorly preserved), Several secondary branches arise from the main rachis, their

length being partly obscured, but at least 22 mm, The visible lensth of the rachis

is 80 mm, width at the base 2 mm, width near the apex 1 mm. The rachis bends

$2 HEINZ AMTSBERG

slightly into an arc. Pirmules are born on the secondary branches, and also on the

main rachis, their venation is odontopteroid, but only faintl visible. A seedlike

structure arises 55 mm from the base on the main rachis. The structure is pear-

shaped, its surface is somewhat coarser than the underlying grey argillite. It

appears to possess a short pedicel and to arise in the angle hetween the main

rachis and a secondary branch. The seed(*) is raised 2mm above the underlying

material. (On the counterpart it creates a respectively deep imprint.) The full

length of the seed is 13 mm, width of the widest part near the apex 7 mm. The

pedicel of the seedlike structure appears to continue asa 1 mm wide ridge almost

to the apex of the seed.

Division PrermosPERMOPHYTA

Family CORYSTOSPERMACEAE Thomas 1933

Genus Dreromnrest Gothan 1914

Dicroidium feistmanteli (Johnston) 1895 Gothan 1914

(Plate 2, Bus. 9-11)

Remarks: This genus, which gives the name to an epoch of the Mesozoic

flora, has been described hy many authors, and occurs in several places of the

Gondwanaland area. In the descriptions, the recommendation of Walkom (1915-

1919) has been adopted, thus the species is defined as follows:

Description: Frond bipinnate, venation odontopteroid.

Material;

Hypotype No. (P14124) Hypotype No. (P14125) Lypotype No. (P14126)

Fig. 9 Fig. 10 Fig.

Fragments; ] J 3

length: 60 mm approx. 115 mm 70 mm

width: 4{) mm 180 imiir 50 mm

Width of rachis

(widest part 2 mm 5 mm 2 mn

near base):

Pinnules

width: 5 inm 7 mm 3 mu

length: 6 mm 10 mm 5 mm

Shape of pinnules: semicircular to semicirenlar semicircular to

narrow clongate narrow elongate

Attachment of

pinnules to base: full width full wielth full width

Angle of pinnules

to rachis: 9° ge 45°-90°

Division PreamosrPERMOPHYTA

Family CORYSTOSPERMACEAE Thomas 1933

Genus Dicromrmont Gothan 1914

Dicroidium acuta (Wulkom) 1917

(Plate 2, fig, 12)

Description: The part of a frond is 40 mm_ in length, and divides dichoto-

mously into two pinnae at about the middle of the impression. The rachis is 2 mm

wide at the base, and is striate in places. The pinnules are spaced about 1% mm

apart, are 11 mm long, 3mm wide at the base, tapering into an acute tip, and

are attached by the whole base, joined by a narrow lamina along the rachis. The

yenation is alethopteroid. The secondary veins make an angle of about 30° to the

midrib, which persists to the tip.

CONTRIBUTION TO THE MESOPHYTIC FLORA OF STH. AUST, 8S

Material: The original is specimen No. F 332 in the Queensland Geological

Survey Collection, and was found in the Ipswich Series in Queensland (Walkom

1917).

Hypotype (P14127) fig, 12 appears to be similar in alf aspects to the original

specimen,

Division PrrrmosPeERMOPHYTA

Family CORYSTOSPERMACEAE

Genus XyLorrens (Carruthers) 1872 Frenguelli 1943

Xylopteris elongata (Carruthers) 1903

(Plate 2, figs. 13-15)

Description: The available length of the frond is 50 mm. The dichotomous

branching starts 15 mm from the basal end, The width of the branches is 1-5 mm.

The width of the pinnae is 1 mm, their length is somewhat obscure, however, a

minimum of 25 mm is visible. The strong single medium vein on all parts on the

imprint is distinct.

Material: Hypotype (P14128) fig, 13.

Hypotypes (P14129) fig. 14 and (PL4130) fig, 15.

GyYMNOSPERMOUS seeds

(Plate 3, figs. 18-21)

Fig. 18 (P14133)

Fig. 19 (P14134)

Fig, 20 (P14135)

Fig, 21 (P14136) This specimen was found in close proximity to the impres-

sions of Dicroidium feistmanteli (Johnston), in the overburden at the coalfields

of Leigh Creek in December 1967.

Division GinxcorryTa

Family GINKGOACEAE (?)

Genus Psycmoruyitium Schimper 1870

Psygmophyllum cf. etheridgei Arber

(Plate 4, figs. 22-24)

Several specimens have been collected by the writer at the Leigh Creek

Coalfield, thus showing the abundance of the genus Psygmophyllum at the

locality. The fragments described give an indication of the size of the lamina of

the plants bearing these leaves,

All specimens were collected in December 1967 from the overburden of the

Telford Open Cut (Leigh Creek Coalfield).

Fig. 22 (P14137)

The imperfect jmprint of the lamina js 14 cm in length, its greatest width is

9 cm. The full length of the lamina is estimated at 19-20 om. The veins are 1 mm

apart. The distal end and the base of the lamina are not p-eserved.

Vig, 23 (P14138)

Part of a lamina, size: 70 mm x 45 mm. The veins are 1 mm apart and

branch dichotomously. The apex of the lamina appears to be torn.

Fig. 24 (P14139)

Part of a lamina, length 12 em, visible width 4 cm. The parallel veins are

clearly marked, 1 mm apart, and show dichotomous branching,

Bt HEINZ AMTSBERG

Family INCERTAE SEDIS

Genus Taeniortertis Bronyniart 1628

Taeniopteris cf, dunstanit Walkom 1917

(Plate 4, figs. 25-26)

Fig, 25 (P14140), fig. 26 (P14141)

Description: Part of frond upper surface. The impression appears to be the

part near the apex, It measures 28 mm in length. The average width is 12 mm.

The apex appears to be acute, the width near the apex is 7 mm. A strong midrib

is visible. The veins are simple and arise at an angle of approximately 70° from

the midrib, sometimes they are forked, and occasionally two adjacent veins join

before reaching the margin. About 22 veins are located in a distance of 1 cm.

A marginal vein is visible.

Family INCERTAE SEDIS

Genus Taenrortenis Brongniart 1628

Taeniopteris spatulata McClelland 1850

(Plate 4, figs. 27-30)

Fig, 28

Description: Part of frond, narrow, slightly lanccolate, the length is 80 mmm,

The base and distal end are missing, the total length of the frond is unknown.

The midrib is prominent and lougitudinally striate, its width is ] mm, The width

of the frond at the basal end is 8 mm, at the distal end 9 mm, The veins branch

from the midrib at approximately right angle, occasionally they branch anywhere

between midrib and margin. There are 10-12 yeins located in a length of 5 mm.

Material; Hypotypes (P14142) fig. 28, (P14143) fig, 27, (P14144) fig. 29,

(P14145) fig, 30.

CONCLUSION

Ludbrook (1961) does not give the epoch of the Triassic Basin of Springheld,

while Brown, Campbell, and Crook (1968) ascribe it to (?)Lower Triassic. The

analysis of its macroflora suggests that these deposits were laid down during

approximately the Upper Triassic age,

Du Toit (1954) remarks that the Thinnfeldia ( Dicroidium) Hora is typical of

the Upper Triassic (Rhaetic) in the Cape Natal region (South Africa), and that

these Molteno beds have a surprising similarity to the Upper Triassic flora of

Ipswich (Queensland), and to the Rhaetic Hora of India, Argentina, New South

Wales and Tasmania, This similarity is present also in the macrofossils collected

from the Springfield Triassic Basin described in this paper, The genus Ginkgo

has been recorded from the Upper Triassic in the Ipswich series (Walkom 1917).

Taeniopteris and Xylopteris are considercd to he Upper Triassic (Seward 1963,

Walkom 1917-1919), while Townrow (1967) considers Dicroidium and Xylopteris

to be Middle to Upper Triassic.

The descriptions of the macrofossils of Leigh Creck, based on the “Swect”

collection revised in 1926 by Chapman and Coukson, also show a resemblance

to the Springfield fossils.

The Springficld flora is an impoverished fragment of the floras from the

localities mentioned above. It does not offer any new information ou which the

dating of these Horas can be improved, but its similarity to them shows that they

are of about the samc age, that is approximately Upper Triassic.

CONTRIBUTION TO THR MESOPIHYTIC FLORA OF STH, AUST. 85

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I wish to thank the management of Springfield Proprietors, Cradock, for

permission to collect fossils on their property. My appreciation goes to Mr. A,

Drummond who accompanied me on most of my collection trips. Dr. N, H.

Ludbrook kindly advised me on the preparation of the manuscript. For assistance

with the secretarial work my thanks to Clr. Mrs. V. Moss, B.A., and Miss ].

Rowland, The photographs were taken by Mr. R. V. Leeton, Flinders Park.

REFERENCES

A RORENS ‘ian N. Jn, 1947, “Ancient plants and the World they lived in.” (Ithaca, New

York.

Anprews, Henny N, Jn, 1967. “Studies in Paleobotany,” (John Wiley and Sons. Inc.. New

York,

Arnovp, Cuesren A., 1947, “An Introduction to Paleobotany,” Ist ed. (McGraw-Hill Book

Co., Inc,, New York, )

Barwann, P. D, W,, 1965. The geology of the Upper Djadjerud and Lar Valleys (North

Iran). II Palaeontology. Riv ital. Paleont. Stratigr, TL; 1123-1168,

Boner, M., 1966, Consideraciones sobre algunos representantes de In familix “Corysto-

spermaceae”. Ameghiniana IV, (10): 889-395.

Brown, D, A., Campnen., K, 8. W., Croog, K. A. W., 1968, “The Geological Evolution of

Australia and New Zealand.” (Permagon Press, Oxford.) pp. 226, 229.

CHapman, FRepk,, and Cookson, Isanen C., 1926. A revision of the “Sweet” collection of

triassic plant remains from Leigh's Creek, South Australia. Trans R, Soc. 8, Aust, L: 163-

178.

Detrvonyas, THroponr, 1963. “Morphology and Evolution of Fossil Plants.” (Holt, New

York. )

Du Torr, Arex, 1954, “The Geology of South Africa.” 3rd ed, (Oliver & Boyd, London, )

Harris, Tuomas Maxwern, 1961. “The Yorkshire Jurassic Flora.” Vol, 1.” Thallophyta-

Precidephyt (British Museum, Natural History. London.)

Jacor, K., and jacos, C., 1950, A preliminary account of the structure of the cuticle of

sep tt (Thinnfeldia) fronds from the Mesozoic of Australia. Broo, nain. Inst, Sci.

India 16,

Jounson, W., 1960. Exploration for coal, Springtield Basin. Rep. geol, Surv. S, Aust., 16.

Lipproox, N, H., 1961. Mesozoic: Non-Marine Mollusca from the North of South Australia,

Trans. R. Sue. §. Aust, 84; 139-147,

Parkin, L. W.. 1953. The Leigh Creek Cuslfields. Bull. geol. Sure. S. Anst. 81.

Prumx, T, W. ed., 1966. Atlas of Australian resources, Second Series. Geology, 2nd cd, (De-

partment of National Developmerit. Canberra, )

Scacen, R. . et al, 1965. “An Evolutionary Survey of the Plant Kingdom.” (Blackie,

London.

Sewarp, A. C., 1963. “Fossil Plants,” Vals, 1-4. (Hafner Publishing Co.. New York, )

Srorne, ~ x 1965. “The Morphology of Gymnosperms.” (Hutchinson University Library,

London.

Troaras, H. H., 1933, Mesozoic Pteridasperms. Phil. Trans. R. Soc, B, 222: 193-265.

Townnow, J, A,, 1967. Fossil plants from Allan and Carapace Nunataks. and from the Upper

Mill and Shackleton Glaciers, Antarctioa. N.Z.1, Geol. Geophys, 10: 456-473,

Watxom, A, B.. 1915-1919. Mesozvic Ploras of Queensland. Pts. I-IV. Publs. geal. Sure.

‘Od. 252, 257, 259, 262, 263.

CAD uUk wbre

HEINZ AMTSBERG

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

Puate 1,

Ginkgo antarctica Hypotype (P14117) x 1:5.

Ginkgo antarctica (spur shoot leaf?) Hypotype (P14118) x 1-5,

Equisetales stem showing 5 longitudinal fattened ridges. (P14119) x 1.

Equisetales stem with one node. (P14120) x 1,

Equisetales stem with one node. (P14121) x 1:5,

Equisetales stem with two nodes. (P14122) x 2.

Equisetales stem showing leaf scars at the nodes, (P14146) « 1-5.

Dicroidium odontopteroides showing raised blisters on the rachis, (P14123) x 1.

PLATE 2.

Dicroidium feistmanteli Hypotype (P14124) x 1.

Dicroidium feistmanteli showing large frond. Hypotype (P14125) x 0-25,

Dicroidium feistmanteli Hypotype (P14126) x 0-5.

Dicroidium acuta Hypotype (P14127) x 2.

Xylopteris elongata Hypotype (P14128) x 1.

Xylopteris elongata Hypotype (P14129) x 1.

Xylopteris elongata Hypotype (P14130) x 1.

PLATE 3.

Dicroidium odontopteroides (P14131) x 1,

Dicroidium odontopteroides with seed-like structure attached to the rachis.

(P14132) x 0-8.

Gymnospermous seed (P14133) x 1.

Gymnospermous seed with pedicel (P14134) x 2.

Gymnospermous seed (P14135) x 1:5.

Gymnospermous seeds from Leigh Creek (P14136) x 1.

PLATE 4.

Psygmophyllum cf, etheridgei (P14137) x 0-5.

Psygmophyllum cf. etheridgei showing the tom apex of the lamina, (P14138) x 1.

Psygmophyllum. gf etheridgei (P14139) x 0-75,

Taeniopteris cf. dunstani (P14140) x 2.

Taeniopleris cf. dunstani (P14141) x 2,

Taeniopteris spatulata Hypotype (P14143) x 1

Taeniopteris spatulata Hypotype (P14142) x 1

Taeniopteris spatuluta Hypotype (P14144) x 1.

Taeniopteris spatulata Typotype (P14145) x 0

PLATE 1

HEINZ AMTSBERG

PLATE

Heinz AMTSBERG

Piate 4 Heinz AMTSBERG

REVISION OF THE ACAENA OVINA A. CUNN. (ROSACEAE)

COMPLEX IN AUSTRALIA

BY A. E. ORCHARD*

Summary

The species until now known as A. ovina is here divided into four on the basis of indumentum, leaf

and fruit characters, supported to some extent by geographical distribution. Two names, A. echinata

Nees and A. agnipila Gdgr., are reinstated, one new species (A. X anserovina) is described, three

varieties occur in new combinations and five varieties are newly described. The nomenclatural

history and the occurrence of hybridization within the A. ovina group are discussed, and an

hypothesis concerning the origins of the taxa is advanced. A key to the Australian species of

Acaena includes the infraspecific taxa recognized in the A. ovina complex.

Only a selection of the specimens examined from the following herbaria is cited: Adelaide

(AD, ADW); Bremen (BREM); Brisbane (BRI); Firenze (FI); Geneve (G); Halle (HAL); Lyon

(LY); Melbourne (MEL); Sydney (NSW); Perth (PERTH); Wien (W).

REVISION OF THE ACAENA OVINA A, CUNN, (ROSACEAE)

COMPLEX IN AUSTRALIA

by A. E. Orcrarn®

[Read 11 September 1969]

SUMMARY

The species until now known as A. ovina is here divided into four on the

basis of indymentum, leaf and fruit characters, supported to some oxtent by

geographical distribution. Two names, A, echinata Nees and A. agnipila Gder-,

are reinstated, one new species (A, * wnserovina) is described, three varieties occur

in new combinations and five varieties are newly described. The nomenclatural

history and the occurrence of hybridization within the A. ovina group are dis-

cussed, and an hypothesis concerning the origins of the taxa is advanced. A key

to the Australian species of Acaena includes the infraspewifie texa recognized in

the A. ovina complex.

Only a selection of the specimens cxamined from the following herbaria is

wited: Adelaide (AD, ADW); Bremen (BREM); Brisbane (BRI; Firenze (FT);

Geneye (G); Halle (HAL); Lyon (LY); Melbourne (MEL); Sydney (NSW); Perth

(PERTH); Wien (W).

NOMENCLATURAL HISTORY

The first description of an Acaena from Australia was by J. R. and J. G, A.

Forster in 1776 in their “Characteres Generum Plantarum” under the name

Aneistrum anserinaefolium. This is now known as Acaena@ anserinifolia (Forst.

et Forst, £,) Druce.

Acaena ovina was described by Allan Cunningham in 1825 in Barron Field’s

“Gosemphical Memoirs of New South Wales by Various Hands”. His: description

read,

“Incano-hirsuta, foliolis profunde incisus pinnatifidis; laciniis oblongis, spicis

oblongis; inferioribus remotifloris, caule reclinato subdemerso.

Frequent on moist lands, Bathurst, etc.”

In 1844 Nees m Lehmann’s Plantae Preissianae described another species,

Acaena echinata from “In rupestribus umbrosis ad latus orientale montis Brown

(York) d. 4 Sept., 1839 Herb. Preiss. No. 2305”. The distinctive features of this

species were supposed to be the unequal conical spines lacking barbs ( .... “spinis

calycis conicus inaequalibus simplicibus (haud uncinatus)”),

Schlechtendal in 1847 described another new species, Acuena behriana, which

in part read, “... flores decandri, . . . calyx extus spinis magnitudine variis rigidis

basi latioribus apice glochidiatis instructus”.

J. D. Hooker, in Flora Tasmaniae (1856) reduced A. behriana Schidl. and

A. echinata Nees to synonyms of A, ovina. A. Cunn. This judgement was followed

by Bentham in Flora Australiensis (1864) who also added Hooker's Acaena

montevidensis to the synonymy of A. ovina. A. montevidensis was subsequently

also declared synonymous with Acaena eupateria, another South American species

described 10 years earlier in 1827 by Chamisso et Schlechtendal. A. eupatoria had

a 4 partite calyx, 2 stamens, 2 styles and a 2 seeded fruit.

Citerne (1897) attempted to distinguish A. ovina from A. eupatoria by their

stamens, claiming that A. ovina had exserted stamens, while in A. eupatoria the

stamens were enclosed by the sepals. Bitter (1911) pointed out that one form of

os Botany Department, University of Adelaide.

Trans. Roy, Soc, $, Aust, (1969), Vol. 93,

92 A. BE. ORCHARD

A. ovina which he named subsp. calviscapa also had short filaments so that the

anthers did nat exceed the sepals. In addition, some specimens in cultivation in

botanic gardens and referred by him ty his subsp. maxima also had stamens

searcely exceeding the sepals, while in the species considered hy him to he mast

clasely related ta A, eupatoria, viz. A. polycarpe Griseb. he recognised two

varieties, var, brevifilamentosa and var. longifilamentosa, On the other hancl, Batter

based the descnption of A. ovina subsp. calviscapa on material bearing, only

immature fruits. Present observations show that the length of the filament increases

markedly with age, so that the short filaments in the subspecies may be a result

of the stage of development of the material examined.

Bitter examined the type of A. eupatoria and confirmed that ‘the number of

stamens was two, and that in this and in all other specimens of it, the stamens

were enclosed in the sepals. Only very rarely is the number of stamens in A, ovina

sl. as low ag two, indicating that the relative lengths and numbers of stamens

may be useful in separating the Ewo species.

Only one specimen of A. eupatoria was available for comparison in the

present study, but in this specimen, as in all available figures and descriptions,

the stipules were deeply cut (4-fid in this specimen, 2.3-fid in some written

acvounts). while A. ovina si. always has ene lanceolate or triangular stipules,

This, in addition to the differences in stamen number and size mentioned earlier

wad the geographical separation seem sufficient ta keep A. eupatoria. Cham. et

Schidl, (syn._A. snontevidensis Hook, £,) distinct from the Australian species,

Ritter was unable to comment on the status of A. behriqna and A. echinuta

as he did uot sce the type specimens. He suggested that A. echinata might prove

to be 2 variety of A. ovina but the only specimens that he saw in which the spines

Jacked barbs (the main distinguishing character in the original description) and

which he named A, evina subsp. capitulata did not mateh A. echinata in habit in

his opinion. An Ped of A. echkinata in the National Herbarium of Victoria (ex

Herb. Sonder, MEL 21944) unfortunately has most of the spike missing, and only

amu incomplete fruit remains,

It appears that the spines were unequal in this fruit, the longer ones having

thickened conical pases, Whether or not these spities were barbed cannot he

determined as they are all broken off just above the base. The very small spines

ure still undamaged and unbarbed, but this is often the case even in fruits where

the larger spines are barbed. In all the specimens examined, only one (L. A. S.

Tohnson, NSW 15052), has barbless spines and the character seems to he of little

significance.

The important characters in the description of A. behriana appear to be the

ton stamencd Howers with filaments fused at the base. Bitter saw no plant which

fitted this description and retained the name as a synnonym. Fusion of the Gla-

raents at the base is usual in the whole A. ovina complex, although misunderstood

by J. D. Hooker (1856) as “a very short lobed or toothed cpigynous dise” in

“fomale” fowers in which the filaments had apparently broken off, In ie specimens

have lowers with as many as 10 stamens been seen, the maximum number being

seven and this occurs only rarely, The usual number is 5 with sometimes (2°)

3, 4 or 6.

The type sheet of A. behriane in Halle consists of four elements falling, inte

tue groups. Two of them are sterile (one has part af an infloresccnee stalk but

no flowers or fruits) and from their densely pubescent nature probably helong

to the species here called A. agnipila. The third consists only of an infloreseence

bearing semianature frnit. The fruits are hairy with unequal conical based spines,

thus placing this plant in A, cetinata var, retrorsumpilosa. The fourth plant is here

vhnsen as the lectotype of A. hefriana, Tt bears about 6 leaves and an infructesence

THE ACAENA OVINA A, CUNN, COMPLEX IN AUSTRALIA go

to which 2 mature fnuits still cling. An isotype of A. behriana exists in the National

Herbarium of Victoria (ex Herb. Sonder, MEL 21939), bearing a label in

chlechtendal's handwriting. It consists of a whole plant with an inflorescence in

the bud stage, The Howers have 5 stamens not 10 as described by Schlechtendal.

Bitter (1911) divided A. ovina into 5 subspecics and 4 varieties on the basis

of characters like fruit. and spine indumentum, plant size, number of spines per

fruit and number of leaflets per leaf, but proy ‘dod no key. All except ane of his

types have been re-examined (the type of subsp. nenella formerly in Berlin is now

lost) and many of his yarietal epithets have been retained but in new combina-

tions. The present system, however, euts across that of Bitter, whose work wis

based on a very small number of collections,

Gandoger (1912) described 4 new species of Acaena trom Australia, Onc of

these, A, dumulosa, belongs in the A. anserinifolia complex and may or may not

be distinct at the species level. A second, A, fasmanica is a later hamonym of

A, tasmanica Bitter, and both are possibly taxonomically synonymous with A.

montana Mook, f., but a study of more material and the types will be necessary to

determine this. Of the other two species, one (A. pennatula) can be matched with

Bitter's A. ovina var, subglabricalyx which is here transferred to A. echinatu, the

other (A. agnipila) is distinct and is here maintained at specific rank.

KEY TO THE AUSTRALIAN SPECIES AND VARIETIES OF ACAENA

(, Flowers and frults all arranged in a iobuler terminal head, Fruits 4 angled with + sheadex

subequal spines, 1 ut the apex of each angle, Stamens 2, cream. Creeping plants with long

epigeal stolons:

2. Calys lobes persistent in fruit + fused at the base, spines long (1-2 em) in fruit, friiting

head 2-3 cm dium, at A, anserinifolia complex

2 Calyx lobes deciduous in [vuit, frees at the base. spines short (1-3 min) in frit, fruiting

% Fruits in globular heads with 3 or 4 fruits scattered un stem below, + 4 angled ‘or

globular, 46 slender spines at the apex, and several smaller ones on the body of the

fruit, Siete Guts a7. = Oe eae es 4. A, ® anserovina

3, Fruits in elongate interrupted cylindrical spikes. oveid or with 3-4 longitudinal angles,

Spiney many, equal or nnequal, scattered. over the entire fruit, (A. ovina complex.)

slender, ;

5. Spines of fruit unequal, 3-6 longer than the rest. 3, A, ovina

6. Body of fniit and spines glabrous_ . tt var. ovina

6. Bory of fruit densely spreading pilose, spines + pilase at extreme base.

\ var, deltitina

5. Spines of froit + equal. _ = . _ 1, A. aunipila

7. Er) densely spreading pilose, spines glahreaus, or pilose at extreme hase

only,

§. Stamens (5-) @ (-7), Jenvth 2-5-3-5 mm. stipules 4-0-5-0 {-8-0) mm,

spike + branched at the base, 7 var. agnipila

8. Stamens (3-) 4-5, length 1-5-2:0 mm, stipules 1-0-3-0 am lang, spike

unbranched, es : po vat. fennixpiog

F'rnit and spines glabrous.

0. Stamens 3-4 (-5). length |-3-2-0 mm, stipules 2-0-2-5 mm lang.

var. gecuispina

9. Stamens (5-) 6 (-7), length 4:0 mm, stipules 0-5-0 min Ibag,

var, protenta

4. Leaflets with hairs confined to the major veins and/or midrib on the lower surface,

glabrous ar + sparsely pilose on the op et surface; tntit ovoid with all spines shenler

or with 3-4 longitudinal ridges formed by concrescence of (hue thickened bases of the

3-8 largest spines; spines always unequal. walk mitt 2, A. eehinate Nees

10. Fruit and spines glabrous, largest ypines with thickened bases.

Sd A. E. ORCHARD

11. Stamens (2-) 4-5, length 1°5-2-0 mm, stipules 1+5-2-5 mm long.

var. echinata

i1, Stamens 6-8, length 3:5-4-0 mm, stipules 3-0-5-0 tm long.

var, rolrusta

10, Fruit spreading pilose, larger spines with thickened bases or slender,

12 Spines all slender, fruit ovoid without longitudinal ridges.

var. xubglabricaliyx

12. Spines (at least the longest ones) with thickened bases, (ruit with 3-4 longi-

tudinal ridges.

13. Stamens (2-3-) 4-5, length 1-0-2-0 mm, stipules 2:0-3-0 mm long.

spike uribranched, kee =. var, retrarsumpilosa

13, Stamens (4-)6, length 3:0-5-0 mm, stipules 4-0-5°0 num long, spike

usually branched at base. ay Ps ' var, tylacuntha

1. Acaena agnipila Gandoger, Bull. Soc, Bot. France 59 (1912) 706. [Typus:

ee in Sunny Corner, (Boorman)". Holotypus: LY ! isotypus: NSW

(95900) 1].

Figures; Bailey, Weeds Qld. (1906) fig, 87 (as A. ovina); N.S.W, Dept. Agric,

(Whittet), Weeds (1962) pl. 80 (as A, ovina). A. ovina auct, non A, Cunn.

in Field, Geog. Mem, of N.S. Wales (1825) 358: Bailey, Weeds Qld. (1906)

49 p.p.; Black, Fl. S, Aust. ed, 1.2 (1924) 266 p-p., ed. 2,2 (1948) 398 p.p.;

Whittct, Weeds (1962) 345 p.p,

Syn. A. ovina subsp. nanella Bitter. Bibl. Bot. 74 (1911) 71. [Typus: “Novae

Zealandiae insula meridionalis: Canterbury Plains. old river-bed of Waima-

kariri, ‘Not native of New Zealand?” leg. L. Cockayne, herb, Beral.” Halo-

typus: Non vidi, probably destroyed.]

Herbaceous perennial 20-50 (-66) cm tall, stems erect or ascending more or Jess

densely pilose with spreading hairs; the leaves narrowly obovate to oblanceate,

imparipinnate, petiolate, stipulate (3-5-) 8-15 (-22) em long, petiole and rachis

pilose with hairs as for the stems, stipule shape variable, always simple never

multifid (1-0-) 2°0-5-0 (-8:0) mm long and 1:0-3-0 mm wide, glabrous or

sparscly appressed pilose adaxially, more densely pubescent abaxially. Leaflets

(9-) 17-23 (-27) per leaf, more or less sessile, ovate to oblong, serrate with (+)

12-15 (-18) serrations of depth #-% of the lamina, (5-) 8-15 (-26) mm long and

3-) 69 (-13) mm wide, moderately appressed pilose on the upper surface,

ensely appressed pilose over the entire lower surface. Sepals 5, sparsely to

densely appressed pilose externally 15-25 mm long and (0-5-) 1-0-2-0 im

wide; (3-) 45 (-7) stamens 1-0-4-0 mm long; 1(-2) styles 1-0-2-0 mm long.

Fruit ovoid, glabrous or pubescent, spines all more or Jess equal, slender, glabraus,

(15-) 30-40 (-55) all 1-0-2-0 (-3-0) mm long, barbed at the tip.

Distribution: $.E, Queensland. eastern New South Wales, eastern and central

Victoria. the Mount Lofty Range in South Australia and Tasmania including

Flinders Island. One specimen is known from each of North Island New Zealand

and the Stirling Range in S.W. Western Australia, both probably recent intro-

ductions,

1A, var. agnipila.

Plunt 30-45 (-60) cm tall, leaves (8-) 10-15 cm long, stipules linear to tri-

angular 4:0-5-0 (-8-0) mm long and 1-5 to 2:5 mm wide, ttcd or sparsely

pilose adaxially, densely appressed pilose abaxially. Leaficts (15-) 17-23 per leaf

with 11-14 (-18) serrations, $-% of the lamina width, (8-) 10-15 (-18) mm long and

(5-) 7-9 mm wide. Spike often branched near the base; sepals 5, moderately

pilose, 1-5-2-0 (-3-0) mm long and (0-7-) 1:0-2-0 mm _ wide; stamens (5-) 6

(-7), 2°5-3-5 mm long; style solitary 1-0-1'5 mm long. Fruit ovoid. densely

‘preading pilose with (6-) 20-40 slender, equal, glabrous spines (0-5-) 1+0-2-0 mm

ong,

THE ACAENA OVINA A, CUNN. COMPLEX IN AUSTRALIA 95

Distribution: Eastern New South Wales, S.W. Victoria and Tasmania,

Specimens examined:

QuEENsLAND! Hubbard 8253, Glen Innes (BRI).

New Sout Wates: Atkinson, Blue Mountains (MEL); Cheel Raokwood, 25.ii,.1898

(NSW); Madsen, Neyille, Noy. 1950 (NSW); McKee 11687, Black Mountain A.C.T. (BRI,

Nee FyM., Parramatta (MEL); Perrott, Armidale, 1871 (MEL); Wools, Parramatta

Vicrorta: Hannaford, Warrnambool (NSW).

TasmantA: Radway, Bellerive, Oct. 1898 (NSW),

IB. var, tenuispica (Bitter) Orchard, comb. nov.

Basionym: A. ovina subsp. monachena var. tenuispica Bitter, Bibl. Bot, 74.

(1911) 71, [Typus: “New South Wales: Jenolan Caves near Sydney leg. Blakely.

Holotypus FT! isotypus NSW (95906) (“Jenolan Caves 10/1899 W. F, Blakely”)!]

Map 1. Distribution of A. agnipila var. agnipila o and var, aequispina ®.

Plant (15-) 30-50 (-66) cm tall, leaves (3+5-) 8-15 (-20) cm long, stipules

triangular to linear, rarely slightly bifid at tip, 1:0-3-0 (-7-0) mm long and 1-0-

1-5 mm wide, sparsely appressed pilose adaxially, moderately appressed pilose

abaxially, Leaflets (11-) 17-23 (-27) per leaf with (9-) 12-15 el serrations, 3-2

(2) of the lamina width, (3-5-) 6-9 (-12) mm long and (7-) 10-15 -19)mm wide.

Spike elongate, interrupted, unbranched. Sepals 5, sparsely pilose, 1-0-2-0 mm

Jong and (0-5-) 0-8-1-3 mm wide; (3-) 4-5 stamens, (1-0-) 1-5-2-0 (-3-0) mm

long, styles 1 or rarely 2, 1-0-1-5 (-1-9) mm long. Fruit ovoid, densely spreading

pilose, with (15-) 30-40 (-50) slender, equal, glabrous spines 1-0-2-0 (-3-0) mm

long. Differs from var. agnipila in that the spike is never branched, in the fewer

and shorter stamens and in the shorter stipules.

Distribution: 8.E, Queensland, eastern New South Wales, central Victoria

and the Mt. Lofty Ranges in South Australia. One collection is also known from

the Stirling Range in $.W. Western Australia,

Selection of specimens examined;

Sour Austrara: Eichler 17081, 17094 and 17116, National Park, Belair (AD);

Orchard 24, Torrens Gorge (AD); Symon., Naime, 30,x.1953 (in part) (ADW).

Queensiann: Anon., Canning Downs (MEL); Vanham, Toowoomba, 28.xi.1933 ( BRI).

96 A. E, ORCHARD

New Sourn Waxes: Blakely, Hornsby, Oct. 1914 (NSW); Eichler 18969, Happy Jacks

Plain (AD); Hamilton, Penrith, 21.xii1912 (NSW).

Vierorta: Meebold 21531, Dandenong (NSW); Mueller, Port Philip (W); Muir 3635,

Fryerstown (MEI): Muir 3696, Omeo-Corryong road (MEL).

Wesrern Austraua: Gardner, Red Gum Spring, Nov, 1935 (PERTH).

1C. var. aequispina Orchard, var. nov.

Valde similari var. tenuispicae, sed in fructu ct spinis glabra _praecipuc

differt. Foliola plus minusve pilosa supra, dense pilosa infra, stamina 3-4 (-5) et

1+5-2:0 mm longa, stipulae 2:0-3-5 mm longue,

Typus: Hj, Eichler 17826; Australia, New South Wales. Snowy Mountains.

Near the Crackenback River at Thredbo Village, 25.i.1964. Holotypus:

AD 96450044 !, isotypi: L! NSW! UC].

Plant (J5-) 20-35 (-60) cm tall, leaves (5-) 8-12 (-22) em long, stipules

linear to triangular, rarely slightly bifid at the tip, (1-0-) 2:0-3:5 (-5°0) mm

long and (0-5-) 1-0-2:0 mm wide, glabrous or sparsely pilose adaxially, more

densely appressed pilose abaxially. Leaflets (9-) 17-21 (-25) per leaf, ovate to

oblong with (9-) 12-14 (-16) serrations 4-3 of the depth of the lamina, (5-) 8-14

26) mm. long and (3-) 6-8 (-13) mm_ wide. Spike clongate, interrupted, un-

ranched, Sepals 5, sparsely pilose, 1-0-2:0 mm long and 0-6-1-0 (-1-5) mm

wide; (3-) 4-5 stamens, (1'0-) 1:5-2-0 (-3-0) mm long; styles, 1, 1-0-1-5 mm

long. Fruit ovoid, glabrous with (12-) 30-40 (-55) equal, slender glabrous spines

1-0-2-0 mm long.

Distribution: Great Dividing Range from S.E. Queensland to central Victoria,

the Mt. Lofty Range in South Australia, Tasmania and Flinders Island. One

specimen is also known from the North {sland of New Zealand, where it represents

un introduction of the species from Australia,

Map 2. Distribution of A. agnipila var. tenuispica ® and var, protenta o.

Selection of specimens examined:

Sourn Ausrrauta: Richler 17075, Basket Range (AD); Orchard 22, 23, Torrens Gorge

(AD); Orchard 6, Cherry Cardens (AD),

QueEens.anp: Colonial Botanist, Stanthorpe 6.xi1890 (BRI); White, Bunya Mts,, Oct,

1919 (BRI).

THE ACAENA OVINA A. GUNN. COMPLEX IN ATIS'TRALLA Ay

New Sours Wares: Buorman, Molong, Nov, 1906 (NSW); Fieloes, Armidale, Nov.

(321 (NSW); ‘Thomson, Happy Jacks Plain, 17.1.1057 (NSW),

Vicrorta: Muir 3078, Mt. Wellington (MEL); Muir 2973, Tali Karng (MEL); Walter,

Victoria (BREM),

TasmAnta; Cleland, Launceston, Nov. 1912 (NSW); Whinray, Flinders: Island, 20.ix. 1966

(MEL).

New Zeauanp: Kirk, 'T'e Aro (MEL).

1D. var. protenta Orchard, var. nov.

Valde similari var. aequispinae, sed in staminibus (5-) 6 (-7) et 4 mm longis,

stipulis 4-0-5-0 mm longis, ct spica ramosa prope basin vel cum fasciculis forum

in axillas folioram summorum praecipue differt.

Typus: I. B. Wilson 627, 1 mile N. of Wandilo R.S., 5.xi.1966. Holotypus:

AD 86721088 |, isotypi: L! MEL! UC},

Plant 20-40 cm: tull, Jeayes (7-) 10-20 em long, stipules linear or triangular,

4:0-5-0 mm long and 2-0-3-0 mm_ wide, glabrous adaxially, appressed pilose

ahaxially. Leaflets 18-23 per leaf, 10-17 mm long and 7-10 mm wide, with 10-13

serrations 3-% of the lamina width, sparsely pilose on the upper surface, moder-

ately densely pilose on the Jower surface, Spike clongate, interrupted, either

branched at the base or else bearing large clusters of Howers in the axils of the

upper leaves. Sepals 5, 1-5-2-0 mm long and 0-7-1'0 mm wide, sparsely pilose;

stamens (5-) 6 (-7), 4mm _ long; style 1, rarely 2, 0-9-1.5 mm long. Fruit vyoid,

glabrous with 25-35 equal, slender glabrous spines 1:0-2-0 mm long,

Distribution; The type and the four specimens cited below are the only known

necturences of this variety.

Spewimens examined:

Sourn Austra: Ising, 22,x.1927, Long Cully (AD),

QueEENsLAND: White 1734, Silverwood (BRI),

New SoutH WazEs: Garden, 10 miles N, of Oberon, 10,%i,1922 / NSW),

Victoria; Willis, Walgulmerang, 2.xii,1962 (MEL).

2. Acaena echinata Nees in Lehm., Pl. Preiss. 1 (1844) 95.

[Typus; “In rupestribus umbrosis ad Iatus orientale montis Brown (York) d.,

4 Sept., 1839 Herb. Preiss No. 2395.” Holotypus: non vidi, isotypus in MEL

(21944 )!| Hook. f., Fl. Tasm. 1 (1856) 115 pro syii A. ovina; Maiden, Useful

Nat. Pl. Aust. (1889) 636 pro. syn. A, ovina; Bailey, Qld, FL 2 (1900) 529 pro

syn. A. ovina; Bitter, Bibl, Bot. 74 (1911) 66; Hichler, Suppl, Fl. §. Aust.

tame 169; A. ovina auct. non A. Cunn. in Field, Geog. Mem. of N.S, Wales

1825 ) 358; Fiv.M,, Key Syst. Vict, PL 2 (1885) 21, 1 (1888) 228 p.p.; Moore,

Handbk. Flora N.S, Wales (1895) 175 p.p.; Black, Fl, S, Aust, ed. 1.2 (1924)

266 p.p.; Ewart, Fl. Viet. (1930) 571 p.p.; Black Fl. S, Aust, ed, 2.2 (i948)

398 p.p,

Figures: Bitter, Bibl, Bot. 74 (1911) Figs Land 11 (sub nom. A. ovina subsp.

maxima); Black, Fl. S, Aust. ed. 1.2 (1924) Fig, 129 D-H, cd. 2.2 (1948)

Fig, 556 D-H (sub nom, A. ovina); Blackall, W. Aust, Wildils. 1 (1954) 182

(sub nom, A, ovina).

Herbaceous perennial (7-) 25-40 (-66) cm tall, stems erect or ascending,

glabrous or sparsely appresse pilose. Leaves narrowly obovate to oblaneeate,

imparipiniate, petiolate, stipulate, (1+5-) 8-15 (-20) em long, petiole and rachis

pilose with hairs as for stems, stipules linear to triangular, (1-0-} 2-0-4-0 (-6:0)

mm long and (0-5-) 1:0-3-0 mm wide, piabrons adaxially, sparsely appressed

pilose or almost glabrous abaxially. Leaflets 9-15 (-21) per leaf, more or Jess

98 A. E. ORCHARD

sessile, ovate to oblong, serrate with (6-) 8-12 (-16) serrations 4 of the lamina

width, (4-) 10-12 (-23) mm long and (3-) 6-10 (-13) mm wide, glabrous or very

sparsely pilose on the upper surface, the hairs on the lower surface confined to

the veins and/or the midrib. Sepals (4-) 5 (-6), sparsely pilose externally, 1-0-1:5

(-3-0) mm long and (0-5-) 1:0-1-5 mm wide; (2-3-) 45 (-8) stamens 1-0-2-0

(-5-0) mm long; 1 or rarely 2 styles 1-0-2-0 (-3-0) mm long. Fruit ovoid or with

longitudinal ridges formed by concrescence of some of the spine bases, glabrous

or spreading pilose, the spines unequal, barbed at the tip, g abrous or spreading

pilose for 4-% of their length, 3-8 longer than the others, 2-0-3-0 (-5-0) mm. long,

slender or with thickened conical bases; (4-6) 10-30 shorter, 0:5-2-0 mm long

slender and usually glabrous.

Distribution: Eastern New South Wales, Victoria, Tasmania and the coastal

regions of South Australia as far west as Streaky Bay. Several collections, including

the type, are known from S.W. Western Australia, but probably represent fairly

recent introductions,

Map 3. Distribution of A. echinuta var. echinata o, var, retrorsumpilosa © and var,

tylacantha +.

9A. var, echinata

Syu.; A, behriana Schidl,,, Linnaea 20 (1847) 660; [Typus: Behr, Sud-

Australien: auf hoher gclegenem Grasland haufig im Gebiet des Gawler

River, H, Behr, 1847. Holotypus: HAL! Isotypus: MEL 21939!] Hook, f. Fil.

Tasm. | (1856) 115 pro syn. A. ovina; Benth., Fl, Aust. 2 (1864) 433 pro syn.

A, ovina; Maiden, Useful Nat, Pl, Aust. (1889) 636 pro syn, A, ovina; Bailey,

Qld. Fl. 2 (1900) 529 pro syn. A, ovina; Bitter, Bibl. Bot. 74 (1911) 66;

Eichler, Suppl. Fl, $. Aust. (1965) 169.

A. ovina subsp. monachena Bitter var. monachena, Bibl, Bot. 74 (1911) 71.

[Typus: “‘Mount Koro’ (; locus in tabulis geographicis neque Australiae

neyue Tasmaniae eruendus) herb, Vindab! (sine collectoris nomine ).” Tolo-

Peo Korong, Oct. 14. W! Isotypus: Mount Korong. Oct. 14. MEL

21 }

A. ovina subsp. calviscapa Bitter, Bibl. Bot. 74 (1911) 70 p.p. [Typus: “Aus-

tralia verisimiliter septentrionalis; “Bunks of the Hawkesbury at Mutallin’

leg. Caley herb. Deless. Genev.! sub. nom. Ancistrum anserinifolium. herb.

THE ACAKNA OVINA A. CUNN. COMPLEX IX AUSTHALIA oy

Vindob! sine nom, et loco natali.” Lectotypus (Orchard): Caley. Nova

Hollandia, Ancistrum, W!] j

Plant (7-) 25-35 (-50) cm tall, leaves (4-) 7-12 (-20) cm long, stipules

triangular or linear, 1-5-2:5 (-5-0) mm long and 1-0-1-5 (-2-0) mm _ wide,

glabrous adaxially, appressed pilose abaxially, Leaflets (9-) 13-15 (-19) pe leaf

with §-13 serrations 4-3 of the lan fia width, or sometimes cut almost to the mid-

rib, (5-) 7-10 (-15) mm long and (4-) 5-8 (-10) mm wide. Spike elongate, inter-

rupted, unbranched, Sepals 5, almost glabrous, 1-0-1-5 ( -2-5) mm long and

)-7-1-0 mm wide; (2-) 45 stamens, 1-0-2-0 (-3-0) mm long; style solitary

1-0-1-5 mm long. Fruit more: or less angular, glabrous, spines unequal, 3-6 {-8)

longer than the others, 2-0-2°5 (-4:0) mm long with more or less thickened bases,

(8-) 20-30 spines shorter, usually slender, 1-0-2-0 mm long.

Distribution: S.E. New South Wales, central and eastern Victoria and South

Australia from the Mt. Lofty Ranges to Streaky Bay.

Specimens examined:

Soota Avstnaiaa: Eichler 17050, Brown Hill Creck (AD); Pichler 18758, Angaston

(AD): Green 659, Clarendon (AD): Orchard 19, Chain of Ponds (AD); Richards, Lake

Hamilton, Oct, 1882 (AD); Richards, Port Lincoln-Streaky Bay, 1883 (MEL); Tepper,

Yorke Peninsula (MEL).

New Sour Watrs: Rodway, Braidwood, 3,v.1985 (NSW).

Vicronra: Howitt 642. Dry Cully Creek (MEL); Muir 3340, Yea district (MEL).

Western Avstnaita: Gardner, Northam, 5.x,1942 (PERTH).

2B. var, robusta Orchard, var, nov.

Valde similari var. echinatae, sed in stipulis 3-0 mm longis, spica plerumque

famosa prope basin, staminibus (3-) 6-8, 3-4 mm longis praccipue differt.

Typus: C. R. Alcock 1666, 22.x,1967, South Austrulia. Southern Eyre Penin-

sula. Hundred of Koppio. Road between sections 65 and 215, (Hundred of

Koppio is ca. 30 km. north of Port Lincoln.) Huey as; AD 96807170!

Ercet plant, 30-45 cm tall, leaves 10-17 an long, oblanceate, stipules 3-0-6:0

mm long and 1-5 mm broad. Leaflets 13-17 per leaf, 10-12 mm Jong and 8-11 mm

wide, more or less glabrous on the upper surface and with the hairs confined ta

the midrib and veins below. Spike branched at base or unbranched, but then with

clusters of flowers in the axils of the upper leaves, Sepals 5, more or less glabrous,

2:0-2-5 mm long and 1-0-1-3 mm wide: (3-) 6-8 stamens, 2-5-3-5 mm long; the

fruit more or less angular, glabrous, spines uhequal, 4 long, 15-25 shorter. This

variety differs from var, echinata in its longer more numerous stamens, the larger

stipules and the tendence of the spike towards the branching form.

Distribution: The four specimens cited below are the only ones known of this

varicly,

Specimens examined:

Sourn Austratia: Alcock 1666. Hundred of Koppio (AD); Typus,

Victonra:= Eckert, Wimmera, 1890 (MEL): Muir 1231, Kanya (MEL).

Westexn AustRAuiar Helms, Leederville, July 1997 (PERTH).

ia)

var. subglabricalyx (Bitter) Orchard, eamb. ney,

Basionym: Acaena ovina subsp. capitulata var. subglabricalyx Bitter, Bib),

Bot. 74 (1911) 70. [Typus: “Plantae Mullerianae, Nov. Holland. meridional.”

Holotypus: W!]

Syn.: A. ovina subsp. maxima Bitter, Bibl. Bot. 74 (1911 ) 66 (excluding var.

retrorsumpilosa Bitter), [Typus: none designated, ]

100 A. BE. ORCHARD

A. ovina subsp. capitulata Bitter, Bibl. Bot. 74 (1911) 70 (excluding var.

subglabricalyx Bitter). [Typus: “Australia occidentalis: Swan River, leg.

Hiigel nr. 132, Herb. Vindob.” Holotypus: W!]

fs poine subsp. calviscapa Bitter, Bibl. Bot. 74 (1911) 70 p-p. Quoad specim,

ency;!

A. pennatula Gandoger, Bull, Soc. Bot. France 59 (1912) 706, [Typus:

“Australia in provincia Victoria (C, Walter).” Holotypus: LY!]

Plant (14-) 25-40 (-55) cm_ tall, stems sparsely appressed pilose, leaves (5-)

8-15 cm long, petiole hairs as for stems, stipules more or less triangular, (1+0-)

2-0-3-5 (-4-0) mm long and 0°5-1-5 mm _ wide with hairs confined to the edges.

Leaflets 10-15 (-17) per leaf with (6-) 8-12 (-14) serrations % to 4 of the lamina

width, (6-) 8-12 (-23) mm long and (4-) 6-10 (-13) mm wide, almost or com-

pletely glabrous on the upper surface, the hairs confined to the veins on the lower

surface, Spike unbranched; scpals (4-) 5, 1:5-2-0 mm long and (0-5-) 0+8-1-2

mm wide, almost glabrous; stamens 4-5, 1-0-2-0 mm long; styles solitary, rarely

2, (1:0-) 1-5-2-0 mm long, Fruit ovoid, longitudinal ridges absent, spreading

pilose, the spines unequal, slender without thickened bases, 3-6 larger ones

2-0-3-0mm long, (4-8-) 20-30 shorter ones 1-0-2-0 mm long all spreading pilose

in the lower ¥-4 of their length. This variety is intermediate between A. echinata

and A. agnipila in its fruit characters and possibly is the result of hybridization

between them.

Distribution: $.E. New South Wales, southern Victoria and Tasmania, One

specimen is also known from 5,W. Western Australia.

Selection of specimens examined:

New Sours Waves: Constable, Bungonia Cayes, 23.1.1956 (NSW); Fraser, Camden,

Oct. 1934 (NSW); Green, Bega, Mar. 1949 (NSW); Patterson. Albury. Oct, 1916 (NSW);

Rodway, Snowball, 13.iv.1941 (NSW); Whitfeld, Kiandra, Mar. 1924 (NSW).

Victoria: Mueller, neat Melbourne (W); Williamson, Hawkesdale, Nov, 1901 (NSW).

Tasacansa: Bufton, Port Arthur, 1892 (MEL), Rodway, Risdon, Oct. 1898 (NSW);

Rodway, River Jordan, Nov. 1898 (NSW) L.G.S. Herb, Gunn 87. Jaumeeston (NSW).

Western Austracta: Oldfield, Cape Naturaliste (MEL),

Map 4. Distribution of A. echinata var. robusta o and yar, subglabricalyx ©,

THE ACAENA OVINA A. CUNN. COMPLEX IN AUSTRALLA 101

2D. var, retrorsumpilosa (Bitter) Orchard, comb. nov,

Basionym; A, ovina subsp. maxima var. retrorsumpilosa Bitter, BibL Bot 74

(2911) 69, [Typus: “Victoria; Braybrook leg, Weindorfce.” Holotypus: W

(6980, “Die Pilanze links”)!]

Syn.: A. ovina subsp. monachena var, laxissima Bitter, Bibl. Bot, 74 (1911)

Tl, [Typus: “Queensland; Kangaroo Point. leg. Spikerman herb. Florent.”

Holotypus: FI!

Plant (9-) 25-40 (-66) em fall, stems glabrous or sparsely appressed pilose,

the leaves (1-5-) 8-15 (-20) cm long, the petiole and rachis indumeritum 4s for

the stems, stipules triangular, (1-0-) 2-0-3-0 (-4-0) mm long and (0:5-)

1-0-2-Omm wide, glabrous adaxially, sparsely appressed pilose abaxially. Leaflets

9-15 (-21) per leaf, with (7-) 10-12 (-16) serrations ¥-% of the lamina width, (4-)

8-12 (-20) mm long and (3-) 6-8 (-13) mm wide, glabrous or very sparsely

pilose on the upper surface, the hairs on the lower surface confined to the midrib

and/or veins. Spike unbranched; sepals (4-) 5, (1-0-) 1-52-0 mm long and

(0-5-) 0-7-1-5 mm wide, more or fess glabrous; (2-3-) 4-5 stamens, 1-0-2-0

(-3-0) mm long; styles solitary, rarely 2, (1-0-) 1-5-2-0 mm long. Fruit strongly

longitudinally ridged, almost obpyramidal, densely spreading pilose, the spines

unequal, spreading pilose in the lower 3-4 of their length, (3-) 68 (-12) longer

with swollen bases forming ridges, 2-0-4-0 (-5-0) mm long, (4-6-) 20-30 shorter,

often slender, 1-0-2-0 mm Jong.

Distribution: Mainly South Australian, confined largely ta the Mt. Lofty

Ranges, but also recorded for Yorke and Eyre Peninsulas, In Victoria it grades

inte var, subglabricalyx. Known also from Tasmania and S.W. Western Australia,

the latter probably as a result of recent introductions,

Selection of specimens examined:

Sour Ausrratia: Ising, Stirling West, 6X06! ( AD); Orchard 13, Carey Gully

rere Symon 4433, Mortlock Experimental Station (ADW): Tepper, Yorke Peninsula. 1879

Vierorta; Croves 526, St. Albans (MEJ.); Morrison. Werribeo, 24.ix.1892 (PERTH);

Symon 1645, Horsham (ADW),

Tasmania; Rodway, Launceston, Dee, 1915 (NSW); Simson, George’s Bay (BRI),

Western Austuauia: Cloland, Cooxeberry Hill, Aug, 1908 (NSW); Oldfield. Kalzan

River (MEL).

2E. var, tylacantha Orchard, var. nov.

Valde similari var, retrorsumpilosae, sed in habitu robustiore, spica,

plerumque ramosu basin versus, stipulis (2:0-) 4-0-5-0 (-6-0) mm longis et

staminibus plerumque 6 et 3-0-5:0 mm_ longis.

Typus: A. E. Orchard 1835, 21,xi.1968, South Australia. Mt. Lofty Ranges.

Forest Range, ca. [9 km east of Adelaide, Holotypus. AD 96905096 ! isotypi:

B! K! L! MEL! uc},

Plants 25-35 (-45) cm tall, stems almost glabrous, hairs appressed, Leaves

(6-) 8-14 (-20) em. long, the petiole and rachis sparsely appressed pilose, the

stipules linear to triangular (2-0-) 4.0.5-0 (-6-0) mm long and 1-02-60 om

wide, glabrous adaxially, sparsely appressed pilose abaxially. Leaflets (11-)

13-17 (-19) per leaf with 8-12 serrations 4-4 of the width of the lamina, (7-)

10-15 (-18) mm long and (4-) 6-9 (-11) mm wide, glabrous or sparsely appressed

pilose on the upper surface, the hairs below confined to the veins Zork midrib,

Spike usually branched at the base, or at least with clusters of flowers in tho

axils of the upper leaves. Sepals (4-~) 5 (-6), 2-0-3-0 mm long and 1:0-1-5 mi

10%, A, E. ORCHARD

wide, sparsely pilose on the outside; stamens (4-) 6, 3:0-5-0 mm Tong; style 1,

rarely 2, 1-5-2+0 (-3-0) mm long. Fruit as for var, tetrorsumpilosa; with 3-4 longi-

tudinal ridges formed by concrescence of the thickened bases of 3-6 spines

2:0-3-0:mm long, with (6-) 10-20 (-30) shorter spines 0-5-2:0mm long between

the lurger ones.

Distribution; Confined almost entircly to the Mt. Lofty Ranges near Adelaide.

One specimen is known from Eyre Peninsula, one from $,W. Victoria, and one

from S.E. New South Wales.

Specimens examined:

Sounr AustrAuiA: Aleock BOS. Yallunda Flat (AD); Croickshank. 8.x.1967, Kershrook

(AD); Eichler 17653, Hahndorf (AD): Koch 838, Mt. Lofty (NSW); Kuchel 1254, MU.

Lotty (AD): Orchard (833, Basket Range (AD); Spooner 222, Torrens Gurge (AD); Tate.

Golden Grove, Oct, 1878 (AD),

Vicresia: D'Alton 17, Dimboola (NSW); Moeller, Austral, felix (HAL),

New Soutee Waras: Greenup, 7,i4,1962, Kiandra (Soil Conservation Herb. Coama),

3. Acaena ovina A, Cunningham in B. Field, Geog. Mem. of New South Wales

(1825) 358. [Typus “Frequent on moist lands, Bathurst, cte.” Lectotypus:

That plant attached to the label “Aceena ovina C, Freqt. on rather moist

lands. Western Country” plus the flower spike mounted on the same sheet

und obviously belonging to the same specimen, (K, non vidi, sve note

below )]; Hook. f., FI. Tasm. 1 (1856) 115 p.p.; Benth,, Fl. Aust. 2 (1864)

433 p.p.; Buchanan, Trans. N.Z. Inst. 3 (1871) 208 p.p. FvM., Census 1

( 1880} 47 p.p., 2 (1889) 82 pp. FvM., Key Syst. Vict. Pl. 2 (1885) 21 1

(1888) 228 p.p.; Maiden, Usetul Nat. Pl. Aust, (1889) 636 4d Woolls,

Handbk. Fl. N.S.W, (1893) 175 p.p.; Bailey, Qld, Fl. 2 (1% Ps90 P-P.;

Rodway, Tas. Fl. (1903) 44 pp; Bailey, Weeds Qld, (1906) 49 pp.

Cheeseman, Mun. N.Z. Fl. ed. 1 (1906) 1073 p.p. Bitter, Bibl. Bot. 74 (1911)

BS-72 et al., p.p.; Maiden, Weeds N.S.W. 1 (1920) 22 p.p.; Black, FI. §. Aust.

ed. 1. 2 (1924) 266 p.p.; Ewart, FI. Viet. (1930) 571 p.p; Cockeyge and

Allan, Ann. Bot. 48 (1334) 94 p.p.; Black, FI, 8. Aust. ed, 2, 2 (1948) 398 p.ps

Blackall, W. Aust, Wildflowers 1 (1954) 182 p.p.; Curtis, Stud. Fl. Tas, (1956)

172 pp; N.S.W. Dept. Agric., Weeds (1962) 40 p.p.; Eichler, Suppl. Black's

FL 5. Aust, (1965) 169.

Herbaceous perennial (11-) 25-60 em tall, stems erect or ascending,

moderately pubescent, the hairs usually spreading, sometimes mote or less

appressed. Leaves (3-) 8-12 (-20) em long, imparipinnate. the petiole indumen-

tum as for the stems, stipules triangular, lanceolate or linear, (1-0-) 2:0-3-3

(-5-0) mm long, 0-5-1-0 (-2-0) mm wide, usually glabrous udaxially, more or

less densely appressed pilose abaxially, Leaflets (11-) 17-23 (-29) per leat, (5-)

8-12 (-22) mm Jong and (3-) 5-10 mm wide, with 10-14 serrations per lvatlet

extending 3-% of the way to the midrib. Moderately appressed pilose on the upper

surface, more or less densely pilose over the entire lower surface. Sepals. 4-5,

liglitly pilose or almost glabrous externally, 1-0-2° mm long, 0-6-1'5 mm wide,

3-4 (-5) stamens, L-0-2'0 (-4-0) mum long, style 1, 1-0-1-5 mm long. Fruit ovoid,

not ribbed, spines unequal, 3-6 of length 2-0-4-0 mm, 15-30 of Tength 0-5-2-0

mm all lacking thickened bases.

Distribution; S.E, Queensland, eastern New South Wales, $.E. Victoria

(Gippsland), northern Tasmania and S.W. Western Australia, A. ovina s.l. has

also been recorded as an introduction in New Zealand. Its exact taxonomic stalus

has not been determined as no material was available for comparison.

THE ACAENA OVINA A, CUNN. COMPLEX IN AUSTRALIA 103

The choice of a lectotype is necessary as no single collection in Kew bears

a label matching the type citation. The above is chosen as the locality is close to

that cited, is in Cunningham’s handwriting and matches the description fairly

well. The assistance of Mr. A. B, Court, who examined the type material in Kew,

is gratefully acknowledged.

3A. var, ovina

Plant (11-) 25-60 cm tall; leaves (3-) 10-20 cm long, stipules triangular to

linear, 2:0-3-5 (-5-0) mm_ long, 0-7-1-0 mm _ wide, pubroas adaxially,

appressed pilose abaxially. Leaflets (11-) 17-23 per leaf, 10-22 mm long,

(3-) 5-10 mm wide, with (8-) 10-14 serrations. Fruit and spines completely

glabrous, spines unequal, 3-6 longer (2:0-3-0 mm), (6-) 20-30 shorter (0-5-

1-5 mm),

Distribution: S.E. Queensland, eastern New South Wales and S$.E. Victoria

in the Gippsland area.

Specimens seen;

QueENsLanp; F. M. Bailey. Stanthorpe, Dec. 1875 (BRI); Everist and Webb 1312.

Applethorpe (BRI).

New South Waxes: Blakely, Bowen Park, Oct. 1906 (NSW); Boorman, Tooma, Oct.

1916 (NSW); Hamilton, Mt. Victoria, Jan. 1915 (NSW); Johnson, Braidwood, 9.xii,1950

(NSW); Milne-Curran, Upper Macquarie River, Oct. 1884 (MEL); Bauerlen 164, Tin-

giringi Mountains (MEL).

ViororiA: Jephcott, Hume River, 1883 (MEL); Rodway 2667, between Bairnsdale and

Sale (NSW).

Map 5, Distribution of A. ovina var. ovina o, var. velutina ® and A. X ansérovinga +,

3B. var, velutina Orchard, var. nov.

Valde similari yar. ovinae, sed im fructu dense patenti pubescenti, pilis

interdum baso spinarum praecipue differt. Spinae fructus inaequales, omnino

graciles, glabrae pro parte maxima.

Typus: Hj. Eichler 18973; Australia, New South Wales, Australian Alps.

Kosciusko State Park. Happy Jacks Plains [north of Happy Jacks Road, west

of Tolbar Road; ca. 20 km. west-south-west of Adaminaby]. In Eucalyptus

forest near the hut of Parks and Gardens (Canberra), 311.1967. Holotypus

in AD (96714081) ! isotypiin L! NSW ! UC |.

Mild A. KE. ORCHARD

Perennial herb (10-) 30-50 cm tall, Jeaves (3-) 8-12 cm long, stipules tri-

angular to linear, (1-0-) 2-0-4-0 (-5-0) mm long, (0-5-) 1:0-1:5 (-2°0) mm

wide, glabrous or sparsely appressed pilose adaxially, more denscly appressed

pilose abaxially, LeaHets (11-) 17-23 (- ) per leaf, sparsely appressed pilose om

the upper surface, more or Iess densely pilose below, (5-) 8-12 (-22) inm long,

(2-) 5-8 (-10) mm wide, with (7-) 10-14 (-15) serrations extending 4-2 ¢4) of the

way to the midrib. Frait ovoid, lacking longitudinal ridges, densely spreading

pilose, hairs sometimes extending to the extreme base o the spines, otherwise

spines glabrous, all slender, unequal, 3-6 of length 2+4-4-0 mm, 15-30 (-50) of

Jength 0-5-2:0 mm,

Distribution: Great Dividing Range from S.E. (Guts and to the Snowy

Mountains-Gippsland area, and northern Tasmania in the vicinity of Launceston.

One record is Ion from each of §.W. Westen) Australia and §,E, South Australia

possibly introduced,

Selection of apecimens examined:

Sourn AvgTRALIA: Wahl, Lake Bonney, 1892 (MEI).

QurENsiaNnv: Hickey 19, Marylands (MEL); Jolson, Glen Aplin, 4xi.1951 (NSW);

Tink, Stanthorpe, 10.1901 (BRI).

New Sourw Waues: Kichler 18974, Happy Jacks’ Plains (AD); Johnson, Bowral, 153i.1940

(NSW); Johnson and Constable, Gaird’s Cap, Liverpool Range, 31..1954 (NSW); Thorn,

Wugea Wagen, 1886 (MEL).

Vicrorta: Muir 1017, Mt, Wellington { MEL), Muir 4570, Bryees Plain (MEL); Wilson

56, Albury (MEV).

Tasnranza: Anon. ex Herb, Sonder (in part) (ME) 21943); Radway, River Jordan,

Nov, 1898 (NSW); 1.G.S. Merh. Gunn 87, Launceston (NSW),

Wrerrnn AustTHALIA: C. Andrews XLT, Helena River (PERTH).

4 Acaena ™ anseroyina Orchard, hyb. sp, nov. (A. anserinifolia * A. avina sl.)

Acaena ovina var. ambigua Kirk, Student's Flora of New Zealand (1899) 132;

[Typus: “Near Wellington.” nv. prob. J. Buchanan, on Mount Victoria,

Wellington. cf. Buchanan, Trans. N. Zeal. Inst. 8 (1871) 208.| Bitter, Bibl.

Bot. 74 (1911) 72.

Acaene sanguisorbue subsp, oleasenitens Bitter, Bibl, Bot, 74 (1911) 257.

[Typus; none cited.] Figures: Bitter, l.c. figures 71, 72a, 72b.

Species hybrida, intermedia in characteribus pro parte maxima inter A.

anserinifoliam ct A. ovinam 5,1, Caules erecti, non repentibus, folia obovata

wngusta ad oblanceata, imparipinnata, petiolis, stipulis; stipulae 1-3 fd. Flores in

capitulo globoso similari A, anserinifoliae dispositi, sed floribus. aliquot in caulem

sub capilulam ct in axillas foliorum superorum. Fructus globosus, obovoideus vel

obconicus, 1°5-3-0 mm longus et 1-5-2: mm Jatus, dense patens pilosus; spine

omnes graciles, + glabrae vel interdum pilosae prope Basi inequales, 3-6

matiniares 2°0-5-0 mm longue, 10-20 parviores 0:5-2-0 mm longue. Typus:

A. E. Orchard 1963, 11.71.1969. Victoria, Grampians. Dwyer’s Creck on Halls Gap-

Dunkeld Road ea. 32 km north of Dunkeld, [olotypus: AD 96926074 ! isntypi:

B!L! MEL! UC}.

Intermediate in most characteristics between Acaena anserinifolla and

Acaéna ovina sl. More upright, clump-forming plant than A. anserinifolie,

lacking the creeping stems of this species. Stems erect, 20-40 om tall, glabrous

ur extremely sparsely pilose with appressed hairs. Leaves 6-13 em long, the

petiole and rachis sparsely pilose with appressed hair, the stipules 1-3 Ad, (2-0-)

3:0-6-0 mm long and 1-0-2-0 mm wide, glubrous adaxially, appressed pilose

abaxially, Leaflets 11-17 per leaf more or less obovate, oblique at hase, usually

bright green on the upper surface, silver glaucous below, with (9) 14-16

shallow serrations, (8-) 12-14 (-19) mm Jong and 5-10 mm wide. Upper

THE ACAENA OVINA A. CUNN, COMPLEX IN AUSTRALIA Int

surface of leaflets glabrous, lower surface with the hairs confined to the veins or

spreading to the mesophyll. Flowers mainly in a globular head similar in that

of A. anserinifolia but with a few flowers scattered along the flowering stem

below the head and in the axils of the uppermost leaves. Sepals 4-5, 152-0

mm long and 0:6-1-0 mm wide, glabrous or pilose on the outer face; stamens

25, cream, ted or purple. 1:0-2-0 mm long. Fruit globular. obovaid ur ob-

conical, 1:5-3:0 mm long and 1-5-2-0 mm wide, densely spreading pilose: apines

unequal, slender 3-6 longer ones in the upper part of the fruit 2-0-5-0 mm

long and glabrous or pilose only towards their bases, 10-20 shorter, 0-5-2-) mm

lony, glabrous.

This hybrid appears to be quite common wherever the A. anserinifolia

complex contacts members of the A. ovinn complex. The female parent i all

cases examiued in the field seems to he A, anserinifolia, owing largely to its

slightly earlier flowering period and the protcrogyny usual in the genous. In

South Australia and Victoria the male parent, in those cases where this could

be determined with any degree of certainty, seemed to he A. echinata var.

retrorsumpilosa. In New South Wales, and probably in some cases, Victoria

and South Australia, other members of the A, ovina complex must be actiny as

male parent, but the resulting hybrids are indistinguishable from each other

and are therefore lumped under this one nume. A, * anserovina can he tairly

easily distinguished from A. ansevinifalia, with which it is often found rowing

in close proximity, by its more erect hahit, the flowers or fruits on the stem

below the head, and the shorter spines,

Distribution: Probably occurs where A. anserinifolia and the A. ovina eom-

plex come in contact. Known from south-caster New South Wales, Vietoria,

Tasmania and South Australia.

Specimens seen;

Soutw Ausrwaisa: Pachler 17079, Belair (AD); Bichler 17676, Naracourte (AD): Ising,

281921, Mt. Lofty (AD); Tsing. 14.xi.1935, Penuly (AD); Jackson 335, Middle River.

Kl. (AD): Orchard 32, Millbrook Reservoir’ (AD): Orchard 85, Belair (AD); Orcharel

1829, Montacute (AD).

nsw" Soumn Waes: Galbraith, Kiandra. 29.0 1989 (AD); Rodway. Nerriva, U7, (932

(NSW),

Vierowa; Cowitt, Gippsland, 1882 (MEL); Muir 2762. Mt. Buller (MEL): Ovehard

2012, Moleside Creek (AD).

Tasmanta: Story, Tasmania (MEI),

HYBRIDIZATION

The genus Acaena, in common with several other members of the fumily

Rosaceae, is well known for hybridization at all taxonomic levels.

Bitter (1926), reparted a generic hybrid between Acaena argentea and

Margyricarpus seétosus found by Skotisberg in three places on Mas v2 Tierra in

the Juan Fernandez group of islands. ‘The hybrid was a weak, ineomspieuoys

plant to which he gave the name Mareyrucaena skottshergii,

Within Acaena there ate many reports of inter- and infra-specific: hybrids,

The first of these was by Buchanan (1871 ). He suspected that a form of AA.

anserinifolia in New Zealand, in which there were a few scattered fruits below

the globular head was in fact a hybrid between A. ovina and A, anserinifolia,

This plant was described by Kirk (1899) as A, ovina var, ambigua, and another

by Bitter (1911) as A. senguisorbae subsp. oleosenitens.

In his monograph Bitter devoted 26 pages to a discussion of hybrid Acaenae.

Of the 16 hybrid taxa which he described, 15 involved a variety of A. anserini-

folia as at least one of the parents, All of the hybrids were raised in cultiva-

106 A. E. ORCHARD

tion in Bremen Botanic Garden, which unfortunately contained no plants of

A, ovina. Many of Bitter’s hybrids were later recorded in natural populations

in New Zealand by Cockayne and Allan (1934). They listed 12 naturally-

occurring hybrid Acaenae, including those of A. ovina with A, microphylla, A.

novae-zealandiae, and 2 varieties of A. anserinifalia.

Dawson (1960) made a comprehensive study of naturally-occurring hybrids

between A. anserinifolia and 2 varieties of A, nooae-sealandiae near Wellington.

Efe found that the postulated hybrids showed much more variation than the

presumed parents, and that the seeds of the F, generation showed a decrease

in fertility compared with the parents. Owing to protogyny in all three species

and the earlier flowering period of A, anserinifolia, this species acted as male

parent in most cases,

Hybridization almost certainly occurs between the different Australian

forms and varieties of A. anserin{fotia but the investigation of this is outside

the scope of the present study. ¢ long-recognized hybrid between the A.

unserinifolia and A, ovina groups is here given species status for the first time.

This hybrid species, A, “ anserovina, can be easily recognized by the infruc-

tescence having several fruits on the stem below the globular head. The fruits

may be more or less 4 angled as in A. anserinifolia, or almost globular, but the

number of spines which is 4 in A, anserinifolia may he reduced to 2 or increased

to ahout 6, but in any case the spines are shorter, The body of the fruit bears

small spines as in A. ovina s.l. In the fruits of A. anserinifolia the outer layer of

the receptacle is a loose papery pilose shell which is easily removed to show

the bases of the spincs appressed to the inner woody layer of the receptacle,

while in A. ovina s.J, the inner and outer receptacle layers and the spine bases

are ull fused together, In A, X anserovina the receptacle is of the fused

A. ovina type. In habit, the hybrid is intermediate between the parents, being

neither as prostrate and creeping as A. anserinifolia nor forming such upright,

compact clumps as the members of the A, ovina group. An examination of the

fruits revealed that in every case the seed had aborted.

Within the A. ovina cormplex hybridization is also quite common. In fact,

A. owina §, str. and A. echinata var. subglabricalyx are probably hybrid in origin,

resulting from recent contact between A. echinata aud A. egnipila. Other

varieties within these latter two species also grade into each other to some

extent probably as a result of several crosses and backcrosses in wild popula-

tions. A comparison of A. agnipila, A. ovina and A, echinata is made in Table 1.

TABLE |

Comparison of A. agnipila, A. ovina and A. echinata

A. agnipila A. ovine A-echinata

Stem and potiols dense and spreading 4 dense and subappressed sparse and appressed

indumentum

Leaded indumentum, moderately densely pilose glabrous to moderately — glabrous

wpper surface pilose

Leafet indumentum, denaaly andeventy pilose densely andevenly pilose pilose only on mitjor

lower surface veins

Leaflets por leaf (0) 17-28 (27) (11-) 17-28 (-29) 0-15 (-21)

Serrationa porleallas (te) P2015 (—18) 10-14 (6-)'8—12 (-16)

Fruit shape ovuid, notlongitndinally ovoid, not longitudinally obpyrimidal, long!-

Tibbad ribbed todinally ribbeL

(except var.

subglabricalyx)

Spines equal, all slender unequal, all slender unequal, larger ones

swollen at base (oxcept

var. subglabnicalyx)

TO ——

THE ACAENA OVINA A, CUNN, COMPLEX IN AUSTRALIA LOT

HISTORY AND RELATIONSHIPS OF THE AUSTRALIAN SPECIES.

Tn 4 discussion of possible origins af and relationships within the Australian

species of Acaena, the tollowing points seem relevant:

1. The major centre of diversification of the genus is in South America

(127 species; R. Good, 1933). ‘Two species occur in South Africa, about 14 in

New Zealand and 6 in Australia, About 4-6 more are scattered among Various

sub-Antarctic islands,

2, The Australian and New Zealand species fall into several different

sections and sub-sections of the genus as sub-divided by Bitter (1911). Farther-

more, all have closely allied species in South America, the affinities of the A,

avina group being with South America. with no close relatives in New Zealand,

3. Long distance dispersal of Acaens fruits in the down of young sea hirds

such as peers (Carlquist, 1965), and shorter distance dispersal in the Fury

of animals is well documented (Summary: Ridley, 1930),

#, In Australia the different species are all confined to cool temperate

regions with average annual rainfall of above ahout 13-15 inches.

>, Of the Acueng ovina complex, Acaena echinata is mainly confined to the

Mt. Lofty Ranges in Sauth Austrulia and the Grampians in Victoria, A. agniplla

is commionest in the Great Dividing Range in New South Wales and eastern

Victoria, and A. ovtna s. str. eccupies ap intermediate position,

6. There is an intergradation between A, echinata and A. agnipila in some

places, and the oceurrence of intermediate plants suggests hybridization, Some

of these intermediates can be referred to A. ovina §. str, and others to one or

other of the other two species.

7. Hybrids oceur between A, ansertnifolia (usually the fernale parent} and

Species of the A, ovina complex. Tho male parent in the cases examined has

always been A, echinata var. retrorsumpilosa, but turther investigation may show

A. agnipila also taking part.

8. Records of Acaena in Western Australia are widely scattered in time,

loeation and in species and variety, suggesting recent introduction of the various

taxa on several occasions,

The affinity of the Australian complex with South American species implies

that it had its origin in Australia as an introduction irito eastern Anstralia from

South America, Furthermore, the obvious close relationship between the

species wilhin the complex supports the postulated introduction of a single

taxon with subsequent diversification.

Present climatic preferences suggest that the parent species spread xlong

the mountain systems until halted to the north in whist is now southern Queens-

land by the increasingly tropical climate, and in the west by the aridity of Fyre

Peninsula and the Nullarbor Plain.

Crocker and Wood (1947) sugested that the onset of the presont arid

conditions in South Australia oceurred 5,000 fo 9,000 years ago. Its efficient

method of dispersal in the fur of animals ensured 4 fairly rapid spread of the

colenixing Acaena species after ils initial establishment, Thus the date of

original introduction is probably no more than 10,000 years ago and possilsly

much less. Along with this expansion into new ureas, the original species under-

went diversification, with A, echinata evolving in the west and A. agnipila in

the east. Besides diverging morphologically, the species developed a diflerence

in ability to hybridize with A, anserinifolia, although yetaining the ahility to

cross with each other.

108 A. E, ORCHARD

During this period of expansion and diversification the original colonizing

species seems to haye disappeared. The only extant group that could possibly

represent this ancestor is A, ovina s. str., which occupies a position intermediate

in morphology and geographical distribution between A. agnipila and A, echinata-

That this is the case, however, is unlikely, if one assumes that the derivative

species evolved by better adaptation to their new environment. If the original

species managed fo successfully withstand the competition of its spreading cleri-

vatives, then one could expect that it would also have survived in its country

of vrigin, particularly as the time involved is relatively short. A. ovina s, str.

does not occur in South America, and the differences between it and its South

Amcrican relatives are as great or greater than those between the Australian

species. Furthermore, the occurrence of isolated plants of A. ovina 5. str.

wherever A. echinata and A, agnipila come together suggests that a hybrid origin

for this specics is more likely than its heing the ancestral species.

Stock and fodder movements resulting from European settlement, combined

with the creation of disturbed habitats such as roads and pastures over wide

areas, and the weedy tendencies of the group, resulted in the rapid spread of

A, aynipila and A. echinata and their subsequent contact. The result was the

formation of large hybrid swarms, particularly in southern and central New

South Wales. Some of these plants. formed the basis of Allan Cunningham's

description of A. evina. Eurvpean colonization also resulted in the transport at

members of the complex to Western Australia and New Zealand at an early

pateaat type specimen of A. echinata, for example, being collected near Perth

in 1830.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

My thanks are here expressed to the curators of the herbaria mentioned

earlier. who provided loan material for tis study; to Miss C. M. Eardley for

her advice and encouragement, and to Dr. Hj, Kichler for facilities provided

for the work at the State Herbarium of South Australia and for his valuable

ecomstructive criticism,

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Benimam, G., 1864, Flora Australiensis, Vol. 2 (Lonekm).

Hirren, G., L911, Die Gattung Acaena. Bibl. Bot, 742 1-336.

Boren, C., 1920. Hin Cattungsbastard zwischen Acaéna und Mareyricurpus: Marenracacne,

Fedde Repert. 17; 239-245,

Bucanan, J., I87L. Ona supposed hybrid Acuena, Trans. N. Zeal, Inst. 8: 208.

Cantar, §, J,, 1965. Island Life, (Carden City, NY.

Cranasso, A. pe, and ScunecutTenpar, D. F. L, Von, 1827, De plantis in expeditione specu-

Jatoria Romanzoffiana observitis. Lirmaea 2: 3O-

Critane, P., 1897. Du genre Acaenu. Sciences naturelles de YOuust: (uv).

Cockayer, TL. and Annan. TT. H,, 1934. An aunotated list of yroups of wild hybrids in the New

Zealand fora. Ann, Bot, 48; 24-25,

Cnocxen, BR, L., and Woon, J. G.. 1947. Some historical influences on the development of the

South Australian vegetation communities and their beariug on concepts and classification

in evology. Trans, BR. Soe. S. Aust, Th: 81-136,

Datwann. J. Ws. pl Natural Acuena hybrids in the vicinity of Wellington, Trans. KR, Soc. N.

eal. 88: 13-27.

Fiecp, B,, 1825. Geographical Memoirs of New South Wales by various hands. (Londan.)

Forsten, J. B., and Fousien, J. G. A. 1776, Charucteres Genenim Plantarum, quas in itinerc

ad insulas maris australis collegerunt, discripserunt, delinearunt annis 1772-75 ( Landen_}

Canvocen, M. 1912, Manipulus plantaram novaram praccipue Americac australintis, Bull.

Sue. Bot, France 59; 706-7.

Goo, at 1933. A geographical survey of the flora. of temperate South America, Ann. Bot, 47;

GH.

THE ACAENA OVINA A, CUNN, COMPLEX IN AUSTRALIA 1a9

Hooker, J. D., 1856: The botany of the Antarctic voyage, IU. Flora Tasmaniae 1: 114-115,

London,

a, T., 1899, The Student’s Flora of New Zealand. (Wellington. )

NEEs AB Esenzecx, C. G. D., 1844, Rosaceae in C. Lehmann, Plantae Preissianae 1: 95.

(Hamburg. ) ;

Ripey, H, N., 1930, The Dispersal of Plants throughout the World. (London. )

SCHLECHTENDAL, D, F. L., von, 1847. Bestimmung und Beschreibung der vom Dr. Behr in

Siidaustralien gesammelten Pflanzen. Linnaea 20: 660.

INDEX TO NAMES

(Bold designates new taxa, new combinations or hew names; italics indicate synonyms, )

Acaena L.

agnipila Gdgr, 92, 93, 94, 100, 106, 107, 108

yar. aequispina Orchard 93, 95, 96, 97

var. agnipila 93, 94, 95

var. protenta Orchard 93, 96, 97

var, tenuispica (Bitt.) Orchard 93, 95, 96

anserinifolia (Forst, et Forst. f,) Druce 93, 104, 105, 106, 107

* anserovina Orchard 93, 103, 104, 105, 106

argentea Ruiz et Pav, 105

behriana Schld. 91, 92, 93, 98

dumulosa Gdgr. 93

echinata Nees 91, 92, 93, 97, 100, 106, 107, 108

var. echinata 94, 98, 99

var. retrorsumpilosa (Bitt.) Orchard 92, 94, 98, 101, 102, 105, 107

var. robusta Orchard 94, 99, 100

var. subglabricalyx (Bitt.) Orchard 94, 99, 100, 101, 106

var, tylacantha Orchard 94, 98, 101

eupatoria Cham, et Schldl. 91, 92

microphylla Hook, £. 106

montana Hook. f, 93

montevidensis Hook. £. G1, 92

novae-zealandiae Kirk 106

ovina A. Cunn, 91, 92, 93, 102. 104. 105, 106, 107, 108

subsp. calviscapa. Bitt. 92. 98, 100

subsp. capitulata Bitt. 92. 100

var. subglabricalyx Bitt, 93. 99, 100

subsp. maxima Bitt. 92, 97, 99

var, retrorsumpilosa Bitt. 99. 101

subsp. monachena Bitt,

var. laxissima Bitt. 101

var, monachena 98

var, tenuispica Bitt, 95

subsp. nanella Bite, 93, 94

var. ambigua Kirk 104, 105

var, ovina 93, 103

var. velutina Orchard. » 93, 103

pennatula Gdegr. 93, 100

polycarpa Griseb, 92

var. brevifilamentosa_Bitt. 92

var. longifilamentosa Bitt. 92

sanguisorbae Vabl

subsp. oleoseni/eny Bitt, 104, 105

tasmanica Bitt. 93

tasmanica Gdgr. 93

Ancistrum Forst. et Forst. f,

anserinaefolium Forst. et Forst. £, 91

Margyracaena Bitt.

skottsbergii Bitt, 105

Margyricarpus Ruiz et Pav.

setosus Ruiz et Pay. LO5

SCORESBIA A NEW HYDROID GENUS FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN

WATERS

BY JEANETTE E. WATSON*

Summary

A new genus and species of hydroid, Scoresbia daidala from South Australian (Flindersian) waters

is described. Differences and affinities with related genera are discussed, and ecology noted.

SCORESBIA A NEW HYDROID GENUS FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN

WATERS

by Jeanerre E. Watson*®

(Communicated by §. A. Shepherd)

[Read 11 September 1969]

SUMMARY

A new genus and species of hydroid, Scoresbia daidala from South Australian

(Flindersian) waters is described. Differences and affinities with related genera are

discussed, and ecology noted.

Family HALECIIDAE Hincks, 1868

Genus Scorespta n.gen.

(Generic name, derived from a personal name)

DIAGNOSIS

Hydrotheca borne singly on a pedicel arising directly from a creeping stolon;

hydrotheca much the same diameter as the supporting pedicel and too small to

lodge the retracted hydranth; hydrothcca impunctate. Hydranth with a single row

of filiform tentacles, Nematothecae restricted to stolon. Reproductive zooid a

fixed sporosac.

Type species; Scoresbia daidala usp.

GENERIC RELATIONSHIPS

The new genus Scoresbia differs from all other sporosac and nematothecae

bearing haleciid genera in possessing a constantly simple unbranched pedicellate

stem and nematothecae seated on the stolon at the base of the stem. It shows

some affinities with Phylactotheca Stechow 1913, particularly P. armata Stechow

1924 in the shape of the hydrophores, lack of punctae and heavily ridged stem;

with some sypecies of Ophiodissa Stechow 1919, in the lack of differentiation of

the base of the hydrophore from the pedicel, and general size, e.g, O. mirabilis

(Hincks 1868) and with the aberrant O. carchesium Fraser 1914 which has nema-

tothecae scattered an the stolon. (The hydrophores in this species, however, are

subscssile, and the gonosome is unknown. )

Blackburn 1938 united the three sporosac and nematothecae bearing haleciid

genera Ophiodes Hincks 1866, Diplocyathus Allman 1888, and Ophiodissu

Stechow 1919 in the single genus Hydrodendron. Hincks 1874, This was followed

by Millard (1957), Ralph (1958), and Rees and Thursfeld (1965). Vervoort

(1959), however, retained the genus Hydrodendron for those forms lacking

nematotheeae, and assigned to Ophiodissu those forms with protective structures

surrounding the nematophores.

Blackburn considered the validity of Phylactotheca to he doubtful but allowed

it to stand because of the campanulate shape of the hydrophore, ditferentiation of

the hydrophore from the supporting pedicel and lack of the marginal ring of

puncta. He considered the shape and disposition of the nematothecae, used by

* 74 Nimmo Street, Essendon. Victoria,

Trans, Roy. Soc, 8, Aust, (1969), Vol. 93:

ibe JEANE NE EK. WATSON

Steehow as a basis for division of these genera, to be of little value, Nevertheless,

the presence of nemutothecae on the pedicel below the hydrophore in some piirts

of the colony at least, has long been accepted by authors as a diagnostic characte,

Thus, Hydrodendron, Ophiodissa and Phylactetheca as. generally understood,

accommodate forms having shallow to deeply campanulate hydrephores, some-

times with a marginal ring of puncta. Nematothecae ranging from bell shaped to

tubular are normally situated on the hydrothecal pedicel but may be additionally

scattered on stem and xtulon. Also, by definition, these genera relate only to

branched forms (that is, those forms normally bearing at least two separate

hydrophores on a stem) which may be either monosiphonic or fasicled (Leloup

1930, -p. 6). However, in some species it is not unusual to find single hydrophares

arising directly from the stolon (Millard 1958, p. 186) but these are probably

young sterns in the developmental stages and are always found interspersed among

mature branched stems.

In summary, although the retention of the genera Ophiodissa, Hydrodenelron

and Phylactotheca clears up to some extent the nomenclatural difficulties sur-

rounding the sporosac and nematothecae bearing haleciid genera, a review of this

vroup is indicated, Whilst showing some affinities with these genera, Scoreshia

bears no cluse eclationship to any of them in characters of fundamental importance.

Scoresbia daidala n.sp.

(SaSudac—beautifully wrought, referring to the stolous and hydranth)

Description from the Holotype and paratypes microslides,

Hxpaosmza: a reticular network, very wide, Hat and ribbon-like, strongly

attached to the seaweed un which it grows (Fig. 1), divided into a central inner

canal and wide outer flanges. Distinct, close, dark coloured spine-shaped markings

transverse between wuter and inner margins of flange (Fig, 2). Hydrorhiza

widening towards base of each hydrothecal pedicel.

Srem: simple, short, erect, arising mainly at the junctions where the stalons

cross: unbranched, widest at base, tapering distally, passing into hydrephore with

a small constriction at narrowest part. Perisarc of stem thick, heavily ridged

internally and three or four very deep oblique external constrictions dividing stem

into segments, the largest at the base, becoming progressively smaller distally, the

last supporting the hydrophore (Figs. 3, 4). Stem bending in a gentle curve

toward distal end, bringing plane of margin of hydrophore almost perpendicular

te hydrorhiva.

Hyproruoxk: small, bowl shaped, asymmetrical, the abcauline side usually

a little longer than the adcauline side; expanding in @ sinuous curve to an everted

elveular margin. Diaphragm present, extending across base of hydraphore in a

shallow curve frequently not well seen, but position marked hy a shoulder-like

ledge and distinct notch im perisare. on the abcauline side and sometimes on

adeauline side (Fig, 3, 3). No reduplication of margin; punctae not present; no

secondary or tertiary hydrophores developed.

\, hydrorhiza network on alga;

Fi, 3. hydrorhiza enlarged, showing markings;

_ 3, 4, hydrothecal pedicel; fig. 4 anterior view;

Fig, 5, extended hydranth with lenticular nematocysts;

Fig. 6, trom Holotype; stem, nemutotheea, and nearly mature male yonotheea, gra chosen

to show relative sizes, but nematotheca displaced further behind hydrot eel petlivel

than usual.

Fin. 7, nematotheca and extended nematophore,

113

SCORESBIA A NEW HYDRUOID GENUS FROM STH. AUST. WATERS

Q-imm

i Bs

S35

= Oo

™ o)

sé

Ld JEANETTE E. WATSON

Hyprantu: body thick, too large to fit retracted into hydrophore. Only

slightly constricted below tentacles; tentacles stubby, 20 to 24 sect in a circlet

about a wide hypostome. A fringe of “lenticular nematocysts” packed about four

deep surrounds hypostome at base of tentacles (Fig. 5).

NEMATOTHECAE: small, elongate um shaped, with slightly everted margin,

arising. from flange of hydrorhiza usually under curve of stem directly below

hydrophore, only present in younger parts of colony. Nematophore very extensile,

capitate head set with nematocysts (Fig. 7).

Goxotica: large, obovate, smooth, somewhat flattened, tapering proximally

into a short, slightly bent pedicel arising from the hydrorhiza at the base of the

hydrothecal pedicel below curve of stem (Fig. 6). Width increasing to distal end;

truncated by a slightly convex cap; no orifice, the contents emptied by rupture

of fhe distal end. Male end female gonotheca same shape and size, borne on same

colony.

Conornores: Mature colonies bear gonangia thickly. Gonophores tend to

grow in groups of the one sex, malcs outnumbering females in colony by at least

five to onc. Mature male gonophore comprises a mass of spcrmatogenic tissue

almost filling gonotheca, supported by a_blastostyle which expands in a cap

across the distal end. Mature female gonophore composed of a cluster of 11 to 15

creamy coloured eggs with large yolk spats, almost Fling gonotheca, surrounded

hy a thin blastostyle which spreads in a pinkish mass across distal end,

Mature personas: December to January St, Vincent Gulf (water temperature

92° C.).

Colour: perisare pale straw colour, hydranths white,

DIMENSIONS:

(all dimensions given in mn. )

HypRorurza

maximum width — - a - - 0-20-0+26

width of flange - + - = - - - - 0-05-0.09

Penpicer or HyproPuore

length to base of hydrophore - mee - - = 0+24-0-37

width at junction with hydrorhiza - - — - - - - 0-07-0-09

HyYpROPHORE

diameter at margin = - - - - - - - - 0-09-0°14

diameter at diaphragm = - - a - + - 007-0-08

length abcauline side (diaphragm to margin)- - = - — 0-05-0-07

length adcauline side (diaphragm to margin)- = - > = 0-03-0-05

N&RMATOTUECA

diameter at margin - - - 4 - - - - - 0-05-0-06

Icngth from base to margin - = - > = + - (10-0: 13

Nr MATOPHORE

maximum extended Iength = - - 2 6S = = - 0-70

diameter of head = - - - - - - - - - 006-009

GONOTHECA

length, excluding pedicel — oe ee = = = = 068-092

greatest width “ - - - “ = - - - 0-42-0-54

length of pedicel = - - — 2 ee 006-009

HypRANTIL

tentacle width . = - - = 2 - [i . 0

Lenticunan NemMaATOCYSTS

length == se « 3 & ~ © 2 £ ©€ ~*

width = “ - - C3 - - a 4 _ a 0

SCORESBIA A NEW HYDROID GENUS FROM STH. AUST. WATERS 115

TYPE MATERIAL AND LOCALITIES

A series of seven microslides, designated Holotype, and six paratypes, and

preserved material is lodged in the National Museum of Victoria, Melbourne.

Nes an designated paratype is lodged in the South Australian Museum,

Adelaide,

N.M.V. Reg. No. G1490 Holotype; 3 km. off Semaphore, St. Vincent Gulf,

South Australia, on Zonaria crenata; depth 7 m.; coll. [.E.W.* 28/13/68.

N.M.V. Reg. Nos, G149!: G1492; C1493; G1494; $.4.M. Reg. No, H,20 para-

type, from same colony as Holotype, Material fertile.

N.M.V. Reg, Nos, G1495; G1496, paratypes: West Iskind, Encounter Bay,

Scie utuuba: on Zonaria crenata: depth 25 m.; coll. J-E.W." 29/8/65, Material

infertile,

N.M.V, Reg No. G1497: formalin preserved material, reinainder of material

[rom type locality, including fragment figured in Plate 1, Other localities:

Lawrence Rocks, Portland, Victoria: on Zonaria crenata: coll. [-E.W-* 14/5/69.

Material infertile,

REMARKS

This minute, delicate species exclusively epiphytises Zonaria crenata, a small

hrown alga ranging from central Victorian to Western Australian ocean waters,

and commonly in South Australian gulf waters, in depths of 5-25 m. The asso-

ciation is so conslaut that the species of alga may be determined by the presence

of the hydroid (Womersley, 1967, p. 226). Hydrophore, gonotheeua, and nemato-

theca are very deciduous, brushing off at a touch, leaving only the stems and

distinctively patterned stolons behind. Each stem curyes stiffly forward at a

remarkably constant angle, The asymmetrical nature of the hydranth, with fore-

shortening of the adcauline side further accentuates this forward bend so that the

hydranth faces directly toward the growing front of the colony at the edge of the

algal frond. The gonangia also share this directional growth habit each pedicel

is slightly bent, bringing the gonotheca close to the surface of the seaweed, with

distal ends all pointing to the front of the colony,

The nematothecae are not often seen with the gonothecac, having dropped

off the older parts of the colony, leaving no observable scars, When both are

present, they are seen to be very close together, the gonothecal pedicel arising

from the central canal of the hydrorhiza at the base of the stem, and the nemato-

theea a little te one side, on the flange of the hydrorhiza.

The thick fringe of lenticular nematocysts surrounding the hypostome has

heen reported previously by Ritchie (1910, p. 808) who drew attention to a “ring

of yery large bean shaped nematocysts 30, long by 6. broad suzrounding the

hydranth” m Halecium simplex Pictet, 1893, and by Huve, 1954. who reported

similar large nematocysts in the intertentacular web of Hydranthea marzarica

(Hincks. 1863), H. aloysti (Zoja, 1893) and Campalecium medusiferum Tompy,

1902 (=H. simplex), The nematocysts of the present species fall within the size

range described by these authors.

In examination of a large number of specimens I have found the hypostome

to be a wide, open annulus; occasionally flatly conical. The shape observed

evidently depends on the state of retraction at the time of preservation (a con-

dition also noted by Leloup, 1939) and is therefore a character of doulutul

aystematic value,

The stolons can be removed with difficulty from the seaweed after treatment

with hot 10% Potassium hydroxide. Viewed from the underside, the spine-shaped

(? All judterial collected hy authar, using SCUBA.)

116 JEANETTE E, WA'TSON

markings are seen to be walls dividing the flanges into hollow box-like compart-

ments. Possibly their function is to strengthen the hydrorhiza and to give added

flexibility with the movements of the seaweed in the water.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I am grateful to the Director, Mr. J]. McNally, and Dr, B. J, Smith of the

National Museum, Melbourne, for providing facilities, and allowing me access to

the hydroid collections; to Dr, H. B. S. Womersley, Botany Department, University

of Adelaide, and Mr, 8S. A. Shepherd, who first drew my attention to this hydroid,

and to the Trustees of the C.S,LR.O. Science and Industry Endowment Fund for

financial assistance in the form of « Research Grant,

REFERENCES

AL Man, G. J., 1888, Report on the hydrmida. Pt 1, Rpt, Sci. Res, H.M.S. “Challenger” Zoology

XXINM (LXX), 90 pp. ;

Bracxpurn, M,, 1937. Reports of the MeCoy Society, I., Coelenterata, Proc, Roy. Sac. Vict. n.s.

49. pp. 364-381.

Brnacxpusn, M., 1938. The Hydrozoa of the Sit Joseph Banks Islands. Proc, Roy. Soe. Vict.

ns. 50(2), pp. 912-328.

Fraser, C. Mc., 1914. Notes on some Alaskan hydraids. Trans. Roy, Soc, Canada (3) Vol. VII,

pp. 217-222,

Hexcxs, T., 1866. On Ophiodes. a now genus of Hydroid. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3) Vol. 18,

pp.

Hinexs, T., 1874. Notes on Norwegian hydroids from deep waters. Ann, Mag. Nat, Hist. (4)

Vol. 13, pp, 125-139.

Huve. P., 1954, Hydrantheu et Campelecium genres Mediterraneens aberrants d’hydroids de la

famille des Haleciides. Recl Tray, Stu mar. Endoume. 1954.

Levovr, E., 1930. Diplocyathus minutus noy.sp, nouvel hydraire de la Mediterranee occidentale.

Bull. Mus. Roy. d'Hist. Nat. de Belgique. VI Na. 6,

Lexoup, E., 1939. Notes sur quelques hydropolypes exotiques. Bull. Mus. Roy. d’Uist.. Nat. de

Belgigne. XV No, 51, pp. 1-19.

Mu.zann, N. A, H,, 1957. The liydrozoa of False Bay, South Africa. An, South Afr, Mus, Vol.

XLII, Pt. TV. 6.

RALPH, ets ia New Zealand thecate hydroids, Pt, 11. Trans. Roy. Soc. N.Z. Vol, 85, Pt. 2.

pp. 301-356.

Rercute, J., 1910. The marine fauna of the Mergui Archipelago. The hydroids, Proc, Zovl. Sac.

London, 1910, pp. 799-825.

Recs, W., and Tuursrieip, §,, 1965. The hydroid collections of James Ritchie. Pruc. R. Soc,

Edinb. Vol. LXIX, B, pts. J. 11.

Ssecnow, E., 1913. Hydroidpolypen der Japanischem Ostkuste. Abh. Math-phys. Akad der

Wissensch, Supp, #d, iii, pp. 162.

Srxenow, E., 1919. Zur kenntnis der hydroidenfauna des Mittelmeeres, Amerikas und pnderer

Gebiete, Zool. Jahrb. Jena Syst. 42, pp. 1-172.

Strecnow, E., 1924. Diaetosen neuer hydroiden ans Australien, Zoul. Anz. 59, pp. 57-69,

STE Be 1935. iTydroiden von West und Sudwestaustralien. Zool. Jahrh, Jena. L.,. pp.

91-269.

VEnvoont. ie 1959. The hydroida of the tropical west coast of Africa. AUantide Rep. 5, pp.

911-325.

Womenstey, H. B. S., 1967. A critieal survey of the marine algae of Southern Australia. II

Phacophyta. Aust, J, Bot, 15, pp. 189-270.

Jeanette E. Watson PLATE |

PLATE |

Part of holotype material, on Zonaria crenata.

SIX NEW SPECIES OF BASSIA ALL. (CHENOPODIACEAE)

BY ERNEST H. ISING

Summary

Six new species of Bassia All. (Chenopodiaceae) are described, and the necessary amendments and

additions to the key to the Australian species of Bassia are given [see Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austral.

88 (1964) pp. 65-67]. Three of the species are from Western Australia, two from South Australia

and one from New South Wales.

SIX NEW SPECIES OF BASSIA ALL. (CHENOPODIACEAE)

by Ennest H. Istxe

(Communicated by Hj. Kichler)

[Read 11 September 1969]

SUMMARY

Six new species of Bassia All. (Chenopodiaceae) are described, and the

necessary umendments and additions to the key to the Australian spocies of

Bassia are given [see Trans. Koy. Soc. §, Austral, &8 (1964) pp. 65-67]. Three

of the species are from Western Australia, two from South Australia and one

from New South Wales.

1, BAssia BEAUGLEHOLET Ising, sp. nov, (Fig. 1 A-C)

Suffrutex; rami graciles, dense albo-tomentosi; folia anguste linearia, 10-30

mm longa, dense albo-pubescentia, obtusa, vetera saepe imregulariter flexa,

juvenilia dense aureo-pnhescentia; fores axillures solitarii; perianthium in fructu

tomentosurn, ca, 2mm longum latumque, facies posterior brevis, concaya, anterior

+ convexa cum aliquot costis longitudinalibus; spinae 2, ea. 1:5 mm_longae.

plerumque recurvae, divergentes horizontalesve, subglabrae; tuberculam promi-

nens, anguste oblongum, obtusum, tomentosum, secus spinam unum valde de-

currens; limbus ca. 1-5 mm longus, incurvus, ciliatus, tomentosus; basis profunde

cavata, grandis, + ovata, yalde obliqua, cum septis radiatis, margine lata ple-

tumque glabra; stamina 5; stylus rectus, fere glaber; rami stigmatici 2, rubri,

styla ca. duplo longiores; semen verticale; radicula superior, longa.

Holotypus: A. C, Beauglehole 11672; Western Australia. North-West Coast

Highway. ca. 45 km south-west of Tropic of Capricorn, 19.vifi.1965. [AD

96929321].

Undershrub; branches slender, densely white tomentose; leaves narrow-linear,

10-30 mm. long, densely white pubescent, obtuse, often irregularly bent in age,

juvenile densely golden pubescent; flowers solitary in axil: fruiting perianth

tomentose, about 2 mm long and wide, posterior face short, concave, anterior

face + convex with several longitudinal ribs; spines 2, about 1-5 mm_ long,

usually recurved, divergent to horizontal, almost glabrous; tubercle prominent,

narrow-oblong, obtuse, tomentose, strongly decurrent alongside one spinc; limb

incurved, ciliate, tomentose, about 1-5 mm long; base deeply hollowed, large,

+ vate, very oblique, radiating septa, margin broad usually glabrous; stamens 5;

style straight almost glabrous, stigmatic branches 2, red, abont twice as long as

style; seed vertical, radicle superior, long.

Western Australia. A, C. Beauglehole 11416: AD; 40 km west of Rey Hill on

Wittenoom Road, 32.viii.1965.—id. 11885; AD: 25 km north of Murchison River,

ca, 340 km south of Carnarvon on the North-\West Coast Highway, 22.viii1965,

Note. This species is nearest to BL uniflora which has leaves + linear clavate,

4-8 mm long, thick, perianth base smaller, spines ca. # mm long, straight, limb

incouspicuous, style hirsute and seed horizontal to slightly oblique.

Named in honour of Mr, A. C. Beauglchole (Portland, Vic, ), who has made

large collections of Australian plants in recent years.

2. Bassra copieyt Ising, sp. nov. (Fig. 4 A-C)

Suffrutex; rami ramulique graciles, numerosi, tomentosi, subtiliter costati:

folia sessilia, conferta, linearia, 3-5 mm_ longa, hirsuta, acuta, incurvata; flores

Trans. Roy. Soc. §. Aust, (1969), Vol. 93,

120 ERNEST I]. ISING

E. H, Ising: Six new species of Bassia Al]. (Chenopodiaceac}).

3A 3B

Figs, 1 to 3. Fruits of Bassia species (all drawings made from the holotypes).—1l: Bassia

beaugleholei Ising; 2: Bassia stylosa Ising; 3; Bassie scrymgeouriae Ising.

axillares solitarii; perianthium in fructu_ oblongum, cylindrico-compressum,

tomentosum, 2-3 mm Jongum, ca. 1 mm latum, cum aliquot costis longitudi-

nalibus, facies posterior parum concava, anterior + convexa; spinae 2, ca. 1 mm

Jonyae, divergentes, subulatae, obtusae, plerumque tomentosae; tuberculum

obtusum; limbus erectus, ciliatus, ca. 0-5 mm longus; basis oblonga, obliqua,

parum caya; stylus glaber, rami stigmatici 2, rubri, ca. 1 mm _ longi; semen

verticale; radicula superior.

SIX NEW SPECIES OF BASSIA ALL, {CHENOPODIACEAE ) I21

Tlolotypus; B, Copley 1883; Australia, New South Wales. Ca. 115 km north-

east of Buronga [across River Murray from Mildura]. 13.iv.1968. “A few decum-

bent plants to 30 em high and 50cm wide, grey-green.” [AD 96819059],

Undershrub, branches and branchlets tomentose. finely ribbed. slender

numerous. Sessile, densely placed, Jeaves linear, 3-5 mm long. hirsute, acute, in-

curved. Flowers solitary in axi!, Fruiting perianth oblong, compressed-cylindrical,

2-3 mm long, ca. 1 mm wide, with several longitudinal ribs, tomentose. posterior

face slightly concave, anterior face slightly convex. Spines 2, ca. 1 mm long,

divergent, subulate, obtuse, usually tomentose. Tubercle obtuse, limb erect ca,

{5 mm long, ciliate. Base oblong, oblique, slightly hollowed. Style glabrous:

stigmatic branches, 2, ca. 1 min long, red, Sced vertical: radicle superior.

Nearest to B. caput-casuarit Willis, which differs in the plant almost glabrous,

perianth tapering to base, tubercle larger and recurved, buse circular, spine 1,

Named in honour of the discoverer, Mr. Bruce Copley of Bute, South

aprrabs, who has made extensive collections of native plants in much of

Australia.

3, BAssia LanaTa Ising, sp. nov. (Fig, 6 A-B)

Suffrutex, pilosus, diffusus; rami teretes, > costati, veteres ere glabri, ramuli

toretes, costati, albo-lanati; folia sessilia, linearia, 5-10 mm longs, ca. 1 mum Jata,

pilosa (vetera fere glabra), pilis axillaribus, acuta. mucronata. lana, tennia,

iugosa, pallide-viridia, margine ad basin membranacea; flores axillares solitarii;

perianthium in froctu cylindrics-compressum, ca, 3mm longum, ca. 1 mm Iatuym,

lbo-lanatum, facies anterior convexa plernmque 3. costis ongitudinalibus, pos-

terior concava, brevissima; spinae inaequales, arebalarites dispositae, plerumejue

4, interdum 3, raro 2, 23-7 mm_ ct ceterae 1-3mm longae, divergentes, aciculares,

graciles, glabrae (base excepto); limbus erectus, chartaceus, lanatus, ciliatus,

perianthio fere longior; basis oblonga, valde obliqua, aliquantum cava, fucic

posteriore fere longior; stylus ca, 2 mm longus, pilosus (apice densus); rami

stigmatici 2. rubri, ca. 3 min longi; semen non visum probabiliter yerticale:

radicula superior.

Holotypus: T, R. N. Lothian 4944: South Australia, Lake Eyre Basin, west,

Ca, 56 km south of Edwards Creek [Edwards Creek is ca, 100 km south-south-

cast of Oodnadatta.] “Along creek bank, rocky gibber.” 31.vii.1968, [AD 96846121]

Undershrub hairy, diffuse, Branches terete, + ribbed, white lanate. Sessile,

leaves Tinear, 5-10 mm lony, ca. 1 mm wide, pilose (nearly glabrous in age),

hairs in axil, acute, mucronulate, Hat, thin, rugosc, pale green, base margins mem-

branous. Flowers axillary, solitary. Fruiting perianth compressed-cylindrical, ca,

3mm long, ca. Lmm wide, white lanate. anterior face convex with usually 3

longitndinal ribs; posterior face concave, very short. Spines usually 4, sometimes

3, rarely 2, unequal in length and spacing, 2 longer 3-7 mm long, others 1-3 mm

long, divergent, acicular, slender, #labrous except at base. Limh erect, chartaceous,

lanate, ciliate, nearly as long as perianth. Base oblong, very oblique, somewhat

hollowed, nearly as long as posterior face. Style pilose, densely so at summit, ca.

2 mm long, Stigmatic branches 2, red, ca, 3 mm Jong, Seed not seen; radicle

superior.

Note, Bassia lanata is unlike any of the known species of Bassia with 4 spines

and hairy perianths; the prominent features are the white lanate branchlets and

perianths and the thin pale-green leaves. Many perianths were dissected but nu

fruits were fertile, The vertical seed cavity, which is long and narrow, suggests a

vertical seed. In B. filiformis Ising the spines are ever ly spaced and weak, B,

forrestiana FyM. has 1 spine 20 mm long. B. minuta Ising has smaller, obconic

122 ERNEST H. ISING

E. H, Ising: Six new species of Bussia All. (Chenopodiaceae ).

Figs. 4 to 6. Fruits of Bassia species (all drawings

copleyt Ising; 5: Bassia nitida Ising; 6

made from the holotype).—4: Bassia

: Bassia lanata Ising.

SIX NEW SPECIES OF RASSLA ALL, {CHENOPODIACEAE) 128

perianth and glabrous leaves, B. decurrens Black has a glabrous perianth and limb

as long as perianth.

4. Bassta seria Ising, sp. nov. (Fig. 5 A and B)

Suffrutex pilosus; rami ramulique teretes, roseij folia anguste linearia, 7-13

mm longa, villosa. crecta, obtusa, pallido-viridia, facies abaxiilis cum evosta proml-

nenti ad basim; flores avxillares solitarii; perianthium in fructu cylindricum, ca.

1-5 mm Jongum lutumque, apice concavo, glabrum, rubrum, nitidum, cum ca.

10 costis longitudinalibus Prominentibus, cuius una plerumque valde decurrens:

spinic + 1 mm longae, plurumque 4, 2 rectae, ad basim junctae, 2 + divergentes,

glabrae, plerumque apicibus recurvatis; limbus erectus, ca. 065 mm Inngus,

ciliatus; basis + sischbaete, ca. 1 mm diametro, aliquantum cava cum 5 foveis

purvis, saepe margine aliquot pili longi; stylus glaber, rarni stigmatiei 2, rusei,

Stylo ca. longiores; semen horizontale,

Holotypus: R. H. Kuchel 2684: South Australia, Northern Flinders Runge.

Paralana Hot Springs [ca, 115 km east-north-east of Leigh Creck]. 24.vii.1968.

[AD 96839199],

Undershrub, hairy, branches und branchlets terete, pink. Leaves narruw-

linear, 7-13 mm long, villons, erect, obtuse, pale green, midrib prominent at base

on undersurface. Flowers axillary, solitary, Fruiting perianth cylindrical, ca, 1-5

mm long and wide, glabrous, red, shining: ribs ca, 10, longitudinal, prominent,

one usually extended above summit an strongly decurrent; summit concave.

Spines usually 4, = 1 mm long, 2 straight, joined together at base, 2 usually with

recurved apices + divergent, pisbtoiie Limb erect, ca. 0+5 mm long, ciliate. Base

+ circular, ca, 1 mm dia., somewhat hollowed with 5 small pits, margin often

with a few long hairs. Style glabrous, stigmatic branches 2. ca. as long us style,

pink, Sced horizontal.

Note, The unusal and remarkable features of Bassia nifida arm the pink

branches and branchlets, one rib extended higher than the summit of the perianth

and strongly decurrent and two spines with recurved apices. It is nearest to

B. ganas Ising, which has an obconic, villous perianth, all spines straight and seed

vertical.

9. BassiA scrymMcEountar Ising, sp. nov, (Fig. 3 AC)

Suffrutex ramosissimus, § cm altus: rami graciles, pallentes, glabri, cum costis

subtilibus; folia oblaneeolata, + clavata, 4-7 mm ong’, atrovirentia, rugosa,

apiculata, base membranacea laevia pallidaque, enum pilis axillaribus; perianthium

in fructu compresso-cylindricum, 3 mm longum, 1:5 mm Jatum, glabrum, brun-

neum dilute, vertice concavum, facies anterior vix costata longitudinaliter,

posterior laevis; spinae 4, rectae, divergentes, glabrae, 2 longiores 4-9 mm,

aciculares, aequales, 2 breviores 1-4 mm, plerumque subulitac, in facie posteriore

apicifixae; limbus inconspicuous; erectus, ciliatus; basis + cireularis, vix cavata,

obliqua; semen verticale, radicula Superior, tenuis, acuta, stylo propinquo; stylus

parce hirsutus, rami stigmatic: 2 vel 3, rubri.

Holotypus: E. M. Serymgeour 1472; Western Australia, 450 mile peg, North

West Coastal Highway. 2.x.1966, [PERTH],

Undershrub: “dense bushlet of height 3 inches, growing in red sandy loam”

[E.M.S.]; branches slender, pale, @labrous, finely ribbed; [caves oblanceolate.

+ clavate, 4-7 mm long, dark green, rugose, spitnlate, base membranous, smooth,

pale, hairs in axil; fruiting perianth compressed cylindrical, 3 mm long, 1:5 mm

wide, glabrous, pale brown, anterior face with several weak longitudinal ribs,

posterior face smooth, summit concave; spines 4, straight, divergent, glabrons, 2

124 ERNEST H. ISING

longer 4-9 mm, acicular, equal, 2 shorter 1-4 mm, usually subulate at summit of

posterior face; limb inconspicnous, erect, ciliate; base ~ circular, slightly hollowed,

oblique; seed vertical, radicle superior. slender, acute, adjacent to style; style

sparsely hairy, stigmatic branches 3 or 3, red.

Close to, but differs from B. recurvicuspts Fiteg., which has recurved shorter

spines, perianth urveolate. ribs stronger.

Named in honour of the collector, Miss E. M. Scrymgeour (now Mrs, Bennett,

PERTH).

6, Bassra stxcosa Ising, sp. nov, (Tig. 2 A-D)

Suffrutex: rami dense-albo-hirsuti, partes juveniles aureae; linearia, folia con-

ferta, 5-15 mm longa, ca, | mm lata; dense pubeseentia, obtusa, apice recurva,

flores axillares solitanii; perianthium in fructu ca, 1 mm longum 2 mm latum,

dense pubescens, facies + coucavae cum aliquot costis longitudinalibus; spinae 3

(vel 4) divergentes, plerumque inaequales, dense pubescentes, 2 dorsales 3-7 mm

longae, 1 (vel 2) im facie anteriore afixa, 1-1-5 mm longa: limbus erectus, ca.

2mm longus, + conicus, coriaceus, lense pubescens; basis elliptica, obliqua, vix

cavata, margine villosa; stamina 5; stylus ad centrum turgidus vel deorsum dila-

tatus, ca. 1 mm longus, parce hirsutws, ruber vel bronneus dilute; rami stigmatici

2, ca, 2 mm longi; semen verticale, radicula superior, brevis.

Holotypus: A. C, Beauglehole 11780: Western Australia. North-West Coast

Highway, ca. 170 km gouth-south-east of Carnarvon, 21.viii. 1965. [AD 96929337 |.

Undershrub; densely whitish hairy, juvenile parts golden: leaves linear,

crowded; 5-15 mm long, ca. 1 mm wide, densely pubescent, obtuse, apex re-

curved: flowers solitary in axil; fruiting perianth ca. 1 mm long, 2 mm wide,

densely pubescent, faces = concave with several longitudinal ribs; spines 3 (or 4),

9 dorsal 3-7 mm long, 1 (or 2) on anterior face 1-1-5. mm long divergent, usually

unequal, densely pubescent, limb erect, ca, 2 mm long, + conical, coriaccous,

densely pubescent; base elliptical, slightly hollowed and oblique, margin villous;

stamens 5; style turgid im centre or widened downwards, ca. 1 mm long, slightly

hairy, red or pale brown, stigmatic branches 2, ca. 2mm long; seed vertical,

radicle superior, short.

Differs from all other species in the swollen style, and from most others

chiefly in the leaf apex recurved and juvenile parts golden.

AMENDMENT TO KEY TO AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF BASSIA ALL.

In order to facilitate the determination of the new species described above

the key to Australian species of Bussia published in Trans. Roy. Soc, 5, Aust.

88-65-67 (1964) is to he amended as follows:

93, Tubercle large.

93b. Tubercle shorter than spines 6 + I7A. B, beaugleholei

23h, Tubercle longer than spines.

24. Perianth glabrous - ' j . Is. B. burbidgeat

24, Perianth hairy - , ‘ - ‘ . 19. B. uniffora

93. Tubercle inconspicuous,

39, Perianth ribbed.

39a, Perianth base circular i _ . , 35, B. everistiuna

39a, Perianth base oblong, - . . . 35A, B, capleyi

39, Perianth not ribbed base ovate . . 36. B. patenticuspis

SIX NEW SPECIES OF BASSIA ALL. (CHENOPODIACEAE) 125

41. Perianth villous, pubescent or tomentose.

42, Perianth villous . ‘ ‘ : . . 37. B. lanicuspis

42. Perianth pubescent or tomentose.

42a. Perianth pubescent styled turgid . . 37A, B. stylosa

42a. Perianth tomentose, style linear.

43. Spines erect or divergent, perianth

swollen in lower part . ; . . 38. B. ventricosa

43, Spines horizontal or divergent, perianth

globular — « « «4 4 89 B, globosa

41, Perianth glabrous.

58. Perianth ca, 14 mm long.

58a, Perianth villous . : ; F . . 48. B, minuta

58a. Perianth glabrous . z ’ ‘ . 4A8A. B. nitida

58. Perianth ca. 3mm _ long.

59. Perianth ribbed.

59a, Perianth glabrous . . . . . 34. B. decurrens

59a. Perianth Janata . : : : . 34A, B. lanata

59, Perianth not ribbed, sparsely tomentose . 38. B. ventricosa

65. Spines irregularly spaced, usually divergent to

horizontal.

65a. All spines divergent upwards . . . 538A. B. scrymgeouriae

65a. One spine curved or erect,

66. One spine curved horizontally, base

hollowed : ‘ ‘ : . 42. B. andersonii

66. One spine erect, short, base not hollowed 40. B. oppositicuspis

65. Spines + equally spaced, divergent to erect.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I wish to thank Mr. R. D. Royce, Curator, Western Australian Herbarium, for

the loan of a specimen collected by Miss E. M. Scrymgeour, and Dr. Hj. Eichler,

Keeper, State Herbarium of South Australia, for facilities provided at AD to

enable me to determine two Western Australian specimens collected by Mr.

A. C, Beauglehole, Mr. J. Carrick for preparing Latin descriptions, and Mr, L.

Dutkiewicz for preparing drawings.

INTRODUCTION TO A STUDY OF THE

ECOLOGY OF THE KANGAROO ISLAND WALLABY,

PROTEMNODON EUGENII (DESMAREST) WITHIN FLINDERS CHASE,

KANGAROO ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY H. G. ANDREWARTHA* AND S. BARKER

Summary

In 1919 a Fauna and Flora Reserve was established at the western end of Kangaroo Island by the

South Australian Government. The area offers good opportunities for research on native mammals

but it has not been used for that purpose until recently. In 1964 study on the Kangaroo Island

wallaby living within the Reserve was commenced and is continuing. Despite the fact that the

Kangaroo Island wallaby is a particularly fecund species and has no serious natural predators, the

natural population appears to remain at a moderate density. Research into this aspect is continuing.

INTRODUCTION TO A STUDY OF THE

ECOLOGY OF THE KANGAROO ISLAND WALLABY,

PROTEMNODON EUGENII (DESMAREST)

WITHIN FLINDERS CHASE, KANGAROO ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by H. GC. AnprewaAnTHa® Anp 5. Barxer®

[Read 9 October 1969]

SUMMARY

In 1919 a Fantna and Flora Reserve was established at the western end of

Kangaroo Island by the South Australian Government. The urea oHers good

opportunities for research on native mammals but it has not been used for that

purpose until recently. In 1964 study on the Kangaroo Tsland wallaby living

within the Reserve was commenced and is continuing. Despite the fact that the

Kangaroo Island wallaby is a particularly feeund species and has no serious

natural predators, the natural population appears to remain at a auoderate

density. Research into this aspect is continuing,

In October 1919 an Act “To establish a Reserve on Kangaroo Island for the

protection, preservation, and propagation of Australasian Fauna and Flora, and to

provide for the control of such Keserve, and for other Purposes” became law in

South Australia. This was the culmination of the efforts made by the Royal Society

of South Australia, commencing in the 1590's, to have the western end of Kangaroo

Island declared a Fauna and Flora Reserve, A summary of the events leading up

to the passage of the Rill is given by Dixon (1920), Surprisingly, until the 1960's

Flinders Chasc had not been extensively used “for other purposes’, namely for the

scientific study of the Fauna and Flora it contained, even though for reasons to

be discussed, it is an ideal locality for the study of some of the native vertebrates,

A little work had been done in the 1920's however. and check-lists of the animals

known to occur there had been published (Waite, 1927; Waite and Wood Joncs,

1927).

The Flinders Chase Reserve

There is no recent scientific account of the physiography of Flinders Chase

but a great deal of information is available in an unpublished thesis of F. H. Bauer

(1960) on the regional geography of Kangaroo Island. Although the annual rain-

fall at the Rocky River station is 29 inches, the vegetation of the area is best

described as dry sclerophyll woodland. The Rocky River station area was first

inchided in a grazing lease in 1900, The area was taken over as an agricultural

lease in 1909. In 1922 the area was reclaimed by the Crown and since then

farming activities have virtually ceased. At the present time less than 100 acres

remain cleared and fenced in the area surrounding the Ranger's establishment.

Since the reserve was established the animals that live there have not been

molested by men. Most species of animals are tame, particularly the kangaroos

and the wallabies. So Flinders Chase is an ideal place for studying these animals.

Mammals

Waite and Wood Jones (1927) listed the names and status of the indigenous

and introduced mammals known to occur in Flinders Chase. Both members of the

° Department of Zovlogy. University of Adelaide,

Trans, Ray, Soc, S, Aust. (1969), Vol, 93.

1A 1G, ANDREWARTIIA axp 5. BAKKER

Monotremata ocurr, Tachiclossus aculeatus, the echidua, is indigenous and

abundant. The plutvpas, Ornithorhynchus anatinus, was successfully introduved

into the Kocky River and is now common there and in several af the other streams.

Of the three Austrulian supertamilies of the Marsupialia, there is no specimen

record of a living Dasyurid although Sininthopsis sp. has been seen just outside

of Flinders Chase by one of us ($.18.) and it is possible that members of both

Dasyurus and Antechinus occur there. OF the Perameloidea, Isoodon obesulus, the

shert-nosed banticool is common. In the Phalangeroidea, both the brush-tailed

possum, Trichosures culpecula, and the ring-tailed possum, Psendocheirus pere-

grinug oveur, The lormer is abundant and widespread. Tae ring-tailed possum

wus sot recorded frow the island prior to the introduction mentioned by Waite

and Wood Jones (1927) so its statys is uncertain, It still oecurs, as u single

specimen was captured, examined und released in December 1965 hy one of us

(S.B.), Cercartetus nanus, the pygmy possum occurs but because of its small stac

and secretive habits it is vot often seen, Cercartelus lepidus, the Tasmanian pygmy

possum, has also been collected on the Island (Aitken, 1967). Phascalaretos

cinereus, the Kovla, was introduced into Flinders Chase in 1923 and is now wide-

spread and abundant to the point of averbrowsing and killing some of the stands

of manna gum, Eucalyptus viminalis, its preferred food tree. The Kangaroo Islund

kangaroo, Macropus fulizinosus, is common in Flinders Chase but is now quite

rare on the eastern end of the island, The Kangaroo Island wallahy, Proten:odon

eugenii, is abundant in Flinders Chase and elsewhere on the island, No other

marsupial is known to occur on the island. Of the Eutheria, very little is known

of the Michrochiroptera which occur on the island. Of the Rodentia, Aeatins

fuscipes greyi ovcurs in varying numbers depending on the scason. It is most

abundant after the breeding season at the end of summer. The only other nit

recorded recently is the dusky-footed swamp rat, Rattus Iutreolus, and only

isolated specimens have beew captured (TTorner and Taylor. 1965).

The study on the Kangaroo Island Wallaby

Because of its occurrence in great numbers the Kangaroo Island wallaby

(Plate 1) presents a unique opportunity for study, as no other wallaby occurs in

such numbers in South Australia, The distribution of P. engenii is interesting. In

historic times this wallaby occurred in large numbers on mainland South Australia

( Finlayson, ia and it still oecurs in isolated pockets on mainland Western

Australia (Kelsall, 1965) although it used to be move widespread (Shortridge,

1909). Island populations still exist on East and West Wallabi Island m the

Abrothos group, Garden Island, Middle and North Twin Peaks Islands, Recherche

Archipelago, all off the coast of Western Australia (Main, 1964). They were cap-

tured by Flinders in 1802 on the islands of St. Trancis, St, Peter (= Vile Khigéne

of Peron), Thistle [sland and Kangaroo Island, all of which lie off the coast of

South Australia (Flinders, 1814), Flinders also captured a closely allied species

ou Flinders Island, South Australia and the species still oceurs on the islund in

very small numbers. Ta South Australia P, eugenit now occurs abundantly only

on Kangaroo Island. It is extinct on all o£ the other islands, and is likely to be:

extinet or occurring only in staall colonies, an isolated parts of the mainland, such

as fiose mentioned hy Evre (1847), towards the head of the Great Australian

Bight, Mitchell and Behrndt (1949) recarded its Introduction onto Greenly Island

by fishermen. P, engenit was also introduced onto Kawau Island, New Zealand,

by Sir George Grey in 1870 and into the Retorua district at an unknown date

(Wodzicki and Flux, 1967). It seems possible that the animals liberated by Grey

were captured on the mainland of South Australia, as at that time they were very

common close Lo Adelaide. Wodzicki and Flux (1967) have also reported that the

STUDY OF THE RCOLOGY OF THE KANGAROQG ISLAND WALLABY 120

Kawau animals weigh less than the Rotorua animals which are of a similar weight

to the larger Kangaroo Island race, Differences belween these Gwo stocks could

be determined by moder tuxonomic techniques such as those reported ly

Martin and Hayman (1965) and Kirsch (19A7). The existing colonies of P.

eugenii present a unique opportunity for study of the evolution of macropod

Species ;

A population study of the walluhy was commenced in Flinders Chase in

Novernber 1963, In 1964 finance was obtained to establish a ficld station? within

Flinders Chase to be used by members of the Zoology Department, From that

time periodic visits have been made to the island ard us a result of these, a pool

of individually marked animals has been built up.

Method of capture

On the first trip to the island it was found that individual cupture of free

animals with hand nets, which has been successful with the Rottnest Islanel

quokka, Setontx brachyurus, could not be used because P, engenii is too wary to

be netted easily and can run much faster than a man pursuing it with a hand net.

Ascordingly a natural feature of the Rocky River station area was utiliscd to

construct a fence-trap, The trap was built in the south-east comer of the station

paddock where there is a clear demarcation between the Acacia serub and a

cleared grassy area. Tt was known that large wumbers of wallabies emerge from

the scrub in this area after sunset when they commence to graze. A mesh fence

was built from the eastern boundary fence ta the Cape de Couedie road just oul-

side the line of Acacia trees, In two plices swinging trap gates were fitted to the

fence so that when they were sct the wullabies could pass into the cleared area

hnt couldn't pass back into the scrub. Between visits to the island the gates were

left open so that the resident animals became accustomed to passing through

them freely. At two corner positions an the fence short wings were built out at

sn oblique angle to the fence. At the end of each of these wings another wing

was extended back towards the Fenee, and this end was made so that it cold be

temporarily closed off with a wire gate. At the corner point enclosed within the

wings a small trap was built with an inswinging gate.

The catching procedure is to wait until at least one hour after dusk, by which

time many wallabies have emerged from the scrub to feed, The operators then

drive the animals slowly down the fence line and into the enclosed wing and trap

area. The temnorary gates are closed and the animals inside the wings and in the

raps are caught with aluminium shafted hand nets, and they are then put inilivi-

dually into sacks. The operators who net the animals wear head torches so that

both hands are free. Temporary wings, made of arc mesh, have also been nsed

at the comers of existing fences. In one place a semi-permanent structure made

from old gates is also used in 2 camer as a wallaby trap. At optimum times of the

year, up to twenty wallabies have been capturcd in one night. As only smaller

niuinbers are renmired, the maximum that can be caught in a single night has not

been established, Up to 83 animals have been captured on a hyo-week bip. At the

end of cach trip it is noticeable that in certain areas the wallabies are much more

wary than at the start of the trip and there is a fall off in nightly catching returns,

On capture each animal is marked with a moncl metal ear tag (Dunnet, 1954),

The animals are weighed, their foot length is measured and their teeth are

* We gratefully acknawledme the assistance of the following who voluntarily assisted in the

construction of the field station. P. D. Kempster. $. R. Harris, P, C, Kempster. G, Lonzar, L.

Bennett, D. Burton, Vera Burton. B. Dixon, R. Holst, C. Philpott, Dr, 1. Radda, A, Sparrow,

R, Wells and A, Driver.

130 ll. G. ANDREWARTHA anv §. BARKER

examined for stage of eruption. The pouch young of females are sexed and

measured. In August 1966 regular sampling was commenced, Ten adult males and

30 adult fersales have been captured on each tip for 24-hour urine and faecal

collection in metabolism cages. Blood samples have also been taken tor cell counts

and urea and total protein analysis. The results of this work are to be published

in due course,

Behaviour

Very little is known of the sucial behaviour, territoriality, movements or

toud preferences of the wallaby. To date only onc tag has heen recovered outside

nf the study area and this came from a single female which was snared ou u

property about ten miles north-east of Flinders Chase less than one year after it

was tagged, The wallabies which frequent the cleared ares surrounding the Racky

River station commence fecding at sunset and retire into dense scrub before

sunrise. They make squats in the undergrowth to sleep in, but as yet it is not

known how far they move from the feeding area to a resting place, or whether

they always return to the same place to sleep, Water is freely available at all times

of the year from the Rocky River and from artificial watering points in the Rocky

River station area. The water requirements of free living wallabies are unknown,

One marked behavioural change has been noticed at different times of the year.

Doring the early winter until green feed becomes scarce in the cleared areas,

female wallabies are more abundant than males. During the summer months,

males outnumber females and fewer wallabies come mto the cleared areas at

night, At this time of the year many animals forage under the stands of Acacie

retinodes for seed. The numbers foraging vary according to the crop, which was

heavy in 1968 and light in 1969. In the field, breeding activities are nol obvious

and copulation has never been observed, although males have been seen following

females on several occasions in the same wuy us the larger male kangaroos follow

the females just prier to copulation (Sharman and Pilton, 1959). The only obvious

social grouping is between females and their newly emerged pouch young, which

continue to follow their mothers for as long as the mothers are lactating,

There are no natural mammalian predators of wallabies on the island. Tiger

cats nsed to occur on the island as skulls have been found in cave deposits, Int

they are unknown in historic times. The single instance of predation seen was the

killing of a young animal that had run into a fence-trap of its own accord and was

caught by a pair of wedye-tuiled eagles. So far the life span is unknown. [owever,

we have recurds of females that were tagged as adults in 1964 and were recaptured

in the first half of 1969. These wallabies would be at least § years of age,

Reproduction

Some of the first observations on reproduction in this species were made hy

Gould (1863), [lis conclusions were based on data obtained My his collector, Tobey

Gilbert, from animals taken on the Abrolhos Islands in January 1843, Gould

inferred that there was no regular breeding season but nevertheless gave evidence

which clearly shows that there is u definite breeding season. Sharman (1955) first

recorded the oceurrence of delayed implantation in the Carden Island race of

P, eugentl and this was confirmed by Sadleir and Shield (1960). In the Kanyarvo

Island race Berger (1966) recorded that the delayed blastocyst produced by a

post partum mating in one yeur is held over for 11 months and is eventually born

as the next season's oflspring. Since the reported project commenced, messure-

ments have been made un all pouch young examined. The birth date of cach

animal has been estimated from the foot and/or head measurements referred to

STUDY OF THE ECOLOGY OF THE KANGARGO ISLAND WALLABY 131

a standard growth curve constructed from domesticated wallabies of known birth

date (C. Murphy and J. Edwards, pers, comm.). The details arc presented in

Figure 1. The earliest estimated birth in the field is 7th January and the latest is

August 12, Most births occur from the middle of January until the middle of

February. As the known gestation period is 28 days (Berger, 1966) reproductive

cycles must recommence from mid-December. Field observations suggest that

most females have ceased to lactate just prior to this time. However, Berger

(1966) has suggested that the delay is controlled at first by lactation and later

by some unknown factor.

N:=246

Fig. 1. Estimated birth dates of 246 pouch young Kangaroo Island wallabies measured in

Flinders Chast: between 1964-1969.

The Kangaroo Island wallaby is extremely fecund, The quokka, a wallaby

of cornparable size, breeds in its second year at the earliest, and normally docs not

breed until its third year, Female Kangaroo. Island wallahies can produce young

when less than one year of age, The youngest known animal (domesticated ) was

9 months of age at her first fertile mating. Of 282 females capable of having

young, which we examined in the field between 1964 and 1969 (including. Ist

year and aged animals) only 15 did not have young. The sex ratio of pouch

young is very close to unity, Of the 246 pouch young old enough to be sexed

externally, 128 were males and 118 females,

The main purpose of this investigation is ia find out what controls population

size. It is apparent from the length of life of some animals and from their fecundity

that the potential exists for a very Jarge population build-up. That this does not

happen and in the absence of predators suggests that a high deuth-rate occurs at

least occasionally, There is some evidence indicating that a “die-off took place

during. the winter of 1968, which was wetter than average, and which followed a

very dry summer. A number of dead animals were found in the study area in

July 1968, an unusual occurrence as they are not usually seen. Serum protein data

indicates that some infective agent may have been present in the population

during 1968 (C. Murphy, pers. camm.). Work on this aspect of the problem is

continuing,

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

We are indebted to the Australian Wool Board and the Rural Research

Credit Fund for grants to establish and equip the field research station.

132 H, G. ANDREWARTHA Axv S. BARKER

REFERENCES

Ares, P. . (1967). Cereartetus lepidus (Thomas) an addition to the fauna of Kangaroo

Island, Rec. 8A. Mug. 15: 575-576.

Bauer, F. H. (1960). “The regional geography of Kangaroo. Island, South Australia.” Ph.D.

thesis. (Publie Library of South Australia; Adelaide. )

Bene agsaians ]. (1966), Eleyen-month “embryonic diapause” in a marsupial, Nature Dil:

435-436,

Dixon, Sastuen (1920): “The full story of Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island, South Anstralia,”

( Hussey and Gillingham: Adelaide.)

Dunner, G, M. (1956). A population study of the quokka, Sefonix brachyurus Quoy & Gaimarsd

(Marsupialia), C.5.L.B.0, Wildl, Res, 1: 73-78.

Fine, E. J. (1847). “Journals of expeditions of discoyery into Central Australia, and averland

in the years 1640-1.” Vol, 1, ('T. & W. Boone; London, Libraries Board of South Australia

1964 Australiana facsimile editions 7; Adclaide; )

Fincayson, H. H. (1927). Observations on the South Australian members of the subgenus

Wallabia. Vrans. roy. Soc, S. Aust, 51; 363-3.

Furxpens, M. (1814). “A voyage to Terra Australis.” Vol. L (G. & W. Nicol: London, Libraries

Board of South Australia [966. Australiana facsimile editions 387: Adelaide, )

Gounp, J. (1883). “Mammals of Australia,” Vol. 1. (Taylor and Francis: London, )

Hoawen, B. E., and Tayvor, J. M. (1965). Systematic reltionships among Rattus in Southern

Anstralia; evidence from cross-breading experiments. C.S.LB.0, Wildl. Res. 10: 101-109,

Kensaut, |. P. (1965). “Insular variability in the ‘lammar (Protemnodon eugenti) of Western

Australia.” Ph.D. thesis, (University of Western Australia: Perth, )

Krascu, J. A. W. (1967). Serological characterization of the Parma wallahy, Mucropus parr

Waterhouse 1846. Aust. J, Sci. 29; 430-431,

Mam, A. R, (1964). The occnrrence of Macropodidac on islands and its climatic and ecological

implications, J. roy, Sac. W. Aust. 44: 84-89,

Martiw, P. G.. and Hayman, D. L. (1965). A quantitative method for comparing the karyo-

types of related species. Evolution 19: 157-161.

Mircnen., F. ]., and Benunpr, A. C. (1949), Fauna and flora of the Greenly Islands, Part 1,

introductory narrative and vertebrate fata, Rec. $. Aust. Mus., 9: 167-179,

Sapcem, RB. M,, and Sumerp, J, W. (1960). Delayed birth in marsupial riueropods—the euro,

the tammar and the marloo. Nature 185; 335.

SHARMAN. G, B. (1985), Studies on marsupial reproduction. LV, Delayed birth in Protemnodon

eugenii, Aust. J, Zool, 33: 156-161

SuARMAN, G. B., and Pruron, P, EB. (1939). The life history aud reproduction of the red

kangaroo (Megaleia rufa). Proc. zool. Sov. Loud. 142; 29-48.

Suonreipce, G. C. (1909). An account of the geouraphical distribution of the marsupials and

monotremes of south-west Australia, having. special reference to the specimens collected

during the Balston Expedition of 1904-1907. Proc. ‘zoal. Soc. Lond. 1909: 803-848.

Warre, BE. R, (1927). The fauna of Kangaroo Island, South Australia. No, 3,—The reptiles and

amphibians, Trans, roy. Soc. S. Aust. 51: 326-329.

Warre, EF. R... ard Woon Joves, PF. (1927), The fauna of Kangaroo Island, South Australia.

No. 2.—The mammals. Trans. roy, Soc, S. Aust. 31; 322-825.

Wopzicet, K., and Frux, J. E. C. (1967). Guide to introdneed wallabies in New Zealand,

Tuatara 15: 47-39.

H. G. ANpREWARTHA AND S, Barker PLATE 1

PLATE |

Two captive male Kangaroo Island wallabies. The animal on the right is an adult male, The

animal on the left is a 1%-year-old male; there is an ear-tag in the leading edge of its left ear.

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITS OF THE RABBIT BANDICOOT

BY C. H. S. WATTS*

Summary

The known past and present distribution of the rabbit bandicoot (Macrotis lagotis Reid), derived

from museum records and a ground survey, are plotted. Once extremely widespread, the rabbit

bandicoot now occurs only in portions of the Northern Territory, central Western Australia and

south-west Queensland. Possible reasons for the reduction in range are briefly discussed and a

correlation between the disappearance of the bandicoot and the arrival of rabbits and foxes

demonstrated.

Observations on the distribution, density and habits of the rabbit bandicoots living close to

Yuendumu N.T. were made over a ten-month period.

The diet in central Australia was investigated by microscopical examination of faeces, and found to

be mainly vegetable matter, most of it small seeds and underground bulbs and fungi.

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITS OF THE RABBIT BANDICOOT

by C. H. S, Warts”

{Read 9 October 1969]

SUMMARY

The known past and present distribution of the rabbit bandieoot (Macrotis

lagotis Reid), derived from museum records and a ground survey, are plotted.

Once extremely widespread, the rabbit bandicoot now occurs only in portions of

the Northern Territory, central Western Australia and south-west Queensland.

Possible reasons for the reduction in range are briefly discussed and a correlation

between the disappearance of the bandicoot znd the arrival of rabbits and foxes

demonstrated.

Observations on the distribution, density and habits of the rabbit bandicoots

living close to Yuendumu N,'l. weré made over a ten-month period.

The diet in central Australia was investigated by microscopical examination

of faeces, and found ta be mainly vegetable matter, most of it small seeds and

underground bulbs and fungi.

INTRODUCTION

The rabbit bandicoot ( Macrotis lagatis Reid) was once a common and wide-

spread animal in Australia, but is now restricted to a few areas in central Anstralia.

Many reasons for its decline in range have been suggested but until more detailed

information on the nature of the decline and the natural history of the species

is forthcoming any explanation is speculative. Successful conservation of the

species also depends on an understanding of the reasons behind its disappearance

from many areas. In addition a more detailed overall picture of the present dis-

tribution and status of the animal is needed in order to judge, with the help of

future surveys, whether or not the species is still declining in range.

This study is an attempt to bring together the existing data on the chronology

of local extinction of the rabbit bandicoot and to plot its present distribution. At

the same time the work on the natural history of the species begun by Smyth and

Philpott (1968) has been continued.

METHODS

Information on the localities and dates of collection of the rabbit bandicoot

specimens held in museums in Australia, North America and England was

obtained to give a picture of the past distribution of the animal. Information

on the preseut distribution came from the same sources, the Northern Territory

Administration, and a ground survey carried out in 1968. During this survey I

visited as many of the centres of habitation as possible within the arca outlined

by dashed lines in Fig. 2 and asked the inhabitants if they knew of any rabbit

bandicoots in the vicinity. Life-sized photographs were used. If a positive report

was obtained an effort was made to confirm it by visiting the locality concerned.

It was assumed that only one species of rabbit bandicoot was involved. but it is

ossible that some of the reported sightings in south-west Queensland refer in

act to M. minor (Spencer) a smaller species which may still be present in the

area although not collected anywhere since 1930.

of South Australia.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1969), Vol. 93.

136 C. H. S. WATTS

The rabbit bandicoot colonies near Yuendumu, N.T., were more closely inves-

tigated, Four visits were made to the area between February and October 1968

and an attempt made, with the assistance of the Aboriginal population, to locate

all the nearby colonies. Two colonies were repeatedly visited and burrow use and

distribution recorded. Unfortunately all attempts to trap the animals using a large

variety of traps proved fruitless.

Fresh faceal pellets (30 or more) were collected from three areas in central

Australia and their contents microscopically analysed by a method similar to that

used by Watts (1968).

EQ nt

on re

Ca u

Fig. 1. Former distribution of the rabbit bandivoot based on known specimens. Numbers

give collection dates.

RESULTS

Past distribution

The rabbit bandicoot was once extremely widespread, occurring over most

of mainland Australia south of 18° south and west of the Great Dividing Range

with the apparent exception of central Queensland and most of Victoria (Fig. 1).

The species appears to have disappeared from New South Wales and southern

South Australia rather suddenly around 1900 and from south-west Australia and

northern South Australia in the 1930’s,

This picture of sudden extermination over wide areas may to some extent

represent the vagarics of collection, but seems to be marked enough to be real.

An example of false record is the comparative lack of records from southern South

Australia where, according to Wood-Jones (1924), the specics was common

around 1890.

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITS OF THE RABBIT BANDICOOT 137

Present distribution

At the present time the main concentration of rabbit bandicoots is in the

Northern Territory to the west of the Stuart Highway, between 18° south and

24° south (Fig. 2). Outlying populations remain in south-west Queensland, the

Warburton Ranges, W.A., and on the central coast of Western Australia. Whether

or not the Western Australian populations are isolated from one another or from

the Northern Territory population is uncertain due to the absence of recent

collecting in the intervening Great Sandy Desert, The south-western Queensland

population is almost certainly an isolated one.

Habitaié

Rabbit bandicoots are today found over a wide range of desert and sub-desert

habitats wherever the ground is soft enough to burrow in and is not subject to

waterlogging, There is a tendency for burrows to be located in the more open

areas and along water-courses. Illustrations of the type of habitat colonised are

given by Smyth and Philpott (1968),

Food

Table L. The bulb of Cyperus bulbosus made wp most of the diet at Papunya

and was prominent in the diet at Yuendumu. In Thoth places the animals were

living close to water-courses where the plant was moderately common. On an

open, wire-grass plain at Hamilton Downs, the underground fruiting bodies of

the fungus Endogone made wp much of the diet, Much of the diet at Yuendumu

was composed of 2 small, crinkled seed not specifically identified, but resembling

those of the small succulents Calundrinia or Trianthema,

Ficld observation at Yuendumu showed that rabbit bandicoots were cating

the centres of the tap roots of Solanum spp. and Boerhavia diffusa, The unidenti-

fied fibres found in the faeces could have Bian from these,

Insect matter was sparse in most samples, Identifiable portions were mostly

from adult Coleoptera,

Large quantities. of sand occurred in all the faeces.

Social structure and habits

lm the Northern Territory rabbit bandicoot colonies consist of from 7 to 28

(av: = 17, n=6) separate burrows spread over a large and usually elongate

area. Three colonies at Yuendumn covered 28, 38 and 40 acres respectively, The

TABLE 1

Food types present in. rabbit bandicoot: faeces frora three different areas of Central Australia,

Figures give percentage volume

—_ eee

Lovality

Yuendumu Hamilton Downs Papunya

Date 2-68 4-68 7-68 7-68 4-68

Tnsect 2 11 6 3 2

Fungus (Endogone) 2 T 5 69 &

Bulb (Cyperus) 8 32 20) 0 0

Seed (Sateeyeum) 2 0 23 iT) 0

(? Trinnthema or

Calandrinia} 76 45 20 T 3

(Compositae) 0 0 0 T 0

(Other) 5 4 9 3 0

Fibre 5 8 17 20 0

eee

T -- Trace

138

22:5

C. H. §. WATTS

Fig. 2. Present distribution of the rabbit bandicoot, © = locality of speci-

men collected in past 15 years; © = known locality but without

specimen; ? = unsubstantiated report; --- = area surveyed.

130° 132°

Denison

Rocky outcro

o Colony

Fig. 3. Distribution of rabbit bandicoot colonies close to Yuendumu, N.T,

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITS OF THE HABBIT BANDICOOT 139

distribution of the burrows in a large (58 hole) colony in the Warburton Ranges

has been described by Smyth and Philpott (1968) and my observations in the

Nerthem Territory confirm their general description.

There are two basic types of burrow. The commonest is an isolated burrow

shout 6 in, in diameter which descends in a spiral to an average depth of 2:4 feet

(1-5 to 4:0 feet, n. = 13), At Yuendumu 70% of these were under or close to a

bush or fallen log. Usually there is only one complete tum and in 9 out of 1

burrows the spiral was clockwise. There is no special chamber at the end of the

burrows, but the burrow usually flattens out at the end. In 2 of the 13 burraws

excavated at Yuendumu a small side tunnel, most probably a balt hole, led off the

main tunnel and ended close to the surface, The second type of burrow is more

complex and consists of several entrances and a series of interconnecting tunnels

spread over an area of up to 10D square feet. Usually there was only one such

burrow in any burraw group and it was absent from several groups. All such

burrows appeared to be of long standing and probably resulted from long ovcu-

pation of a favoured site. A few burrows excavated were intermediate between

the two types.

From detailed observations of burrow use in one area at Yuendumu over a

period nf two weeks and from repeated visits to known colonies close to Yuenduru

some idea of the pattern of burrow use emerged, When there is a complex burrow

this is used most nights and appears to be the main sleeping quarters. The

remaining burrows in the arca are visited less frequently and only occasionally

are used as sleeping quarters. Usually only the main burrow and one or two of

the nearer single hurrows are used on any one night, but on some nights, particu-

larly rainy ones, virtually all the burrows are visited and cleaned out When there

is no large burrow in the area, a few well used burrows, often widely separated,

appear to be used as sleeping quarters.

From the evidence of tracks, faeces and scratchings, rabbit bandicoots seldom

move more than 100 yards from a burrow. In two instances the tracks of a large

handicoot leading away from a colony were tracked for 0-8 and 1-2 miles

respectively. It is possible therefore that some inter-colony visiting takes place,

The number of individuals living in a group of burrows uppears to be far

fewer than first impressions would indicate. At Papunya a group of six burrows

were dug up yielding one adult female. At Yuendumu a group of twelve burrows

yielded an adult female and there was evidence of another individual in the

vicinity, a group of twenty-eight burrows yielded an adult male, an adult female

and a juvenile, and another group of burrows under detailed observation never

gave evidence of being occupied by more than two individuals. Aboriginal testi-

mony was that an adult male and female with une or occasionally two young

usually occupied a group of burrows. Kreft (in Troughton, 1967) reported that

in N.S.W, rabbit bandicoots lived in pairs, Thus it appears that each group of

burtuws is occupied by a pair and any offspring of the year.

In a three hundred square mile area close to Yuendurmy | eventually located

seven burrow groups (Fig, 3), Approximately a third of this area was rocky and

unsuitable for bandicoots, The colony density in suitable habitat was thus roughhy

one per thirty square miles, Assuming an average colony size of three individuals,

this works out at one rabbit bandicoot per ten square miles of suitable habitat,

DISCUSSION

The dentition of the rabbit bandicoot suygests a predominantly carnivorous

dict. Field observations of fur in the stomachs of the related M. minor (Findlaysan,

1936) and the ease with which captives dispatch mice seem to confirm this, How-

ever, Smyth and Philpott (1968) showed that in the Warburton Ranges the animal

140 C,H, §, WATTS

was mainly insectivorous the bulk of the diet being termites and my observations

indicate that, in Central Australia, the rabbit bandicoct is ormmivorous and that at

times its diet is alnost totally vegetable. These results bear out Kreft’s previously

discredited observation that the dict in N.S.W. included bulbous roats (quoted in

Troughton, 1967).

Most of the “bush tomato” (Solanum spp.) seeds eaten at Yuendumu were

intact, suggesting that the Hesh and juice of the fruit was the mutin attraction,

About half of the sceds tentatively identified as coming from small succulents

were undigested and it is possible that in this case also it was the Hesh and juice

of the fruit that were being sought. However, in these species the Fruits are small

and the least succulent part of the plant and there was no evidence of their

remains in the faeces. The large quantity of these small seeds in the faeces is

something of a puzzle.

Comparison of the known pust and present distributions illustrates strongly

the great shrinkage of range that has taken place since early settlement. Whether

this shrinkage is still occurring must be left for future surveys to answer.

The reasons for the decline in range and probably also in density are difiivult

to identify, The decline has been from the south which implicates European man

or his introductions. The fact that the animals did not disappear troni New South

Wales until around 1900 and were common in the settled areas close to Adelaide

in the 1890's (Woorl-Jones, 1924) and in the south-west until as late as 1930

suggests that European man and close settlement with the resultant alteration of

habitat were not the prime causes of the rabbit bandicoot's extinction in these

areas, In addition the animal has disappeared from the large reserves in north-

west South Australia where there has as yet been little alteration of the habitat

by man.

European man introduced the fox, rabbit and cat into Australia and all are

now widespread. The cat was the earliest introduction and spread rapidly, even

preceding European man into the central regions (Findlayson, 1961), Since the

handicoot and feral cat co-existed for many years the cat presumably has had little

to do with the comparatively recent extermination of the bandicoot,

Rabbit handicoots appear to have disappeared rather suddenly from New

South Wales and southern South Australia around 1900, from Western Australia

end northern South Australia in the 1930's, but are still present in central Australia,

These dates correspond with the arrival of the fox in these areus and correlate

quite well with the arrival of the rabbit which became established in southern

South Australia and New South Wales around 1890 and south-west Austculin

and northern South Australia uround 1910, Both rabbits and foxes are rare in the

areas where ralabit bandicoots still exist, Thus, on this broad evidence, either or

hoth competition for burrows by rabbits and predation by foxes could have led

to the sudden demise of the rabbit bandicoot, It is probable that ulthough the

rabbit together with the cat and man’s hunting, farming and ranching undoubtedly

contributed greatly to the reduction in numbers and range. the coup de grace

in most areas was probably delivered by the for,

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

This work was supported in part hy a Nufficld Foundation Grant to Dr. P. S-

Watts at the Royal Zoological Society of South Australia. Thanks are due to the

Qucensland Department of Primary Industries, the Northern Territory Adminis-

tration and the South Australian Department of Fisheries and Fauna Conservittion,

for issuing the permits that made the work possible. The work at Yuendurau would

not have been possible without the help of the Superintendent, staff and peaple

and in particular the Reverend and Mrs. T. Fleming,

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITS OF THE RABBIT BANDICOOT 141

REFERENCES

Finptayson, H, H. (19385). On mammals from the Lake Eyre Basin: Part 2, the Peramelidae.

Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust. 59; 227-36,

Finpiayson, H, H. (1961). On Central Australian mammals: Part 4, the distribution and status

of Central Australian species. Rec. §, Aust. Mus, 14: 141-91,

Smytu, D. R., and Pumrott, C. M. (1968). Field notes on rabbit bandicoots, Macrotis lagotis

Reid (Marsupialia), from central Western Australia, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 92: 8-14,

TroucuTon, E. (1967). Furred animals of Australia (Angus and Robertson, Sydney).

Wen Joh ‘a (1924), The mammals of South Australia, Part 2. (Government Printer:

Adelaide.

Warts, C. H. S. (1968). The foods eaten by bank voles (Clethrionomys glareolus) and wood

mice (Apodemus sylvaticus), in Wytham Woods, Berkshire, J. Anim. Ecol. 87; 25-41.

THE VEGETATION OF PEARSON ISLANDS:

A RE-EXAMINATION-FEBRUARY 1960

BY R. L. SPECHT*

Summary

The botanical observations made on the 1960 Scientific Expedition to Pearson Islands off the west

coast of Eyre Peninsula are compared with those of the 1923 Expedition. The number of

angiosperm species recorded was increased by 9 to a total of 61 species; 1 fern and 7 fungal species

are also recorded, and collections of marine algae were made but have not been fully determined.

A vegetation map is presented together with detailed studies on structure and composition of seven

representative plant communities.

The probable effect of seals in the changes observed in the vegetation of the travertine plateau of

Middle Island between 1923 and 1960 is discussed.

THE VEGETATION OF PEARSON ISLANDS:

A RE-EXAMINATION—FEBRUARY 1960

by R. L. Specat®

[Read 12 June 1969]

SUMMARY

The botanical observations made on the 1960 Scientific Expedition to Pearson

Islands off the west coast of Eyre Peninsula are compared with those of the 1923

Expedition. The number of angiosperm species recorded was increased by 9 to

2 total of 61 species; 1 fern and. 7 fungal species are also recorded, and collec-

tions of marine algae were made but have not been fully determined.

A vegetation map is presented together with detailed studics on structure

and composition of seven representatiye plant commuinities.

The probable effect of scals in the changes observed in the vegetation of the

travertine plateau of Middle fslund between 1923 and 1960 is discussed.

INTRODUCTION

In January 1923, the late Professor F. Wood Joncs Jed a research expedition

to examine the natural history of the Pearson Islands, 40 miles off the west coast

of Eyre Peninsula, South Australia, in the chain of islands named the Investigator

Group by Matthew Flinders in 1802, Amongst the party were T. G. B. Osborn,

Professor of Botany of the University of Adelaide and Mr, T, D. Campbell, Osborn

made yery detailed observations on the vegetation of the Pearson Islands, and

these were published in the Transactions of this Society in 1923. A short Appendix

on the soils of the Islands was included by J. G. Wood.

In 1960 (Feb, 10-23), Professor T. D, Campbell led a second rescarch

expedition to the Islands. Among other natural history studies, the vegetation of

these small Islands was again carefully examined and compared with the botanical

collections, notes and photographs made by Osborn in 1923.

The 1960 botanical programme was as follows:—

(1) Preparation of an herbarium of all fern and angiosperm species to be

found on the Islands so that changes in species composition, if any, could

be compared with the collection made by Osborn in 1923.

(2) Collection of fungal, moss, lichen, and marine algal species, details of

which were not included in Osborn’s paper. The algal collection, made

largely along the rocky shorelines, was supplemented by material

dredged from around the Islands.

(3) Preparation of a detailed vegetation map of the Islands by interpreting,

by land reconnaissance, recent aerial photographs of the area.

(4) Examination of the structure of characteristic plant communities and

associated. soils,

(5) Observation of any vegetation changes which may be obvious when sites

identical to those photographed by Osborn in 1923 were again examined.

* Department of Botany. University of Queensland; formerly Department of Botany,

University of Adelaide,

Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust. (1969), Vol, 93.

144 R. L. SPECHT

RESULTS

The floristics and ecological relationships of the plant communities found on

Pearson Islands have been adequately described by Osborn (1923). This paper

aims ut supplementing Osborn’s paper with minimum repetition,

The major plant communities of the Islands together with notes on their

habitat are summarised in Table 1. A vegetation map of the Islands (Fig. 1)

derived fromm aerial photographs and land reconnaissance, outlines the dis-

tribution of these plant communities, Detailed notes on the structure, floristics and

habitat of seven representative plant communities are given in ‘Tables 2-8.

TABLE 1

Major plant communities recorded on Pearson Tslands

Detailed

reeurds

(Tahlos 2-8)

‘Formation Association Habitat

Low open-forest

Casuaring. stricta Granitic hills of North Island] Site 1

Low woodland A few trees on South Island

Closed-serub Meluleucu halmaturorum Brackish watereourse on

: North, Island —

Open-serub Melaleueu lanceolate | Lower granitic hill slopes on

| North Island Site 2

Open-heath (1) Olearta rarpulosa— (1) Exposed granitic slopes and)

(=shrub commumty) Leveopogon pareyflorus creviees on all Islands —

| (2) Nitrarta schabers (2) Kdge of travertine plates

i on South and Middle Island —

Low open-scrub (1) Abiples etnerea (dart) |) Travertine plateau of South | (1) Site 5

{=mat plant

community)

(2) Disphayme austratle—

Brckylaena tomentose

(3) Arthracnemium

hulocnemoides

Island (flattened by seals) | (2) Site 6

A few small areaa on Middle

and North Islands

(1) On twavertine on wind-

swept south-east side of

(3) Site 7

(i) Melaleuca lanceolata (1) Bite 3

(prostra te)—A trigiles

Low shrubland

(dense phase)

paludoser |

North Island

(2) Atréplexe paludosa— Lower grariitic slopes, often | (2) = —

Rhagndia erussifolie borderiny travertine of North

(a) Abriples pofurdase Island and bo lesser extent Site 4

(b) Rhayortia. crassifolia. | | South Island

—Zzxgophyllum

(3) Abriplex einerca (3) Travertine platesn of —

(3)

| Middle Island

2 ee SS

Lists of vascular plants (ferns and angiosperms) and fungi, collected on the

Expedition are given in Appendix 1 and TI respectively. There are small differences

between the list of angiosperm species collected by Osborn in January 1923 and

the collection made in February 1960.

The following species were not relocated: Trichlochin muelleri,* Vulpia

bromoides, Agropyron scabrum, Bulbinopsis semibarbata, Centrolepis murrayi,

Chenopodium desertorum,* Westringia rigida, Nicotiana suaveolens(?), Cotula

coronopifolia, and Sonchus asper.

® Listed from Pearson Islands by Black (1943-57), > 7

PEARSON ISLANDS

C G.o8 €

tc ceccece

Site 2

on agp

as a 0.25 0.5

; MILES

0.5 10

KM.

Site 7

[c | Casuarina stricta

Casuarina stricta

Melateuca halmaturorum| | Dlearia ramulosa TF] Frankenla pauciflora

Atriplex paludosa [o] Nitraria schoberj [>] Disphyma australe

(dense stand)

[M] Melaleuca lanceolata Zygophyllum sa, || Arthrocnemum -Franhenia

[= ] Melaleuca lanceoiata[ F | Rhaygedia spp. [=] Enchylaena in| Mostly bare rock

tomentosa

(prostrate)

Atriplex cinerea

Fig. 1. Vegetation map of Pearson Islands,

146 R. L. SPECHT

TABLE 2

North Island, Stte 1

Location ; Edge of drainage channel on southern side of 781 Hill, (Fig. 1)

Geology: Granitic rock

Soil: 0-0-5in. Casuarina needle litter

0°5-%in. Dark grey coarse sandy loam with organic matter (pH 6-8)

9-12 in. Brown coarse sandy loam over decomposing granite

Animals; Wallabies common

Vegetution ;

(1) Formation: — Low open-forest (dense phase)

(2) Association: — Casuarina. stricta

(3) Structure: —

Canopy

Species Height Projective cover

(ft.) %o

Casuarina stricta* 18—25 77

Correa reflexa 3—4 2

Rhagodia crassifolia 2

Bare ground — 21

*Trees per acre: 412 Trunks per tree: 1-8 (range 1-3)

Mean diam. trunk: 6:1 in. (range 2-15 in.)

Sampling technique: Eight random quadrats each 5 yards square

TABLE 3

North Island, Site 2

Location; South side of Bast Hill (Fig. 1)

Geology: Granitic rock

Soil; 0-0-5 in. Small amount of litter, moss and gravel

0-5-1+5in. Dark brown sandy loam with organic matter (pH 6-4)

1:5-12in. Brown coarse sandy loam (pH 6-6) over decomposing granite

Animals: Wallabies common

Veyetation: (1) Formation: — Open-serub

(2) Association: — Melaleuca lanceolata

(3) Structure: —

Canopy

Species Height Projective cover

(ft.) %

Melaleuca lanceolata* 8—12 46

Rhagodia crassifoliat 0-5—1-5 33

Bare ground (often

exposed granite) _ 37

*Truonks per tree 3-6 (range 2-5) {Some Rhagodia bushes occur under Melaleuca

Sampliny technique: Fight random line transects each 20 yards long

TABLE 4

North Island, Site 3

Location; Windswept south-east side of North Island (Fig. 1)

Geology: Travertine limestone plateau

Sail; 0-3in. Dark brown loam with organic matter (pH 7-0)

3 in, Travertine limestone

Animals: Wallabies common

Vegetation: (1) Formation: - Low shrubland (dense phase)

(2) Association: — Melaleuca lanceolata — Alriplex paludosa

(3) Structure; —

THE VEGETATION OF PEARSON ISLANDS; A RE-EXAMINATION

147

—— ee ee”.

Canopyt

Species Height Projective cover

(inches) (%)

Melaleuca lanceolata* 10—15 33

Atriplex paludosa 12—18 42

Rhagodia crassifolia 12—18 4

Enchylaena tomentosa I2—18 2

Threikeldia diffusa 6—9 trace

Bare ground oe 21

*Prostrate under influence of southerly winds; one specimen had a prostrate trunk 8 yards long.

tA few plants intertwine or overlap.

Sampling technique; Eight random line transects each 10 yards long.

TABLE a

North Island, Site 4

Ineation:

Geology:

Soil:

Animals:

South side of North Island (Fig. 1)

Near granitic boulders close to travertine limestone plateau

Surface Small leaf litter layer

0-14 in, Brown coarse sandy loam (pH 6-8) over decomposing granite

Penguin burrows common. Wallabies common.

Vegetation: (1) Formation: — Low shrubland (dense phase}

(2) Association: — Atriplex paludosa

(3) Structure: —

a a ee

Canopy

Species Height Projective cover

(inches) (%)

Atriplex paludosa 15—24 55

Rhagodia crassifolia 6 0-5

Olearia ramulosa 12 0-5

Bare ground — 44

—-ee_—————————————

Sampling technique: Eight random line transects each 10 yards long.

TABLE 6

South Island, Site 5

Location:

Geology:

Soil:

Animals:

North-cast corner of travertine limestone plateau, (Fig. 1)

Travertine limestone plateau

0-1 in. Grey brown sandy clay loam with organic matter

1-9 in, Brown sandy clay loam (pH 7-6) over travertine limestone

Seals were observed sun-baking on this area. Cape Barron geese were recorded.

Vegetation; (1) Formation: -- Low open-scrub (= mat plant community)

(2) Association: — Atripler cinerea

(3) Structure: —

Ee eee

Canopy

Species Height, Projective cover

(inches) %%)

Atriplex cinerea 3—4 51

Frankenia paucifiora 34 1

Bare ground — 48

_oooOoOooeeee

Sampling technique: Eight random quadrats each 1 yard square.

145 R. L. SPECHT

TABLE 7

South Island, Site 6

Location; South-east corner of travertine limostone plateau. (Fig. 1)

Geology: Travertine limestone plateau

Soil: 0-1in, Dark brown coarse sandy loam with organic matter (pH 8-9)

1-8 jn, Brown coarse sandy loam (pH 6-9) over travertine limestone

Animuls: Scala probably sun-bake on. the area. Cape Barren geese were observed

Veyetation: (1) Formation: — Low open-serub (= mat: plant community)

(2) Association: — Disphyma australe — Bachylaena tomentosa

(3) Structure; —

Canopy

Species Height | Projeective cover

{inches) (%)

Disphyima australe 3—4 38

Enchylacna tomentosa 3—4 16

Threlkeldia diffusa. 3—4 8

Atriplex patudosu up to 12 2.

Bare ground - 37

Sampling technique: Eight random quadrats cach 1 yard square.

TABLE §

South Island, Stte 7

Loention: North-west corner of travertine limestone plateau. (Fig. 1)

Geology: ‘Travertine Limestone plateau

Sail; Q-L in. Dark brown coarse sandy loam

1-6 in, Brown coarse syndy loam over travertine limestone

Animals; Seals probably sun-bake on this area. Cape Barren geese were observed

Vegetutions (1) Formation: - Low open-serub (= mat plant community)

(2) Association: — Arihrocnemum. halocremoniles

(3) Structure: —

Canopy

Species Height Projective cover

(inches) 21)

Arthrocnemum halocnemvides 2—4 50

Frankenia paneiflorn. 2—4 7

Bare ground — 43

Sampling technique: Eight. random quadrats each L yard square

The following extra species were recorded in 1960: Scirpus congruts(?),

Centrolepis strigosa, Calandrinia calyptrata, Stelluria media(?), Crassula

sieberiana, Oxalis corniculata, Zygophyllum billardieri, Plantago varia, and

Galium gaudichaudit,

So far 1 species of fern, 11 species of monocotyledons and 50 species of

dicotyledons have been recorded from the Islands. The supplementary list,

collected February 1960, includes a number of seasonal species more of which

may appear during the winter-spring seasons.

It is interesting thal the tiny Centrolepis murrayi collected from the Islands

in 1923 and recorded as a new species by Black (1923) was not relocated and yet

many plants of Centrolepis strigosa, not collected in 1923, were found, Willis

(1953) recorded both species from the Recherche Archipelago on the western side

of the Great Australian Bight.

THE VEGETATION OF PEARSON ISLANDS; A RE-EXAMINATION 149

CHANGES IN THE VEGETATION

As far as possible photographs and notes made by Osborn in 1923 were

matched in 1960, Within the limits of this technique, little change was obvious

vver much of the Islands except on the travertine plateau of the Middle Island.

Osborn recorded, both by photograph (plate IX, fig. 1) and in the text (p.

108), that an annual community of Lepidium foliosum, Apitum prostratum, and

Senecio laulus covered much of the plateau. At the junction of the travertine

plateau and the talus fan derived from the granitic hill dominating Middle Island,

a belt of Atriplex cinerea, typically a constituent of the travertine Veretation, wis

noted,

In 1960 Atriplex cinerea had extended its range to cover much of the traver-

tine plateau (Fig, 1); no trace of the annual community could be found.

Osborn does not refer to seals on the Islands. During February, 1960, seals

were common on the eastern side of Middle Island and on the north-eastorn side

of South Island, These heavy animals sun-baked mostly on the granitic rocks and

sand near the shore linc but occasionally climbed nigher onto the travertine

plateau. Dnring February, 1960, they were observed sun-baking on the stunted

stand (3-4 inches tall) of Atriplex cinerea growing on South Island (Fig. 1, Site

3). It is probable that seals may have devastated much of the Atriplex cinerea

stand on the travertine plateau of Middle Island prior to 1923. Since that date

either the seal population has fallen or the travertine plateau has become tem-

Rorasily undesirable as .a basking area, thus enabling Atriplex cinerea to recolonise

the area.

Wallabies (Petrogale pearsoni) ranged over the whole of the North Island

(presumably eating Airiplex paludosa), but were apparently restricted to that

Island by the small strait about 100 yards wide which can be waded only at low

tide,

Gillham (1960) indicated that extensive changes have occurred around

peuguin vookeries in Victorian sea-bird colonies. “The presence of the sea-birds

cads toa broadening of the coastal belt of salt-resistant plants and climination of

the indigenous, more inland type of flora.” ‘The penguin burrows on Pearson

Islands are confined to the coastal belt—in the Atriplex paludosa—Rhazedia

erassifolia, Atriplex cinerea, and Olearia ramulosa-Leucopagon parviflorus associn-

tions of granitic slopes and detrilus fans, Gillham's observations would suggest

that, around penguin burrows, these communities may be gradually replaeod by

eve more salt-resistant plants such as the “mat plant” communities—Disphyma

australe-Enchylaena tomentosa and Arthroenemum halocnemoides associations,

Such a change may be slowly occurring around the small penguin rookeries on

Pearson Islands bunt was by no means obvious.

Ponguins, however, rarely burrow into the travertine plateau but prefer fo

vest in burrows under granitic rocks. [t is thus improbable that they were the

pause of the vegetation change observed on the travertine plateau of Middle

Island,

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

Grateful thanks are due to Professor T. D. Campbell, leader of the Expedition,

ty Ampol Petroleum Pty. Ltd. who assisted with finance and ta Mr, Max Fanser

of Ungarra, Eyre Peninsula, who provided transport to the Islands, Mr. I. M.

Thomas, Dr. 5. J, Edmonds, Dr, B. B. Carrodus and Dr. P. Miles, scientific

personnel on the Expedition. helped in many ways and provided stimulatinys

conversations, Mr, K, Phillips acted as photographer.

150 R. L. SPECHT

REFERENCES

saa 1M. 1923. Additions to the Flora of South Australia, No. 21. Trans. Roy. Soc, S, Aust.

Buack, J. M., 1943-57. Flora of South Australia. Parts I-IV. Govt. Printer, Adelaide.

Gimnam, Mary E, 1960, Destruction of indigenous heath vegetation in Victorian sca-bird

colonies. Aust, J. Bot. 8: 277-317.

Osnorn. T, G. B., 1923. The flora and fauna of Nuyts Archipelago and the Investigator Group.

No. 8. The ecology of Pearson Islands. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 47; 97-118.

Was, J. H., 1953, The Archipelago of the Recherche, Part 3a, Land flora. Aust. Geogr, Soc.

Rep. No. 1; 3-35,

APPENDIX I

List of fern and angiosperm species collected on Pearson Islands by T. G. B.

Osborn (January 1923) and R. L, Specht (February 1960). The collections have

been deposited in the State Herbarium of South Australia, Botanic Gardens,

Adelaide.

Recording dates

Jan. 1923 Feb. 1960

Polypodiaceae

Cheilanthes tenuifolia (Burm. f.) Swartz , ka

Scheuchzeriaceae

Triglochin muelleri Buch. * =

Gramineae

Agrostis avenacea |. F. Gmel. * 2

Notodanthonia racemosa (R.Br.) Zotovt *, *

Poa poaeformis (Labill.) Druce * a

Vulpia bromoides (L.) S. F. Gray * -

Agropyron scabrum (Labill.) Beauv. ? -

Cyperaceae

Scirpus congruus (Nees) S. T. Blake (?) ~ 7

Liliaceae

Dianella revoluta R.Br, . <

Bulbinopsis semibarbata (R.Br.) Borzi ? -

Centrolepidaceac

Centralepis murrayi J, M, Black + =

C. strigosa (R.Br.) R. & S. - *

Casuarinaceae

Casuarina stricta Ait. z $

Chenopodiaceae

Rhagodia baccata (Labill.) Moq, * *

R. crassifolia R.Br, 4 ,

Chenopodium desertorum (J. M. Black) J. M. Black sg -

Atriplex cinerea Poir. 2 ?

A, paludosa R.Br. e °

Enchylaena tomentosa R.Br, i *

Threlkeldia diffusa R.Br. * f

Arthrocnemum halocnemoides Nees

var. pergranulatum J. M. Black = :

Salicornia quingueflora Bunge ex Ung.-Sternb. ad *

Suaeda australis (R.Br.) Moq. . +

Aizoaceae

Tetragonia amplexicoma (Miq.) Hook. f. * *

Carpobrotus aequilaterus (Haw.) N.E.Br. * 7

Disphyma australe { Ait.) N.E.Br. * ¥

+ Probably identified hy Osborn as Danthonia penicillata (Labill,) F. Muell.

THE VEGETATION OF PEARSON ISLANDS: A RE-EXAMINATION

Portulacaceac

Calandrinia calyptrata Hook. f.

Caryophyllaceae

Scleranthus pungens R.Br.

Stellaria media (L.) Vill. (?)

Cruciferae

Lepidium foliosum Desvy.

Crassulaceae

Crassula sieberiana (Schultes) Druce

Geraniaccae

Pelargonium australe Willd,

Oxalidaceae

Oxalis corniculata L.

Zygophyllaceae

Nitraria schoberi L.

Zygophyllum billardieri DC, (>?)

Rutaceae

Correa reflexa (Labill.) Vent.

var. nummulariifolia (Hook.f.) Wilson

Sapindaceae

Dodonaea viscosa Jacq.

Rhamnaceae

Spyridium phylicoides Reiss.

Malvaceae

Lavatera plebeia Sims

var, tomentosa Hook.f.

Frankeniaceae

Frankenia pauciflora DC,

Thymelaeaceae

Pimelea serpyllifolia R.Br.

Myrtaceae

Melaleuca lanceolata Otto

M. halmaturorum F. Muell. ex Miq.

Calytrix tetragona Labill.

Umbelliferae

Apium prostratum Labill. ex Vent.

Trachymene pilosa Sm.

Epacridaceae

Leucopogon parviflorus (Andr,) Lindl.

Labiatae

Westringia rigida R.Br,

var. dolichophylla Ostenf.

Solanaceae

Lycium australe F, Muell.

Nicotiana suaveolens Lehm, (?)

Myoporaceae

Myoporum insulare R.Br.

M. deserti A. Cunn, ex Benth,

Plantaginaceae

Plantago varia R.Br.

Rubiaccae

Galium gaudichaudii DC.

151

152 R, L. SPECHT

Compositae

Olearia ramulosa Labill.

Cotula coronopifolia L.

Ixiolaena supina F. Muell.

Cassinia spectabilis R.Br.

Calocephalus brownii F. Muell.

Senecio lautus Forst. f. ex Willd.

S. cunninghamti DC.

Sonchus asper (L.) Hill

var. littoralis |. M. Black 7 ~

ee ew oe ee

ee He OH |

APPENDIX If

List of fungal species collected on Pearson Islands by R. L. Specht (Feb.

1960) identified by Miss Judy Brown. The collection has been deposited in the

mycological collection of the Waite Agricultural Research Institute.

Coriolus cinnabarinus (Jacg.) G. H. Cunn.

Corticium sp.

Fomes rimosus Berk.

Geastrum floriforme Vitt.

Hexagona decipiens Berk.

Naucoria semiorbicularis (Bull.) Fr.

Polystictus versatilis Berk.

OCCURRENCE OF POLYGONAL PATTERNED GROUND IN THE

ARID ZONE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY SUSAN BARKER* AND R. T. LANGET

Summary

A discovery of polygonal patterned ground is reported from Quondong Station in the north of the

Murray Basin. The polygons are very large, possibly the largest ever described. The phenomenon is

also unusual on account of the infilled trench, which soil pit sections revealed below the channels

delimiting each polygon. The origin is unknown; there is a superficial resemblance to large drying

cracks recorded from New Mexico.

OCCURRENCE OF POLYGONAL PATTERNED GROUND IN THE

ARID ZONE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by Susan Barker* anp A. T. Lance}

[Read 13 November 1969]

SUMMARY

A discovery of polygonal patterned ground is reported from Quondong

Station in the north of the Murray Basin, The polygons are very large, possibly

the largest ever described. ‘he phenomenon is also unusual on uecount of the

infilled trench, which soil pit sections revealed below the channels delimiting each

polygon. The origin is unknown; there is a superficial resemblance to large drying

cracks recorded from New Mexico.

Patterned ground, which is 4 term applying to more or less symmetrical

ground surface formations, is principally, but not always, found in polar, sub-polar

and alpine regions. Types of this phenomenon have been described and classified

by Washburn (1956), Each of the distinguishing shapes—circles, polygons, nets,

steps and stripes—can be either non-sorted or sorted, the latter showing regular

aiTangements of stones in relation to finer material, The dimensions of the circles,

nets, and polygons vary from a few centimetres to a few metres, the maximum

recorded being for fon-sorted polygons 25 to 30 m_ across in an arid temperate

situation, Steps have risers 0-3 to 1:5 m and treads up to 8 m across; stripes

vary in width from a few centimetres to 6 m. Numerous hypotheses regarding the

origins of these forms are also discussed by Washburn; most concern the effects of

freezing and thawing and haveno application to the Australian arid zone, but one

hypothesis concerns contraction due to drying and may be relevant,

The occurrence of different types of patterned ground or gilgai in warm

temperate Australia has been described by Hallsworth (1955, 1968). This surface

morphology is referred to as “small scale undulations, the alternate hummnocks

(puffs, mounds) and hollows (shelves, crab-holes, melon-holes) of which show

some degree of regularity”, Six major types of gilgai are recognised—normal,

melon-hole, stony, lattice, linear or wavy and tank gilgai. Only the stony gilgai

which occurs widely in the arid regions appears to be sorted. Tank gilgai records

the largest dimensions, the mounds being up to 10 m across and the depressions

up to 20 m long,

A remarkable new kind of patterned ground has been found in arid country

in South Australia, which does not conform to any of the morphological descrip-

tions given in the reviews cited above. The discovery was made on Quondong

Station in the plains of the Murray Basin lying between the River Murray and

the Olary Spur. The area is one of low rainfall (average 175mm per annum). The

country is gently undulating and geologically consists of Tertiary marine sedi-

ments covered by calcareous Pleistocene and Recent deposits. The calcareous

soils are underlain by calerete and are classified as solonized brown soils in the

Handbook of Australian Soils (ed, by Stace ef al., 1968) and as Ge soils by the

Factual Key (Northcote, 1965),

* Department of Geography, University of Adelaide.

+ Department of Botany, University of Adelaide.

Trans, Roy. Soc. S$. Aust. (1969), Vol. 93.

154 SUSAN BARKER anp R. T. LANGE

The phenomenon was first observed during a ground suryey of the vegetation

of Quondong, when straight-sided channels 0:3 to 0:5 m wide by 7 to 30 cm

deep and up to about 20m long were noticed. Examination of aerial photographs

revealed whole systems of these channels or gutters forming a roughly polygonal

pattern (see Fig. 1). Each polygon was approximately 50 to 100 m_ across,

dimensions which are far in excess of other patterned ground mentioned in the

literature. The characteristic puff appearance of gilgai was absent, though the

vertical sides of the channels gave the impression that rifting might have occurred;

there was no evidence of sorting of stones from fines, even t puck nodular calcrete

occurs a few centimetres below the ground surface. The ground in the area does

not undulate but slopes gently to the S.E. where there is a small swamp about

1-25 km away.

TABLE. 1

Location: Quondong Station, N.E. of South Australia. Chowilla 1: 250,000 map (SI 54-fh)

grid. ref. 327291 140°17'E and 33°00/20"S.

Profile 1; Samples taken from infilled trench below gutter, Principul profile form Gel- 12.

| %, Total | %, Organic

Depth Description % Clay | soluble salts | carbon | % CaCO,

(+5 em Dark reddish brown, powdery ;

sandy loam id “030 “59 3-1

5-13 cm Dark reddish brown, powdery =

sandy loam 16 +029 “49 4-4

13-28 em Dark reddish brown, powdery

sandy clay loain 17 ! “029 “44 6-4

28—48 em Dark reddish brown, powdery

sandy clay loam 16 -029 g]

48-69 em Yellowish red, powdery sandy

clay loani 16 -031 11-0

9-79 om Yellowish red, massive hard

sandy clay loam 17 O97 | 46-0

Profile 2; Samples taken from undisturbed aoil to one éide of gutter. Principal profile form Gel: 12

% Total o¢, Organic

Depth Description % Clay | soluble salts | carbon | % CaCO,

0-5 em Dark reddish brown, powdery

sandy loarn 15 +028 -38 31

5-13 om Dark reddish brown, powdery

santly clay loam 17 “029 “35 9-0

Dark reddish brown, weakly |

13-28 cm cemented massive sandy clay 18 032 24 13-0

loam

Yellowish red, hard weakly

28-43 cm cemented massive luariy clay 2) 732 18:0

43-79 cm Yellowish red, hard weakly

cemented massive loamy clay 17 *OKG 43-0

ne EEE

PATTERNED GROUND IN ‘THE ARID ZONE OF STH AUST, 155

A limited investigation was carried out, the results of which are outlined bere.

Two soil pits were dug to a depth of approximately 0-9 m across two of the

channels, one a well formed channel 0-3 m deep (see Fig. 2) and one a shallow

gutter 10 em deep, Below both the channel and the gutter (see Fig, 3) was a

narrow vertical trench apparently infilled with muterial which may he from the

top of the profile, This vertical trench was remarkable for its straight sides and

flat bottom,

The gutter was given further examination and samples from the centre of the

gutter through the infilled section (Profile 1) and from the undisturbed section to

one side (Profile 2) were subjected to chemical and physical analyses (see Table

1), Although the profiles are similar the analyses show diflerences that are of

interest. In the infilled trench there is a higher percentage of organic carbon

throughout the profile, and lower percentages of calcium carbonate and clay in

the 28 to 43 cm horizon, than in the undisturbed! soil. The trench also shows a

marked increase in calcium carbonate from 11% to 46%, whereas the soil to the side

of the trench has « more gradual increase in calcium carbonate,

These extremely large polygonal segments and the clearly defined channels

cannot be very old, In places, roots of the black oak (Casuarina cristata) bridge

the channels, which must, therefore, have developed after the roots had grown.

However, the cause of the microrelief is not known. A rather similar patterned

grotind on a playa surface in New Mexico (Lang 1943) was attributed to drying

cracks, The polygons in this case were 25 to 30. m_ across, and delimited by broad

faint depressions about 1 m wide and 3 em deep in the middle, which were

picked out on aerial photographs by the concentration of shrubs in the grooves.

The channels found at Quondong were not in a swamp or depression where water

collects. The vegetation is a black oak-bluebush association with Cassia sp. and

bullock bush, The channels haye been observed in other parts of the Station where

dense black oak woodland obseures the pattern from the air,

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

We are greatly indebted to Mr, K. H. Northcote and Mr, R. Campbell of the

C.S.L.R.0. Division of Soils, Urrbrae, $.A,, who examined the soils in the field, and

Mr. A. BR, P, Clark under whose direction the analyses were made,

REFERENCES

Haniswourn, 7. G,, Ronentsox, G, kK. and Ginsons, F. R., 1955. Studies in pedowenesis in

N.S.W. VIL, The gileai soil. J. Soil Sei. 6: 1-31.

Harcsworrn, £. G., 1968, The gilgai phenomenon, pp, 415-420 in A Handhook of Australian

Soils, ed. by Stace, H.C. 'T.. et al. Relliin Technical Publications, Glenside, South Australia,

Lana, W, B., 1948, Gigantic drying eracks in Animas Valley, New Mexico. Selence 98; 543-

584,

Nowrucore, K. 1h, 1965, A Factual Key for the recognition of Australian soils, Second

Edition, C.S.1.R.0, Aust. Div. Soils, Divl. Rept, 2/65.

Sacre, H. CG. Ty, ef al, (eds,) 1968. A Tuncbook of Australian Soils, Rellim Technical Pub-

lieutions, Glenside, South Australia. ]

Wasnnunn, A. L,, 1956, Classification of patterned ground and review of sugested origins,

Geol, Sue, America Bull, 67> 823-865,

PLATE 1 Susan Barker AND R. T. LANGE

x. 1 (Top) Aerial photograph showing hex-

agonal patterned ground; scale approx.

6 cm, to 1 km. (Courtesy S.A. Dept. of

Lands.)

Fig. 2 (Above) Well formed straight-sided

channel,

» 3 Fig. 3 (Left) Section through gutter show-

_ ing narrow trench infilled with darker

" material. [The hollow below the trench

is an artefact produced by water lying

in the soil pit.]

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE RECORDS OF EUCALYPTUS L’ HERITIER

IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY C. D. BOOMSMA

Summary

The nomenclature of three species of Eucalyptus-E. incrassata Labill. E. odorata Behr ex Schldl.

and E. pyriformis Turcz., is discussed while alterations are described to the recorded occurrence of

another five species.

CONTRIBUTIONS ‘TO THE RECORDS OF EUCALYPTUS L’HERTTIER

IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by C. D. Boontsara*

[Read 8 May 1969]

SUMMARY

The nomenclature of three species of Eucalyptus—E. incrassata Labill.

E. odorata Bebr ex Schidl, and EF. pyrifanniy Turcz., is discussed while altera-

tions are. described to the recorded oceurrence of another five species,

INTRODUCTION

With such a Jarge genus of six hundred species it is expected that nomen-

clatural changes will be proposed from time to time. The likclihood of this hap-

pening is increased if the holotype is relatively imperfect or inacecssible when it

is located oyerseus, In each of the three species in which nomenclatural changes

wre proposed, difficulty was being experienced in identifying specimens with

current floras.

Although the type specimen of only one of the three species was seen, a good

photograph was obtained of the second species, both by courtesy of Dr, H.

Hichler of the State Herbarium, Mr, J. H. Willis of the National Herbarium,

Melbourne, in a personal communication reported on the third species, that he

had “looked up the type material of Muellcr’s E. youngiana from Ooldea and

Victoria Spring, and it corresponds perfectly to this squat fruited eastern plant”.

This is in agreement with Mr. BR, Royce and Mr. P. Wilson of the Perth

Herbarium who jointly examined the published descriptions of E. pyriformis

Turez., E. erythrocalyx Oldf, & IF. Muell, ex F, Muell. and E. pyriformis var.

elongata J. H. Maiden.

They consider that these wre conspecific which is supported by the fact that

the taxon with the tapered fruit is endemic to Wester Australia.

1. Eucalyptus inerassata Labill. in Nov. Holl, P. ii, 12, t.150 (1806).

Eucalyptus costata F, Muell. ex F. Muell. Trans. Vic. Inst. 33 (1855).

Eucalyptus incrassata var. costata , Mucll, N.. T. Burbidge. Trans. Roy. Soc,

5. Aust. 71: 150 (1947).

The puzzling feature in the original description is the omission of reference

to ridges and in the somewhat schematic illustration which accompanied it. The

pertinent part of the description in which no reference to ridges occurs is “calyx

turbinatus, subangulatus, germini adnatus, ultra productus, subcampanulatus,

operculum coriacem”. This can be translated as “calyx turbinate, snbangular,

joined to the ovary and extends beyond. Operculum leathery.”

During a thirty year period a diligent search in the field in South Australia

has failed to locate a significant population with smooth fruits, It is not surprising

then that there is a formidable number of specimens with costate fimits in both

the Perth and Adelaide Herbariums, This situation could be resolved only by an

inspection of the type. Dr, Hj. Hichler, Keeper of the State Herbarium of South

Australia, fortunately obtained a photograph of the type with an annotation by

the Director of the Florence Herbarium that the handwritten label agreed with

the handwriting of the author, Labillardiére,

* Woods and Forests Devt.. Adelaide,

Trans, Roy. Soc, S, Aust. (1969), Vol, 93.

The type locality is “Nova Hollandia, ora austre-vccidentalis” or south west

coust of Australia, This agrees with the fact that Labillardiére landed at Esper-

ance Bay along the southern coast of Western Australia during December 1792.

A full account appears in “Land Flora, The Archipelago of the Recherche” |. H.

Willis Aust, Geog. Soc, Rept. 1/3, 3-4, (1953).

A confirmatory anuotation by the Dircctor of the Floreuce Herbarium tefers

to the presence of small ridges on the torus and these can be seen quite clearly

in the onlargement, plate 2. The occasional collections that van be made from

individuals with only faint ridges to almost smooth is well within the range of

variability reasonably expected where the bulk of individuals have fruits which

are firmly ridged.

It is considered then that there is adequate support for the exchision of

eousideration of « smooth-fruited form E. incrassata Labill., sensu strictu, and

the erection of two varieties.

F, incrassata Labill. yar. incrassata.

E. inerassata var. angulosa (Schau.) Beuth.

The telationship between the varieties can be quite close as intergrades occur

between the somewhat smaller, less ridged and sculptured fruits of yar. incrassata

to the heavily ridged with sharp edges or corrugated thick walls of the usually

larger fruits of var. angulosa Benth.

Selected specimens of E. incrassata var. incrassata in AD inelnde:—

Eyre Peninsula M. E. Phillips 1965 Cleve; R. L. Specht 1950 Section 21 Hundred

Murlong, 105 km north of Port Lincoln: H, C. Robjohn 1967 Sir Joseph

Banks group of islands; J. B. Cleland 1963 Lock,

Yorke Peninsula R, L. Specht 1950 Port Julia.

Central District N. W. Donner 1963 Reeves Plains:

Murray Mallee J. W. Green 1950 Moorlands; R. L, Specht 1960 Hundred Peo-

binga 80 km S.S.E. of Renmark: E, H. Ising 1959 Murray Bridge; R. 1..

Specht 1960 Wanbi Research Centre.

South East D. Wunt 1962 Bordertown.

Western Australia BR. Parsons 1967 Madura.

Selected specimens from Perth Herbarimn,

C. A. Gardner 1924 Hopetoun; R. $, Royce 1956 West Cape Tiawe; A. Main

1960 along track to Streich Mound, A. 5. George 1964 Porongorup Range.

Selected specimens of L. incrassata var, angulosa in AD include:—

Eyre Peninsula, D. J. E. Whibley 1958 Boston Point; K, D. Rohrlach 1961 West

Point; D, J. E. Whibley 1958 Yeclanna, J. B. Cleland 1964 Wanilla.

Lukes of Lower Murray, BR. D. Williams 1959 Meningie, C. D. Boomsma 1967

Goolwa.

Southern Districts, R. Schodde, Wailpinga.

2. E. normantonensis Maiden & Cambage.

This species was recorded Jor South Australia in the supplement to “J, M.

Black's Flora” by Hj. Fichler on p. 236 on the basis of a single specimen J. B..

Cleland 1933 Ernabella, Musgrave Ranges. The previous record of this species

was qualified by: |

“the assumption that the specimen recorded by Black (1952) as E. largi-

florens var, xanthophylle was correctly determined. Its leaves are rather

broad (2.cm).”

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE RECORDS OF EUCALYPTUS 1/HERITIER Lt

On inspection, the specimen was scen to have wide thick coriaceous leaves and

was ratened to I. intertexta forma, R. T. Baker.

The position now is that the record for this species should be cancelled for

South Australia and it is unlikely to be reinstated, as this species is typical of the

northern tropical regions.

3. E. odorata Behr ex Schldl,

This is a preliminary note resulting from an examination of the holotype

HAL 17754, but in the absence of the types of any of the described yarictics. The

rather vague locality of the holotype was “Aldenhoven Estate” and a scarch of

the old land title of the estate showed that it consisted of four parcels of land

in the Barossa Valley distributed from Angaston to Fords, a distance of 20 miles.

An inspection of each parzel showed that the property at Angaston still supports

exclusively an uncleared woodland of E. camaldulensis, whilst E. odorata still

occurs either on or nearby the other three. Specimens recently collected from

these compare favourably with the hololype.

A striking difference in maximum leaf width between this and the wide

leaved specimens from the western slopes of the foothills of the Mount Lofty

Ranges was recorded without further comment by Boomsma, Trans, Roy, Soc.

S. Aust. 83: 197 (1960), An extension to the occurrence of the wide leaved taxon

is now recorded fram Bordertown to Western Flat and Wolseley in the South

Rast.

A comparison of the maximum leaf width per mounted sheet in the Woods

and Forests Department Herbarium, South Australia, is as follows:—

No. of specimens Maximum Width

Wide leaved specimens 27 3241

Typical leayved specimens 29 1s+2

Narrow lcaved specimens 33 12+1

It would appear that the striking difference of width of the wide leaved

specimens in conjunction with its comparatively restricted field distribution

justifies the recognition of a varietal statis, but the type specimens of other

described yaricties would be necessary to resolve the situation.

4. E. pachyphylla F. Muell,

A single definite collection of this stunted mallee species has been made by

R. B. Major in 1966 on a silcrete risc during a geological survey in the Victoria

Desert at Long, 129° 24 E. Lat. 27° 56’ S. The specimen is lodged in the Woods

and Forests Department Herbarium, South Australia.

5. E. pileata Blakely.

Mr. L, A. S. Johnson in a personal communication to Mr, D. Symon points

out that this specics has a characteristic pileate bud and that South Australian

material is not in agreement with that from the type locality in Western Australia.

Specimens of South Australian origin were then forwarded to Sydney Herbarium

in early 1966 for determination. :

6. KE. pyriformis Turcz, Bull. Soc. Nat. Moscow xxii., pt. 2, 22 (1849).

E. erythrocalyx Oldf. & F. Muell. ex F. Muell, (1860).

E. pyriformis yar. elongata Maiden (1914).

160 Cc, D. BOOMSMA

Fruit B

ems

R.W.D,

Lgl A focetyeres pyotirovs B Lfurepatys gyrifornys

For some time two superficially similar large fruited mallees have been recog-

med as E, pyriformis yar, elangata Maiden, and E, pyriformis Turez., respec-

tively,

That two taxa are justified is suggested by the constant clongate torus, with

shallow furrows tapering into the long pedicel in the one from Western Australia,

contrasting with the abrupt short pedicel to the squat torus with deep furrows,

in the one from South Australia.

Mr. P. Wilson, Botanist, Perth Herbarium urate communication) has

pointed out that specimens from the north of Perth, in particular from Wongan

Hills, have long pedicels fully in agreement with that of the original description.

Further, in a Totter by the collector of the type, Drummond, to Hooker and

published in 1853 in the Jounal of Botany by Hooker, the locality of Wongan

Hills ig mentioned and could therefore constitute the type locality. Mr. P. Wilson

records in a private communication “The original description of E. erythrocalyx

agrees with that of the material found in the Wongan Hills and Three Springs

areas and is probably conspecific and convarietal with E. pyriformis,”

It is interesting to note that so far no record has been made of a specimen

from South Australia similar to that of the original description of E. pyriformis.

Instead there is an abundance of the squat budded form which extends well

into inland Western Australia at Laverton, as well as Israclite Bay on the Great

CONTRIBUTIONS TQ THE BROGRDS OF EUCALYPTUS L'HERITIER 1Gl

Australian Bight. It is known for certuin that a collection of the squat budded

form MEL 31296 was made by Mr. Jess Young, a member of Giles 4th expedition

in 1875, from a locality given as Queen Vivtoria Spring, Wester Australia, which

is two hundred miles inland at 30? 25° §. Lat. and 123° 35° F, Long. Less than one

hundred miles inland at Ooldea in South Aust:alia a second collection MEL 31257

was made and the label is in the handwriting of Mrs. Ann Richards,

The label reads as follaws: “A few specimens of Oldia large Howering mallee.

L heggud these for you, but they are such poor things I fear they will be of no

use.

“Should we be heve next winter, will try to get some good specimens.”

Mr, |. H. Willis points out (in a personal communication) that the specimen

MEL 31297 was probably collected hy Police Trooper Richards, her husband,

who acted asa guide lor Giles in March 1875 en route to Ooldes,

The actual year of collection is uncertain, however, as Richards had been

to Ooldex previously.

In considering the shape of the buds of the two taxa, one tapered. the other

squit, coupled with the fact that the main occurence of each hixon is peo-

Hraphically distinct, a subspecific rank is proposed.

E. pyriformis Turez, subsp. pyriformis,

younsiana F. Muell. Fragm. Phyt. Austral, x. 5 (1876).

The selected speciniens of E, pyriformis subsp. yornyiang in the ADD wer

all collected from the far western arid region of South Australia. They include:—

N. B. ‘Tindile 1934 Ooldea; D. Symon 1942 Cheesman Peak: T. BN. Lothian

1964 43 km. west of Tallaringa Well; 1967 10 km. west of Emu: O. H. Turmer

1965 Maralinga. The illustrations were mude from AD 96749222. Ooldea: and

96801936 Cult, Waite Agric, Res, Inst.

7. E. striaticalyx W. F. Fitzy, was identified by L, A. S. Johnson in 1965 us

occurring in South Australia from specimens forwarded to him by D. Symon.

It was recorded in corrigenda and addenda to the Supplement to “J. M. Black's

Flora of South Australia” by Hj. Eichler, 1966. Both before and since then, it hes

heen collected sparingly in several dispersed localities giving it a wide potential

distribution, stretching from the Transcontinental Railway northwards to the

Musgrave Ranges, and perhaps beyond, and westwards to Western Australia,

In a personal communication to Mr, D, Symon, in Sept, 1965, L. A, 3, Johnson

remarks that “this is a new record for South Australia and a most interesting

extension of its range. This species, thought for a lony time to be rare and

confined to the Cue-Nanning area in Western Australia, has in recent years been

found in several places as far as 59 miles north of Kalgoorlie,”

The type locality as recorded by W. V. Fitzgerald, is Milly's Soak four miles

vast of Nannine, With permanent water within root reach it is not surprising that

the associated trees are KE. microtheca und E. eamaldulensis, and that it is able

to reach u height of 10 to 12 metres, and a diameter of 43cm: Tn South Australis

it is reduced to a mallee, or small tree, of 4 proportionate size to the accom-

panying vegetation such as Acacia aneura, E. pyriformis subsp, yorngiana, FE.

terminalis, Pittosporunt phylliraeoides, and Triodia sp,

Selected specimens:—

ADW Symon 1965, Commonwealth Hill Station; Woods & Forests Depart-

ment S.A., J. Johnson 1955, Musgrave Ranges; O, H. Turner 1960, Maralinga;

J. Johnson 1986, Loch Arline Outstation (Commonwealth Hill Station); RB. B.

Major 1966, Long, 129° 30° E., Lat, 27° 58’ 8,

162 Cc, D. BOOMSMA

8. E. viridis R. T. Baker.

The occurrence of this species in South Australia has been cither queried or

confused with E. odorata var. angustifolia Blakely, but a number of recent

collections have been made of it, all from the one large elevated region of the

North East Flinders Ranges and Mainwater Pound, Gammon Ranges. Itemised

localities of recent collections include: Mainwater Pound, J. Johnson; and Mt.

Patawarta, K. Mack; S.A. Woods and Forests Department Herbarium, and Mt.

McKinley at 3000’ altitude, D. Symon, ADW 31 293.

The identification has been confirmed by J. H. Willis, of the National

Herbarium of Victoria despite the dull to subglaucous mature foliage. Fortu-

nately the linear-lanceolate leaves of seedlings are in good agreement with the

species description,

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

The assistance is gratefully acknowledged of Dr. Hj. Eichler, for obtaining

the loan of the type specimens; Mr. D, Hester, for reliable translations of the

original Latin descriptions of E. incrassata and E. odorata; and_Mr. B. H.

Bednall, Conservator of Forests, who made the services of Mr. R. Davies avail-

able for the illustrations. Mr. |. H. Willis, Mr. R. Royce and Mr. P. Wilson kindly

gave critical opinions of the proposed nomenclatural changes.

C, D. Booms PLATE 1

/ Herb. Webbianam. "

| P wente led) Ten. YQ

yey at Ars pers BP “J oa

7 as

Dare “ %

Us Bork, Labitiendtiva.

Puate J

The type sheet of Eucalyptus incrassata Labill. \

collector’s label.

var, incrassatla showing the original

PLATE 2 C. D. Boomsma

PLATE 2

An enlargement of the central portion of the left-hand side specimen on Plate 1 showing

the ridges on the torus of the buds and young fruit.

A NEW SPECIES OF TREE FROG (HYLA) FROM PAPUA

BY J. 1. MENZIES*

Summary

A collection of frogs from Efogi in the Owen Stanley Mountains includes a tree frog (Hyla) with a

combination of characters unlike that of any other Papuan species described in the recent

monograph by Tyler (1968). With reference to the pronounced dermal spike on the snout, the new

species is named.

A NEW SPECIES OF TREE FROG (HYLA) FROM PAPUA

by J. L. Menzims*

(Commanicated by M, J. Tyler)

[Read 10 July 1969]

A collection of frogs from Efogi in the Owen Stanley Mountains includes a

tree frog (Hyla) with a combination of characters unlike that of any other

Papuan species described in the recent monograph by Tyler (1968),

With reference to the pronounced dermal spike on the snout, the new

species is named

Hyla prorat new species.

Holotype, University of Papua and New Guinea No. 1015, an adult male

collected near Efogi by the writer on December 12, 1968, Altitude 3.800’;

location [47° 38’ E., 9° 9’ S. and approximately 37 miles north-east of Port

Moresby.

Paratypes, There are four paratypes, all adult males, collected at the type

locality with the holotype: University of Papua and New Guinea Nos. LOI8 and

1019; South Australian Muscum Nos. R. 10410, 10411.

Diagnosis. A medium-sized arboreal Hyla with fully webbed fingers. a

pronounced fleshy spike on the end of the snout and cryptic, lichen-like dorsal

markings,

Description of the holotype

Habitus slender, and flattened, the outline at rest irregular and extremely

cryptic (Fig. 1A and 1B),

Dimensions: body length (S-V), from apex of rostral spine to cloaca 39-3

mm.; tibial length (TT.) 19-0 mm.; head length (HL), including spine 13-5

mm.; head width (HW) 11:4 mm.; eye to nostril distance (Z-N) 2-9 mm.;

internarial distance (IN) 4-5 mm-.; eye diameter 3-7 mm,: tympanic diameter

1-9 mm,

The head is fattened and longer than broad (HL/ITW 1-19) and slightly

more than one-third of the hody length (HL/S-V 0-34). The snout bears an

acutely tupering fleshy spine, forwardly directed and sharply demarcated from

the head, The spine is 2-3 mm. long and 1-4 mm. wide at the base. The nostrils

are completely lateral and set in depressions on raised tubercles. The eye to

nostril distance is greater than that between the nostril and the upex of the rostral

spine but less than the inlernarial distance (E-N/IN 0-644), The canthus

rostralis is strongly curved but not well defined due to the warty nature of the

skin. The loreal region is oblique and slightly concave. The eye is small, approxi-

mately one and three quarters times its distetce from the nostril. The tympanum

is small and ill-defined being completely covercd with skin. lts upper one-third

is concealed by the supratympanic fold of skin but the lower rim is prominent.

The tympanic diameter is approximately one-half that of the eye. The vomerine

teeth are in two very small groups level with the mid-line of the chownae. Their

* Department of Biology, University of Papua and ‘New Gainey, Port Moresby. Papua.

+ Fram the Greek prora, the prow of a ship,

Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust. (1969), Vol. 93.

tA J. J, MENZIES

distance from the chounac is about twice their own width. The inferior margin

of the lower jaw bears a row of prominent irregular dermal flaps and tubercles.

The fingers are fairly long and extensively webbed and have large torminal

dises, The web extends to the base of the dises on digits 2 and 4 and to the

penultimate articulation on digit 3. Fingers in decrcasing order of length are

ant 4521, There is an elongate moderately pigmented nuptial pac (Tig,

‘The hind limbs are fairly short (TL/S-V 0483), tocs in decreasing order of

length arc 4 > 5 = 3>2> 1 The web extends to the base of the disc on the

5th digit, to the penultimate articulation on digits 2 gnd 4 and to the pre-

penullimate articulation on digit 3, continuing ax # narrow fringe to the buse of

the disc. There is a moderate immer metatarsal tubercle bnt no outer one, The

sulvarticular tubereles are poorly developed.

The skin on the dorsal surface is entirely and irregularly covered with low,

raunded tubercles. A fold of skin commences at the posterior corner of the eye;

passes across the tympatium, oyer the insertion of the fore-limb and continues to

tlie eroin. The dorsal skin of the fore-limbs is similar to that of the body, There

is a pronounced, irregularly crenulated fringe from the posterior side of the

elbow to the disc of the 4th digit. A similarly crenulated inge runs down the

sterior side of the hind-limb, from the middle of the tibiul section to the cise

of the Sth digit. A large triangular dermal flap at the hee) forms part of this

fringe. Two large, semi-circular, warty flaps are situated ventro-lateral lo the

clonca,

The ventral surface is entirely and irregularly tubercular with the exception

of the fore-limbs and the hind-hmbs, distal (o the knees, which are smooth. There

is a gular vocal suc opening from the buccal civity on euch side of the tongue

but the skin of the gular region is not markedly different from clsewhere-

Colour in life

The dorsal coloration was variable and extremely cryptic, consisting of a

mixture of greys, greenish-greys and ochres forming the ground colour with

smaller, scattered blotches of darker browns and blacks, the whole giving an

impression of lichens on dead wood. Sometimes a faint hour-glass mark

appeared, commencing between the cyes and fading out before the cloaca. The

visible surfaces of the fore- and hind-limbs had darkcr and lighter cross bands.

The colour of the margin of the lower jaw was the same as the dorsal

surface with a few black spols extending on to the gular region. The rest of the

ventral surface was an immaculate white, except in the region of the groins.

The concealed surfaces of the hind limbs and the sides of the body from

groin to axilla were brownish-purple with scattered white spots. This colour

extended ventrally from the groins lo meet in the mid-line.

The iris was gold with two lateral dark blotches extending the line of the

horivontal pupil.

Colour in aleohol

The dorsal colour is basically grey with « slight bluish tinge. The hour-glass

mark is discernible and brownish in the centre. There are scattered, irregotlar

darker blotches and faint trmsyerse bars on the limbs. The coloration of the

eonceuled portions of limhs and body js little different from that in life,

Variation

The five type specimens form a unifonn group. The head is consistently

longer than broad (HL/HW 1-060 to 1-195) and may be slightly more, or

slightly less, fhan one-third of the body length (HL/S5-V 0-318 to 0-357). The

A NEW SPECIES OF TREE FROG (HYLA) FROM PAPUA 167

E-N/IN ratio varies from 0-511 to 0-708 and the eye diameter is always less

than the internarial distance, The body length varies [rom 38-1 mm. to 41-2 mro.

The basic coloration is the same in all specimens but the irregularity of the

pattern makes no two exactly alike. The hour-glass mark varies in intensity and

the dark colour of the groins varies in extent. In the holotype the groin patches

mect broadly in the mid-ventral line, in one paratype they meet narrowly, in

another they fail to meet at all.

The crenulated fringes on the limbs and the dermal Jappets on the margin

of the Jower jaw vary in size and distribution.

The nuptial pads vary slightly in shape but all consist of a long, nacrow,

proximal portion and a shorter, wider, distal part,

Fig, 1 Hyla prora, new species, holotype.

A. dorsal view with left hind foot turned to show ventral surface.

B. lateral view, head and fore limb,

C. left thumb and nuptial pad.

168 J. 1, MENZIES

Voice

The call consists of 3 to 10 figures at approximately one-third of a second

intervals, the figures not sharply cut off but fading into the succeeding ones, The

frequency intensity maximum is 2-2 Kes. and the acoustic impression is a taint,

wavering bleat. A more detailed analysis of the call, together with that ot other

Papuan trogs, will be published in due course,

Habitat

The holotype and the four paratypes were collected at night as they called

from low bushes overhanging a small pond, about half » mile from Efogi village.

The natural vegetation of the region. is dense raiti forest on steep-sided valleys

but there are considerable areas under cultivation and patches of coarse grass

(kunai) where the forest has failed to regenerate alter clearing. The pond was

on the boundary between such a kunai patch and the forest, a few yards from

a running stream.

The Owen Stanley Mountains are the most easterly of the central ranges of

the New Guinea mainland. They rise to over 12,000’,

Comparison with other species

The presence of a distinct rostral spine sets the new species apart from all

other Papuan Hylu, the nearcst approach to this condition being seen in H.

spinifera which has an extremely prominent snout and is also a tubercular mon-

tane species. However, the hands of spinifera are unwebbed so that further

comparison is unnecessary.

The only other Papuan Tyla with fully webbed hands are amboinensis,

aruensis, darlingtoni (some individuals), eucnemis, graminea and amnltiplica but

these species all have rounded snouts. Additional points of comparison are as

follows. Hyla amboinensis is a lowland species, generally larger; it has a loud

gigeling call that can be heard one hundred yards distant. H yla aruensis has a

smooth dorsal skin and a uniform green colour, H. darlingtoni is a montane

specics but the backs of its thighs are vividly marked black and yellow; H.

eucnemiy is a submontane species but its nostrils arc closer together (E-N/1N

1:0 to 1*5 compared to 0:5 to 0-7) and its nuptial pad is a different shape; H.

graminea is a much larger plain green species; IT, multiplica is another montane

species but the colour is different (green in life) and the dermal folds on the

limbs are not nearly so prominent.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

I wish to thank Mr. M. J. Tyler of the South Australian Museum for his

critical reading of the manuseript and for examining two of the paratypes.

REFERENCE

‘Tyeun, M. J. (1968). Papuan hylid frogs of the genus Hyla, Zool, Verh., Leiden. (96): 1-203.

LITHOLOGY AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE OBSERVATORY HILL BEDS,

EASTERN OFFICER BASIN

BY H. WOPFNER*

Summary

The new term OBSERVATORY HILL BEDS is proposed for a sedimentary sequence exposed

along the southern and eastern margin of the South Australian portion of the Officer Basin. The

type section is located at 28° 58e2' S. latitude and 131° 59°7' E. longitude. The sequence comprises

red, green and grey micaceous siltstones and silty shales, frequently calcareous; brown, fine to

medium grained greywacke, and thin carbonate-chert beds. The main characteristics are high

contents of K-feldspar in the elastics, extremely thin parallel bedding of the greywacke and

concentric, multicoloured chert nodules and chert breccias associated with the carbonates. Mud

cracks are common.

The sediments were formed during a period of tectonic instability and were deposited in a shallow

water, medium to low energy environment. Mildly evaporitic conditions are indicated by the

presence of beds of gypsum and chemically precipitated carbonates.

No fossils have been found in these sediments but contact-relationships with underlying and

overlying sediments indicate that the Observatory Hill Beds are of middle to late Cambrian age. It is

suggested that they were deposited during the period of tectonic instability in which the sediments

of the Lake Frome Group were laid down.

LITHOLOGY AND DISTRIBUTION OF TIIE OBSERVATORY HILL BEDS.

FASTERN OFFICER BASIN

by H. Worrner*

[Read 13 Novemker 1969]

ABSTRACT

The new term Onsenvatory Ilm1, Beps is proposed for a sedimentary

sequence exposed along the southern and eustcrn margin of the South Australian

portion of the Officer Basin. The type section is located at 25° 58-2’ S. latitude and

131° 59-7’ E, longitude, The sequence comprises red, green and grey micaceous

siltstones and silty shales, frequently caleareous; brown, fine to medium grained

greywacke, and thin carbonate-chert beds, The main characteristics are high

contents of K-fcldspar in the clastics, extremely thin parallel bedding of the

greywacke and concentric, multicoloured chert nodules and chert breccias asso-

ciated with the carbonates. Mud cracks are common,

The sediments were formed during a period of tectonic instability and were

deposited in a shallow water, medium to low energy environment, Mildly evapo-

ritic conditions are indicated by the presence of beds of gypsum and chemically

precipitated carbonates,

No fossils have been found in these sediments but contactrelationships with

underlying and overlying sediments indicate that the Observatory Hill Beds are

of middle to late Cambrian age. It is suggested that they were deposited during

the period of tectonic instability in which the sediments of the Lake Frome Group

were laid down.

INTRODUCTION

The Officer Basi is truly one of the “last frontiers” in South Australian

geology. Nowliere else in this State is there an area of comparable size about

which so little is known. The nature of the basin’s sedimentary fill, its stratigraphy

and its structure are still largely unresolved and most of the [ew data now avyail-

able were produced by oil exploration work carried out by Exoil Pty. Ltd.

Continental Oi] Co. of Australia, and by the Sauth Australian Geological Survey

over the pust 6 years.

The rst subsurtace data were obtained however during iut intensive ground-

water search for the Maralinga and Emu Ficld atomic testing grounds (Barnes,

1956) carried out by the South Australian Geological Survey prior to the com-

mencement of oil search in that region.

Within the South Australian part of the Officer Basin 2 decp oil exploration

wells and 2 shallow stratigraphic tests have been drilled so far, but none of these

wells penetrated the full sedimentary thickness and only one of them (Continental

Sun, Exoil Munyarai No. 1) produced tangible palaeontologicul evidence as to

the age of the basin-fill.

Similarly there is an almost complete lack of formally defined stratigraphic

units. The aim of the present paper is to define and describe the Onsernvarony

Hint Bros, a characteristic sediment-sequence which has been observed by the

author over a wide area of the eastern Officer Basin.

m Supérvising Geologist, Petroleum. Exploration Division, Geologival ‘Survey of South

Australia. Published with the permission of the Director of Mines,

Trans, Roy. Soc, §. Aust. (1969), Vol. 93.

170) HM. WOPPNER

Most of the field-data were gathered during 1966, when the Petroleum

Division of the South Australia Geological Survey conducted « svismograph

survey between Emu Kield and the Officer Creek, and during a visit to u contract

seismic crew operating in the vicinity of Serpentine Lake, near the Western

Australian Border.

REGIONAL SETTING

The Officer Basin is an arcuate shaped basin, extending from ibout 123” east

longitude in Western Australia to 134° east in South Australia (Fig, 1). The

northern margin of the basin is formed by the igneous and metamorphic complex

of the Musgrave Block, The southern and south-eastern limits are ill-defined as

the older sediments of the Officer Basin are, at least in parts, overlapped by the

Mesozoic-Tertiary sequence of the Eucla Basin and the Permian-Mesozoic of the

Arckaringa Basin.

Geophysical data obtained from the South Australian portion of the Officer

Basin in recent years, show a deep trough adjacent to the Musgrave Block, with

sediment accummnlations in excess of 18,000 feet (Moorcroft, 1969), To the south

of this trough the basin shelves gradually till, in the vicinity of Maralinga, sedi-

mentary thickness is reduced to some 1,700 feet (Barnes, 1956; Ludbrook, 1961).

The basin’s inception appears to date back into late Precambrian time,

although in the eastern Officer Basin the major part of sedimentary contribution

NORTHERN TERRITORY

LEGEND

DEYONIAN TO

SILURIAN

ORDOVICIAN,

MT, CHANDLER

SANDSTONE

MICAMBRIAM;

OBSERVATORY

HILL BEDS

PRECAMBRIAN

CRYSTALLINE

FIFLD) BASEMENT

RAILWAY ~ LINE

DA RW Ib) ow?

N.T. j

ime

OFFICER BASIN QLD.

Ft , i

<j PLATFOR sot NE,

wa sOODNADATTA

BRISBANE

A, ae

tr Bh Le

: 8./ j "s

sent peg ; N.S.W.

mrad ADELAIDE i,

state

0 500 “vier.

NILES, MELBOURNE

H.Woptirer 1969 LOCALITY MAP

De!

Fig, 1, Locality plan and generalised surface geology of eastem Officer Basin,

MTHOLOGY AND DISTRIBUTION OF TITE OBSERVATORY HILL BERS 171

was received between the Cambrian and the late Devonian or earl Carbonilerous

(Krieg, in press). Outcrops of the younger sediments oocur near the centre of the

trough whilst exposures of successively older sediments appear towards the

southern margin of the basin (Fig. 1). Overlap of Ordovician sediments is

reported by Kricg (in press),

The area occupied by the Officer Basin is synonymous with the Great Victoria

Desert, which extends from the Everard-Musgrave and Mann Ranges in the narth

to tha: Nullarbor Plain in the south. The whole region is :wonotonously covered by

latitadinally trending, red sand dtines, now thickly vegetated by mnlga-scrub.

Oveasionil stands of tall black oaks (Casuarina cristate) thrive where Pleistocene

carbonates underlie the desert floor. The area is uninhabited by white men and

even aborigines venture into it only on race occasions.

The floor of the Great Victoria Desert exhibits a slight, but nevertheless

distinctive south-tilt with a gradual decrease of surface elevation from uround

1.400 feet in the north to about 400 feet near Maralinga. un average gradient of

5 feet per mile,

Remnants of Pleistocene river systems, once extendin from the ranges alone

the northern basin margin down to the Nullarbor Plain, but now disrupted and

choked by the desert dunes, may still be recognised in meandering salt pans

such as Serpentine Lakes, In some instances the rivers have cut steep-sided

channels into the old land surface. Remnants of these embankments now form low

escirprients around some of the playa lakes and afford good exposures of the

hasin sediments (Wopfner, 1967). Outcrops occur also on the slopes of silerete-

tovered mosas, but this landform is very rare,

OBSERVATONY HILL BEDS

The Observatory Hill Beds as defincd herein comprise the sedimentary

sequence of multicoloured clastics and carbonates which are exposed at, and in

the vicinity of Observatory Hill, a low, but prominent mesa, situated 86 miles

north of Maralinga on the track to Emu Field (Figs. 1 and 2). The name which

has heen derived from the same locality, was first used in an informal sense by

Wopfner (1967).

The term “Emu Sandstone” used informally hy Exoil Pty. Ltd, and Con-

fnental Oil Co, of Aust, Ltd, in unpublished company reports in reference to

sediments in the vicinity of Emu Field is rejected as the prefix Emu is used alrendy

in Fru Bay Shale, defined by Daily (1956).

The Observatory Hill Beds ure identified by characteristic litholngies,

particularly carbonates with chert breccias and multicoloured, conerelionary

chert nodules, and by laminated arkoses, greywacke and feldspathic siltstones

Type Locality

Observatory Hill and its surroundings. were sclected as type locality for

their gond exposures and because all of the lypical lithologies: displayed by this

formation may be observed in close proximity to each other, At Observatory Hill,

however, the sediments are partly altered by the deep weathering profile of the

quartzose silerete (duricrust ) which caps the mesa, The type section was Uhere-

fore chosen 4 miles west of Observatory Hill, where a low escarpment along the

western shore of a playa lake displays an excellent section with almost LOO:

exposure of the fat lymg sediments (Fig. 2 and Plate 1/1),

Along the fout of this escarpment there is a great variety of cemurkable

aboriginal stone grrangemunts. consisting of long rows of stone pyramids pre-

sumably associated with ceremonial rituals. The stone arrangements of this

ve 1. WOPENER

ceremonial site, sometitnes referred to as “Stonehenge” have heen deseribed in

some detail by Campbell and Hossteld (1966),

The type section is easily accessible via an -defined track which turns off

the Maralinga track 4 miles south-west of Observatory Hill.

Litholoxy

The sediments exposed at the type section of the Observatory Hill Beds,

although dominantly a clastic sequence, display a variety of rocks, diversified by

colour, grain size and the amount of chernically precipitated material. [t is the

combination of these various rock types in oue depositional sequence plus certain

textural and mineralogical trends which are so characteristic of the Observatory

Hill Beds ond identify them as a stratigraphic unit.

In the type section (Fig. 3), the grain sizos of the clastic sediments range

from shule (< 0-03 mm.), to fine-grained sand (0:25 mm.) and their colours vary

between bluish grey, green, tan, maroon and brown. Maroon and preen mottling

is also common.

Within the lower two-thirds of the section, the clastics are mainly shales or

siltstones. They are generally well bedded, fissile or splintery and are nearly

always micaceous and some exhibit well developed mud cracks (Plate 2c). The

elastics are also often calcareous and thin bands and lenses of limestones, dolo-

ine and cherts, are commonly interspersed throughout this part of the sequence

ig. 3).

These chert-carbonate associations not only provide one of the t pical litho-

lowies by which the Observatory Hill Beds may be recognised in widely separated

areas but are also an important environmental indicator. ‘The chert generally

securs in thin lenticles or in concentric concretions of ellipsoidal or botryoidal

shapes, with an average diameter of 20 to 30 mm. (Plate 2b). Angular piecvs of

chert sometimes form the cores of these concretions. The individual concentric

shells of these concretions display a variety of colours such as black, white, grey

and hues of red which lends them a most attractive appearance when freshly

braken or cut, As their resistance to weathering is considerably greater than the

yemnaining sediments they are preserved even in deeply weathered and altered

profiles (Wopfrer, 1983) or remain as lag along the foot of debris covered slopes

fe, Observatory Hill). Other typical chert-carbonate associations are chert-

hreeeia or micro-breecia whereby angular pieces of chert are embedded in a

carhonate matrix. Sometimes these chert-breceias can be traced laterally into

undisturbed chert bands, clearly demonstrating the penecontemporaneous Halure

of these breccias.

The carbonates themselves are mainly crystalline or micro-crystalline-mieritic

and intraclasts arc generally rare in the clean varieties. Some of the carbonates

are thinly banded, with alternating bands ot Jimestone, dolomite and chert

(unit 17), Terrigenous clastic material, mainly quarts and some feldspar varies

within very wide margiyis, from very ymall percentages to equal participation or

predominance. Special features of some of these carbonates are inclusions of

scapalite (units 3, 4, and 7) and large euhedral grains of red oligoclase albite

(unit 7).

Petrographic descriptions ot some of the carbonate rocks are given in the

appendix and a summary ef their composition is shown in Table 1 helow.

The top third of the type section is composed of non-calearcous clasties and

sediments in the fine sand range (0°25 to 0+125 mim.) become more abundant.

As in the lower parts of the section, the sediments arc generally micaccous and

feldspathic, The “sandstones” are generally friable lo semifriable and they show

a high clay content which classifies these sediments as greywacke, Small fithie

LITHOLOGY AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE OBSERVATORY HILL BEDS 173

TABLE 1

Composition of caleareaus sediments from type-section of Observatory Hill Beds and from

Emu No. 1 well

Percent of mineral composititm from visual estimates

Minerals - =

identified P293/68 P294/68 P292/68 P287/68 P288/68 P289/68 P1/69

Unit 2 Unit 3 Unita Unit 6 Unit 7 Unit 9 Emu No. 1

1105 ft.

Calcite 40-50 | 20-40 | 45-80 | 70 80 | 40-50 | 50 30

Dolomite 30-.40 50 nil 1—2 2-5 10 nil

Chert 10—20 5-10 40 10—20 nil nil nil

Quartz 1—5 5 2—5 10—3A 40—50 30—40 30)

Feldspar nil nil * * 1 nil 30—35

Clay mil nil * * 2-3 6-10 +

Chlorite nil nil * + + 1 Tt

Leucoxene nil nil * * tT + nil

Biatite + tT * * t nil T

Muscavito Tt + a * t I +

‘Tourmaline tT nil ng * t nil Tt

Garnet nil nil * * + nil nil

Apatite nil nil * * + ay nil

Zireon 7 nil * * + tT nil

Scapolite nil 1 5—10 ¥ T nil nil

Opaques + 1 + * t 1—2 2—3

* = not determined

grains are also common, One of the main featur

abundance of detrital K-feldspars w

position. Plagioclase feldsp

. K-feldspar is either microperthitic

7 denotes trace-amounts

TABLE 2

ars are ulso present but f

Composition of arenaceous sediments of Observatory Hill beds

Table 2.)

Minerals § |————____

identified P 291/68

Unit 21

in Type sect,

Quartz. 60—70

Plagioclase 2-5

K. Feldspar 20

Muscovite 2-3

Biotite 3

Chlorite 5

Clay 5—20

Sericite nil

Tourmaline *

Zircon +

Clino-

zoisite nil

Rutile nil

Apatite nil

Opaques *

Pereent of mineral composition from visual estimates

P 207/63 |

es of these sediments is the

hich constitute up to 30% of the rocks’ com-

n much smaller amounts (see

as in unit 21 or occurs as mi¢rocline

P 295/68 P 296/68 P 298/68

4 miles N of 4 miles 8 of | 2miles S of

Observatory | Emu Field | Emu Field | Emu Field

Hill

55 —65 60—70) 40-50 5)

1—% 4—6 1-2 1-2

10—20 20—380 10—20 15—20

2—3 I—2 1—2 3—5

nil ¥ nil *

nil nil 30—40 1-3

10 0 -10 20 —35

5-10 & nil nil

nil * nil *

* nil nil nil

nil nil nil +

nil nil nil *

* nil nil nil

nil 1-2 1 *

* denotes less than 1 percent

P 299/68

5 miles EB of

Serpentine

Lake

H, WOPFNER

i — a —=

3 pA: : LEGEND

apg A % Ao | stp OBSERVATORY HILL BEDS:

: UD rope Calcare ‘red—beds'

a LT. Merorang. ore and thers nen

fi cb is 2 233 Akosic sandstoane-___ EEE

To Mt. rter

E TE sas peng pe ns

“EXxOIL Emu! |e"

= ——95)

‘a

| ae

80¢ ‘ re = =

\ ae ve dy

y Ye ~~ 850!

fed visit MEF

A Le

SCALE

KILOMETRES

A No. 1

Playa lakes _..___ --— Cae

A \__s

% ATOMIC BOMB

Sea \ TESTING GROUND a

ey S/

0) MILES

H. Waptner 1969 fo

ST = a

Pig. 2.

Type area of Observatory Hill Beds, south-eastern Officer Basin. Contours show

surface-elevations in feet. P-

Appendix.

numbers refer to pelrographic descriptions in the

LITITOLOGY AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE OBSERVATORY HILL BEDS 175

OBSERVATORY HILL BEDS—TYPE SECTION

Lat. 28° 58-2’ S; Long. 131° 59-7’ E.

UNIT LITHOLOGY

No.|Surface Limestone (calerete) with reworked

chert-noduiles and cobbles of limestone.

Paka THICEMESS IN FEET

aS rst

Greywacke-sandstone, maroon'te brawn, fine

grained, feldspathic, micaceous, thinty bedded, + P29) 68

semi-friable, LEGEND

Sandstone, fine grained

Shale, maroon, grading to grey near top, very Siltstone-._-

silty and richly micaceous; splintery to flaky.

‘ ? . . Shale.

19 Sittstone, red, richly micaceous, sandy, thinly aa Limestone_-_______

bedded, semi-friable. ‘aleps f riya Dblomité.: 24 = 4 .-

Greywacke-sandstane, grey, very fine grained, .

richly micacecus.

Oslomite, green, banded,cherty.

| 26 [Siltstone, grey, very richly micaccous,

Shale, marcon and green mottled, micaceaus,

hard, splintery

Sandstone, brawn, very fine grained,

richly micaceous. thinly bedded

: Mica

Shale, maroon and green mottled, micaceous,

hard, splintery or conchoidal.

WVU Vaviel

— i —

12 Siltstone ts silty shale, bluish grey, richly

Micateous; muderacks, 40

Siltstone, Buf, calcareous, micaceous,and grey

dolomite.

eee a

P-numbers identify position

of samples described

in the Appendix,

Shale, maroon, micaceous, splinrery,

Limestone, grey, sandy, and calcareous silt- A -s—P2B9. 08

stone with muderacks, grading to Shale,

bluish gray, mitro-micaceous, massive, con-

choidal fracturing.

Shale, maroon with green moctling, silty,

micaceous, thinly bedded; calcareous with

layers of coarsely erystalline calcite near top

and Very richly micaceous,

Limestone pale green, silty, microcrystalline.

Shale, maroon, silty, micaceous, 26

grading to grey, silty sandstone,

NOTE

10 Feet equivolant

fo 3,048 Metres

E ==> +— P287 168

Limestone, tan, cherty, crystalline, ay

“hi

Siltstone, greenish grey, mitaceous, “dirty,"' a ae P292 68

with stringers of red, micaceous shale and '

bands of carbonates,

3 |rmee maroon and green mottled, silty,

a= VV 0294 68

micaceous; calcareous near top with thin beds

of carbonates.

Shale, pale greenish grey, verysilty, micaceous,

With thin bands of cherts and carbonates:

mudcracks

Shale, maroon, silty, micaceaus, fissile, medium

hard,

= eS

P2938 68

i eel Wh oe a

- 0 [Sy oy,

Bose nul exposed a

69-423 Del. C.R.5, H.Wooplner 1948 Surtace of plays lake

Fig. 9. Type section of Observatory Hill Beds. 4 miles west of Observatory Hill.

6 Fl. WOPIFNER

or untwinned forms. The greywackes in the type svetion ure thinly bedded or

current laminated. A tendency towards small-scale festoon-current bedding is

exhilitted in unit 21,

Yo the north-east of the type section exposures of greywacke and urkoses

heeure more important. On the south shore of the lurge playa lake, situated about

5 miles north-east of the type section (P295/68 in Fig, 2) a brown, clayey arkose

interbedded with highly weathered cherty shale is exposed. ‘This arkose exhibits

perfect parallel bedding, the individual bed thickness being very evenly in the

range of 2 to 4 mm. This thin parallel bedding with high fissility is very typical

for most of the fine-grained greywackes and arkoses and is another characteristic

feature of the Observatory Hill Beds.

Outerops in the immediate vicinity of Emu Ficld consist dominantly of grey-

wackes and clayey arkoses in the size range of fine to medium. grained sand

(0-50 to 0-12 mm.). The lowest outcrops occur in the west side of the air-

strip where they consist of fine to medium grained, thinly current or parallel

bedded white greywacke with an average bed thickness of 10 to 15 mm,

About a mile south-west of this oceurrence and south of the only remaining

building of Emu Field Village there is a low escarpment with goud exposure

of greywacke. The lower & feet of this exposure consist again of white, ne to

very fine grammed, richly micaccous greywacke. This sediment aguin exhibits

the typical, extremely thin parallel bedding with very regular bed thickness of

between Land 8 mm. In the upper part of this outerop bed thickness increases to

an ayerage of I to 15 cm. Sample P298/68 was obtained from this unit Some

powdery gypsum and lenses of alunite occur newr the base of this mit. The

composition of the greywacke and clayey arkoses exposed near Emu Field Villige

show the same high K-feldspar content’as found in arenaceous sediments within

the type section. The white colour of these sediments is almost eertainly duc to

bleaching and chemical weathering within a (?)Cainozoi¢ deep sveathering

profile. The same process probably was also responsible for the kaolinisation of

ewrtain feldspars:

A vomparison of the composition of arenites from Emu Field, the type section

and other localities is given in Table 2.

The Exoil Well Emu No. 1, drilled to a total depth of 1,370 feet. The well

encountered maroon, greon. and grey siltstones, calcareous siltstones, greywacke.

arkoses, and grey cherly limestones (Fig 4). Small amounts of gypsum were

encountered between 1,090 and 1,140 feet and a 1 inch bed of gypsum was

reenvered in core 4 from 1,105 feet. The strata penetrated in the Emu No, 1 Well

show all the typical features of the Observatory Hill Beds, such as the cherty

limestones, chert breecia and the high percentage of K-feldspars,

There can be litth: doubt, if any, that the section observed in the type section

and the sequence encountered in Emu No. 1 Well belong to the same depositional

event. Figure 4 shows a possible correlation between the type section and the well,

a distance of about 26 miles (see Fig. 2), Although this correlation can anly he

tentative it agrees with the observed predominance of oulerops of arenaccous

sediments to the north of the type section, The slight thinning towards the type

section would he in kecping with the more peripheral position of this locality,

Regional Distribution and Age

Intermittent exposures of thinly bedded greywacke and urkoses occur lo the

nutth-cast of Emu Field and they have been observed over a distance of some

40 aniles, No work bas been carried out along the eastern margin of the Officer

Hasin beyond that point and the area of the Everard 1;250,000 map shect. Near

LITITOLOGY AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE OBSERVATORY IIL, BEDS 177

CORRELATION Eee! We

BETWEEN EMU No.1

TYPE-SECTION AND

EXOIL WELL EMU No.1| 5°

DEPTH AWD THICKNESS IN FEET

NOTE

50 Fee) equivalent

to 15.24 Metres

TYPE-

SECTION

, Calerete

wes —

Elevation difference between

top of type=section and

surface—elevation at Emu No]

approximately 150 feet.

Liho—log of Emu No.1 300

after R\Grasso (1963)

lithological symbols as in figure 3

69—387 Del. C.R.S.

Fig. 4. Correlation between type section and sequence penetrated in the Exvil Well Emu

ea Hi Top section of Emu Well has been enlarged (central column) for greater

etail.

(78 H. WOPFNER

the castern margin of that map area, south of Wallatinna water hole G. Keleg and

R. Major mapped a sequence of sillstones with nodular chert conerelions und

thinly bedded to laminated greywacke, The sediments exposed at this localit

show al! the typica! features absesyedl in the type section of the Observatory Hill

Beds and there is no doubt in the author's aind, who visited this section in 1968,

that these are cock equivalents of the Observatory Hill Beds. Krieg (in press)

correlates the Observitery Hill Beds at Wallatinna with a sequenve ut the north-

castern foot of the Mt. Jom Range, consisting of a basal conglomerate—‘with

components. derived trom an Adclaidean and granitic terrain—cherty siltstone

characterised by nodules, lenses and irregular bands of chert and red, fine grained,

cross-bedded greywacke-sandstone. The conglomerates are confined to the

vieinity of Mt. John Range beyond which they grade laterally into finer clastics.”

These equivalents of the Observatory Hill heds vverlie the Adclaidean sediments

with marked unconformity and they are capped, apparently conformably, by the

Mt. Chandler Sandstone which is generally gegatdcd to be of early Ordoyician

age. On this evidence it would appear that the Observatory Hill Beds have to be

placed somewhere within the Cambrian.

Red cherty siltstones, shale and greywackc-sandstomes are exposed inter-

mittently to the east of Serpentine Lake. As the lithology and mineral composition

of these sediments are very similar to the greywacke in the type-area (see P299/68

ce Appendix) they are tentatively considered to represent Observatory Hill

Peds.

The first attempt at correlating the Observatory Hill Beds with sediments

outside the type area was made by Barnes (18) wh equated these sediments

with a sequence of dark red sandstones, purple shale aud siltstones and green sand-

stones encountered below Tertiary sediments in the Maralinga water bores, One

of Hiese bores penetrated 1,090 feet of these sediments and bottomed in crystalline

basement to 1724 feet. Barnes (op. cit.) suggested a Tate Precambrian to

Cambrian age for the lower, red-bed sequence and a Palaeozoic to early Meso-

zoic age for the upper, generally green coloured succession, Tadbrook (1961 )

subsequently carried out palaconto logical work on the bore samples. No fossils

were found in these sediments and Ludbrook (op. cit.) suggested a late Pre-

cainbrian (Marinoun) age for both the red-beds und the green coloured sediments,

comparing them with the Tent Hill Formation of the Port Augusta-Woomera

yegion.

. Red-beds are of course a very common. and widespread sediment type in

South Australia, They ave known from Precambrian stages in the Adelaide Geo-

syncline, they were developed extensively during the Cambrian and they are

again common in Devonian sequences. The lithological characteristics ot the

Observatory [ill Beds compare most favourably with the middle to Lite Cambrian

Lake Frome Group (Daily, 1956) of the Flinders Ranges,

The sedimentological features particularly of the lower two units of that

group, the Muodlatana and Balcoracanna Formations, are almost identical, These

formations are composed of green and red siltstones, arkoses, greywacke-

sandstones, calearcous siltstones, and of dolomites and limestone, commonly with

chert bands and breccia. The clastic sediments are characterised by a high feldspar

content (20-10%) and they are richly micaceous and often biotitic. These twa

lower units are capped by a current-bedded arkose, the Pantapinna Sandstone of

Dalgarno and Johnson (1965),

The sediment sequence and the lithological characteristics of both the

Observatory Hill Beds and the Lake Frome Group suggest a depositional environ-

ment which required specific tectonie contrul nat only of the basin area but also

of the region which furnished the detrital material.

LITHOLOGY AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE OBSERVATORY TILL BEDS 175

It is for this reasouipg, combined with the evidence presented from the Me.

Jobin Range, that a middle to late Cambrian age is suggested for the Observatory

Hill Beds,

Environment

The Observatory Hill Beds are substantially the product of a shallow water

environment in which they were laid down under generally oxidising conditions

and under low to medium levels of energy, The uniformly high contents of detrital

teldspars and micas, the generally ill sorted natuze of the clustics and high pro-

portion of clay size particles requires rapid burial of the sediments and & proximity

of a metamorphic and igncous source area which underwent active und continuous

erosion, In order to maintain such a situation over an extended period of time,

dlownwarp of the basin must be compensated hy uplift of the source arca and

vice versa. In other words, such an environment cun only be maintained during

periods of tectonic instability.

The first downwarp, which initiated the depositional period of the Observu-

tory Hill Beds appears to have been rapid. In the north-castern portion of the

basin (Mt. John area) a gradient of sufficient magnitude was created, to facilitate

transport of cobbles and pebbles into the basin while elsewhere medium grained,

feldspathic sands were deposited. After this initial tectonic cpisode, sedimeritation

was largely controlled by oscillating perinds of stihility and reactivation of

tectonic instabilily. This is demonstrated by a tendency to cyclic: deposition, for

instance the repetition of gradational shale-carhonate sequences observed in the

type section (anit 8 > nnit 9— units 10 and It), Each of these “cycles” may he

interpreted as having resulted from fluctuations of the gradicnt between the

source arca and the depositional “base” within the basin. Intermittently the basin

was filled to such a level that portions of the sediments became exposed above

water level, dried out and formed mod cracks.

The texture of the carbonates is characteristic of chemically deposited lime-

stones and dolomites. This, together with their thinly laminated nature and the

coprecipitation of silica (chert) and the deposition of gypsun indicates a mildly

evaporitic environment with above normal salinities, The high concentration af

CO, may also have been responsible for the retention of the scapolites observed

in same of the carbonate rocks.

A generally higher energy level, manifested by the predominance of

arenaceous sediments, prevailed during deposition of the upper parts of the

Ohservatory Hill Beds, The extremely thinly bedded greywacke and arkoses are

difficult to interpret but they have certain affinities to deposits of the intra-tidal

zone,

The mineral composition of the Observatory Hill Beds shows that the

terrigenous material was derived from a source area largely composed of meta-

morphics af the gramplite fucies, with lesser contributions from both acid and

basic fyneous racks. Along the southem and caster margin of the Officer Basin

the terrigenous material was most likely supplied off the Gawler Range Platform

whilst the Musgrave Block may have contributed clastic components into the

northerm portion of the basin,

REFERENCES

Barnes, T. A. 1456. Water Boring—Maralinga, Geological and Iydrological camments, Geol.

Surv. S. Aust, Rept. Bk, No, 493, 18 Curpuh,),

Camper, T. 1, and Hossrenp, P. S.. 1966. Australian, Aboriginal Stone Arrangements in

North-west South Australia, Trans. Roy. Suc. §. Aust. Vol, 90, pp. 171-176,

Dany, B, 1956, The Cambrian in South Australia in EI Sistem Cambrico. su pulaen-

geographia y el problema de sia hase, Congreso Geal, Internat. Mexico, Vol. 2, pp. 91-147,

Lea H. WOVENRER

Daiuanxo. C, B., and Jounson, J.B... 1966. Geological Atlay of Australia, Parachilaa 1 :250,000

chect. S. Aust, Gel. Survey Sheet H54-13, Zoncs 5 andl 6.

Grasso, HK, 1983. Final Well Report of Exoil Ply, Ltd. Emu No, 1 Well (unpub. ).

Kmarc, G. (in press). Geological Developments in the Eastern Officer Basin of South Aststralia.

1. Aust. Petroleum Explor, Ass. ;

Lupwaoox, N. H., L061. Subsurface Stratigraphy of the Maralinga Avea, South Austrafia, “Leans,

Hoy. Suc, 8. Aust Vol. 84, Pp. 51-59,

Mooncrort, K, 1969. Seismic Reflection, Refraction and Gravity Survey, Eastern Offiver Basin,

1966. 5. Aust, Mines Dept. Mining Rey, N1I26-. pp, 58-70 (June [9G7).

Worrner, H.. 1967. Some Observations on Cainozoic Land Surfaces in the Officer Basin. Ceol.

Surv, S. Aust. Quart. Geol Notes. No, 23, pp, 3-8,

APPENDIX

Fetrographic Descriptions

The following petrographic Sereriptlant of selected samples of Observatoey Hill Beds are

here presented as additional evidence for the characteristic lithology and mineral composition

of this stratigraphic unit and also in support of the interpretations on depositional environment

und provenance, The visual estimates af constituents have been summarized in table-form atl

are included in the main part of this paper

The petrology was carried out by R. Davy (P287/68 to P299/68) and A. Kelly (P1L/ti8) of

the Mineralogy Section of the Australian Mineral Development Laboratories in Adelaide. ‘fhe

description of sample PCS by W. B. Bryan was taken feom the Well-completion report vf

Em No, 1 (Grasso, 1963), The deseriptions are grouped in 3 pee, namely (n) samples from

the tyne section; (b) surface samples from the Emu region an Serpentine Lake and (x) core

samples trom the Exoil well Emu No. L

(a) Samples from the type section.

Saniple No. P293/68: 7 feet above base,

Dolamitised Limestone with Chert nodules,

The hand specimen is a creamy grey, fine grained rock with red, rownled nodules uf chert

alone apparent bedding plines, Weathering dissolves the matrix and leaves the cherty material

standing proud on the surtace.

Thin section: The rock was composed ritmatily of calcite and chert. Subsequently there

hay heen secondary dolomitization in a pateny fashion and the development vf large rounded

sepregations of chert vontaininy venlets of quartz, Ihe segregations appear le he dithusion

phenamena, The chert contains small spheroids uf fibrons silica, occasional fakes of eleite aud

= host of minute inclnsions virtually opaque because of their size. These appear lo be aotmpic,

are reddish and probably some form of irom oxide. Dolumite has started to pentrate the chert,

Grain size is that of silt far most of the rock, silt-clay grade in the chert layers.

Other minerals present i trace amounts include a deep vreen biotite and ovuscovite. The

rack is a Chemically precipitated limestone. partially doluwilised since deposition. For estimates

of eonstitnents see Table 2.

Sample No. 2204/68: 10 feat above hase.

Dolomitised Limestone with Chert.

Hand specimen: A iassive fine rained rock, creamy or urey in colour which contains

Jovers of fine vrained, partly fibrous material, The lutter layers are highly resistant to weathering

und land ont on the weathered surface te 4 licight of 3:5 mm,

Thin section: "his is oa dolomitised limestoue similar to P293/68, Li contains athedral

avereyates of calcite which have been partly replaced by dolomite, with the replacement at

a higher level than in other slides, Within the cock there are voin-like segregations of dolomite

and chert, and there are apparent fursier lithic fragments composed wholly of dolamite. These.

parallel the bedding and Une vaniticn, Quartz appears in the dolomitised calvite in avhedral

detrital grains, Scapolite oceurs with the dolomite in aiecral grains with fantike extinctipn.

Senpolite was confirmed by X-ray diffraction examination. Grain sizg is upprovimately silt src

far most of the rock with the cherty layers more fine grained still, The sediment is a cheniicsl

limestone which has heen secondarily dolomitised. Some siliga present has bern mobilised or

has been introduced at a later stave: and precipitated’ as Ghert, The dolomifsation may he

almost contemporaneous. ‘Shis: is sugested by the presence of apparently Wthie fragments of

dulumite, For rock-composition see Table 2,

Sainple No. P292/68: 14 foet above base.

Cherty Limestone.

Hand specimen: Au irregularly laminated, multi-coloured sedimentary rock which shows

roueh variation in grain size, Certain Layers appear very fine grained, others are coarse with

apparent grain diameters of 1-2 nn. The ruck is stained pink over much of ibs volume, but

LITHOLOCY AND DISTRIBUTION GF ThE OBSERVATORY MILT, HEDS 151

has yellow, maroon-black and brown layers, 'The banding appears ta be a prnditet of diffusion,

uot hedding,

Thin neutiia) This is a chemically precipitated sediment composed at chert and calvite with

& few grains Of quarks and also fans 0 scapolite. The calcite is in irregular corroded masses. pf

quite large Yrainy and there ave siguy af dolomite as a rim td sume of the calcite. Grains inay

he pp te 1 mm. in diameter. Comparatively rare grains wf quartz o¢gur dispersed (heaugh the

tock. Chert forms discrete lavers and has also penetrated into the carbonate rich areas in the

interstices behween the grains, ;

The sedinrent was formed by chemical coprecipitation of calcite uncl vlwrt, modified by

Jatey diffusion and corrosion, Far estimates vf constituents see Table 2

Sample Na. P287/88: 17 Feet ahove base.

Cherty Limestone,

The hand specinien shows twa types of sediment, The inain portion is a grey, fine-grained

rouk’ contiining wrecnixl patches, ‘Che other is red and yellow in patches and uppears to

cantain chert as a secontlary material, Patches of the grey rock are contained within the red and

yellow “filamews”. The chert kuyer 1s move resistant to weathering,

a thin sections The rock is composed of an intimate mixture oF calcite (70-80%) and quartz

(10-35%) which have apparently coprecipitated as smal) anhedral grains (averaging 0:04 yn,

but rungingoup to 0-18 mm.). Part of the limestone bas been replaced by a yein-like agirewate

af opaline chert (10-20%) which contains grains af the limestone apparently broken off and

Incorporated into the chert, and part is replaced by dolamite (1-2%). The chert shows corrosive

functions with the limestone, The chert ix stained fight brown and also contains small grains of

dmextone, Small patches of chert also oveur within the main limestone and appear to be lithic

fragments derived From some earlier phase of silicification. Dolomite rinis or replaces valolte

Grains. The only other minerals present are hydrated iron oxides and leucosene, Sune ol the

calcite has. been recrystallived. into laryer grains in the: area adjavent to the vein. Crain size for

the calcite averngex 0°05 rom; for the chert lower still.

This is a chemical limestone with secondary deposition or segregation of churt.

Sample No, 7288/68; 22 feet above base.

Arenucuous Limestone,

The hand specimen is a uniform, medion tu fine gratned rock vontuining white

“ypherulites". There ar: occasional veddish grains within the: main mass of the rock, There are

only traces of a bedding, lines visible may he related to proximity ta the surface.

Thin sextion: A ruck of silt or fine sand esrade with oucasional coarser fragments. Calvite

and quarts are the two chick constituents and boll vecur as small ireeular grtins. Clay is

also present between the cruins and the minerals present in acvessory aniounts are disperseel

through the tack, One esurse fragument of scapolite 3 aim, long was seen, There ix at best only

a very rough trace of bedding which is shown by « tendency to parallelism of some of the

coarse fragineuts. The feldspar shows white-type twins and is probably oligoclase albite: (bout

Any): Dolomite replaces and rims calelte vrains in a Few places.

Grain-size vitrivs trom (hb 15 min. for the quarks to, typically. 0°08 mm, for the ealoite.

A special feature: of this specimen are large grains (0+8-1+2 mii,) of red oligoclase albite

with minute inclusions of hematite.

This sediment is probably largely of clastic origin, Some of the carbonate may haye heen

chemically precipitated. There has been unich erosion of metamorphic rocks followed by short

transportation and reasonably quick burial, The rack has not been secondarily rourystalliseal

An interesting exotic is the lacge smahe erystal of svapolite, For estimutes of constituents see

Tahle ft,

Sample No, P289/68; 33 feet ahave base.

Arenacéous Limestone,

‘Lhe hand specimen shows a massive, hard, fine grained, laminated sediment. The calor

varies from light to dark grey and weathers brown. Bedding is rather variable and appears to

be irrevuler owing, ty current action,

Thin section: This has been an: arenaceous limestone and contiins a mosaic of gquledral

quartz and cileite, with subordmate clay, However the ealeite has heen attacked and partly

replaced by dolomite which appears in some “rains O6 8 riut ronnd the centre, The micaceynis

minerals and elongate quartz crystals show a rough puralelisin indicative of hedding, the

latter being eniphastied by bands of differing proportions of minerals, especially hy the cliftermny

prapertions of clay, The oOpuque minerals are, fur the most part, scattered through the teed,

(where they appear to be mica altered to iron ore, traces of miou remam iu places) but alsa

occur along bedding cracks or farmer solution channels, The primary ofueral scems ta hav:

been hematite but tt is naw lovgely Timemite, A few apaque grains show outlines consistent

with «.g. brachiopod shell sections, No definite trace of fossils was found. The grain diggwter

averages 0-1 mm, The constituents are shown in Tabl: 1.

162 H, WOPTNER

Sample No. P29N/6%: 54 lect abuve base,

Banded chert-carbonate mck, ‘

The hand speeinten is a fino grained, irregularly banded (bedded) sedinent. The layers

are apparently af different composition and this has produced variegated bands, some of which

pon, wi, wréenish-erey, clark wrey, aud light grey, Manganese dioxide stuins appear on the

surface.

Tlin section: The mck consists of calcite. dolomite, quartz, chert, feldspar, green biotite,

Innscevite and, im accessory amounts tourmaline and leucoxeme Ut is however impossible to

vive acenrate proportions as. the mineruls are concentrated in difterent layers. In general calelte

is the most abundant mineral, but in some lavers it is in the. process of being replaced by

dolomite, fy other layers. chert iy the most common roineral with calcite and dolomite sub-

urdinate, Quartz iy present im the calcite-rich layers but in subordinate amounts: it is anliedeal

and detrital. ‘Lhe layers range in thickness from 0-4 mm. to over L em, Other minerals are Fairly

evenhy dispersed except that the chert contains no micacems material or tourmaline. Dolomite

is definitely secondary and ts present (a) as a cement, (b) in small rhombs, and {c) rims on

enleite. Its definite tondeney to take crystal forma contrasts strunely with the caleite. Quarts

ntins are jess common Ja the carbonate layers thar in specimens 287/284 /389, They are

etrilal in origin.

Certain of the chert layers have been cracked and the eracks have been infitled wath

calcite, The chert layers show a form of grated bedding with calgite at the apparent bottom,

Grain size is typically 0-06 mm, or below-

sins aDirent bedding may reflect true bedding but it has almost verinly been ovolified

ay diffusien.

‘The thin swnple mpresents a sedimentary sequence with alternations of cleqwically pre-

cipitated carbonate and silicu.

Sample Na. P29/168: 74 leet wbove base-

Feldspathic Creywacke,

Han specimen, A dark chocolate brown rather variably bedded sudy sack. ‘be rack

Shaws variable bedding derived from mild nirbulence and current bedding, Light coloured

nica Shows on the bedding surfaces.

Thin section: A visual estimate of the constituents is giver in Talle 3. The rock is come

posed of largely anhedesl grains of quartz and feldspar, together with hiths of musenvite and

oxidised biotite, The interstices between the prains are filled with clay, ‘Chis is subordinate, and

much) gf the space between the grains has been filled by sceondary pvergrowth of silica ur liv

apparent redistribution of silica. A few fragments ure of ronncled masses of chlorite, apparently

representing former ferromapmesian minerals, Mictoeline yemains fresh but untwinned K- eldspar

aid the K-feldspar microperthite are bath sericitized. The K-feldspar ticroperthite is af the

tubular vein perthite commanly sssucinted with the wranuiite facies. Albite is care and fresh

and, In aoe case, euherral. Other; more calcic plagioclase (Pandesine) is severely altered,

The biotite is wiusual in that it is almast opaque being now replaced by one of the

Iylrated fron oxides, As this specimen comes ftrm fhe surface thix may be a weathering feature.

Mica is normally Sprennieately parallel to the beddiny,

Other minor minerals present vielude tounnaline (rounded}, zireom (rounded) and

sobably primary iron oxides. The considerable voidl space means: that the roek is probably

dvhly porous, The grain size of the framework 15 typically 0-3 % 0-15 min.

‘bhis is an arkosic sediment devived, in purt at Facets from Ure weathering and erosion of

rocks of the wnonulite fuvies.

(h) Surtace sionples fram the Eon region god fram Serpentine Luke, (See Fig. 2 fe sauiple

Inoution. )

Sample No, P295/68: 4 tiiles oorth of Observatory Hill, on south dure al large playa lake.

Arkose.

The hand specimen consists of a dull brown sandy porous rock, containing abioudant

surivite-muscovite ou exposed surfaces. There are signs of incipient bedding only,

Thin seclion: (See Table 2 tor estimate of constituents. ) The rock is composed of anhedral

tu subronnded wrains of quartz, feldspar, muscovite and, wyeregates of seri¢ite groins set im»

inntrix of clay. Chere is little cementing material and there ure abundant voids. The qtarte

commonly shows ironstained rims and in many griins shows overgrawths of secondary quartz.

Any clongate crystals are arranged subpurallel to the bedding; these are chiefly muscovite, the

apatite, and some grains of qnartz, Feldspar is mainly microcling but oliguclasc-andesine in

= ratia of 1:10-alsy appears: all feldspar is contmonly partly sericitized. Glay appears as a

cement and also as reunded grains or pellets apparently squashed. during compietion, The

average vrain diameter is 0-12 mm.

The sample represents a detrital arkosic sediment whieh hav lurgely been cemented by

redisintbution of silica, Some clay ix also present but cantributes littk: to the cementation.

LITHOLOGY AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE OASERVATORY HILL BEDS 183

Sample No, P296/88: 4 miles south of Emm field on Meralinm track.

rkose,

The haud specimen is a buf coloured “sandstone” which shows traces of layering, “Serieite”

shows on the broken bedding surface, his rock is probably Fairly nich fn iron ay il weathers

to i dee red brown surface layer,

Thin section: (A visual estimate of the constituents is given in Table 2.) The mvyk ty

composed of anhedral grains of eqnarte, inivrocline, perthitic K-feldspar, ?andesine, mosvuvile.

sectuite grains mucl opaque material (mainly limonite), "There is little cement; whut there is,

ts clay, Moxt cementation has been caused by overgrowth of silter on the former qniurtz graiis,

which bave locked the vrais together in an unhedral mosuie, Mich pure space reuinins, Some

of the feldspar shows the vein perthite texte of feldypur from erannlites. Micrsuline is fresh

Other feldspar is. mare or less altered to scricite; however, the oviginal woperties are still qurtly

visible. K-feldspur is more abundant than plagioclase, hy aliout 4:1, The opacues appear lu he

“hinenite’™. The averige grain diameter is about 0-2 am.

Thin is a clastic rook, derived. in part at least, from the erdsion of avid metamorphosed

rocks. Gomentation is primarily etfected by the development of overgrawth at quarte.

Sunpl: No, P297/68; 2 miles sonth of Emu Beld, pa Maralinga track.

Feldspathie Greywacke.

The hand specimen is a thinly bedded. pinkish-oreain sandstone, ‘Che hance appears

fo he formed by the selective concentration of darker/lighter minerals. Bedding i) Are, of the

order of Lov 2 my,, and very unifurm

Thin section: CA visual estimate of the conslituents is given inv Tuble 3.) This rock differs

from those previously described. by virtue of the larger eencentration of chevy and chlorite. The

frinework, consisting of quartz and feldspar, tends. to liave more elongate urains, which tend

try Ie: dixerote, and these grains tend to lave their axes parallel (u the bedding. The quartz. as

before, commonly shows overgrowths af secondary siliua, There ure n few grains of farmer

quartzite, Foldspar is both microcline and plagioclase, with: altered mntwinned, or microperthitic

K-Felspar, K-feldspnr exceeds plagioclase by over 10:1. Sevicite is the jormal alteration

product of both feldspars and even fresh feldspars appear mildly kavlinised. Crain azn tends

to be about 0°3 % 9-15 mm. in the largest grains,

This sedimentary rock is of clastic origin. Grams: in weneral are more younded than

unguiar, though they may be clongate. The reinded habit of the grains is produced more by

secondary silicifieation than by transport.

Sample No, P298/68; suuth-enst of Eniu Fiekl hut.

Feldspathic Greywanke.

The hand specimen is a anassive, cream eoloured. fine erained “sandstone” which stinws

muscovite on the crude bedding surfaces visible.

Thin section. The framework of the rock eotsists of quartz, feldspar and mica with

aceossory minerals. embedded in a clay-matris A quantitative estimate of the minerill éar-

Position is given iu Viable 2. "The averayp urain size is US mo. OLS om. bat baths of

muscovite extend to 0-3 min, This is a bedded fine greywacke with arkogie tendencies, which

has been foteied hy Fhe weathering of aeid racks probably, at least partly, of the zeronulite

facies of metanuuphism, as one ar two prains of feldspar have the characteristic vein (tuhubie)

perthite texture. Sedfmentation aud burial have been rapid to preserve the abunchint anledral

fresh (except for lizht kaolinisution ) feldspars, Microcline exceeds plagiovlase by approai¢nately

10:1, Plapioctase appears ta he oligoclasn-ancesine. The quarts is alse in genera Ny elouieate

anhedval grains and commonly shows secondary overgrowth, ‘The anitrix is composed lurgely

OF clay with fine urainel quartz. Minor amounts of anhedral leucoxene, ane irmmwular tonrugaline,

tutile and clinozoisites also acer, Bedding is shown by the-approxianule purallelism of elongate

rains.

This rovk is very sinilar to P294/68 and its origin appears to be the same, Compared with

that rack, this has slightly more clay end shows more siens of oxidation. Compared with

P297/68 there is movh less clay

Sumple So, P299/'HK; 3 niles east of Serpentine Lake, near Western Australinn berder.

Feldapathic Grevwacke.

Hand speciinen: A medinnu-fine grained, creamy, “‘sendstone” which shows Hakes of

muscovite on the hecding surfaces. Traces only of bedelings ave seen pad the rock breaks very

roughly an these surfaces. This weld probably qualify ws a freestany on the evidence al the

hand specimen.

‘Thin section: This sediment is intermediate in properties between P287/68 and P295/A8

and. P296/68. This is rich in quartz, feldspar anc sericite/clay. The last nunied may oceur as

pellet-like grains as well as in the matrix. As betore mierocline is the most common feldspar,

with umtwinned (?)eryptoperthite K-feldspar second, and plagioclase (imeertain) lust’

K-feldspar excreds plagioclase by 10:1. ‘Ihe feldspar and quartz oeenr ax unhedral rainy,

Some feldspar is highly sericitised (2 @ calcic plagioclase), most ig fairly fresh, microcline in

184 di. WOPF NTR

particular being unaltered, The average grain sve is (15 rom. There isn sign ol sarting. An

estiiite of constituents is given in Table 2. The sedient is related to an arkose which has

been buried quickly ond formed fran raatenal which hats not been timsparted very Fur,

Probably: derived from acid tyneous ar high wrade metamorphic rocks.

Comparison of arenaceous rocks P201/B, P2M5/68. P2968, P297/G8, P298/68 und P299/68

Four of these rocks are feldypathie greywiekes Lhe other two (P295/68, P296/68) ave

urkeses, ‘The distinguishiue eviterion for this is the proportion of matrix clay or cluy/ellorite.

The framework is of detrital quartz, autedral hot commonly with secandory overgrowths, and

tekispar. K-feldspar exceeds playiuclase by over 1f:1 except ia 2296/89 where andesine is

present in some abundance. The plagioclase is nat ulways. clearly reeogniseble, but there are

twa sorts albite and andesine (P291/08), ‘The plagioclase does not give a Rguee In most slides.

ancl identification lias been hy refractive indices and extinction angles wore possible, Where the

plagioclase has heen highly altered even the ahoye determination was not possible. K-feldspar

neous in. Hiroe Furms: mictoperthitic and very like K-feldspar from rocks of the erunulite facies

(P291/68), mictocline (P298/68), and antwinned K-feldspar. It is supypvested that the last may

be an intermediary between the two former, The microcline has heen erived fom plutanio o

metamorphic rocks, probably the latter, Some of the K-feldspar in P2971 /68 and P298/68 shows

that vein perthite texture normally characteristic of rocks af the granulite Facies.

No artginal ferromagnesian minerals remain, bul there: are rauuded pellets af a mass of

chlorite, ot sérieite, which possibly were once more fornal ferromagnestan minerals. These

oceur in P291/88. 2296/68 and P299/68, There is little biotite, and this is being oxidised to

“limonile” presumably by weathering at the surface.

The groundmass # either clay or amixture of clay with chlorite (P287/68). Both are tales

eolaured, brown for the clay, brownish green for the chlorite. Other clay material is provided

by a few squashed pebbles and pellets which appear to be transported, and are probably

rounded remnants of earlier shale, They are distinct from the suspected ferromagnesian material

and gecur in P396/68 and P200/68,

The two arkoses (P295/68, P296/68) are exceptional i their low content of matrix

inaterial. Texturally they ave very similar but P295/68 is more fine grained than the otlier, Ta

both the grains. are well socted though P296/68 has a better surling than P295/68. Many

of the grains of P295/68 are now irregular-rounded where once they seen: ta have heen

angular, modified because vf the secondary overgrowth of silica, Overgrawths are still pro-

miinent in P296/68 but by contrast. are uot as common, A difference between the two ts the

presence of subparallel and quite large laths of anuseovite in P295/G68,

It appears thut all Nese six sumples ure lithologically related with vuriations in quantity

of mabix, grain size and type of feldspar. Sedimentation has been rapid and the clastic maternal

used has buen-derived from an area of yranulite facies metamorphic rocks: with probably both

acid and basic camponents contributing.

(e) Core samples fram Exoil well Emu No. 1.

Sample No, P1/69: core No. 4. 1,105. feet,

Greywacke-siltstone (Pturbidite) with a gypsum vein,

The hand specimen. js a reddish-brown, thick-hedded finely but irregularly Ineinoter

muddy sediment. A single bedded vein. 1 em, thick, of palisade structure and containing:

a thin raft of the host-rock, oceurs ut one end of the core-specimen,

Thin section: Microscopically the texture indicates much poorly sorted materal, The tlk

of the rock is of shaly character hut minor, distorted and Frequently ciscantinuous larninge of

aaubmillimetre thickness carry high proportions of grains up to fine sandstone sizes (to 1 mu),

Th some laminae these grainy are fairly well sorted and have a sandstgue bestyre whereas in

athers the texture is that of a greywacke. Other coarse grains are: incungrugusly clisteibuted

throughout the shaly parts.

Minerals forming the rock are major quartz, calcite aud anicrocline, onor albite, bictite,

muscovite, chlorite, dusty fron oxides (Phematite), Psorieite and traces of tourmaline. Meavy

ytuinine by micron-sized iron oxides ancl the highly variable, fne grain size makes visual estina-

tie of the mineral proportions unreliable, but it is evident thal ihe three major minerals farm

at least 90% of the whole and accur in roughly equal proportions. Hemutite forms an estimated

2-3 of the rock.

Same of the courser quarty, calcite and microcline grains are well rounded and of detrital

origin. However, the bulk of the calcite is fine-grained and reerystallised and probably arigin-

ally chemically precipitated. The structure of the rock suggests a turbidite urigin for the heel.

The vein is of gypsum: the identity of the mineral was confirmed hy X-ray diffraction

‘Ve origin of the iran oxides and the gypsum may be connectetl; accessory hematite grains

§ imleron avross. may be pscudomorphous after Gne-grainud sedimentary pyrite, The mimesal

(Ppyrite) forms only (i af the hed-

LITHOLOGY AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE OBSERVATORY HILL BEDS = 185

Sample No. Ped: core No. 5, 1,357 feet.

Feldspathic sandstone,

The core sample is a medium grained, porous sandstone without apparent bedding,

Thin section: The sample is composed of well rounded to moderately well rounded sub-

spherical grains of quartz, microcline, and lithie fragments, in order of decreasing abundance,

Aecessory minerals include tourmaline pleochroic in green and blue as occasional rounded

vrains: rutile as needles in quartz; and apatite, as relatively stout prisms enclosed in quartz.

The lithic fragments appear to be composed of siliceous or ferruginous shale,

The rock is definitely transitional to an arkose, and cannot be precisely classified without

exact modal data. The name “feldspathic sandstone” seems most appropriate as there is little

or no argillaceous niaterial.

The average grain size is about 0-3-0-5 mm., and_ porosity appears high. Grains are

weakly cemented by a fine-grained birefringent material which also lines the pore spaces, This

is too fine to be accurately identified optically. It is definitely not calcite as it does not renct

to acid. Birefringence is too high for most phosphates, although the moderate relief is charac-

teristic of such minerals. Dolomite would be expected to show some evidence of rhombohedral

crystal form, A phosphate such as francolite or dahlite remains the most likely possibility.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

PLATE 1

(n) View of type section of Observatory Hill Beds. 4 miles west of Observatory Hill, The

sediments are of flat lying and the benches are formed by carbonate beds. Man in middle-

ground is standing on unit 5. (Photo; H. Wopfner. )

(b) Upper part of Observatory Hill Beds, showing thinly bedded nature of sediments. Mr. J.

McG, Hall is standing just above top of unit 9. (Photo: H. Wopfner. )

PLATE 2

(a) Laminated dolomite, chert and limestone (unit 17) in type section, (Photo: H, Wopfner. )

(b) Concentric chert-concretions from type section of Observatory Hill Beds.

(e) Specimens on left and lower right of picture show bottorn-faces of calcareous siltstones

with infillings of muderacks from units 6 and 2 respectively. Sample in top right-hand

corner shows chert-blebs (light colour) on top of bedding plane of fine-grained sandstone.

PLATE 2

H. Woprner

(a)

ib)

(

(ce)

BALANCE SHEETS:

GENERAL ACCOUNT AND RESEARCH FUND

Summary

189

‘syUBUNODIY parapEyy t

“OD 2 AOUVSS ‘SNUASLS ‘ANTI

G96T

‘aunt worn We Spuatujsoauy Jo a[upayas ayy payran Ose savy aay

‘6961 ‘Waquiagdag yyp

‘eieqsny whos ‘aprejapy

*payraqns Ayarog aqi JO syoog ayy Aq UMoys

Sp pue sn 07 waar suoqvuejdxa oy} put gonuwuuojUr mo (e341 84} 0} SuIpIoooE ‘GOGT ‘AM WQS Papus red ou} Loy Ajaog ayy ja suoMoesUEQ Ysuo aq

Piode1 oy dh umesp «[radoid aan Pung FuawWMopuy puy

I] ‘Tetauen atyq 307 sjuantdeg pur sydrosay JO SsusWIOIWIG payouye ayy ‘uoTudo smo Ur

“peebar Savy aM suoneuefdys pur UOHELOFUT oyy [TE Psuteyqo savy pus “6961 ‘eunf ye pepua

qwak ayy s0g (CHLVHOdUOONT) VITVULSNY HILNOS JQ XALBIDOS TVAOU AHL JO sunosoy ‘pur syoog ot Pourwuexa ary am yim podar 3Ay

“Lucday SHOLICAY

OO'OLe'FI$ B9G6T “suNf Og yoIg Ay y jo ONTEA FIVPL 1970N

O9'Ste' Fas

66'9EE'T yard 1 ysep

00008: 4Suig paquosuy

T9821 T

00°008 0OF—sjarg—szuypjoH poomiyog

ATOG6T'T 7 : “ SL9—yHomsuyy

00°E90'T OOS—salysnpay jeariay5 Teiadmy

00'OfE*T r ¥ OSS—syio0y,

9L°FT3°T OSc—sauty, Appeaq, pues ppesazy

OO'E8z‘T OOF—SeHougey wang jeruojo

00°SLE'T “A 000'T—Wwamag = apivpapy

SO CELT O89—salisnpur pajeprosuod uRTeysny

00°062°T % , 006—sqHOa oor,

y20Is Annby

00°006'0T LE

00°000°% : Yo %elL—SUOYeM “'O'N' TL

00°006, _ “ %8— TET

00°000°S : WRL— VOT

00°000°S bh L— IVA’

00°000'F %3—AOUVULT Yoasuary

. Susodaq paxt,y

8 $

(3809 98) 6961 ‘ANOLE OE LV SLNANLSHANI JO WTINGIHOS

66'9e¢'TS ; " * 696 ‘sunf WINE aruDjog ausoyy | Tego0'es

GE'SEL‘T

oo"'00S

00°0ST she " a "C urutuy iq

00°OS% ” proydays -y “g 29 sewoqy, ‘Wl

00°00T : 7 ~ " S[RPIM ET “Y 'D

—SIUBIA) YOIuasay

SE'SEG'T . P

OL LEE ‘SPIO SowrT, APPA 2} pleraTy OOT _ EOELES —

SB tet r “SpIQ aaneuLg ywomsuaT CLT OR FTI'T ' (008 39 aes) sareyg S2urp]OH pooayyog

89°C19 ‘SPIQ. SaLysupuy pezyeprosuoy uelensny O8s FFTE | - c i " Saray Aue

£208 “ r ‘sptQ SBuIploH pooaysog 77 69'ScE'T peatooy spuapiaicy pus ysaroquy

—yusugsaduy jo ase dis2ay ppYy

swuauliivg janpag Bees ¢ R96T ‘Ain Ist aumog suuadg

§ $

SINAWAVd | SLdI AOR

696T “ANOL WOE GHANA uvaAr HHL WOU SLNAWAVd CNV SLdISOaN JO LNANALVIS

danny HOWVaASaY OMLINAIDG CNY INIW MOUNT

CALVYOdYOONI VITYULSAV HLOOS 4O ALAIOOS TYAOW AHL

REPORT ON ACTIVITIES OF THE COUNCIL, 1968-69

Summary

rau

REPORT ON ACTIVITIES OF THE COUNCIL, 1968-69

In 1969 the Socicty was honoured to receive the patronage of His Excel-

lency the Governor of South Australia, Major-General Sir James Harrison,

I is a pleasure to report that during the past year there has been a marked

increase in membership, increased attendance al Ordinary Meetings of the

Sodety and an excellent response to ucw activitics.

Twenty-four new Fellows were elected during the past year, and one Fellow

resisned, In April, 1969, Honorary Fellowship was conferred upon Professor

A. RK. Alderman. The total membership of the Society now stands at 280,

The Council notes with pleasure that many members moving interstate or

overseas are retaining their membership; at the present time 61 members reside

outside of South Australia.

Seven ordinary meetings of the Society were held and attendances varied

from 26 to 60 with an average of 39, compared with an average of 32 in the

preceding year. Seven addresses were delivered at these mectings and six

Exhibits were presented.

The twelve papers read at these mectings were concerned with the follow-

ing disciplines; Botany 4; Geomorphology 2; Climatology 2; Palaeontology 1;

Soil Science 1; Zoology 1.

At the instigation of the President, the Council at the beginning of the

year formed a “Promotions Committee” which considered various aspects of

the Society’s activities and recommended various innovations. Amongst the re-

commendations was the organisation of a Conyersazione, which was eventually

held at the Park Royal Motor Inn in March, 1969. Approximately 30 exhibits

af the varied scientific research activities of members were displayed and 150

members and their guests attended the function.

In August, 1969, the Council organised a Public Lecture held at the State

Library Lecture Theatre. Professor R. Stebbins of the University of Califomia

delivered an address entitled “The University of California Expedition to the

Galapagos Islands”, This function attracted an audience of 110,

Nine meetings of the Council were held during the year.

In 1969 three awards were made from the Scientific Research and Endow-

ment Fund to assist scientific research being undertaken by members of the

Society:

Mr. F, S. Parker of Daru, Verritory of Papua and New Guinea, was granted

$250 towards costs involycd in the collection of amphibians and reptiles.

Dr. D, L. Hayman tind Mr. R. Hope of the Department of Genetics, Uni-

yersity of Adelaide, received $150 to undertake a field study of serum proteins

in the. opossum, Trichosurus vulpecula.

Mr. R. CG, Beck of Mil-Lel, South Australia, received $50 to defray travel

expenses involved in a study of factors affecting the distribution of the frog,

Crinia laevis, in South Australia,

The Library continued to operate efficiently and profitably. Five new

exchanges were successfully negotiated, 195 volumes were bound, and it intal

of 350 volumcs borrowed from the Library, mostly on interlibrary Joan.

191

The Council has been investigating the possibility of reprinting some of the

early volumes of the Transactions.

Volume 92 of the Transactions of the Society was published in December,

1968, together with an index to volumes 45-91. The volume contained 10

papers and comprised a total of 132 pages. The Society is greatly indebted to

Dr, N. H. Ludbrook who undertook the compilation of the index.

The Council has been concerned at the steadily increasing costs involved

in publishing the Transactions, and a deputation from the Council waited on

the Hon. the Minister of Education and submitted a case for an increase in the

government subsidy to the Society for the next financial year, The Council also

feels it necessary at this stage to consider an increase in the annual subscription

of Fellows.

OFFICERS FOR 1968-69

Summary

192

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

Patron:

HIS EXCELLENCY MAJOR-GENERAL SIR JAMES W. HARRISON,

K.C.M.G,, C.B., C.B.E.

OFFICERS FOR 1968-69

President:

F, J. MITCHELL

Vice-Presidents:

K. R. MILES, D.Se., F.G.S. Cc. B. WELLS, M.Agr.Sc.

Secretary: Treasurer:

M. J. TYLER S. A. SHEPHERD, B.A., LL.B.

Editor:

Assistant Editor:

J. K. TAYLOR, B.A. M.Sc., B.Sc.Agr. I. M. THOMAS, M.Sc., M.I.Biol.

Librarian:

Programme Secretary:

N. H. LUDBROOK, M.A., Ph.D., D.L.C., F.G.S.

D. E. SYMON, B.Agr.Sc.

Members of Council:

J. T. HUTTON, B.Sc., A.S.A.S.M.

K, E, LEE, D.Sc.

H, E. WOPFNER, Ph.D.

C. R. TWIDALE, M.Sc, Ph.D.

R. H, KUCHEL, B.Sc.

G. F, GROSS, M.Sc.

Auditors:

Messrs. MILNE, STEVENS, SEARCY & CO.

LIST OF FELLOWS

Summary

1u3

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

LIST OF FELLOWS

Those marked with an asterisk (*) have contributed papers published in the Society's

Transactions. Those marked with a dagger (+) are Life Members.

Any change in address or other changes should be notified to the Secretary.

Note; The publications of the Society are not sent to those members whose subscriptions

are in arrears,

HONORARY FELLOWS

Date of

Date of Honorary

Election Elvttion

1927 1969 *AvpERMAN, Prof. A. R.. Ph.D,, D.Se., F\G.S.. Department of Geo-

logy, University of Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. 5000,

Council, 1937-42, 1954-57; Vice-President, 1962-63, 1964-65; Pre-

sident, 1963-64; Verco Medal, 1966.

1895 1949 *Creranp, Prof, Sir J. B., M.D., Dashwood Road, Beaumont, $,A.

5066, Verca Medal, 1933: Council, 1921-26, 1932-37; President,

1927-28, 1940-41; Vice-President, 1926-27, 1941-42.

1913 1955 *Osuoan, Prof, T. G. B,, D.Sc., 34 Invergowrie Avenue, Highgate,

S.A, 5063. Council, 1915-20, 1929-24: Vice-President, 1924-25,

1926-27; President, 1925-26.

1925 1964 *Prescorr, Prof, J. A,, C.B.E., D.Sc, FRAC, F.B.S., F.A,A., 82

Cross Road. Myrtle Bank, $.A, 5064, Verco Medal, 1938; Council,

1927-30, 1935-39, 1962-68; Vice-President, 1930-32; President,

1932-33; Editor, 1955-62,

1923 1985 °Trnpaxe, N. B,, D.Se,, South Australian Museum, North Terrace,

Adelaide, S.A. 5000, Vereo Medal, 1956; Secretary, 1935-36;

Council, 1946-47; Vice-President, 1947-48. 1949-50; President,

1948-49; Librarian, 1952-66.

FELLOWS

Date of

Election

1946 “Annie, Prof, A, A.. M.D,, D,Se., Ph.D,, Department of Anatomy, University of Ade-

faide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. 5000.

1961 Anetr, C., B.Sc., Ph.D., 4/123 Leunyoon Street, Elwood, Victoria. 3184,

1968 Apa, J, B., B.E., A.M, Aust. I,.M.M., Department of Mines, Box 38, Rundle Street

P.Q., Adelaide, S.A. 5000,

1959 Arsen, P, F., B.Se., South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, $.A. S000,

1966 Ai.enurcs, P, D., B.Se.. ¢/- Australian Selection Pty. Ltd., PO. Box 50, Kalgoorlie,

W.A. 6430.

1969 Amtsnene, H, E. O., 24 Kanhara Street. Flinders Park, §.A. 5025,

1961 Bnnens, D. J., B.Se,, B.Ed, M.A.C.E., 1 Seaforth Avenue, Hazelwood Park, S.A,

5066.

151 °AnpeHSON, Mrs, S, H., M.Sc, 138 Stephen Terrace, Gilberton, S.A. 5081.

1935 “°ANDREWARTHA, Prof. H, G., M.AgrSc.. DiSe., FAA. Department of Zoology,

University of Adelaide. North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A, 5000,

1935 "BARE WaTTEEA, Mrs. TT. G., B.Agr.Sc.. M.Sce., 29 Claremont Avenue, Netherby, S.A,

5062,

1929) *Ancec, F. M., 293 Fullarton Roud, Parkside, S.A. 5063,

1939 *Awern, Miss L. M,, MSc, Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Adelaide, S.A, 5000.

1968 Axvove, P. C., R.DA. M.A.LAS.. Departinent of Agriculture, Gawler Place, Ade-

luide, S.A. 5000,

1960 Arcuzorn, R. T., B.A. ALAA, 26 Waller Crescent, Campbell, A:C.T. 2601.

1966 Asmar, C, M., M.Se., West Pakistan (address unknown),

1965 Asim, F, W., 29 Blizubeth Street, Mt, Gambier, $.A, 5209.

1962 Bacor, P, H., 7 Findon Street. Hawthorn, Victoria 3122,

194

Date of

Election

1963

1964

1868

1965

LAS

1969

1932

1968

1025

1934

1982

1968

1950

1945

1952

1983

L957

1962

1961

1957

1944

1967

1966

1960

1968

1959

1953

1963

1957

1955

1949

1962

1969

1956

Lust oF Fecrtaws

Bamzy, Mrs. M. A. B.Sc, (Hons.): Ph.D, Department of Botany, University al

British Columbia, Vancouver §, British Columbia. Canada.

Banwy, A, B.Sc, (Hons.), Ph.D. Department of Ratany, University of British

Columbia, Vaucouver 8, British Colaurnbia, Canada. |

Raunock, R. N., B.8c., 62 Robsart Street, Parkside, S.A. 5063.

Barker, S., Ph.D, Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide: North ‘Terrace,

Adelaide, S.A. 5000.

Banken, Miss S., M.Se., Department of Geography, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Adelaide, S.A, 5000,

Bantow, B. A.. B.Sc. PhD., School of Biological Sciences. Flinders University,

Sturt Road, Bedford Park. &.A, 5042.

Beck, R, G., B.Agr.St.. B.D.A., Lynwood Park, Mil-Lel, via Mount Gainbler, S.A.

5290,

Beoc, M. W., M.B., B.S. M.R.A.C.P., 20 Jasper Street. Millswood, S.A, 5034,

Bxoc, P, R.. D,D,Sc,, R.D.A., Shell Houso, 170 North Terrace. Adelaide, 5.A. 5000,

Brennens, D. von, South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, 5.4., 50000,

Bests D.Se., FRAGT, FL. Biol., M.A.LA.S., P.O, Box 10, Moana Beach,

S.A. 9,

}Buacx, E, C.. B.A. M.B., B.S. 483. Magill Road, Tranmere. S.A, 5073,

Buesuxc, Mrs, N. M., 50 Angus Road, Westbourne Park, S.A. 5041.

Brassert, A. H., M.Sc., A.M. Aust, LM.M., F.G.S., Department of Mines, Bax 38.

Rundle Strect P,O., Adelaide. S.A. 5000.

Borrmen, S., B.A. (Mus.), Dipl.S.T., 10 Charles Street, Norwood, S.A, 5067.

Bonni, N. J.. M.B., B.S. F.RUGS, (Eng.), FRACS, 19 Marlborough Street

College Park, S.A. 5069,

iBone snow C,. W., B.Se., FRAC, Romalo House, Romalo Avenue, Magill, S.A.

5072.

*Boomsaa, C, D., M.Sc., B.Se,For,, 6 Celtic Avenue. Clovelly Park, S,A. 5042,

HovEs, Bis, A, J. Mus.Bae., AULA. “Mirrabooka”, 68 Wilpena Street, Eden Ills,

S.A, 5050.

Brock, B, J. B.Sc,, 62 Mills Street. Clarence Park, 5.4. 5034,

"Bunoxes, Miss H. M.. Department of Entomology, Waite Institute, Private Bag

No. 1, Glo Osmond, S.A. 5064,

Brown, R. C., B.Sc., Ceulogy Department, University of Western Australia, Ned-

lands, W.A, 6009.

*Brownett, FP. F.. Ph.D. University College of Townsville, Pimlico, Townsville,

Queensland 4810.

}Burce, W. G,, B.A. Library, University of Papua and New Guinea, Box 1433,

Boroko, T.P.N.G.

*Bunpwce, Miss N. T.. D.Sc., C.S.LR.O., Division of Plant Mncustry, P.O. Box 109,

Canberra, A.C.Y, 2601.

Cate, R, A., B.Sc. (Hons.), Department of Mines, Box 38. Rundle Street P,O,,

Adelaide 5000.

Ca.iow, K. J., B.Sc., ¢/- Delhi Australian Petroleum Ltd... 32 Grenfell Stroet,, Ade-

laide, S.A. 5000.

Canpurr, C., 8 First Avenue, Glenelg, S.A. 5045,

Cann J. B.Sc, State Herbarium, Botanic Garden, North Terrace, Adelaide,

S.A. 5000.

*Cannonus, B. B,, B.D.Oen., Department of Geography, University of Melhourne.

Parkville, Victoria 3052,

Canter, A. N., MSc., Ph... 5 Scot Street, Maroubra Bay, N.S,W, 2035.

Canter, F, D., B.AgSe., Waite Institute, Private Bag No. 1, P.O. Glen Osinond,

S.A. 3064.

*Croppenpaik, C. M,, B.Se., Raoul Place Lyons, A.C.T. 2606,

Croruur, KF. A., B.E.. ¢/- Gonzine Rio Tinto (Aust.), 95 Collins Street, Melbourne,

Victoria 3000.

Coutrver, F. $., Geology Department, University of Queensland, St. Lucia, This-

bane, Queensland 4067.

Corsrrr, D. W. P., PhD., F.G.S., 41 Hawthorndene Drive, Glenalta, S.A. 5052.

Cnrawronp, A, L., 5 Downer Street, Plympton Park, 5,A. 5038.

*“Cnawronp, A. R., B.Se., Department of Geophysics and Geochemistry. The Aus

tralian National University, Box 4, G,P.0., Canberra, A.C.T, 2600.

Date of

Election

193

1056

1962

1969

1968

1964

1930

1957

1964

1963

7959

1931

1968

1933

1963

145

1962

1956

1968

1969

1965

1959

1963

1951

1966

1958

1959

1962

1964

1962

1954

1953

1u6e4

1935

196u

1964

19683

1963

1959

List or Fenrows 155

_ Csowcrorr, W. P,, M.Se., D.Phil. Chieago Zuological Park, Brookfield, THinuis,

60513, U.S.A,

Day, B., PhD. Department of Geology, University of Adelaide, North Terrace,

Adelaide, S.A, 5000. Programme Secretary, 1957-59; Council, 1960-64: Vice.

President. 1964-65, 1966-67: President, 1965-66,

°Darcarno, C. B., M.Sc.. Thirkell Street, Bealimant, S.A, 5068:

Davison, KE. M., B.Sc., Ph.D, Botanic Garden, North Terrave, Adelaide, S.A, 3001,

Dave, RK. B.Sc, (Jlons,), A.M.LM.M., F.G.S., Australian Mineral ‘Development

Laboratories. Conyngham Street, Frewville, S.A. 5063,

Deastove, T. R., M.B., B.S. 35 Harvey Avenue, North Clenely, S.A. 5045,

Drs, E. V., P.O. Box 12. Aldgate, S.A. 5154.

Devi, K. M,, M.Ag.Se,. Waite Institute. Private Bay No. 1. 2.0... Clen Osipad,

| '§.A. 5064,

Dnacovicu, Mrs, D. J., B.A, (Hons.). /- 40 Ingerson Street, West Beuch, S.A. 5024,

Duaytox, R. D., B.Sc, (Hons.), 17 Eton Street. Colonel Light Cardens, S.A. 5041,

Deuxiop, P. R, CG, BSe., 13 Walton Avenye, Clearview. S.A. 5085.

Dwyen, J. M.,'M.B., B.S., 1567 East Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. 5000,

Dyxr, N. W., M.LI.C.A,, 57 Baleombe Avenue, Seaton, S.A, 5023,

“Eanpiey, Miss G, M., M,Sc,, F.L,S., Department of Botany. University of Adelaide,

* North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. 5000. Council, 1943-46,

Epny, Mrs. N. G,, 110 Mitchell Street, Darwin, N.T, 5790. :

°Epmonps, S. J,, BA. PhD., Department of Zoology, University ef Adelaide. North

Terrace, Adelaide, 5,A. 5000, Council, 1954-55; Progiamme Secretary. 1955-56;

Secretary, 1956-57; Vice-President. 1963-64, 1965-66; President. 1964-65.

“Epwanps, R,. South Australian Museum, North Terrace. Adelaide, S.A, 5000,

*Erouter, Hj., Drrermat., State Herbariom, Botanic Garden, North Terrace. Acte-

laide, S.A. 500),

Exnst, L. K., 50 Airdrie Avenue, Findon, §,A. 5023.

Fanwurn, W... BSc. (Eons), A.M, Aust. LM.M., ¢/- Carpentaria Exploration

Piy. Ltd,, 567 Main South Road, Everard Park, S.4. 5035,

*Fanver, H. W.. M.Sc, 3 Yougala Street, Tranmere. S.A. 5073,

Fenner, T. 1... B.Ag.Sc,, Entomology Section, Department of Agriculture and

Forestry, Konedobn. Territory Papua-New Guinea,

*Fiecogs, D, R., B.Sc., Ph.D,. Department of Zoology, University Collage of Tawns-

ville, Pimlico, Townsville, Queeusland 4510, :

°Fimman, J, B.. B.Sc. (Wons.), 11 Wilkins Street, East Glenelg. S.A, 5045.

Fisher, R, H,, 21 Seaview Road, Lynton, 8A, 5062.

Keon, H. D,. BE. F.SAS.M. MLE, Aust. 104 Marian Road, Payuchaiy

Sopa, G., Ph.D,, Department of Mines, Box 38, Rutile Street P.O., Adelaide,

aiid N.. Dip.For., Western Teachers College, TU South Road, Tarrensville, S.A.

Posten. R. J.. B.E., 2 Rendell] Court, Hughesdale, $.h. 12, Victoria 3166,

Freeman, R, N., M.Sc., Edificis Keuatoriana-Suiza de Seguros. FCO de B. Yoara

203, 7° Piso. Bos 6400, Guayaquil, Ecuador,

°Frevtac, 1. B, B.Se, 2 Selway Street, Oaklands Park, S.A, 5046.

Grason, A. A., A,W.A.S.M,. 2 Boyle Street, Oaklands Park. S.A. 50446,

*Graussyra, Prof. M, F., D.Sc. F.A.A.. Department of Ceology, University af

Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, §.A. 5000.

peat C. J, M.. B.Se,, South Australian Miseum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

1Cornsacx, H., Coromandel Valley, S.A, 5051.

Goopwins, T, R., Departnient of Genetics, University af Adelaide, North Terres.

Adelaide, $.A. 5000.

Gorpon, Miss E. M., Lol 32, Titree Road. Stirling, S.A. ‘5152,

Grarry, R, D., BSe. ¢ Ilons,), Environmental Biology Group, Research Svhnol of

Biological Sciences, Australian ‘National University, Canberra City, A.C.T, 2601.

Grasso, R.. M.Sc. 8 Bransby Avenue. Plyiupton, S.A, 5038.

Green, Miss L, M.A. B.A. MSc, Ph.D., Department of Anatomy and Tlistalogy,

University of Adelaide. North Terrace, Adelaide, §,A, 5000,

196

Date uf

Elechon

1060

1969

1961

joe2

1948

1944

1962

1946

1944

1963

1960

1963

1960

1968

1962

1DA8

iH44

1968

1566

1951

1968

t959

1968

1947

1968

1965

1968

t945

1850

1s66

1983

19a6

167

LG2

1938

1935

1960

1965

List oF Fentows

Greensanr, P, J, M.. M.A, PhD. C.S.1.B.0., Division of Soils, Private Bag Na, 1,

Glen Osmond, S.A. 5064,

Greexsiape, Mrs, P. J. M., M.A. & Fourth Road, Belair, S.A, 5052.

Green, W. J., B.Sc. Beaver Exploration Australian N.L., Bank of Adelaide Build-

ing, 275 George Street, Syduey. N.S,W. 2000.

tCrecony, G. C., M.B., B.S., Leigh Creek, S.A. 5731,

Gross, G. F., M.Se.. South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. S000.

Secretary, 1950-53; Council, 1968-.

Guppy, D, J., B.Sc., 22 Chermside Street, Deakin, A.C.T. 2600.

Hasouron-Santa, E,, A.U.A. 17 Helwig Avenne, Montmorency, Victoria GORA.

Hanpine, J. H.. B-Sc,, 92 East Avenue, Clarence Park, S.A, 5034,

*Harpy, Mrs. J. E., M-Se., Stewart Avenue, Salisbury, S.A, pols.

Hanns, J. R.. M.Se., Division of Soils, C.S.1LR.0.. Glen Osmond, S.A, 5064,

annis, W. K., B.Sc., Department of Mines. Box 38 Rundle Strect P.O., Adelaide

S.A, 5000, Programme Secretary. 1965-67; Secretary, 1967-68.

Hanarsox, J., 39 Hunter Avenue, St. Ives, N,S,W. 2075.

fHlawke, V. L., M.B. B.S., 43 Semaphore Road, Semaphore 5.A. 5091.

Hayman, D. L., Ph.D., Department of Genetics, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. 5000.

Heap, R, J.. Department of Human Physiology and Pharmacology. University of

Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A, 5000,

"Hearn, G. BR. B.Sc, (Hons. }. Ph.D;, Department of Oceanogruphy, Oregon State

University, Corvallis, Oregon, 97331. U.S.A.

Hunvincsen, M,, B.E., F.S.A.S.ML, A.M.LELA,, A.M. Aust. 1.M.M., Department of

Mines, Box 38, Rundle Street P.O., Adelaide, 5.A. 5000,

Wentuot, R. L, B.Agr.Sc:, Boseworthy Agricultural College, Roseworthy, S.A. 337L,

lien Ay M.. B.Se,. Department of Mines, Box 38, Rundle Street 2.0., Adelaide.

Hitiwoon, E. H.. B.Se.. 2 Harris Road_ Vale Park, S.A, 5081.

Tlockinc, L. J., 40 Kauri Parade, Seacliff, S.A, 5049.

Horr, 8. M., B.Sc. (Hans.). Department of Cenetics. University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Adelaide. 5.A. S000,

Vrcnisos, A. H.. 218 Shepherds Hill Road, Bellevue. Heights, S.A. 5050,

*Hurron, J. 'T.. B.Sc, A-S.A.S.M., C.5.18,0,. Division of Soils, Private Bay No, 1,

@len Osmond P.O,, S.A, 5064, Council, 1957-61, 1965-69; Vice-President, 116)-

62. 1963-64; President, 1962-63.

Incus, W. G, D.Se., Ph.D. South Australian Museum. North Terrace, Adelaide,

S.A, 5000, Treasurer, 1969-.

James, C.T,, M.B. BS, 134 Follartan Road, Rose: Park, $A. 5067.

fea, R. J. F,, BSc, (Hous.), Geology Department, University of Adelaide,

wA. S001.

“Jessup, R. W., M.Sc, 6 Nurth Renno Parade. Belair, S.A. 5053. Conneil, 1961-65,

Jouns, Be K.. M.Sc. Department of Mines. Box 38 Rundle Street 1.0,, Adelaide,

LA, 8000.

"Jounson, J. E., c/- Geosrveys of Australia Pty. Ltd., 47 Todville Street, Woud-

ville West, S.A, 5011.

Jones, J. B., Ph.D. Department of Coology, University of Adelaide, North Terrace.

Adeluide, S.A. BO00,

Karr, A. J. dring., Delhi Australian Petroleem Ltd... Hox 1837 P., C.P.O,, Ades

\nide, S.A, 5001,

Kennepy, CG, 2, BSe. PhD. School vof Bidlogical Sciences, Flinders University,

Bedford Park, $.A, 5042,

Kewsy, Mrs. M,, South Australian Musenm, North ‘retrace, Adelaide, S.A, 5000.

tKuaxnan, WH, M., Phd. MB, PRG, Khakhar Building, G.P. Tank Rood,

Rombay, India.

*Kierman, A, W,, Ph.D, Department of Geology, University af Adelaide, Nerth

Terrave, Adelaide, $A, 5000. Seeretary, 1845-48; Vice-President, 1948-49: 10-31,

President. 1949-50,

Kucren, R. H., B.Sc. (Tons,), ADOen, I-P.. Botanic Garden, North ‘errace,

Adelaide. S.A. 5000, Catineil. 1968-,

®Lance, RB. T., B.Sc, (Ions.), Ph... Departnent of Botany, University of Adelaide,

Narth Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. 5000, Councillor, 1969-,

Date of

Election

1941

1965

1967

1923

1965

io4g

1989

1931

1965

1953

1968

1939

1966

195%

1966

1950

1964

1963

T9685

1948

1966

1967

1960

1945

1968

1962

1952

139

1958

lwt or Fe..ows 1u7

“LANGrORD-Smirn, T.. B.A, M.Se., Ph.D,, Department of Geography, University af

Sydnuy, Sydney, N.S.W. 2006;

Ler, D, C., B.Se,, South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A, SUflO.

“Lee, K, I D.Se., C.§.LR.0., Soils Division, Private Bag No, 1, Glen Gsmand.

S.A, 5064, Councillor, 1967-.

Lenvon, G. A. M.D,, B.S.. F.R.CP., c/- Eldev’s Trustee Executor Co. Ltd Av

Currie Street, Adelaide, §.A. 5000,

*lanpgay, J. M,, B.Se., Department of Mines. Bax 38, Rundle Street P.O., Adelaide,

S.A, 5000. Programme Secretary 1969-.

Lotuian, T. R. N., O.B.E., NDEI. (N.Z.), Botanic Garden, North Terrace, Ade-

Taide, S.A. 5000, ‘Treasurer, 1952-53; Counvil, 1953-57) Vice-President, 1957-58.

1960-61; President, 1958-60.

Love, J, H., B.A., B,D., A.L.AA., 71 Rowland Road, Hilton, S/A. 503’.

*Lupsroox, Mrs. N. H., M.A, PhD.. D.I.C., F.G.S., 110 Watson Avent, Toorak

Gardens, S.A, 5065, Council, 1958-80, 1964-66; Vice-President, I960-61, 1962-83:

President, 1961-62; Librarian, 1986-; Verco Medal, 1963.

Mactwocsr, J. R.. BSc. (Hons.), Primary Industries Branch, Alice Springs,

N.T. 5750,

Maernzer, D. A.. Ph.D, Waite Tnstilute, Private Baz No, I, Glen Osmond, $A.

5064,

Mayon, R. B,, B.Sc. (ITons.), Departinent of Mines, Box 38, Rundle Strect P.O,,

Adelaide, S,4. 5000,

Marsnate, ‘T. J., M.Agr.Sc,, Ph.D.. C.S.1,R.0., Division of Soils, Private Bag Nu, 1

Glen Osmond, 5.4. 5064,

Martin, C. A, M.Se,, Delhi Australian Petruloum Ltd., Box 1837P.. G.P,O,, Arle.

laide. S.A, 5001.

*Manrin, Miss FL. A,, M.Se., School of Biological Sciences, University of New South

Wales, Box 1. P.O., Kensin ton, N.S.W. 2033,

Mason, M. G., B.Se. (Hons.), Department of Mines, Boa 38, Rundle Street P.O.,

Adelaide, §:A. 5000.

Mayo, G, M. E., B.Agr.Sc., Ph.D., Department of Genetics, University of Adulaide,

North Terrace. Adelaide, S.A. 5000,

McArruur, A. J., B.E., Box 129, Millicent, S.A, 5280,

McBrian, Miss E. M., M.Sc.. Department of Ceology, University of Adelaide,

North Terrave, Adelaide, §.A, 5000.

*McGou., D, H., B.Sc., Department of Geology, University of Adelaide, North ‘Ter-

race, Adelaide, S.A. S000,

McCutocu, H, N., M,B.E.. B.Sc, B.Agr.Se,, Cattle Tick Researvh Station, Wok

longbar, N.S.W. 2480,

cee Sank, A.N,, BA. M.S,, South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaids,

“A, S000.

etrnrtian, B., Ph.D. Department of Mines, Box 38. Rundle Street P.O., Adelaide,

A, 5000.

McKenzre, P. EL B.Med,Sc., 42 Quondong Street, Brighton North, 8.A, 5048.

tMines, K. RK. D.Sc, F.G.S, fl Chirch Road, Mitcham. §.A, 5062, Council, 1963.

66; Vive-President, 1966-67, 1968-69: President, 1967-68.

Murr, BP. G., B,Se, (Hons,), A.M. Aust. 1.M.M., Department of Mines, Bax BR

Rundle Street P.O., Adelaide, §.A, 5000,

“Muts, K. J., B.Sc, Ph.D., Department of Geology and Geophysies, University uf

Sydney, N.S.W, 2008.

Mune, K, L., F.G.A., 14 Burlington Street, Walkerville, S.A, 5081,

Mineram, V. H,, South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adeluide, S.A, 5000,

Mrnams, R, G.. B.Se., ¢/s Newmont Pty, Ltd., Suite 6. 2nd Floor, 190 Hay Street,

Perth, W.A. 6000.

°Mrtcreut, F, ., South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide. S.A. 50nn,

Treasurer, 1959-67; Vice-President, 1967-68, 1969: President. 1968-69,

Mrrenrii, Mrs. F. J. M.Sc,, Department of Botany, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Adelaide, S.A, 5000. ’

Mircuenr, Prof. Sir M. L.. M.Se., c/- Elder’s Trustee anid Exvcrtor Co, Ltd, 37

Currie Street, Adelaide, S.A, 5000.

omenoHT, E.. B.Se., Depattment of Mines, Box 38, Rundle Strect P.O. Adelaide,

Lus

Diath of

Election

1964

1968

1926

1957

1965

1944

1962,

1945

1930

1956

Laas

1963

1968

1969

1963

4037

Lg49

1826

1865

1964

1961

1957

1945

1950

144

Loa’

1963

1847

1963

1950

1951

1963

1966

1933

1959

1966

Last ov FeuLows

Moncan, T. D.. M.Sc. Ph.D. Waite Institute, Private Bag Na, i; Glen Osmond

P.O., Adelaide. 5,A. 5064.

Moutps, M. &, Box 223, B,O., Glen Innes, N.S.W. 2370,

*Motntronn, C. P,. 25 First Avenue. St. Peters, S.A, 508.

>Muamen, 1. A, B.Sc. (Hons.), 3 Oleander Parade. Carmgbah. N.S.W. 2229.

Nesnirt, R, W., B.Sc. (Hous.),, Ph.D. Department of Geology, University of Ade-

laide. North Terrace. Adelaide. S.A, 5000.

Novves, A. R,. B.A. KDA. 62 Sheffield Street, Mulvero, S.A. 5061.

Nixon, L. G, B.. B.Sc, 3. Sweetwater Street, Seacombe Gardens, S.A. 5047.

*Norracotr, K. H.. B-Agr.Sc., MALAS., C.S.LB.O,, Division of Soils, Private Bag

No, 1, Glen Osmond. P.O.. S.A. 5064.

QexEnnen C, P.. BA. Dip. Ed. MACE, 133A Cambridge Terrace, Malverts,

.A. 5061,

O'Dniscour, E. $, T., M.Se. Ph.D., F.C.S., Austvalian Selection Pty. Ltd. P.O,

Box 50. Kalgoorlie, WA. 64:30.

“Oprien, R., B.Sc, (Hons.), Department of Geology, University of Newcastle, New-

castle, N.S.W. 2308,

Ouiwer, RB, L., PhD., Reparinent of Geology, University of Adelaide. Nurth) Terrace,

Adelaide, §.A. S000.

Onsen, A, M., M.So, Department of Fisheries and Fauna Conservation, Gawler

Place, Adelaide, S.A. 5000.

?Oncuarp, A. E., BSe, (Hons.), & Joyce Avenue, Klemzig, S.A. 5087,

Panxen, F. §,. P.O, Box 58. Daru, W.D., Territory Papua New Guineu.

“Parkin, L. W., M.Sc. A.5.T-C., Department of Mines. Box 38, Rundle Street,

P.O... Adelaide, §.A. 5000, Seerctary. 1953-56; Vice-President, 1956-57, 1858-39;

President, 1957-58,

Panxtnson, K, J., B.Sc,, 10 Porter Terrace, Rostrevor. 8.A. 5079.

*Pyper, C, S.. D.Se., 3 Fowlers Road, Clenunga, S.A. 3064, Verco Medal, 1957;

Council, 1941-43; Vice-President, 1943-45, 1946-47; President 1945-46,

Possivcuam, J. V., B.AurSe, (Hons.), M.Sce., DPhil, C.SI.R.0., Horticultural

Research Section, Private Bag No, 1. Glen Osmond P.O., S.A. 5064.

Preiss, K. A., 27 Coyder Street, Erindale. S.A. 5066,

Peeves L., B,A., Dip.Ed., South Austruliaa Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide,

vA. 0.

°Pamcre, Miss L. A, B., L.1.A,, 11 Ramsey Street, Netley, S.A. 5037.

*Pryor, Prof. L. D,,_M.Se., Dip or. Department of Botany. Australian National

University, Box 4, G.P.O., Canberra. A.\C,T 2600. Verco Medal, 1987.

rN J. H.. M.Se. Ph.D.. 20 Mayled Street, West Chermside, Queensland

033.

Ricenran, D. S.. D.Se.. B.Agr.se., RDA, (Hons,), C.S.LR.O. Division of Nutritional

Biocheniistry, Adelaide. 5.A, 5000,

Biceanns, S$. M., B.Sc. (Ifons,), Ph.D.. 28 Carnnta Street, Wattle Park. 8.4, 5066.

Ruoines, A. J]. MLB. B.S, Forces Mail. Flt, Lt, A. J. Ridings (043901). No. 4

R.A.A.F, Base Hospital, H.A.A.F, Base Butterworth. c/- G.P.O., Penang. Malaysia.

}RieveL, W. R.. B.Sc, c/- Scripps Tustitution of Oceanography, Department of

Palaeontology, University of California, La Jolla, California, U.5,A.

Roserrsox, Prof, BR, N., D.S¢., PhD., FBS. F.A.A,, University House, Australian

National University, Box 4, Canberra, A-C.T. 2600.

Rocens, R. W., B.Sc, (HMons.),, Department of Botany, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Adelaide, 5.A. 5000.

Rupp, Prof, E. A, B.Se., A.M., Departinent of Economic Geology, University of

Adelaide, North ‘Terrace, Adelaide, 5.A. 5000,

Russet, L. D., c/- Adelaide Boys’ High School, West Terrace. Adelaide, S.A, 5000,

Russert, R. E., M.B., B.8.. M.R.AG.P., 267 Portrush Ruad, Glemmga. 5.4, 5064.

Rotnanp, Prof. R. W. R., B.Su, Ph,D., Department of Geolovy, University of Ade-

laide, North ‘Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. 5000,

Scunemer, M., M.B,, B.S., 175 North Terrace: Adelaide, S.A, 5000.

*ScHonpe, B., Ph.D., Division of Land Research, C.S.LR,0., P.O. Bos 109, Canherra

City, A.C.T. 2601,

Boer, I, F.. BSc.. Geology Department, University of Sydney, Sydney, NSW,

Date wh

Election

1951

1966

1943

L966

1365

1935

1954

1961

1934

L969

162

A867

i194}

1947

1936

1949

1951

1938

966

1962

1934

L967

1963

Igo

1961

1968

1962

1948

1938

1957

L859

19s

Lise or FELLO Ws 199

*Scorr, T, D., M.Sc... Western ‘leavhers’ Callege. Taylory Read. Thebarton, S.A.

903), Programme Secretary, 1953-54, 1956-57: Secretary, 1957-64,

Sopyabism,; Miss J. M., A.U.A,, South Australian Musene North Terrace, Adelaide,

$.A. 5000.

Sempsman, KR. B,Se,, c/- Australian Exploration Gonsnitants Pty. Ltd. 112 Dep

water Road, Castle Gove, N.S.W, 3069.

Seton, G. D,, Sonth Australian Museum, North Ternace, Adelaide. S.A. S000,

*Sraw, Miss BF. A, PAD., Gray Herbarium, Harvard University, 22 Cambridge,

Mass,, U.S.A,

“Sneanp, H.. 5A Blythewood Road. Torrens Park, S.A, 5062,

SHeruenp, R. G., B.8c., Department of Mines. Box 38. Rundle Street P.O., Ade-

laide, S.A. BOOK),

“Snepuerp, §_ A. B.A, LL.B., 138 Seaview Road, Henley South, §.A, 5022. Cmm-

cil 1966-47; "Treasurer, 1967-69; Vice-President, 1969-,

Smmxrtecp, R. C., 57 Canterbury Avenue, Trinity Gardens, S.A. 5068,

Shape, FP. G., M.A., B.Sc. (Hons,), Ph.D. C.S.LR.O., Division of Soils, Private

Bag No. 1, Glen Osmond, §.A. 5084,

Satane; D.. M.Sc., Australian Mineral Developynent Laboratorius, Conyngham Street,

Parkside, S.A_ 5063,

“Sarin, D. K.. B.Sc, (Hons.), Department of Genetics, Australian National Uni-

versity, Canberra, A.C.T. 2601.

*Sourncotr, R. V.. M.D., B.S., D.Se.. D.T.M.&H., 2 Taylors Rd., Mitcheny, S.A.

5062. Verco Medal, 1963; Council, 1949-51, 1952-53, 1957-60, 1965-47; Treasurer,

1951-52; Vice-President, 1953-64, 1955-56, 1961-62; President. 1954-55. 1960-61.

*Specwt, Prof. R. L., Ph.D., Department of Botan , University of Queensland. St.

Lucia, Queensland 4067. Verca Medal, 1961; Council, 1951-52, 1958-60: Pro-

framine Secretary, 1952-53; Vice-President, 1961.

i*Sprusc, R. C., M.Se,, Geosurveys of Australia Pty, Lu, Da Costa Building, 68

Crenfell Street, Adelaide, S.A. 5000. Verco Medal, 1968.

"Spray, A. HL. M.Se., Ph.D., F.G.S,, Australian Mineral Development Laboratories.

Conyngham Street, Frewville, S.A, 5063.

StrapMan, Rey, W. R.. “Resthaven”, 88 Cambridge Terrace, Malvern, $.A. 5061,

*Srernens, C.G., D,Se., 5 Braeside Avenue. Myrtle Bank, 8.A. 5064. Verco Medal.

1859; Council, 1952-54; Vice-President. 1954-55, 1956-57; President, 1955-56.

Surron, K. J., Box 75, P,O,, Mannum, S.A_ 5238,

Swansz, C, D). M.B., B.S,, 729 Port Road, Woodville, S.A, 5011.

Swiveounne. R, FG... 4 Leeds Avenue, Northfield, S.A. 5085.

*Symow, D. E,, B.Agr.Sc,. Waite Institute, Private Bay No. 1. Glen Osmond P.0.,

S.A. 5064. Conncil, 1966-87; Programme Secretary, 1967-69,

Syatons, J. G,, 33 Murray Street. Lower Mitcham, §.A, 50632, Editor, 1947-55;

Couneil, 1955-53,

Szent-Ivany, J. J. H. Ph.D., F-BELS.. 3 Addison Ayenue. Athelstone, S.A. 5067.

°Tausor, J, L, M.A. PhD., Department of Geology, Lakehead University, Parl

Arthur, Ontario, Canada,

*Tayior, J. K., BA. M.Sc, HSe.Agr., 11 Cheltenham Street, Tlighgate: S.A. 5083,

Council, 1940-43, 1947-50; Librarian, 195)-52; Vice-President, 1952-53, 1954-59:

President, 1953-54; Editor, Loa

Teacus, F, A, Hawker, S.A, 5434,

Teios, D. A., MA[nf,Sc.. Anstralian Mineral Development Laboratories, Cariyns-

ham Street, Parkside, S.A, 5063. ;

Teuswen, R. E., LL.B. o/- P.O., 'Tanunds, 8A, 3352,

*Trroaras, I, M., M.Sc... M.DBiol,. Departinent of Zoology, University of Adulaide.

North Terrace, Adelaide, §,A, 5000, Secretary, 1948-50; Council, 1950-53; Vive

President, 1955-56, 1957-58; Presidont, 1956-57; Assistant Editor. 1958-.

*Tuostas, Mrs, 1, M. (neé 2. M, Mawson). M.Se., ¢/- Departnient of Zoalogy, Uni-

versity of Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A, 5000,

Tuomas, J. B.Sc. Woadleigh Road, Blackwood, S.A. 5051,

Tromson, B. P,, M.Se,, 41 Mills Street, Clarenee Park, S.A. 5034,

*THomson, Capt. J. M,, MiInst.T., 135 Military Road, Sempahure South, S.A. S019,

200 list of FeLtows

Date of

Election

1965 Teens R. M,, M.B., B.S., D.D.M., 16 Wellington Square, North Adelaide, 8.A.

1955 *Tucner, B. M., B.A, M.Sc, C:S.1.R:O., Division of Soils, Private: Bag No. 1, Glon

Osmond, S.A, 5064.

1986 Tunwen, A, H., B.Se,, Australian Mincral Development Laboratories, Conynghan

Street, Frewville, S.A. 5063.

1959 *Twmarn, C. BR. Ph.D., M.Sc, Department of Geography, University of Adeluide,

North Terrace, Adelaide. §.A. 5000. Council. 1965-

1959 °Tynem, M. J., Department of Human Physiology and Pharniacolugy, University oF

Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. 5000. Programme Secretary. 1962-64;

Secretary, 1964-67, 1968-; Council. 1967-68.

1960 Dee A. E., Australian Road Research Board, 60 Denmark Street, Kew. Victoria

L950 Verrcx, J. T., P.O. Box 92, Port Lincoln, 5.4. 5606,

L966 Wace, N. M., B.A., Ph,D., Department of Geography, University of Adelaide, North

Tetrace, Adelaide, S.A. 5000, ;

4967 Wa.roce, J. R. B., Department of Genetics, Universily of Adelaide, North Terrace,

Adelaide, S.A. 5000.

1969 Water. D, R., F.G.A.A., 644 Greenhill Road, Burnside, S.A. 5066.

1969 Waurter, Mrs. J., B.Se., $.1.D., 644 Greenhill Road, Burnside, 5.A, 5066.

1969 Warren, B. J,, B.Se,, Dip.Ed., Dips. ll Glen Avenue, Hawthorilenc, S.A. 505).

1953 Watennan, R, A, B.A., M.A, Ph.D... Department of Anthropology, University ot

South Florida, Taropa, Florida, 33620, U.S.A.

1969 Warson, Mrs. J. E., Ags.Dip.Chem.. Axs,Dip.Ceol,, 74 Nimmo Street. Essendon,

Victoria 3040,

1s&1 “eee, B. P.. M.Se,, Newmont Pty. Ltd, 440 Collins Street, Melbourne, Victoria

1966 Wenuinc, D. DA, B.Sc, M.B., BS., Ph.D., D,T.M. & H.. ¢/- Dr. W. Schwietske,

5 Taylors Round, Mitcham, S.A. 5062. ‘

1966 ®Wetuourn, R, M. E., M.Sc,, 158 Bayswater Road, South Croydon, Victoria 3136,

1954 F*Wenzs, C. B. ED, M.AgrSe.. C.S.LR.O,, Division of Soils, Private Bag No. 1,

Glee Osmond, §.A. 5064. Council 1965-66; Vice-President. 1968-60; President.

1969-.

1967 Wueecen, Mrs, J. 8. §.5e, (Hons,), State Herbarium of §.A., Botanic Garden,

North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A, 5000.

1968 Wits, T. CG. R., B.Sc, B.Sc. (for.). Ph.D., Department of Zoology, University of

Adelaide, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. 5000,

1982 Warrren, G. F., B.Se,, Department of Mines, Box 38, Rundle Street P.0.. Ade-

Jaide, S.A. 5000,

1950 Wiwams, L. D,, “Dumosa’, Meningie, S.A, 5204.

1946 *Winson, Prof. A. F., D.Sc., Department ak Geology and Mineralogy, University lg

Queensland, St, Laicia, Brisbane, Queensland 40G7.

1061 *Witsox, P.. G., B.Sc., Western Australian Herbavinm, Department of Agriculture,

Jarrah Road, South Perth, W.A. 6151,

1968 Wison, R. B., B.Sc, (Hons.), 22 Chetwynd Street, West Beach, S.A. 5024,

1967 Woutasron, Miss E. M., Ph.D,, Botany Department, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. 5000.

1944? Womuusury, H, B S., D.Sc. Department of Botany, University of Adelaide, North

Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. 5000, Council, 1960-63; Viec-President, 1965-66, 1867-84;

President. 1966-87,

1944 Wonsmnsiey, J. S.. B.Sc. Department of Forests, Lae, Territory Papua New Cuinea,

1967 Woon, T. G., BSc, Ph.D. CS.LR.O., Division of Svils, Private Bag No, 1, Clen

Osmanud, $.A, 5064,

1957 Woons, R. ¥., BiSe., Mount Gambier F.R., P.O. Bag 7. Mount Cumbier, $,A, 5240.

1569 Woormer, G. RB. R.D.A,, 1 Langdon Terrace, Barmera, 5.A, 5345,

1960 *Worenen, H., Ph.D., Department of Mines, Box 38, Rundle Street P.O., Adeluide,

§.4.. 5000. Council, 1967-.

1967 Wrionr, BR. G. B.Sc. (Hons.), Department of Mines, Box 38, Rundle Street £0,

Adelaide, S.A. 5000.

1949 Yeates, J. N., AM.LE., AMILM.E., 1 Greenwood Grave, Urrbrae, S.A. 5064,

LIST OF LECTURES AND EXHIBITS 1968-69 AND

AWARD OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

Summary

LIST OF LECTURES GIVEN AT MEETINGS DURING

THE YEAR 1968-69

Sept., 1968 Dr. R, J. SwaAsr: “Resistance of humus to microbial decomposition.”

Oct., 1968 Mr. R. Epwanns: “The preservation and conservation of aboriginal

relics in South Australia.”

Nov., 1968 Prof. L. D. Payor: “Actual and potential ecological amplitude in

Eucalyptus.”

Apr., 1969 Mr. H. Brmeson: “The State Library Australiana Facsimiles.”

May, 1969 Dr, K. R. Mices: “Of boots and boats, and geology and arbitrating

things” (Presidential Address ).

June, 1969 Prof. R. M. Norris: “Aspects of Pleistocene geology.”

July, 1969 Prof. R. Pexn: “Landseape types and problems in the Sahara,”

Exuisits

Mr. J. T. Hurron: “Some results from the use of a Cambridge Geoscan X-ray

analyser.”

Mr. B. P. Tuomsown: “Recent maps issued by the Geological Survey of South

Australia.”

Mr. M. R, Waxren: “The interpretation of stromatolites,”

Mr. D. E. Symon: “A Pearson Island rat and its young.”

Mr, K. Douty: “The nutrition of honey-bees.”

Mr. N, McFarvanp: “Moth eggs.”

AWARD OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

1929 Pror. Warrer Howcntn, F.G.S.

1930 Joun McC, Brack, A.L.S.

1931 Psor. Sm Doucnas Mawson, O.B.E,, D.Sc,. B.E., F.R.S.

1933 Pror. J. Bunron CiELanp, M.D,

1935 Pror. T. HAnvey Jonnstoy, M.A, D.Sc,

1938 Pror, J. A. Prescorr, DS, FLAC,

1943 Hersert Womensnry, A.LS., F.R.E.S.

1844 Pror. J. G. Woon, D.Sc, Ph.D,

1945 Crei T, Mapicax, M.A. B.E., D.Se., F.G.S.

1946 Hensent M. Harr, O.B,E.

1955 L, Kerra Warp, LS.0,. B.A., B.B., D.Se.

1956. N. B. Twiaze, B.Sc,

1957 C, S. Piven, D.Sc.

1959 C. G, Stzprens, D.Sc.

1960 H.W Finuavson

1961 AR, L. Specut, Ph.D.

1962 H. GC. AnpRewartTHa, M.Agr.Se., D.Se., FAA.

1963 N. H. Luvaroox, M.A,, Ph.D., DAC. F.G.S.

1965 RK. V. Souracorr, D.Sc, M.D. B.S... D.T.M.&H

1966 Pror, A, R, Atprnman, D.Sc., PILD.,, F.G.S,

1967 L. D. Pryor, M.Se., Dip.For.

1968 R. C, Sprice, M.So,

1969 H. B.S. Womrrstuy, D,Se,

For comprehensive botanival work on marine algae, particularly from

southern Australia; research into the taxonomy, ecology and life history of

many previously unknown algal species; critical suryeys of Chlorop yta

(green algae) and Phaeophyta (brown algae) avid an important mono-

graph on the Cystuphora complex (brown algae); papers on various

Rhodophyta (red algae), notably Helminthocladiaceae. and several with

his students on Ceramiacea, Has collaborated in the Royal Society of Lon-

don Expedition to the British Solomon Islands Protectorate in 1985: 3

world authority on the marine algae af the Australasian region; has lec-

tured by invitation at various United States Universities and has built up

@ recognised research school in the University of Adelaide with library and

herbarium, which attracts overseas research students; assisted in the 1947

revision of the handhook, “The Seaweeds of South Australia”, Pt. IT, by

A. IT. Lucas and F, Perrin, Adelaide; has published 32 phycological Papers,

13 being in collaboration: lecturer and later Reader in the University af

Adelaide since 1946.

CONTENTS

J. A. Prescorr: The climatology of the vine (Vitis gaia 2. A com-

parison of the temperature regimes in the Australian and Mediter-

ranean regions - - - - - - - - - - -

J. A. Prescorr: The climatology of the vine (Vitis vinifera). 3. A com-

parison of France and Australia on the basis of the temperature of

the warmest month - Sea Scr ls ee ae a

D. E. Symon: A check list of flowering plants of the Simpson Desert and

its immediate environs, Australia - : 5 2 S = a

J. B. Frraan; Stratigraphic analysis of soils near Adelaide, South Australia

N. H. Lupsroox: The genus Miltha (Mollusca bivalvia) in the Australian

Cainozoic - - - = - . 4 :

R. W. Jessup: Soil salinity in saltbush country of north-eastern South

Australia - - - - 2 = < : ~ = >

H. Awrsserc: A contribution to the mesophytic flora of South Australia

(Springfield and Leigh Creek) - . e = ‘. * 4

A. E. Orcuarp: Revision of the Acaena ovina A. Cumn. (Rosaceae) com-

plex in Australia - - - - 2 os eee

Jeanette E. Watson: Scoresbia: a new hydroid genus from South Austra-

lian waters - - - = . = : 4 a z :

E. H. Ismnc: Six new species of Bassia All. (Chenopodiaceae) - = - -

H. G. AnprewartHa and S. Barker: Introduction to a study of the

ecology of the Kangaroo Island wallaby, Protemnodon eugenii

(Desmarest) within Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island, South Australia

C. H. S., Warr: Distribution and habits of the rabbit bandicoot - -

R. L. Specur: The vegetation of the Pearson Islands, South Australia: a

re-examination, February, 1960 - = z 3 E 3 s

Susan Barker and R. T. Lance: Occurrence of polygonal patterned

ground in the arid zone of South Australia : = 2, 2 :

C. D. Boomsma: Contributions to the records of Eucalyptus in South

Aristralias c= co nl co ee te me eee ce Ba ee ee

J. I. Menzies: A new species of tree frog (Hyla) from Papua- - = -

H. Worrner: Lithology and distribution of the Observatory Hill Beds,

Eastern Officer Basin - - : es, = 2 2 x

General Account, Library Account - - 20 VS ee eA

Research Fund - - Sr ne he a

Report on Activities of the Council, 1968-69 - - - - - =

Officers for 1968-69 Sg a Egle at he ee

Tiet ofibelows- oe ee ee ee Re ey

List of Lecturers and Exhibits, 1968-69 - : = s - ae

Award of the Sir Joseph Verco Medal - - - - - = -

119

127

135

143

153

157

165

169

188

189

190

192

193

201